JP2024015016A - gaming machine - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming. [Solution] When a special game state occurs after winning a jackpot, in a predetermined round (for example, the 1st round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation B"), the second opening/closing plate 74a of the second variable winning device 74 is opened, and when the ball arrives at the position where the variable area switch 75a is placed at the timing when the variable area switch 75a is in the open state by the variable area solenoid 75b (see FIG. 8), the variable area switch 75c is opened. Since the variable probability region 75 in which the ball is disposed is opened by the variable variable region opening/closing plate 75a, the ball flows into the discharge passage 76 after being detected by the variable variable region switch 75c. [Selection diagram] Figure 6

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, in game machines such as pachinko machines, game media such as game balls are fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and a downward direction provided in the game area and capable of changing the direction in which the game balls flow down is used. A predetermined gaming value is given to each game ball based on the entry of the game ball into one of the plurality of ball entrances in which the changing means is arranged, and a lottery is conducted based on the winning of the game ball to a specific ball entrance. , it is configured such that when a player wins an advantageous state such as a win in a lottery, a game ball is allowed to enter the ball entry means and a predetermined gaming value is given to the player (for example, according to a patent Reference 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148264

However, with the gaming machine described above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes: a firing means for firing a game ball; a first ball entering means into which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter; Information acquisition means that acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball means, determination means that determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a direction in which the game ball flows can be changed. a second ball entering means and a third ball entering means each having a downward direction changing means arranged therein; and a game ball entering the first ball entering means, a predetermined first gaming value is given to the player; a first game value giving means; a second game value giving means that gives a second game value different from the first game value when a game ball enters the second ball entering means; and the third ball entering means. A gaming machine comprising a third gaming value imparting means for imparting a third gaming value different from the first gaming value when a game ball enters the means, the second ball entering means comprising: a first area disposed upstream of the third ball entry means and through which game balls flowing from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass; and a game ball through which game balls can flow into the first region. a first area switching means for switching whether or not to enable inflow; and a first area switching means for switching whether or not to enable inflow; By using a fourth game value imparting means for imparting a fourth game value and the determination result of the determination means, a state in which the game ball of the second ball entering means can enter, or a state where the game ball of the second ball entering means can enter, or the third ball entering means and pattern selection means for selecting a combination pattern of a state in which a game ball can enter and the state in which the first region can enter by the first region switching means.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a firing means for firing a game ball, a firing means for firing a game ball, and a first ball entry means into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter; Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information due to the game ball entering the first ball entry means; determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means; and a falling of the game ball. A second ball entering means and a third ball entering means are each provided with a downward direction changing means capable of changing the direction, and when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, the player is given a predetermined first game. a first gaming value imparting means for imparting a value; a second gaming value imparting means for imparting a second gaming value different from the first gaming value when a game ball enters the second ball entering means; A gaming machine comprising a third game value imparting means for imparting a third game value different from the first game value when a game ball enters the third ball entering means, the second ball entering means The means is arranged upstream of the third ball entering means, and includes a first region through which a game ball flowing from the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means can pass, and a means for transmitting the game ball to the first region. a first area switching means for switching whether or not to enter an inflow-enabled state in which game balls can flow into the first area; By using a fourth game value imparting means that imparts the fourth game value different from the fourth game value and the determination result of the determination means, the game ball of the second ball entering means is in a state where it can enter, or 3, a pattern selection means for selecting a combination pattern of a state in which a game ball can enter by the ball entry means and a state in which the first region can enter by the first region switching means. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a back view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front enlarged view schematically showing a front view of an attacker unit including a first variable winning device, a second variable winning device, and a probability variable area. (a) is a schematic diagram of the attacker unit for explaining the behavior of a ball that has flowed into the attacker unit when the first variable winning device is in an open state and the probability variable area opening/closing plate is in a closed state. It is a cross-sectional view, and (b) is for explaining the behavior of the ball that has flowed into the attacker unit when the first variable prize winning device is in the open state and the probability variable area opening/closing plate is in the open state. FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of an attacker unit. (a) is a schematic diagram of the attacker unit for explaining the behavior of a ball that has flowed into the attacker unit when the second variable winning device is in an open state and the probability variable area opening/closing plate is in a closed state. It is a cross-sectional view, and (b) is for explaining the behavior of the ball that has flowed into the attacker unit when the second variable prize winning device is in the open state and the probability variable area opening/closing plate is in the open state. FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of an attacker unit. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters, counter buffers, first held ball storage area, second held ball storage area, held ball execution area, general ball held ball storage area, and general ball held ball execution area. . It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table for special figure 1, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table for special figure 2. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a grand prize opening opening/closing table. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variable probability region opening/closing table. The operation timing of the first big winning hole solenoid, the second big winning hole solenoid, and the probability variable area solenoid in each round of the first special symbol jackpot type "time saving A", the first big winning hole switch, and the second big winning hole switch and a timing chart schematically showing the ball detection timing in the variable probability region switch, and the setting timing of the interval and variable probability transition flag. The operation timing of the first big winning hole solenoid, the second big winning hole solenoid, and the probability variable area solenoid in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type "time saving A" of the first special symbol, and the first variable winning device and the second big winning hole solenoid. The timing of the interval which is the closing period of the variable winning device, the time until the winning ball reaches the probability variable area opening/closing plate of the first variable winning device or the second variable winning device, the first big winning opening switch, the second It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the detection timing of a ball in the big winning opening switch and the variable probability area switch and the setting timing of the variable probability transition flag. The operation timing of the 1st big winning hole solenoid, 2nd big winning hole solenoid, and probability variable area solenoid, the 1st big winning hole switch, and the 2nd big winning hole in each round of the 1st special symbol jackpot type "Time saving B" It is a timing chart which schematically shows the detection timing of a ball in a switch and a probability variable area switch, and the setting timing of an interval and a probability variable transition flag. The operation timing of the 1st big prize opening solenoid, the 2nd big prize opening solenoid, and the probability variable area solenoid in each round of the 1st special symbol jackpot type "Latent probability variation A", the 1st big winning opening switch, and the 2nd big winning prize It is a timing chart that schematically shows the detection timing of a ball in the mouth switch and the variable probability region switch, and the setting timing of the interval and variable probability transition flag. The operation timing of the first big winning hole solenoid, the second big winning hole solenoid, and the probability variable area solenoid in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" of the first special symbol, the first variable winning device, and The timing of the interval which is the closing period of the second variable winning device, the time until the winning ball of the first variable winning device or the second variable winning device reaches the probability variable area opening/closing plate, the first big winning opening switch, It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the detection timing of a ball in the second big prize opening switch and the variable probability area switch and the setting timing of the variable probability transition flag. The operation timing of the 1st big prize opening solenoid, the 2nd big prize opening solenoid, and the probability variable area solenoid in each round of the 1st special symbol jackpot type "Latent probability variation B", the 1st big winning opening switch, and the 2nd big winning prize It is a timing chart that schematically shows the detection timing of a ball in the mouth switch and the variable probability region switch, and the setting timing of the interval and variable probability transition flag. The operation timing of the first big winning hole solenoid, the second big winning hole solenoid, and the probability variable area solenoid in each round of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the first big winning hole switch, It is a timing chart that schematically shows the detection timing of a ball in the second big winning opening switch and the variable probability area switch, and the setting timing of the interval and variable probability transition flag. The operation timing of the first big winning hole solenoid, the second big winning hole solenoid, and the probability variable area solenoid in each round of the second special symbol jackpot type "Time saving C", the first big winning hole switch, the second big winning hole switch and a timing chart schematically showing the ball detection timing in the variable probability region switch, and the setting timing of the interval and variable probability transition flag. The operation timing of the first big prize opening solenoid, the second big prize opening solenoid, and the variable probability area solenoid in each round of the second special symbol jackpot type "latent probability variation C", the first big winning opening switch, and the second big winning prize It is a timing chart that schematically shows the detection timing of a ball in the mouth switch and the variable probability region switch, and the setting timing of the interval and variable probability transition flag. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the starting prize winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows special figure fluctuation processing performed by MPU in a main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing jackpot processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening/closing control process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing an open setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing passage determination processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the closing condition determination process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. (a) is a diagram illustrating a "character selection" effect in which a character selection screen with "character A" selected on the third symbol display device appears during the interval period of the jackpot state, and (b) 2 is a diagram illustrating a "character selection" effect in which the selection target is changed from the state of (a) and a character selection screen in which "character B" is selected appears. It is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device in a jackpot state, in which (a) is a diagram illustrating a state in which the number of rounds, firing mode, number of won prize balls, etc. are displayed, and (b) is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device in a jackpot state. is a diagram illustrating a state in which, in addition to the number of rounds, the firing mode, the number of winning prize balls, etc., the probability variable area winning firing mode is displayed. (a) is an enlarged front view schematically showing a front view of an attacker unit including a first variable winning device, a second variable winning device, and a probability variable area of the second embodiment, and (b) is a FIG. 3 is an enlarged right side view schematically showing a side view of the attacker unit from the direction A in a). (a) is an enlarged front view schematically showing a front view of an attacker unit including a first variable winning device, a second variable winning device, and a probability variable area of the third embodiment, and (b) is a FIG. 3 is an enlarged right side view schematically showing a side view of the attacker unit from direction B in a). It is a front enlarged view schematically showing a front view of an attacker unit including a first variable winning device, a second variable winning device, and a probability variable area of a fourth embodiment. It is a front enlarged view schematically showing a front view of an attacker unit including a first variable winning device, a second variable winning device, and a probability variable area of a fifth embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the upper variable winning device and the lower variable winning device that can be opened in each jackpot type of the sixth embodiment, and the number of prize balls per winning in the upper variable winning device and the lower variable winning device. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of the big winning opening opening/closing table of the sixth embodiment. It is a front enlarged view schematically showing a front view of an attacker unit including a first variable winning device, a second variable winning device, and a probability variable area of a seventh embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of 8th embodiment. It is a front enlarged view schematically showing a front view of an attacker unit including a first variable winning device, a second variable winning device, and a probability variable area of a ninth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram of the right side portion of the game board for explaining the behavior of a right-handed ball when both the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device in the tenth embodiment are in a closed state. It is a cross-sectional view, and (b) shows the behavior of a right-handed ball when the first variable winning device in the tenth embodiment is in an open state and the second variable winning device is in a closed state. It is a schematic sectional view of the right side part of the game board for explaining, and (c) is a state in which the first variable winning device in the tenth embodiment is in the closed state and the second variable winning device is in the open state. It is a schematic sectional view of the right side part of the game board for explaining the behavior of a ball played right-handed in a certain case.

<First embodiment>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 40. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and a pachinko machine 10 which is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails, winning holes (ball entrances) 63, 64a, 64b, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by the ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached. Note that details of the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there are provided a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the front frame serves as an opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 8). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is used, for example, to change the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later, or when an interval time occurs during a jackpot game, which will be described later. This button is pressed by the player during the "Character Selection" performance. In addition, the frame button 22 is used to display a variable display of a third symbol (hereinafter referred to as a third symbol) corresponding to the first special symbol used in the first lottery game or corresponding to the second special symbol used in the second lottery game. The variable display is referred to as a "variable effect."

Note that the first lottery game is a lottery game that is caused by a ball entering the first starting port 64a (see FIG. 3) (hereinafter, the ball entering may be referred to as "winning"), which will be described later. be. In addition, the second lottery game is a lottery game that is caused by winning a prize in the second starting opening 64b (see FIG. 3), which will be described later (hereinafter, the first lottery game and the second lottery game are collectively referred to as simply (Sometimes referred to as a "lottery game").

In addition, the variable performance is a performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later. For example, it is executed when a prize is won in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (see FIG. 3, which will be described later), and after the symbol (third symbol, which will be described later) is changed for a predetermined period of time, it is stopped and displayed. This is an effect that presents to the player the result of the lottery (whether it is a jackpot or not) based on the combination of symbols selected. In addition, in the first embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be able to execute only one lottery game, and the first special symbol based on the first lottery game and the second special symbol based on the second lottery game are configured to be executable. Based on the first lottery game, the third symbol is used in common with the symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as "special symbol"). It is configured to display either the lottery result or the lottery result based on the second lottery game.

Furthermore, the stage is a performance mode that provides uniformity to various performances displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later. There are three stages: "Stage" and "Island Stage." Various performances such as the above-mentioned fluctuating performance and the "reach display" performed during the fluctuating performance are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage.

In addition, the "reach display" refers to the display one step before the "jackpot display" that indicates that a jackpot will occur in a variable production executed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later. . Specifically, the third symbols of the left symbol row Z1 and right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 7) does not stop yet and continues to fluctuate. It refers to the state of being

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the "reach display" can be roughly divided into one unit of element that makes up the "normal reach" performance (hereinafter, one unit of element that makes up the production is referred to as "variable element"), The variable element of "Super Reach" is developed and executed from the variable element of the "Normal Reach", and the variable element of "Super Reach" has a higher jackpot expectation than the variable element of the "Normal Reach", and the variable element of the "Normal Reach" is also developed and executed, There is also a variable element called ``Special Reach'', which has higher jackpot expectations than the variable element of ``Super Reach''.

Changes in the stage may occur during a period when a variable effect is not being performed (i.e., during a demonstration display) or during a variable element of "high-speed variation" in which the third symbol changes rapidly in a variable effect that is invisible to the player. This is performed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player. Then, each time the frame button 22 is operated, the display is repeatedly changed in the order of "town stage" → "sky stage" → "island stage" → "town stage" → . . . Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

In addition, when the variable element of "Normal Reach" is started in the variable effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later, the variable element of "Normal Reach" is changed to the variable element of "Super Reach" or When the variable element of "Special Reach" develops, a selection screen for the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the variable element of "Normal Reach". It may be configured as follows.

Specifically, on the selection screen, multiple candidates are displayed that can be selected as the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach", and while the selection screen is displayed, the frame button 22 is pressed. The selected candidate is configured to be changed when the player performs a pressing operation. Then, the variable element of “Super Reach” or the variable element of “Special Reach” is determined based on the production candidate that was selected when developing the variable element of “Super Reach” or the variable element of “Special Reach”. According to the determination, the variable element of "Super Reach" and the variable element of "Special Reach" are executed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed, but instead of the frame button 22, the player can press the frame button 22 in a predetermined direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, with respect to the pachinko machine 10, It may be configured with an operating lever that can be tilted forward, backward, rightward, and leftward. Based on the direction in which the operating lever is tilted, the selection of the production stage may be changed, or the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" may be determined.

Furthermore, although the frame button 22 is configured to be placed on the front side of the upper plate 17 in a side view, the frame button 22 may be placed in any position as long as it can be pressed down by the player. For example, it may be arranged on the upper surface side of the upper plate 17, or in the vicinity (on the upper surface or side surface) of the lower plate 50, which will be described later.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or during a predetermined "ready-to-reach display", and serve to enhance the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 each having a built-in light emitting means such as a light emitting diode (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. .

In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when there is a jackpot or "reach display", the built-in LED lights up or blinks, causing each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 to lights up or flashes to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are in the "reach display" that is one step before hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front, there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display whether a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed on the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 3). ) can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 is made of acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (hereinafter abbreviated as "ABS") which is chromium plated in order to create a more dazzling appearance. .) A resin plating member 36 is attached.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit, not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit.

Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, there is provided an operating handle 51 that is operated by the player in order to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13. Inside the operating handle 51 is a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 8). A touch sensor 51a for permitting the drive of the operating handle 51, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball while the button is pressed, and a rotation operation amount of the operating handle 51 based on changes in electrical resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) for detection is built-in.

When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball is continuously fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and the ball is thereby driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Specifically, if the player continues to operate the operation handle 51 while balls are stored in the upper tray 17, 100 balls will be fired per minute (one shot every 0.6 seconds). configured to be fired. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

Next, as shown in FIG. 2, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes a Micro-Processing Unit (hereinafter abbreviated as "MPU") as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, and a port for various lottery operations. A random number generator used for this purpose, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 8). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 8), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 3, the game board 13 has a transparent resin base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a large number of nails and windmills for guiding the balls as means for changing the flow direction. and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63 through which a predetermined prize ball can be obtained by winning a ball, a first starting opening 64a for the first lottery game, and a second starting opening 64b for the second lottery game. An attacker having a starting port unit 64 having a normal electric winning combination 64c, a first variable winning device 72 and a second variable winning device 74 that are opened when a jackpot occurs in the first lottery game or the second lottery game. It is constructed by assembling the unit 71, the normal symbol gate 67 for driving the normal electric winning combination 64c, the variable display device unit 80 having the third symbol display device 81, etc., and its peripheral part is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. It will be done.

The general prize opening 63, the starting opening unit 64, the attacker unit 71, the ordinary symbol gate 67, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are installed from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed with screws etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 3.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is installed at the inner side of the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is a generally circular area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an arcuate member 70 on the front side of the game board 13 (a winning opening etc. is provided, and a space where the fired balls are placed). (area flowing downstream).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (top left in FIG. 3) to prevent balls that have been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 3) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. (Hereinafter, the act of firing a ball with the force of hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front will be referred to as "hitting to the right.") , the act of causing the fired ball to pass through the left side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front is referred to as "hitting to the left"). In the first embodiment, in a left-handed game, the ball can enter the first starting port 64a, while the ball can enter the second starting port 64b, the first variable winning device 72 of the attacker unit 71, and the second variable winning device 74. It is constructed so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball. In addition, in a right-handed game, the normal electric winning combination 64c may be opened due to the ball passing through the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 of the attacker unit 71 or the normal symbol gate 67. While the ball can enter the second starting port 64b, it is difficult (or impossible) for the ball to enter the first starting port 64a.

Furthermore, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, there is a resin arc member 70 formed with an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

A special symbol display device 37 is provided at the upper right side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 3), and is provided with a first LED group 37a and a second LED group 37b, which are composed of a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means. has been done. The special symbol display device 37 performs variable display of each special symbol (hereinafter, the variable display of the special symbol is referred to as "dynamic display") according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later. At the same time, the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

The first LED group 37a indicates the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls for which variable display has not been performed (held balls), among the balls that have won (entered) the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, which will be described later. This is indicated by the lighting state. Further, the number of jackpot rounds and error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the first LED group 37a corresponding to the state. The first LED group 37a is configured such that the LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emitted colors suggests various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. be able to.

In addition, a "round" in a jackpot refers to the period from when either the first variable prize winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74, which will be described later, is opened to the time when it is closed in order to separate the number of prize balls for the jackpot. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, either "30 seconds" elapse after either the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 starts opening, or the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 starts opening. It is configured such that one "round" is executed when 10 balls enter the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 while any of the variable winning devices 74 is open. There is.

The second LED group 37b is composed of a total of 16 LEDs, including an upper LED group composed of 8 LEDs and a lower LED group composed of 8 LEDs. In the upper LED group, a first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol may be abbreviated as "special symbol 1") indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, in the lower LED group, a second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol may be abbreviated as "special symbol 2") indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is variably displayed.

Specifically, the upper LED group displays a variable display (first In the embodiment, after lighting up the right LED one by one from the leftmost LED of the upper LED group and repeatedly displaying the lighting pattern, a pattern indicating the determination result (in the first embodiment, eight Depending on the combination of each LED lighting pattern, one of a total of 256 types of stop symbols will be displayed.

In addition, the lower LED group displays a variable display (in the first embodiment , the LEDs on the right side of the lower LED group are lit one by one from the leftmost LED, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), and then a pattern indicating the judgment result (in the first embodiment, each of the eight LEDs is displayed) Depending on the combination of lighting patterns, one of a total of 256 types of stop symbols will be displayed.

In any LED group, if the judgment result is a loss, only the leftmost LED will be lit, and if the judgment result is a jackpot, each LED group will be lit in a lighting pattern corresponding to the jackpot. be done. Details of the stop pattern of each LED group will be described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, a judgment is made as to whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery) when a ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. The jackpot type is also determined according to the starting ports 64a and 64b.

The jackpot type determined here is the "probability variable jackpot" corresponding to "10 round (hereinafter, a round may be simply expressed as "R") probability variable jackpot" based on the winning in the first starting opening 64a. "Variation A", "Latent probability variation A" and "Latent probability variation B" corresponding to "5R latent probability variable jackpot", and "Time saving A" and "Time saving B" corresponding to "5R time saving jackpot" are prepared. (See Figure 11(a)). In addition, based on winnings in the second starting opening 64b, "probability variation A" corresponding to "10R probability variable jackpot", "latent probability variation C" corresponding to "10R potential probability variable jackpot", and "10R time saving jackpot" ” is prepared (see FIG. 11(b)).

Here, the "10R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to the "probability variable state" after the maximum number of rounds is 10 rounds. In addition, "10R latent probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a "probability variable state" after the maximum number of rounds is 10 rounds, but does not notify that the "probability variable state" is attached. be. Furthermore, the "10R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to the "time-saving state" after the maximum number of rounds is 10 rounds. In addition, "5R latent probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a "probability variable state" after the maximum number of rounds is 5 rounds, but does not notify that the "probability variable state" is attached. be. Furthermore, the "5R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a "time-saving state" after the maximum number of rounds is 5 rounds.

Here, the "normal gaming state" refers to a low probability state that is not a "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", and refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of special symbols and the probability of winning of normal symbols are normal. . That is, in the "normal game state", the probability of winning a special symbol is lower than in the "probability fluctuation state", and the probability of winning a normal symbol is lower than in the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state". Therefore, the player is not in a gaming state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the second starting port 64b (hereinafter, a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the second starting port 64b is referred to as a "winning assistance state"). This is the most disadvantageous gaming state for players.

Next, the "time-saving state" is a state in which the jackpot probability of special symbols is low like the "normal game state", but a so-called "time-saving function" is added that increases the probability of winning the normal symbols. say. In other words, in the "time reduction state", the normal electrical function 64c provided in the starting port unit 64, which will be described later, is likely to be in the open state, and as a result, the ball enters the second starting port 64b in the starting port unit 64. This is an easy game state, that is, a winning assistance state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "time saving state" is after a jackpot of the jackpot type "time saving A", "time saving B" or "time saving C" (see FIG. 11(a) and FIG. 11(b)). , is maintained until the special symbol variation effect is executed a predetermined number of times (in the first embodiment, 50 or 100 times) for each jackpot. After the special symbols have been dynamically displayed the prescribed number of times, the system is configured to shift from the "time reduction state" to the "normal game state".

Next, the "probability fluctuating state" refers to a high probability state in which the jackpot probability of subsequent special symbols increases as an added value after the jackpot ends. That is, the "probability fluctuating state" refers to a time when the probability is changing, or in other words, a gaming state in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the jackpot type is "probability variation A", "latent probability variation A", "latent probability variation B", or "latent probability variation C" (FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b)). After hitting the jackpot (reference), until the special symbol variation effect is executed 50 or 100 times (so-called special time.Hereinafter, the initial letter of Special Time may be abbreviated as "ST". ), the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in a high probability state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "probability variable state" includes a "probable variable state with time saving" in which the "time saving function" is provided, and a "probable variable state without time saving" in which the "time saving function" is not provided. (Hereinafter, the ``probability variable state without time saving'' may be referred to as the ``latency probability variable state''). That is, in the "time-saving variable probability state", the jackpot probability of the special symbol is high, and the normal electric role 64c, which will be described later, is likely to be in the open state, and as a result, the second starting port 64b in the starting port unit 64 It becomes a winning assistance state in which it is easy for a ball to win a prize. On the other hand, in the "no time saving definite variable state", the special symbol has a high jackpot probability, but because the normal electric hand 64c is difficult (not easy to become) in the open state, the second start is similar to the "normal game state". It becomes a non-winning assistance state, which is not a winning assistance state for entering the opening 64b.

"Probability variation state with time saving" is the jackpot type "Probability variation A", "Latent probability variation A", "Latent probability variation B", or "Latent probability variation C" (see Figures 11(a) and 11(b)) After the jackpot, this is maintained until the special symbol variation effect is executed a predetermined number of times (in the first embodiment, 50 or 100 times) for each jackpot. On the other hand, after the dynamic display of the special symbol for the specified number of times is executed, a jackpot of the jackpot type "Latent Probability Variation A" or "Latent Probability Variation B" (see Figures 11(a) and 11(b)) If it is a "probability variable state with time saving" based on , the state shifts to "probable variable state with no time saving", and the jackpot type is "probability variation A" or "latent probability variation C" (see Figures 11(a) and 11(b) ), the system is configured to shift to the "normal gaming state" when the game is in the "variable time saving state" based on the jackpot.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as a performance mode of the "probability variation state", there is a "probability variation notification production mode" that notifies the player that the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased and the player is in a high probability state. There is also a ``hidden probability change presentation mode'' in which the player is not informed that the game is in a high probability state where the jackpot probability is increased.

The "probability change notification performance mode" is such that during the "probability change notification performance mode", the third symbol display device 81, etc., which will be described later, notifies the player that the special symbol is in a high probability state where the jackpot probability is increased. It is composed of In the first embodiment, when the jackpot type "probability variation A" (see FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b)) is won, the "probability variation notification performance mode" is executed after the jackpot ends.

On the other hand, during the "latent probability variation performance mode", the third symbol display device 81 etc., which will be described later, notifies the player that the special symbol is in a high probability state where the jackpot probability is increased. It is configured not to. In other words, the "latent probability variation performance mode" performs the same performance as the performance corresponding to the "time saving notification performance mode" or the "normal notification mode", and informs the player whether the player is in the "probability variation state" or the "time reduction state". Or, it is configured to make it impossible (difficult) to distinguish whether the game is in the "normal gaming state" or not, thereby providing a gameplay feature that allows players to predict which gaming state they are staying in.

In the first embodiment, when a jackpot type "Latent Probability Variation A", "Latent Probability Variation B", or "Latent Probability Variation C" (see FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b)) is won, the corresponding jackpot After the completion of ``latent probability change performance mode'' is executed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as a presentation mode of the "time saving state", a "time saving notification presentation mode" is provided that notifies the player that the above-mentioned "time saving function" is provided. . This "time-saving notification presentation mode" is such that during the "time-saving notification presentation mode," the third symbol display device 81, etc., which will be described later, notifies the player that the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased. It is configured. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot type "Time Saving A", "Time Saving B", or "Time Saving C" (see FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b)) is won, after the jackpot ends, "Time Saving Notification" will be announced. ``Production mode'' is executed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a ``normal performance mode'' that is different from the ``time-saving notification performance mode (latent probability variable performance mode)'' and the ``probability variable notification performance mode'' is provided as a performance mode in the ``normal gaming state''. It is being This "normal performance mode" is such that a third symbol display device 81, etc., which will be described later, informs the player that the state has not shifted to a state advantageous to the player during the "normal performance mode". It is composed of In the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, when the "probability variation state" or "time reduction state" ends, or when the jackpot type is "latent probability variation A" or "latent probability variation B" After the end of the jackpot (see FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b)), the "normal performance mode" is executed when the special symbol variation performance is completed 50 times.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that the "latent probability variation performance mode" executes a performance equivalent to the "time saving notification performance mode" or the "normal performance mode". With this configuration, the player can determine whether the current gaming state is a "probability fluctuation state" or a "time reduction state," or whether it is a "probability fluctuation state" or a "normal gaming state." It is impossible (difficult) to determine which gaming state the player is in. By configuring in this way, while the "latent probability change performance mode" is being executed, a gameplay feature is created in which the player is forced to guess which game state it is in or not, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In addition, after the jackpot of the jackpot type "Latent Probability Variation A" or "Latent Probability Variation B" (see Figures 11(a) and 11(b)) ends, if the special symbol variation effect ends 50 times, The game state is internally in a "probability fluctuation state" which is advantageous to the player until the next special symbol fluctuation performance is executed 50 times, but the "normal performance mode" is It is in a running state. On the other hand, after the jackpot of the jackpot type "Time Saving A" or "Time Saving B" (see Figure 11(a)) ends, if the special symbol variation effect ends 50 times, the subsequent gaming state is internally set to "Normal". The game is in a "gaming state" and the "normal performance mode" is being executed in terms of performance. Therefore, even after the special symbol variation performance after the end of the jackpot of the jackpot type "Time Saving A" or "Time Saving B" has been performed 50 times and the "Time Saving State" has ended, the player will still be able to win the jackpot even after the "Time Saving State" ends. It is not possible to identify whether it is a jackpot based on the type "time saving A" or "time saving B" or a jackpot based on the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" or "latent probability variation B".

With this configuration, the situation where the "normal performance mode" indicating the "normal gaming state" is being executed is prevented by making the player not aware of whether the player is in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "normal gaming state". Even if the game is a game, it is possible to have the player guess the possibility that the game is internally in a "probability fluctuating state" and continue playing the game. Therefore, even after the "time reduction state" ends, it is possible to increase the player's desire to continue playing and to promote the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the display mode of the second LED group 37b for each jackpot type will be explained. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group for the first special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to a loss, 63 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "Time saving A", and 63 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "Time saving B". There are 63 types of corresponding display patterns, 64 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "Latent probability variation A", 64 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "Latent probability variation B", and 64 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "Probability variation A". There is one corresponding display pattern, for a total of 256 display patterns. Each display pattern has no specific regularity for each type of jackpot, and random display patterns are associated in advance. Therefore, when the player looks at the display pattern of the upper LED group, the player can recognize the stop display of a loss and the stop display of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", while the stop display of the jackpot type "time saver A" and "time saver B" can be recognized. ”, “Latent probability variation A”, or “Latent probability variation B” is difficult to distinguish.

In addition, as the stop display (lighting display) of the lower LED group for the second special symbol, there is 1 type of display pattern corresponding to a loss, 127 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "Time saving C", and 127 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "Latent probability There are 127 types of display patterns corresponding to "variation C" and 1 type of display pattern corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A", for a total of 256 types of display patterns. And, like the upper LED group, each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and random display patterns are associated in advance. Therefore, when the player looks at the display pattern of the lower LED group, he can recognize the stop display of a loss and the stop display of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", but he can recognize the stop display of the jackpot type "time saving C" or "latent probability". The structure is such that it is difficult to identify which of the stop displays of "Fluctuation C" is being displayed.

With this configuration, even if each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, it is necessary to know all the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display. , it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the type of jackpot won, so a gameplay feature is created that forces the player to guess which game state it is in while the "latent probability variation performance mode" is being executed. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 3, the explanation will be continued. The game area of the game board 13 is provided with (1 or) a plurality of (3) general winning holes 63 from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins.

The plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged one each in the upper part, middle part, or lower part of one general winning hole unit. At the upper part of the entrance of each general prize opening 63, a plurality of nails are installed as flow direction changing means that can collide with the ball and change the flow direction of the ball, and the nails are installed in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64a. Only when the ball that did not enter the winning opening such as the starting opening 64b passes through the passage between the nails between the plurality of nails planted in the upper part of each general winning opening 63, the ball enters each general winning opening 63. On the other hand, balls that do not pass through the inter-nail flow path between each nail, that is, balls that are repelled by each nail into a flow path other than the inter-nail flow path, are prevented from flowing into the general winning hole 63. It is composed of In addition, each general winning hole 63 is such that balls that do not enter the upper general winning hole 63 are placed in the middle or lower general winning hole 63, and balls that do not enter the upper and middle general winning holes 63 are placed in the lower general winning hole 63. The arrangement is such that a prize can be won in the general prize opening 63 of .

The balls that have won in each general winning hole 63 pass through a confluence section where the guide passages provided on the back side of the general prize hole unit merge, flow down a collective passage provided on the downstream side of the confluence section, and flow down the collective path provided on the downstream side of the confluence section. It is configured so that it can be detected by one general winning opening switch (not shown) installed (buried) in the gathering passage. Each general winning hole 63 is configured to give (pay out) the same value (prize ball) for one winning ball, so the balls that have won from each general winning hole 63 are aggregated. No problem will occur even if the ball is detected by the general winning a prize opening switch of 1. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced compared to the case where a general winning port switch is provided for each guide passage.

In addition, the ball detected by the general winning port switch is the same as the ball detected by each winning port switch 72c, 74c, 75c (see FIG. 4), etc., which will be described later. (not shown) into one out path (not shown), and is configured to be detected by an out switch 66a (see FIG. 8), which will be described later. In addition, if a ball is not detected by the out switch 66a within a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after a ball is detected by the general winning port switch, it is assumed that a ball is jammed on the collecting board. , it may be configured to issue a predetermined abnormality notification.

At the lower center of the gaming area, a starting opening unit 64 is provided in which a first starting opening 64a, a second starting opening 64b, and a normal electric role 64c are integrated into which a ball flowing down the gaming area can enter. . This starting port unit 64 mainly includes a first starting port 64a into which a ball can enter, a second starting port 64b into which a ball can enter when the normal electric function 64c is in an open state, and a second starting port 64b into which a ball can enter. It is constituted by a normal electric conductor 64c as a flow direction changing means capable of preventing the ball from entering the starting port 64b.

When a ball enters the first starting port 64a provided in this starting port unit 64, a first starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first starting port switch is turned on. Due to this, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8) performs a jackpot lottery of the first special symbol (ie, a first lottery game). Then, a dynamic display of the special symbol according to the lottery result is shown by the upper LED group in the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and a fluctuating effect of the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. executed. Note that the first starting opening 64a also serves as one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

In addition, the ball detected by the first starting port switch (not shown) is similar to the ball detected by each winning port switch 72c, 74c, 75c (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, on the back side of the game board 13. The outputs are collected into one out passage (not shown) by a collecting plate (not shown) provided in the , and are configured to be detected by an out switch 66a (see FIG. 8), which will be described later. In addition, if a ball is not detected by the out switch 66a within a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the ball is detected by the first starting port switch, it is assumed that a ball is clogged in the collecting board. It may also be configured to issue a predetermined abnormality notification.

A second starting port 64b is provided below the first starting port 64a, into which a ball can enter only when the normal electric function 64c is in an open state. When a ball enters the second starting port 64b, a second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. A jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 8). Then, a display according to the lottery result is shown on the lower LED group of the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and a variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. is executed. Note that the second starting opening 64b also serves as one of the winning openings from which one ball is paid out as a winning ball when a ball enters the ball.

In addition, the ball detected by the second starting port switch (not shown) is similar to the ball detected by each winning port switch 72c, 74c, 75c (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, on the back side of the game board 13. The outputs are collected into one out passage (not shown) by a collecting plate (not shown) provided in the , and are configured to be detected by an out switch 66a (see FIG. 8), which will be described later. Furthermore, if a ball is not detected by the out switch 66a within a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the ball is detected by the second starting port switch, it is assumed that a ball is clogged in the collecting plate. It may also be configured to issue a predetermined abnormality notification.

As described above, above the second starting port 64b when viewed from the front, the second starting port 64b is opened and closed by opening and closing two blade members that cover the opening through which a ball enters the second starting port 64b. A normal power supply 64c is provided that can be moved to an open state (enlarged state) or a closed state (reduced state). Normally, the electric power supply 64c is in a closed state with the blades closed (the blades stand upward), and the ball cannot enter the second starting port 64b or is in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball. There is.

On the other hand, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops at the "○" symbol, the normal electric combination 64c is operated for a predetermined time. While the normal electric function 64c is being operated, the blades of the normal electric function 64c are in an upwardly erect state. It is in a state where it moves in a substantially V-shape (inverted V-shape), and the second starting port 64b is in an open state. When the second starting port 64b is in the open state, the ball can enter the second starting port 64b, or the ball can enter the second starting port 64b more easily than in the closed state. In other words, as a result of the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83, when the symbol "○" stops and becomes a hit, and the second starting port 64b becomes open, the ball enters the second starting port 64b. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which many jackpot drawings can be performed.

An attacker unit 71 is disposed on the right side of the starting port unit 64 when viewed from the front, and on the upper side of the attacker unit 71 when viewed from the front is a horizontally long rectangular shape that can change the direction of the ball when it collides with the ball. A first variable winning device 72 having a first opening/closing plate 72a formed in the shape of a ball is provided on the lower side of the first variable winning device 72 when viewed from the front, which can change the flowing direction of the ball by colliding with the ball. A second variable winning device 74 having a second opening/closing plate 74a having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in normal times when a jackpot is not won (for example, during a "normal gaming state"), balls flow into the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74. By holding the first opening/closing plate 72a and the second opening/closing plate 74a as the downstream direction changing means upright, the downstream direction of the ball that is about to flow into the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 can be changed. By colliding with the front surface (closing surface) of the first opening/closing plate 72a or the second opening/closing plate 74a and changing the ball, the ball is prevented from entering the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74. has been done. On the other hand, when the drawing of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 8) results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, a special symbol is set so that the jackpot stops. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the second LED group 37b of the symbol display device 37 and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. After that, depending on the type of jackpot that has occurred, the first opening/closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 or the second opening/closing plate 74a of the second variable winning device 74 is opened, and the stream flows down the gaming area. By causing the ball to collide with the rear surface (open surface) of the first opening/closing plate 72a or the second opening/closing plate 74a and changing the ball, the ball can easily enter the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74. The gaming state changes to a special gaming state (jackpot). As this special game state, the first opening/closing plate 72a or the second opening/closing plate 74a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until "30 seconds" elapse or until 10 balls are won). Ru.

This opened first opening/closing plate 72a or second opening/closing plate 74a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed or when a predetermined number of balls have won a prize, and after closing, the first opening/closing plate 72a or the second opening/closing plate 74a is The second opening/closing plate 74a or the first opening/closing plate 72a is opened for a predetermined time. That is, in one jackpot, the first opening/closing plate 72a and the second opening/closing plate 74a are opened alternately, so that balls can alternately win into the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74. It is configured. The opening/closing operation of the first opening/closing plate 72a and the second opening/closing plate 74a can be repeated, for example, a total of 10 times (10 rounds) at most. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state (jackpot state) that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of gaming value (gaming value) than usual. Prize balls will be paid out.

In addition, the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 can flow into the attacker unit 71 (that is, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74). A probability variable area 75 (so-called "V area", see FIG. 4) is provided. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the special game state (jackpot state), the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a provided in the probability variable area 75 is configured to switch whether or not balls can flow into the probability variable area 75. has been done. In addition, while the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a is open, switching control is performed to enable or disable the ball detection in the variable variable region switch 75c, and the ball that flows into the variable variable region 75 is detected by the variable variable region switch 75c set to be valid. When the ball passes through the probability variable area 75, it is notified that the ball has passed through the probability variable area 75 (for example, the V winning notification effect is executed only when a jackpot of "probability variable A" is executed), and after the special game state ends, the "probability variable area 75" is notified. The system is configured so that a "fluctuating state" occurs.

Note that the balls that have entered the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 are discharged from the back side of the game board 13 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge passage 76, regardless of whether they pass through the variable probability area 75 or not. is configured to be More specifically, the ball detected by the first big prize opening switch 72c (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, is the same as the ball detected by the general prize opening switch etc., which is provided on the back side of the game board 13. The outputs are collected into one out passage (not shown) by a collecting plate (not shown), and are configured to be detected by an out switch 66a (see FIG. 8), which will be described later. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after a ball is detected by the first big winning port switch 72c or the second big winning port switch 72c, the discharge described below is performed within a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds or 5 seconds). If a ball is not detected by the switch 76a (or the out switch 66a), it is assumed that a ball jam has occurred in the attacker unit 71 (collection board), and a predetermined abnormality notification is performed.

Here, details of the attacker unit 71 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view schematically showing the front view of the attacker unit 71. As shown in FIG. 4, the attacker unit 71 is mainly composed of a first variable winning device 72, a second variable winning device 74, a probability variable area 75, and a discharge passage 76. In addition, as described above, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are configured to allow balls fired in a so-called right-handed game to flow in, and balls fired in a so-called left-handed game. The structure is such that the ball cannot enter.

The first variable winning device 72 mainly includes a first opening/closing plate 72a having a horizontally long rectangular shape that covers the first big winning opening pre-detection passage 72d, and a first opening/closing plate 72a that extends forward with the lower side of the first opening/closing plate 72a as an axis. A first big prize opening solenoid 72b (see FIG. 8) for driving the opening/closing plate 72a to open and close, a first big prize opening switch 72c for detecting a winning ball in the first variable winning device 72, and A first big winning opening pre-detection passage 72d where the ball flows down before it is detected by the winning opening switch 72c, and a first post-big winning opening detection passage where the ball flows down after being detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c. 72e, and a deceleration rib 72f that decelerates the ball flowing down inside the first large winning opening detection passage 72e. The first large winning opening detection passage 72e is configured to merge with a second large winning opening detection passage 74e of a second variable winning a prize device 74, which will be described later, at the merging section 73.

The first big winning port switch 72c is buried in the passage of the first variable winning device 72, and when a ball is detected by this first big winning port switch 72c, 15 winning balls are paid out. In addition, if 10 balls are detected by the first big prize opening switch 72c after the first opening/closing plate 72a is opened, the first opening/closing plate 72a that is open is closed and the first round ends. is configured to do so.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after a ball is detected by the first big winning hole switch 72c, the first big winning hole detection passage 72e and the discharge passage 76 are operated for a first predetermined period (residence allowable time. If a ball is detected by the ejection switch 76a, which will be described later, after a period during which the ball can flow down (for example, 10 seconds), that is, the ejection switch 76a is activated within a predetermined period after the ball is detected by the first big prize opening switch 72c. If the ball is not detected, it is assumed that the ball has stayed in the first variable winning device 72, and the third symbol display device 81 etc. can indicate that the ball has stayed in the first variable winning device 72. The system is configured to be able to notify players or hall personnel of winning abnormalities. By configuring in this way, for example, even if a fraudulent act is performed in which only the first big prize opening switch 72c continuously detects the ball, it is possible to quickly discover the fraudulent act. Become.

When the first opening/closing plate 72a is open, the first large winning opening pre-detection passage 72d allows the ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 to pass through the first large winning opening through a bottom that is gently inclined to the right side in front view. It is configured to guide the player toward the winning opening switch 72c. While the first opening/closing plate 72a is open, a ball fired in a right-handed game flows down from between the left nail group 77 and the right nail group 78 provided directly above the attacker unit 71 in front view, and then , collides with the leftmost end portion of the first opening/closing plate 72a when viewed from the front and flows into the first big winning opening pre-detection passage 72d. Then, the ball rolls from the bottom of the leftmost end in the front view of the first big winning port detection passage 72d to the right side in the front view, reaches the first big winning port switch 72c, and reaches the first big winning port. It is detected by the mouth switch 72c.

Here, the ball that has flown down from the right side to the left side in the front view of the first variable winning device 72 due to the right-handed game flows down between the left nail group 77 and the right nail group 78, and then touches the first opening/closing plate 72a. After the collision, the ball rolls to the left in the front view on the upper surface of the first opening/closing plate 72a and the first big prize opening detection passage 72d while maintaining the downward momentum to the left in the front view. Then, the momentum of the ball rolling to the left is canceled by the downward slope to the right of the first large winning opening pre-detection passage 72d, and the ball moves along the downward slope to the right of the first large winning opening pre-detection passage 72d to the right in front view. flowing down to Therefore, the time it takes to reach the first big winning opening switch 72c from the leftmost end in front view of the first big winning opening pre-detection passage 72d is determined by going up the slope of the first big winning opening front passage 72d to the left side in front view. It is configured so that it takes about 0.8 seconds because it stagnates a little.

The first big winning opening detection passage 72e is a passage for guiding the ball detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c to the probability variable area 75 provided in the attacker unit 71. A deceleration rib 72f is provided in a part of the first large prize opening detection passage 72e to reduce the speed of the ball flowing down the passage. The deceleration ribs 72f include a plurality of back ribs provided on the back side of the first large winning opening detection passage 72e when viewed from the front, and a plurality of rear ribs provided on the front side of the first large winning opening detection passage 72e when viewed from the front. The ribs on the near side of the are arranged alternately and at equal distances, and when the ball flows down (rolls) through the passage 72e after detecting the first big prize opening, the ball repeatedly collides with each rib and meanders. It is constructed so that it flows downward while decelerating. Therefore, the time required to reach the variable probability area 75 from the most upstream side of the passage 72e after detecting the first big winning opening is configured to take about 2.5 seconds.

That is, the ball that has flown into the first variable winning device 72 takes at least about 0.8 seconds to flow down the first big winning opening pre-detection passage 72d before reaching the variable probability area 75 in the attacker unit 71. It is configured to take about 3.3 seconds in total, including about 2.5 seconds for flowing down the passage 72e after detecting the first big winning opening. As a result, even if, for example, a ball flows into the first variable winning device 72 immediately after the first opening/closing plate 72a is opened, it will take at least about 3.3 seconds for the ball to reach the probability variable area 75. Therefore, if the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a of the probability variable area 75 is not opened for approximately 3.3 seconds or more from the start of opening of the first opening/closing plate 72a, the structure is such that the ball does not flow into the probability variable area 75. ing.

Therefore, when the first opening/closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 is opened, the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a is closed at least within about 3.3 seconds after the first opening/closing plate 72a is opened. If this happens, the setting is such that even if a ball wins in the first variable winning device 72, the ball cannot flow into the variable probability area 75.

The second variable winning device 74 mainly includes a second opening/closing plate 74a having a horizontally long rectangular shape that covers the second large winning opening pre-detection passage 74d, and a second opening/closing plate 74a that extends forward with the lower side of the second opening/closing plate 74a as an axis. A second large prize opening solenoid 74b (see FIG. 8) for driving the opening/closing plate 74a to open and close, a second large prize opening switch 74c for detecting the winning ball in the second variable winning device 74, and A second big winning hole detection pre-passage 74d where the ball flows down before it is detected by the winning hole switch 74c, and a second big winning hole post-detection path where the ball flows down after it is detected by the second big winning hole switch 74c. 74e is provided. The second large winning opening post-detection passage 74e is configured to merge with the first large winning opening post-detection passage 72e of the first variable winning a prize device 72 at the merging portion 73.

The second big winning port switch 74c is buried in the passage of the second variable winning device 74, and when a ball is detected by this second big winning port switch 74c, the second big winning port switch 74c receives 15 A number of prize balls are paid out. In addition, after the second opening/closing plate 74a is opened, if 10 balls are detected by the second big prize opening switch 74c, the second opening/closing plate 74a is closed and one round ends. It is configured.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after a ball is detected by the second big winning opening switch 74c, a second predetermined period (allowable residence time) different from the first predetermined period (retention allowable time; a second big winning opening post-detection path described later) 74e and the discharge passage 76 (for example, 5 seconds), when the ball is detected by the discharge switch 76a (described later), that is, after the ball is detected by the second big prize opening switch 74c, a predetermined period If the ball is not detected by the discharge switch 76a within the period, it is assumed that the ball has stayed in the second variable winning device 74, and the third symbol display device 81 etc. indicates that the ball has stayed in the second variable winning device 74. The system is configured to be able to issue a winning abnormality notification that indicates to the player or a person related to the hall that a prize has been lost. By configuring in this way, for example, even if a fraudulent act is performed in which only the second grand prize opening switch 74c continuously detects the ball, it is possible to quickly discover the fraudulent act. Become. In addition, since the second big winning opening switch 74c is arranged closer to the ejection switch 76a than the first big winning opening switch 72c, it takes a shorter time than when the ball is detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c. By configuring to perform the above abnormality detection process, it becomes possible to accurately monitor the winning balls of the second variable winning device 74.

When the second opening/closing plate 74a is opened, the second large prize winning opening detection passage 74d allows the ball that has flowed into the second variable winning device 74 to pass through the second large prize opening through a bottom portion that gently slopes downward to the left when viewed from the front. It is configured to guide the player to the big prize opening switch 74c. While the second opening/closing plate 74a is open, the balls that flow down from between the left nail group 77 and the right nail group 78, which are provided directly above the attacker unit 71 in front view, are It collides with the right end portion and flows into the second large winning opening pre-detection passage 74d, and then rolls from the bottom of the leftmost end in front view of the second large winning opening pre-detection passage 74d to the right side in front view. It reaches the 2nd big winning opening switch 74c and is detected by the 2nd big winning opening switch 74c.

Here, the ball that has flowed down from the right side of the first variable winning device 72 in the front view due to the right-handed game flows down between the left nail group 77 and the right nail group 78, and then collides with the second opening/closing plate 74a. From there, it rolls to the left in the front view through the upper surface of the second opening/closing plate 74a and the second large prize opening detection passage 74d while maintaining the downward momentum to the left in the front view. Then, while the momentum of the ball rolling to the left is amplified by the left-down slope of the second big winning opening pre-detection passage 74d, the front view is seen along the left-down slope of the second big winning opening pre-detection passage 74d. Flowing down to the left. Therefore, the time it takes to reach the second large winning opening switch 74c from the rightmost end of the second large winning opening pre-detection passage 74d in front view is accelerated by the inclination of the second large winning opening pre-detection passage 74d. It is configured to take approximately 0.3 seconds.

The second big winning opening detection passage 74e is a passage for guiding the ball detected by the second big winning opening switch 74c to the probability variable area 75 provided in the attacker unit 71. Unlike the first large winning opening detection passage 72e, this second large winning opening post detection passage 74e is not provided with a member (for example, a deceleration rib 72f) that reduces the falling speed of the ball. In addition, the second big winning hole detection passage 74e is configured to be shorter than the first big winning hole detection passage 72e (for example, 1/4 the length of the first big winning hole detection passage 72e). There is. Therefore, the time required for reaching the probability variable area 75 from the most upstream side of the passage 74e after detecting the second big winning opening is configured to take about 0.7 seconds.

That is, the ball flowing into the second variable winning device 74 flows down the second big winning opening pre-detection passage 74d for at least about 0.3 seconds before reaching the variable probability area 75 in the attacker unit 71. It is configured to take about 1.0 seconds in total, including about 0.7 seconds for flowing down the passage 74e after detecting the second big prize opening. As a result, for example, when a ball flows into the second variable winning device 74 immediately after the second opening/closing plate 74a is opened, it takes at least about 1.0 seconds for the ball to reach the probability variable area 75. Therefore, if the opening time of the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a of the variable probability region 75 is not opened for approximately 1.0 seconds or more from the start of opening of the second opening/closing plate 74a, the ball is prevented from flowing into the variable probability region 75. On the other hand, if the second opening/closing plate 74a is opened for about 3 seconds from the start of opening, and if balls are fired one by one at 0.6 second intervals, a maximum of about 5 balls will be fired. It is configured to be able to flow into the variable probability region 75.

Therefore, when the second opening/closing plate 74a of the second variable winning device 74 is opened, the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a is opened for at least about 3.0 seconds after the second opening/closing plate 74a is opened. When the winning ball is in the second variable winning device 74, it is set to be able to flow into the probability variable area 75.

The variable probability area 75 is located downstream of the confluence 73 of the first large winning opening post-detection passage 72e and the second large winning opening post detection passage 74e, and mainly consists of a variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a and a variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a. It is composed of a variable probability area solenoid 75b (see FIG. 8) that can drive the plate 75a to open and close, and a variable variable area switch 75c.

The variable rate area opening/closing plate 75a is a retractable opening/closing plate that is disposed at a position visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the player and covers the upstream side of the variable rate area switch 75c, and as described above, the variable rate area solenoid. 75b so that it can be opened and closed.

This variable variable area opening/closing plate 75a is disposed so that its upper surface is flush with the bottom surface of the passage (rolling surface of the ball) in the attacker unit 71 in the closed state (protruding state), and the variable winning device 1 The balls that have flowed into 72 or the second variable prize winning device 74 are guided to the discharge passage 76. The ball guided to the discharge passage 76 is guided to the discharge passage 76, which will be described later, and is detected by the discharge switch 76a, and then discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 71 (to the back side of the game board 13).

On the other hand, when the variable variable area opening/closing plate 75a is in the open state (retracted state), the upstream side (upper side) of the variable variable area switch 75c is opened, and the flow flows into the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74. The ball is guided to a passage in which a variable probability area switch 75c is provided, and then to a discharge passage 76. When a ball is detected by the variable probability area switch 75c, the variable probability area 75 is set to be valid on the condition that the variable probability area 75 is valid and the type of jackpot is a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot type "variable probability A"). The player is configured to be able to execute a V winning notification effect that indicates to the player that the ball has passed through the variable probability area 75. The variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a may be configured as a retractable opening/closing plate that does not guide the ball to the variable probability region switch 75c in the retracted state but guides the ball to the variable probability region switch 75c in the protruded state. Further, when the variable variable area opening/closing plate 75a is rotated and opened, the ball is guided to the variable variable area switch 75c, and when the variable variable area opening/closing plate 75a is not rotated and closed, the ball is not guided to the variable variable area switch 75c. It may also be constructed with a movable opening/closing plate.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after a ball is detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c or the second big winning opening switch 74c, a predetermined period of time (retention allowable time. After the first big winning opening detection passage 72e or If a ball is detected by the probability variable area switch 75c before the period during which the ball can flow down the passage 74e after the detection of the second big winning opening (for example, 10 seconds), the probability variable area 75 which is in the jackpot and is open. On the other hand, if a ball is detected by the probability variable area switch 75c after the predetermined period has elapsed, the ball is not detected by the big prize opening switches 72c and 74c and the probability variable state is generated. If a ball is detected by the area switch 75c, or if a ball is not detected by the probability variable area switch 75c within the above-mentioned predetermined period in a jackpot type that can be given a "probability variable state", the jackpot is in progress or the probability variable area 75 is open. It is configured to issue a predetermined abnormality notification on the assumption that a ball has entered the probability variable area 75 incorrectly or abnormally in a situation where the ball has not entered the probability variable area 75. With this configuration, for example, even if a fraudulent act is performed in which a ball is detected in the variable probability area 75 during a non-jackpot or in a state where the variable probability area 75 is not opened, the fraudulent act can be quickly corrected. It becomes possible to discover.

Further, the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a is made of transparent or substantially transparent resin. Therefore, by configuring the position (driving mode) of the variable variable area opening/closing plate 75a to be difficult for the player to recognize, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the passage to the variable variable area switch 75c is opened or closed by the variable variable area opening/closing plate 75a. can make it difficult to distinguish. Note that the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a may be made of colored resin.

Here, the inflow pattern of the balls that have flowed into the first variable winning device 72 of the attacker unit 71 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5(a) is a diagram for explaining the behavior of a ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 when the first variable prize winning device 72 is in an open state and the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is in a closed state. FIG. 5(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the attacker unit 71, and FIG. FIG. 7 is a schematic cross-sectional view of an attacker unit 71 for explaining the behavior of a ball that has flowed into the ball. Moreover, FIG. 6(a) explains the behavior of the ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 when the second variable winning device 74 is in the open state and the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is in the closed state. FIG. 6(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the attacker unit 71 for the purpose of 7 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the attacker unit 71 for explaining the behavior of a ball that has flowed into the attack unit 71. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), when a special game state occurs due to winning a jackpot, the first variable winning device 72 The first opening/closing plate 72a is opened, and the balls flowing down from between the left nail group 77 and the right nail group 78 can flow into the attacker unit 71 (first variable winning device 72). The ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 is first detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c, and then the deceleration rib 72f provided in the first big winning opening detection passage 72e. After the first big prize opening is detected, it flows down inside the passage 72e while colliding with the first big prize opening. At this time, when the variable area opening/closing plate 75a is in the closed state (protruding state) by the variable area solenoid 75b (see FIG. 8), the passage (the variable area 75) in which the variable area switch 75c is disposed is connected to the switching area plate 75a. Since it is closed (protruded) by 75a, the ball passes through the upper surface of the variable area opening/closing plate 75a and flows into the discharge passage 76.

The balls that have flowed into the discharge passage 76 are detected by a discharge switch 76a provided in the discharge passage 76, and are discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 71. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not the number of balls detected by the first big winning port switch 72c or the second big winning port switch 74c matches the number of balls detected by the ejection switch 76a. If they match, it can be determined that the ball that entered the attacker unit 71 was ejected without staying in the attacker unit 71, but if they do not match, the ball flows into the attacker unit 71. It is configured to determine that the ball is staying and to issue a predetermined abnormality notification (for example, a winning abnormality notification to the attacker unit 71). In this way, by making a predetermined abnormality notification, it is possible to make the player aware that an abnormality has occurred due to winning in the attacker unit 71, and also to make the players concerned about the abnormality in the attacker unit 71. It is possible to notify the user that a winning abnormality has occurred, and to quickly resolve the abnormal state.

Note that the ball discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 71 is then detected by the out switch 66a (see FIG. 8), and is discharged to the outside of the game board 13. Here, by determining whether or not the number of balls fired into the game area matches the number of balls detected by the out switch 66a, the balls fired into the game area stay in the game area (so-called , it becomes possible to detect the occurrence of a grape phenomenon (a phenomenon in which balls become stuck in a row on the board surface of the game board 13). If the ball is stuck in the game area, a predetermined abnormality notification (for example, grape occurrence notification) can be performed to make the player aware that an abnormality has occurred. It is also possible to inform the hall personnel that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming area, so that the abnormality can be quickly resolved.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5(b), when a special game state occurs due to winning a jackpot, the first variable winning device 72 When the first opening/closing plate 72a is opened, the variable area solenoid 75b (see FIG. 8) moves the ball to the position of the variable area opening/closing plate 75a at the timing when the variable area opening/closing plate 75a is in the open state (retracted state). When the ball arrives, since the passage (variable variable area 75) in which the variable variable area switch 75c is arranged is opened (recessed) by the variable variable area opening/closing plate 75a, after the ball is detected by the variable variable area switch 75c. , flows into the discharge passage 76. Note that, as described above, the balls that have flowed into the discharge passage 76 are detected by the discharge switch 76a provided in the discharge passage 76, and are discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 71.

In the first embodiment, the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a is driven to open in synchronization with the opening of the first opening/closing plate 72a, and the open state is maintained for only 3 seconds. It is configured such that the time required for the ball flowing into the ball 72 to reach the position where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided is at least about 3.3 seconds or more. Therefore, the setting is such that the ball that has flown into the first variable winning device 72 does not arrive at the position where the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a is disposed at the timing when the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a is opened. It is configured so that the ball does not flow into the probability variable area 75 when a prize is won in the variable prize winning device 72.

Next, as shown in FIG. 6(a), when a special game state occurs due to winning a jackpot, in a predetermined round (for example, the 2nd round of the jackpot type "time saving A"), the second variable winning device 74 The second opening/closing plate 74a is opened, and the balls flowing down from between the left nail group 77 and the right nail group 78 can flow into the attacker unit 71 (second variable winning device 74). The ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 is first detected by the second big winning opening switch 74c, and then merges with the first big winning opening detection passage 72e at the merging section 73. . At this time, when the variable area opening/closing plate 75a is in the closed state (protruding state) by the variable area solenoid 75b (see FIG. 8), the passage (the variable area 75) in which the variable area switch 75c is disposed is connected to the switching area plate 75a. Since the ball is closed (protruded) by 75a, the ball passes through the upper surface of the variable area opening/closing plate 75a and flows into the discharge passage 76. Note that, as described above, the balls that have flowed into the discharge passage 76 are detected by the discharge switch 76a provided in the discharge passage 76, and are discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 71.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6(b), when a special gaming state occurs due to winning a jackpot, in a predetermined round (for example, the 1st round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation B"), the second variable winning prize When the second opening/closing plate 74a of the device 74 is opened, the variable area solenoid 75b (see FIG. 8) causes the ball to dispose of the variable area opening/closing plate 75a at the timing when the variable area opening/closing plate 75a is in the open state (retracted state). When the ball reaches the position, the passage (the variable variable area 75) in which the variable variable area switch 75c is disposed is opened (recessed) by the variable variable area opening/closing plate 75a, so that the ball is detected by the variable variable area switch 75c. After that, it flows into the discharge passage 76. Note that, as described above, the ball that has entered the discharge passage 76 is detected by the discharge switch 76a provided in the discharge passage 76, and is discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 71.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the winning ball from the second variable winning device 74 can reach the placement position of the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a while the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a is open. While configured to be detectable by the area switch 75c, the winning ball from the first variable winning device 72 cannot reach the placement position of the variable area opening/closing plate 75a while the variable area opening/closing plate 75a is open. , is configured to be undetectable by the variable probability region switch 75c. With this configuration, during one jackpot, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 (hereinafter, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are collectively referred to as "variable winning device 72" and "variable winning device 74") By alternately opening the variable prize winning devices 72, 74 (sometimes referred to as "devices 72, 74"), the closing period (hereinafter referred to as "interval period") of the variable prize winning devices 72, 74 for dividing the round can be reduced, and one jackpot can be achieved. While reducing the time required and quickly providing gaming value to the player, the two variable winning devices 72 and 74 share the variable winning area 75, and each variable winning device 72 and 74 has a variable winning area 75 and a discharge area. There is no need to provide the passage 76, the number of parts of the attacker unit 71 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening (not shown) that opens and closes separately from the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 is provided in the gaming area, and the second LED group 37b corresponding to the jackpot is lit on the special symbol display device 37. In this case, the large opening opening is opened for a predetermined period of time, and when a ball enters the opening while the large opening opening is open, the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 operates for a predetermined period of time. A game state that is opened a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special game state. Also, a game in which only one variable winning device is provided in the game area, and when the second LED group 37b corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the special symbol display device 37, the one variable winning device is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time. The state may be formed as a special game state.

Returning to FIG. 3, the explanation will be continued. A normal symbol gate 67 is provided above the attacker unit 71 in a front view and on the right side of a variable display unit 80 (to be described later) in a front view. This normal symbol gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) in the vertical direction through which a ball passes. When the ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67, a normal symbol switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and due to this turning on, a winning lottery for the normal symbol is performed by the main controller 110. Note that this normal symbol gate 67 only serves as a lottery trigger for the variable display of the normal symbols, and is configured so that no prize ball or the like is paid out even if a ball passes through.

As described above, the starting port unit 64 is provided with a normal electric power supply 64c. This normal electrical function 64c is mainly composed of a rotating plate and a rotating solenoid (not shown) that drives the rotating plate to open and close.

The main control device 110 of the first embodiment normally maintains the rotary plate of the normal electric power member 64c in an upright state and covers both left and right sides of the second starting port 64b, so that the main control device 110 can connect the second starting port 64b to the second starting port 64b. This prevents the inflow of balls. Then, when a win is won in the variable display of the normal symbol, the rotating solenoid (not shown) is driven for a predetermined period of time, and the rotating plate of the normal electric combination 64c is held upright for the predetermined period of time. The ball is driven from this state to an open state (tilted state) tilted at a predetermined angle (for example, 45 degrees) to the right side, and configured to allow the ball to flow into the second starting port 64b, so that the ball flows down near the starting port unit 64. The ball is configured to be in a state where it is easy to enter the second starting port 64b, that is, to be in a winning assist state.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning in the variable display of normal symbols changes depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the "normal game state" or "variable probability state with no time saving", the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to a low probability state (for example, 1/10), making it difficult to win in the variable display of the normal symbol. The rotating plate of the normal electric prize 64c is made difficult to open (tilt), and it is configured so that it is difficult to enter the second starting opening 64b. On the other hand, in the "time reduction state" or "time reduction probability variable state", the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to a high probability state (for example, 9/10), and by making it easier to win in the variable display of the normal symbol, The rotating plate of the electric prize 64c is made easy to open (tilt), and it is configured so that winnings can be easily entered into the second starting opening 64b.

In addition, instead of changing the winning probability of the normal symbols from the "normal gaming state" or the "variable probability state without time saving" like the "time saving state" or "variable probability state with time saving", it is changed depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Alternatively, the time period during which the rotating plate of the normal electric winning combination 64c rotates or the number of times the rotating plate of the normal electric winning combination 64c rotates per one win may be changed. Specifically, in the "variable state with time saving" or "variable time saving state", the time during which the rotating plate of the normal electric role 64c rotates is made longer than in the "normal gaming state" or "variable variable state without time saving". , The number of times that the rotating plate of the normal electric winning combination 64c rotates in one win may be made larger than in the "normal game state" or the "no time saving probability variable state". In addition, in the "time saving probability variable state" or "time shortening state", the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases, the rotation time of the rotating plate of the normal electric symbol 64c becomes longer, and the rotation of the normal electric symbol 64c increases. At least two of the steps of increasing the number of rotations of the plate may be performed at the same time.

A variable display unit 80 is arranged from the center to the right side of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays the variation of the third symbol in synchronization with the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37, triggered by the ball entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (starting winning). A normal symbol consisting of a third symbol display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs production, and an LED that variably displays a normal symbol triggered by the passage of a ball through a normal symbol gate 67. A symbol display device 83 is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, so that, for example, left, middle, and right Three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 7) are displayed.

Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 7) is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row Z1 to Z3 to display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed variably. The third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment is commonly used in the first lottery game with the first special symbol and the second lottery game with the second special symbol, and is used for control of the main controller 110. While the accompanying game state is displayed on the special symbol display device 37, a decorative display corresponding to the display on the special symbol display device 37 is performed using the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. It is something. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using reels or the like, for example.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be explained. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 7(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of the display screen, FIG. 7(b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of numbers from "0" to "9" attached to the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, among which odd numbers ("1", "3", "5", "7", The main design with the number "9" is a large number added almost completely to the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers ("0", "2", "4", "6", "8") have characters such as a plane, a furoshiki, and a helmet almost completely on the front of the wooden box. A simulated attached symbol is added, and a small even number is displayed in green at the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of any special symbol by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is created. The system is structured so that a jackpot occurs after the fluctuating effects are completed. If you win the jackpot type of "probability variation A" which will be described later, a variation effect is performed in which the main symbols with the number "7" (corresponding to the "probability variation notification symbol") are aligned. On the other hand, jackpot types other than "probability variation A" described later, i.e. "time saving A", "time saving B", "time saving C", "latent probability variation A", "latent probability variation B" or "latent probability variation C" ”, if you win the jackpot type, the main symbol with a number other than the number “7”, that is, the main symbol with the number “1” to “6”, “8” or “9” (“ A fluctuating performance is performed in which all the symbols (equivalent to "uncertain variable notification patterns") are aligned. With this configuration, the player cannot identify the type of jackpot that occurs just by checking the main symbols that are aligned in the fluctuating effect (excluding the main symbols with the number "7" attached). Can not.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into three parts in the vertical direction, and the lower two-thirds is reserved as the main display area Dm where the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It consists of a cockpit display area Db that displays the number of pitches, etc., and the other upper one-third is a sub-display area Ds that displays preview effects, characters, etc.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3: left, middle, and right, and the left symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display region Dm1, the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display region Dm2, A right symbol row Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending (or descending) numerical order in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and a variable effect is performed by periodically scrolling from top to bottom for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. Note that the arrangement of numbers may be configured to be different in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. For example, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols may be arranged in descending order, while in the middle symbol row Z2 and right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols may be arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three rows of upper, middle, and lower rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each variable production, the third symbol is placed on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. Stop display. If the combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols, hereinafter referred to as "jackpot display") is aligned on the active line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video will be displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, while the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing a variable performance (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball is When a ball enters the first starting port 64a, the number of times the ball enters (the number of balls held) is held up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the special symbol display device 37, and the special symbol 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 corresponding to the first special symbol in the cockpit display area Db. It is also shown when The special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d display one reserved symbol (in the normal display mode, an "○" symbol ( White circle symbols)) are displayed respectively, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved symbols displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d of special figure 1.

That is, in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, if one reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is is one time, and if a total of two reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 1 first and second reserved symbol display areas Db1a and Db1b, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is twice, and if a total of 3 reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 1 1st to 3rd reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1c, the number of reserved balls of the 1st special symbol is 3 times, and if a total of 4 reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 1 1st to 4th reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the 1st special symbol is 4 times. In addition, if no pending symbols are displayed in the special figure 1 1st to 4th pending symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the 1st special symbol is 0 and there is a variable performance that is being held. Show that you do not.

Also, while the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing a variable performance (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball is When a ball enters the second starting port 64b, the number of times the ball enters the ball (the number of balls held) is held up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the special symbol display device 37, and the special symbol 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d in the second reserved symbol display area Db2 corresponding to the second special symbol in the cockpit display area Db. It is also shown when In the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, one reserved symbol (in the normal display mode, an "○" symbol ( White circle symbols)) are displayed respectively, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d.

That is, in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, if one reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is one time, and if a total of two reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 2 first and second reserved symbol display areas Db2a and Db2b, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is twice, and if a total of three reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 2 first to third reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2c, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 3 times, and if a total of 4 reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 2 1st to 4th reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol is 4 times. In addition, if no pending symbols are displayed in the special figure 2 1st to 4th pending symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol is 0 and there is a pending variable effect. Show that you do not.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first lottery game with the first special symbol and the second lottery game with the second special symbol are not executed at the same time, but only one of the lottery games is executed. It is composed of In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when any of the lottery games in progress is completed and the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are respectively stored, The second lottery game with the second special symbol is executed preferentially over the first lottery game with the first special symbol (so-called special symbol 2 priority variation). Note that the lottery games may be executed in the order of winning, or the first lottery game with the first special symbol and the second lottery game with the second special symbol may be executed simultaneously.

In the center of the cockpit display area Db, there is provided an execution symbol display area Db0 in which an execution symbol indicating that a variable performance is being executed in the main display area Dm is displayed. This execution symbol display area Db0 is provided in the central part of the cockpit display area Db, that is, on the right side of the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a and on the left side of the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a, It is configured so that an executed symbol larger than each pending symbol displayed in each pending symbol display area Db1a to Db1d, Db2a to Db2d is displayed. In addition, in this executed symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbols displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a or the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a are moved (shifted) and displayed as executed symbols. Ru.

The execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 will be erased when the variable performance ends, and with the deletion of the execution symbol, the displayed pending symbol will be moved to the lower side (the right side if it is the first special symbol, the right side if it is the first special symbol, etc.). 2 If it is a special symbol, it will be moved and displayed as a reserved symbol on the left side). Specifically, for example, in a situation where there are no reserved symbols of the second special symbol and four reserved symbols of the first special symbol, the variation performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends. When the executed symbol displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 is erased, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special symbol 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a, the executed symbol in the executed symbol display area Db0 is deleted. It is displayed by moving (shifting). Further, when a reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a. Furthermore, when a reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b. Further, when a reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 fourth reserved symbol display area Db1d, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c.

Also, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved symbols of the second special symbol, the executed symbol displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 is erased with the end of the variable performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the executed symbol in the executed symbol display area Db0. Further, when a reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 second reserved symbol display area Db2b, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a. Furthermore, when a reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 third reserved symbol display area Db2c, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 2 second reserved symbol display area Db2b. Further, when a reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 fourth reserved symbol display area Db2d, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 2 third reserved symbol display area Db2c.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, while the variable performance is executed in the main display area Dm, the executed symbols continue to be displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 (during the variable element of "Super Reach" or "Special Reach") (excluding variable factors). On the other hand, when the variable performance ends, or when the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" is being executed, the executed symbols are configured to be deleted. That is, when the executed symbol is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, it indicates that the variable performance is being executed (continued) in the main display area Dm, and the executed symbol is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0. If not, it indicates that the variable effect is not being executed (not being continued) in the main display area Dm, or that the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" is being executed.

Further, the cockpit display area Db is configured to be able to execute a "reservation change notice" using the reservation symbols and execution symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db. This "pending change notice" means changing the display color of the pending symbols and executed symbols in multiple stages from before to during the execution of the variable production to change the jackpot expectation level of the variable production performed in the main display area Dm. This is a forewarning.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as a "pending change notice", the display color of the pending symbols and executed symbols is changed from "white" which is the normal display mode, to "blue" which is the blue display mode, to red. The display mode is configured to be changeable to "red" in the display mode or "rainbow color" in the rainbow color display mode. This pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when a "jackpot display" or a "reach display" occurs in a variable performance, the display color selection ratio of the pending symbol and the executed symbol is different. By changing the display color of this pending symbol and executed symbol from the normal display mode ("white") to another display mode (for example, "blue"), the " It is possible to suggest to the player the possibility that a "reach display" or "jackpot display" will occur for each display color.

Specifically, in the "pending change notice", if the pending symbol and the executed symbol are displayed in "blue" rather than the normal display format ("white"), the change indicated by the pending symbol and the executed symbol is The percentage of "reach display" and "jackpot display" in the production is set high. In addition, when the pending symbol and executed symbol are displayed in “red” rather than “blue”, the rate of “reach display” or “jackpot display” is higher in the fluctuating effects indicated by the pending symbol and executed symbol. Set. Furthermore, when the pending symbols and executed symbols are displayed in "rainbow color" rather than "red", the percentage of "reach display" or "jackpot display" is higher in the fluctuating effects indicated by the pending symbols and executed symbols. set high.

In addition, when the display mode of the pending symbol and execution symbol is "red", the mode of production mainly "super reach" in the variable production indicated by the "red" pending symbol or execution symbol (mainly (hereinafter, the "Super Reach" performance mode or the "Special Reach" performance mode may be collectively referred to as the "Super Reach or higher" production mode). ) is set to be executed. Furthermore, when the display mode of the pending symbol and the executed symbol is "rainbow color", the setting is made so that the appearance of the "jackpot display" is confirmed in the fluctuating performance indicated by the "rainbow colored" pending symbol or executed symbol. has been done. Therefore, in this embodiment, the display mode of the pending symbols and executed symbols is changed to "reach display" or "jackpot display" in stages in the order of normal ("white") → "blue" → "red" → "rainbow color". is set so that the expectation level of appearance is high.

It should be noted that the "rainbow color" display mode of the "pending change notice" does not appear in the pending symbols, but is set to be able to appear only in the executed symbols. This means that if the pending symbol is not executed due to some abnormality (for example, a power outage) after the "rainbow color" display mode that confirms the occurrence of a jackpot appears with the pending symbol, the player will receive a profit. This results in dissatisfaction due to not being able to get the jackpot that should have been achieved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned dissatisfaction from occurring by configuring the pending symbols so that the "rainbow color" display mode, which is sure to cause a jackpot, does not appear in advance.

In addition, due to this "reservation change notice", in a state where the display mode of the pending symbol has changed, when the pending symbol shifts due to the execution (extinguishment) of the fluctuation effect, the display mode of the changed pending symbol will shift. It is configured to be carried over (inherited) and reflected on the previous pending symbol or executed symbol. That is, when the display mode of the pending symbols changes, even when the changed pending symbols are shifted to other pending symbol display areas Db1 to Db3 or executed symbol display area Db0 due to the execution of the fluctuation effect, the display before the shift The mode is configured to be maintained as it is as the display mode of the pending symbol or the executed symbol after the shift.

Therefore, for example, when the display color of the reserved symbol changes to "red" in the special pattern 1 fourth reserved symbol display area Db1d, the reserved symbol changes from the special symbol 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c to the special symbol 1 second reserved symbol. When shifting from the symbol display area Db1b to the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a to the executed symbol display area Db0, the "red" reserved symbol or executed symbol is configured to continue to be displayed. Ru.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the number of balls held in the variable effect based on the ball entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b is configured to be held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of balls held is The number of pitches is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls can be displayed numerically on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four can be displayed in a manner that differs by the number of reserved balls ( For example, it may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns. Moreover, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the special symbol display device 37, it is not necessary to display the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, if information regarding the number of reserved balls (reserved symbols, etc.) is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is not possible to execute a "reserved change notice" based on the reserved symbols, so other character symbols, etc. may be additionally displayed. By making it appear, it may be configured to execute a prefetched notice similar to the "pending change notice."

Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the number of held balls is displayed according to the number of held lamps in a lit state. It may also be used to display a number. In addition, when configured to display the number of balls on hold using a hold lamp, it is natural to provide a plurality of display colors for the hold lamp to perform a look-ahead notice similar to the "hold change notice" in the first embodiment. possible.

The sub-display area Ds is provided in a horizontally elongated manner above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and preview effect images, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a sense of expectation of winning a jackpot as a result of the variable performance performed in the main display area Dm. The cockpit display area Db includes a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls for which a variation effect has not been performed (reserved balls) among the balls entered into the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b; This is an area that displays the executed symbols related to the variable performance that is being executed.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 7(b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, in the left small area Ds1, a moving image such as a preview symbol appearing is displayed, indicating that the fluctuating effect being performed in the main display area Dm is in a state where it is easier to transition to a jackpot than usual. Suggested to the player.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, in the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy wearing a headband in the first embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and responds to the variable effect performed in the main display area Dm. Based on this, the boy's hair, which is usually black, changes the color of his headband, which is usually white, or a different character appears, etc., to create a preview effect. will be held.

Furthermore, in the sub-display area Ds, a level meter (not shown) appears in the right small area Ds3, which indicates step-by-step whether or not a jackpot will occur in the variable performance performed in the main display area Dm. Is displayed. This level meter increases (adds) each time the expectation of occurrence of "reach display" or the expectation of jackpot in the fluctuating performance increases based on the appearance of preview symbols etc. in the fluctuating performance. It is configured to suggest that a jackpot is confirmed when the display limit (MAX display) of the level meter is reached. Therefore, the sub-display area Ds has a function of indicating the occurrence of "reach display" in the main display area Dm.

Returning to FIG. 3, the explanation will be continued. The normal symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol are alternately lit as display symbols (normal symbols) each time the ball passes through the regular symbol gate 67. . In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (the "○" symbol in the first embodiment), the ordinary electric winning combination 64c enters the operating state according to the gaming state ( The rotating plate is configured to be rotated.

The number of reserved balls at the normal symbol gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting on the regular symbol retaining lamp 84. Four normal symbol holding lamps 84 are provided, which corresponds to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged above the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of reservations is displayed based on the number of normal symbol reservation lamps 84 lit.

The variable display of the normal symbols can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the normal symbol display device 83 as in the first embodiment, as well as by using the special symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. 81 may be used for this purpose. Similarly, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of balls that can be held through the normal symbol gate 67 is not limited to four, as is the case with the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. The number of times (for example, eight times) may be set. Further, when the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol retention lamp 84 may not be lit.

At the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, pasting spaces K1 and K2 are provided for pasting certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning holes (ball entry ports) 63, 64a, 64b, and 71 are guided through the out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). Further, as described above, the ball that has entered the out port 66 is detected by the out switch 66a (see FIG. 8) provided on the collecting board (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13. It is configured to be able to detect that a ball hit into the game area is discharged outside the game area. Furthermore, the balls that have entered each winning hole (ball entry hole) 63, 64a, 64b, 71 are collected by the collecting board and are configured to be detected by the out switch 66a. The game board 13 is equipped with a large number of nails as means for changing the falling direction of the balls in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls. ) are provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a read only memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "ROM") 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a control program stored in the ROM 202. Random Access Memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "RAM") 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing a program, as well as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, Various circuits such as data transmission and reception circuits are built-in.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main controller 110 is responsible for the main functions of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, dynamic display and variable display settings on the special symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, and lottery results for variable display on the normal symbol display device 83. Execute processing. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Further, the ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a pending number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, a variable pattern table 202e, a jackpot opening/closing table 202f, and a probability variable area opening/closing table 202g. The main control device 110 executes the above-mentioned main controls using various counters stored in the RAM 203 and various tables stored in the ROM 202.

Here, with reference to FIG. 9, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. These counters etc. are used for jackpot lottery, dynamic display settings on the special symbol display device 37, variable display settings on the third symbol display device 81, variable display display result lottery on the normal symbol display device 83, etc. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform this. Furthermore, in the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will also be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13.

The settings for the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, and the variable performance settings of the third symbol display device 81 include the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the stop type of the jackpot symbol. A jackpot type counter C2 used for selection, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting the production mode of the variation production, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and variation pattern selection. The variation type counter CS1 used in the above is used.

Further, a random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol is used for the lottery on the ordinary symbol display device 83, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at "4 millisecond" intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 23), and some counters are updated at irregular intervals during the main processing (see Figure 35). The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The details will be described later, but the RAM 203 includes a first holding ball storage area 203d consisting of four holding areas (first holding areas 1 to 4) related to the first special symbol, and a first holding ball storage area 203d that includes four holding areas related to the second special symbol. A second holding ball storage area 203e consisting of areas (second holding areas 1 to 4) is provided, and each of these areas includes a ball entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are respectively stored in accordance with the timing.

Each counter will be explained in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 899"), and reaches the maximum value (for example, "899" for a counter that can take a value of "0 to 899"). The configuration is such that it returns to "0" after reaching the value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated from that initial value. It will be done.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of "0 to 899", the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value of "0 to 899". The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 35).

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23)). Then, at the timing when the ball enters the first starting port 64a (starting prize), a ball is placed in the first holding ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64a (first special symbol). It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any one of the first reservation areas 1st to 4th area. In addition, at the timing when the ball enters the second starting port 64b (starting prize), a ball is placed in the second holding ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting port 64b (second special symbol). The second reservation is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reservation area of any one of the first to fourth areas.

The value of the random number at which the jackpot random number counter C1 becomes a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the jackpot random number value stored in the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1 and 203e1 in the reservation area. When the value of the random number counter C1 matches the random number value that is a jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot is determined.

Here, details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be explained with reference to FIG. 10. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202. The jackpot random number table 202a is a low probability state that is used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state (a period that is not in a "probability fluctuating state") of special symbols, which is the "normal gaming state" or the "time reduction state". For the probability state, and for the high probability state used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a "probability fluctuating state (probability variable)" which is a high probability state with a special symbol that has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than a low probability state. It can be divided into two types. The numbers of random numbers that constitute a jackpot included in each of the low-probability state and high-probability state are set to be different. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of values (jackpot random number value) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state is three, and the value "7,307,582" is the jackpot random number It is stored in table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the low probability state (namely, the "normal game state" and the "time reduction state") is set to be 3/900=1/300.

On the other hand, the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that result in a jackpot in a high probability state is 9, and the values ``28, 122, 298, 390, 486, 567, 656, 750, 866'' are It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the high probability state (that is, the "probability fluctuating state") is set to be 9/900=1/100.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the jackpot random numbers for the low probability state and the jackpot random numbers for the high probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are set so that they do not overlap. is set. Here, if there is a value that is a jackpot random number value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, that value will be easily predicted from the outside, so there is a risk that there will be a high possibility that a jackpot will be won illegally. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, by changing the value of the random number that results in a jackpot depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), it is possible to win a jackpot. Since the value of the random number can be made difficult to predict, fraud can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 9, the explanation will be continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the event of a jackpot, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99") until the maximum value (for example, "0 to 99") is added. In the case of a counter that can take a value of ``99'', the counter returns to ``0'' after reaching ``99''. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23)). Then, at the timing when the ball enters the first starting port 64a (starting prize), a ball is placed in the first holding ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64a (first special symbol). It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area as the first reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the first to fourth reservation areas. In addition, at the timing when the ball enters the second starting hole 64b (starting prize), a ball is placed in the second holding ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting hole 64b (second special symbol). It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reservation area, which is the same as the second reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the second reservation first to fourth areas.

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e is not a random number that becomes a jackpot, that is, it is a loss. If it is a random number, the variation pattern in the variation performance and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") will be the one at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e is a random number that results in a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern or stop in the fluctuation performance The type will be the one at the time of jackpot. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined in accordance with the jackpot type indicated by the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

The value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99". The jackpot type is determined based on this jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202. This jackpot type table 202b includes a jackpot type table 202b1 for special figure 1, which is referred to in the first lottery game with the first special symbol, and a jackpot type for special figure 2, which is referred to in the second lottery game with the second special symbol. A table 202b2 is provided.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b), the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 will be explained. FIG. 11(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special symbol 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 corresponding to the second special symbol. As shown in FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b), the jackpot type table 202b associates the type of special symbol, the jackpot type according to the type of the special symbol, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. It is a table.

Note that the probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the event of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, in accordance with the set probability, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b.

Further, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, a jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each gaming state may be prepared, and the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed in each jackpot type table 202b.

As for the jackpot type, as mentioned above, after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10, until the special symbol variation effect is executed 100 times, both the special symbol jackpot probability and the normal symbol probability are high. ``Probability Variation A'' is a ``10R Probability Variation Jackpot'' that informs the state (so-called ST 100 times and Time Saving 100 times) and is in a ``Probability Variation State'', and a Jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds. Afterwards, until the special symbol variation effect is executed 100 times, both the special symbol's jackpot probability and the normal symbol's probability of winning will be in a high probability state (so-called ST 100 times and time saving 100 times). "Latent probability variation C" which is a "10R latent probability variable jackpot" that does not notify that it is in a "probability variation state" and after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds until the special symbol variation effect is executed 100 times. , "Time-saving C" is a "10R time-saving jackpot" in which the normal symbol's hit probability is high probability state, but the special symbol's jackpot probability is low probability state (so-called time-saving 100 times). ", after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 5 rounds, until the special symbol variation effect is executed 100 times, the jackpot probability of the special symbol will be in a high probability state (so-called ST 100 times), and the special symbol will Until the fluctuation effect is executed 50 times, the winning probability of the normal symbol will be in a high probability state (so-called time saving 50 times), but "5R latent probability strange jackpot" that does not notify that it is in the "probability fluctuation state" ``Latent probability variation A'' and ``Latent probability variation B'', and after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 5 rounds, until the special symbol variation effect is executed 50 times, the probability of winning the normal symbol is high. "Time-saving A" and "Time-saving B" are "5R time-saving jackpots" that are in a probability state, but the special symbol's jackpot probability is low probability state (so-called time-saving 50 times). be.

In the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2, each jackpot type is associated with possible values of the jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type.

In the example of the jackpot type table 202b1 for special drawing 1 in FIG. 11(a), the value "0 to 19" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "time saving A" which is "5R time saving jackpot", and the value "0 to 19" of the jackpot type counter C2 is also " The value "20 to 39" of jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "time saving B" which is "5R time saving jackpot", and jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "latent probability variation A" which is "5R latent probability variable jackpot". The value "40 to 59" of jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "Latent probability variation B" which is also "5R potential probability variation jackpot", and the value "60 to 79" of jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "10R probability variation jackpot". ” is associated with the value “80 to 99” of the jackpot type counter C2.

In the first special symbol lottery in the first embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any of the first holding balls storage areas 203d becomes the jackpot. value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area is determined from the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1.

For example, if the value of jackpot type counter C2 is "15", "time saving A" corresponding to "5R time saving jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of jackpot type counter C2 is "35", jackpot is determined. If "time saving B" corresponding to "5R time saving jackpot" is determined as the type and the value of jackpot type counter C2 is "48", "latent probability variation A" corresponding to "5R latent probability variable jackpot" as the jackpot type. is determined and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "77", the "latent probability variation B" corresponding to "5R latent probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95". If so, "probability variation A" corresponding to "10R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

That is, when a jackpot is won in the first lottery game with the first special symbol (i.e., the lottery based on the ball entering the first starting port 64a), "time saver A", "time saver B", and "latent probability change" are selected. The jackpot types of "A", "Latent probability variation B", and "Probability variation A" are each selected equally at a rate of 20%.

In addition, in the example of the jackpot type table 202b2 for special drawing 2 in FIG. 11(b), the value "0 to 39" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "time saving C" which is "10R time saving jackpot", The value "40 to 59" of jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "latent probability variation C" which is "10R latent probability variable jackpot", and the jackpot type is associated with "probability variation A" which is "10R probability variable jackpot". The value "60 to 99" of the counter C2 is associated with it.

In the second special symbol winning/failure lottery in the first embodiment, similar to the first special symbol winning/failure lottery, the jackpot random number stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of any of the holding areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e When the value of the counter C1 is a value that becomes a jackpot, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 in the same holding area is the jackpot type table for special figure 2. 202b2.

For example, if the value of jackpot type counter C2 is "10", "time saving C" corresponding to "10R time saving jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of jackpot type counter C2 is "55", jackpot is determined. "Latent probability variation C" corresponding to "10R potential probability variable jackpot" is determined as the type, and if the value of jackpot type counter C2 is "80", "probability variation A" corresponding to "10R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type. ” is determined.

That is, if a jackpot is won in the second lottery game with the second special symbol (i.e., a lottery based on the ball entering the second starting port 64b), the jackpot type of "time saving C" is selected at a rate of 40%. The jackpot type of "latent probability variation C" is selected at a rate of 20%, and the jackpot type of "probability variation A" is selected at a rate of 40%.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, since the lottery game using the second special symbol has greater gaming value for the player than the lottery game using the first special symbol, the player does not know how to use the second special symbol. A game feature is created in which the player receives a lottery based on a special symbol, that is, the ball enters the second starting port 64b rather than the first starting port 64a, and variations are created in the game, making the game more interesting. .

Here, the opening pattern of the variable winning devices 72, 74 (big winning opening) and the opening pattern of the probability variable area 75 for each jackpot type will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a jackpot of each special symbol is won, each round (1st to 5th round, or 1st to 10th round) at the time of the jackpot is determined based on the jackpot type of the jackpot. The same applies hereinafter)) The opening pattern of the variable winning devices 72, 74 (the driving pattern of the first opening/closing plate 72a and the second opening/closing plate 74a) is set, and the opening pattern of the variable winning area 75 (the variable winning area The driving pattern of the opening/closing plate 75a) is set.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the opening/closing pattern is set to "X1" for "time saving A", and " In "Time saving B", the opening/closing pattern is set to "X2", and in "Latent probability variation A", the opening/closing pattern is set to "X1" as in "Time saving A", and in "Latent probability variation B", the opening/closing pattern is set to "X1". '', the opening/closing pattern is set to be ``X2'', similar to ``time saving B'', and the opening/closing pattern is configured to be ``Y1'' in ``probability variation A'' (see Figure 11(a)). ). In addition, as the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72, 74 corresponding to each jackpot type of the second special symbol, the opening/closing pattern is set to "Y2" in "time saving C", and in "latent probability variation C", Similar to "Time saving C", the opening/closing pattern is set to "Y2", and in "Probability fluctuation A", the opening/closing pattern is configured to be "Y1" (see FIG. 11(b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 12, the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 for each type of jackpot will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the big winning opening opening/closing table 202f. The big winning opening opening/closing table 202f shown in FIG. 12 shows variable winning devices 72 and 74 that are opened for each round for each jackpot type in each special symbol, and the front view of the attacker unit 71 is shown for each round. When the first variable winning device 72 located on the right side is opened, it is expressed as "right", and when the second variable winning device 74 located on the left side of the attacker unit 71 when viewed from the front is opened, it is expressed as "right". It is expressed as ``left.'' In the first embodiment, when one variable winning device 72, 74 (for example, the first variable winning device 72) is open, the other variable winning device 74, 72 (for example, the second variable winning device 72) is opened. 74) is configured to be closed, and only one of the variable winning devices 72, 74 is opened, and the two variable winning devices 72, 74 are not opened at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 12, the opening/closing pattern "X1" of each variable prize winning device 72, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving A" and "latent probability variation A", which is a jackpot with a maximum of five rounds of the first special symbol, is as follows. In odd-numbered rounds (i.e., 1st, 3rd, and 5th rounds), the "right", ie, first variable winning device 72 is opened, allowing balls to flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72. At the same time, the second variable winning device 74 is closed, and balls cannot flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74.

In addition, the opening/closing pattern "X1" is the "left", that is, the second variable winning device 74 is opened and the opening/closing pattern "X1" is from the second variable winning device 74 to the inside of the attacker unit 71 in the even numbered rounds (i.e., the second round and the fourth round). At the same time, the first variable winning device 72 is closed, and balls cannot flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72.

That is, in the opening/closing pattern "X1", the ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 in the first round of the jackpot, and the ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 in the next round (i.e., the second round). Balls can flow into the unit 71, and then alternately from the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 into the attacker unit 71 every round until the end of the jackpot (that is, the end of the fifth round). Balls can now flow in. Therefore, the number of rounds that can be opened by the first variable winning device 72 is "3", and the number of rounds that can be opened by the second variable winning device 74 is "2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 12, the opening/closing pattern "X2" of each variable winning device 72, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving B" and "latent probability variation B" which is a jackpot of up to 5 rounds of the first special symbol. In odd-numbered rounds (i.e., 1st, 3rd, and 5th rounds), the "left", ie, second variable winning device 74 is opened and the ball flows into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74. At the same time, the first variable winning device 72 is closed, and balls cannot flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72.

In addition, the opening/closing pattern "X2" is such that in the even numbered rounds (i.e., the 2nd round and the 4th round), the "right", that is, the first variable winning device 72 is opened, and the first variable winning device 72 enters the attacker unit 71. At the same time, the second variable winning device 74 is closed, and balls cannot flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74.

That is, in the opening/closing pattern "X2", the ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 in the first round of the jackpot, and the ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 in the next round (i.e., the second round). Balls can flow into the unit 71, and then alternately from the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 into the attacker unit 71 every round until the end of the jackpot (that is, the end of the fifth round). Balls can now flow in. Therefore, the number of rounds that can be opened by the first variable winning device 72 is "2", and the number of rounds that can be opened by the second variable winning device 74 is "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 12, the opening/closing pattern "Y1" of each variable winning device 72, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" which is a jackpot of maximum 10 rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is , in odd-numbered rounds (i.e., the 1st, 3rd, 5th, 7th, and 9th rounds), the "left", ie, the second variable winning device 74 is opened and the attacker unit 71 is released from the second variable winning device 74. At the same time, the first variable winning device 72 is closed, and balls cannot flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72.

Further, the opening/closing pattern "Y1" is such that in even numbered rounds (i.e., 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, and 10th round), the "right", that is, the first variable prize winning device 72 is opened and the first variable prize winning device 72 is opened. Balls can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the variable winning device 72, and the second variable winning device 74 is closed, making it impossible for balls to flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74. ing.

That is, in the opening/closing pattern "Y1", the ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 in the first round of the jackpot, and the ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 in the next round (i.e., the second round). Balls can flow into the unit 71, and then alternately from the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 into the attacker unit 71 every round until the end of the jackpot (that is, the end of the 10th round). Balls can now flow in. Therefore, the number of rounds that can be opened by the first variable winning device 72 is "5", and the number of rounds that can be opened by the second variable winning device 74 is "5".

Next, as shown in FIG. 12, each variable winning device 72, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving C" and "latent probability variation C" which is a jackpot of maximum 10 rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol The opening/closing pattern "Y2" is the "right", that is, the first variable prize winning device 72 is opened and the first variable prize winning device 72 is opened in odd numbered rounds (i.e., 1st round, 3rd round, 5th round, 7th round, and 9th round). Balls can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the device 72, and the second variable winning device 74 is closed, making it impossible for balls to flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74. .

Further, the opening/closing pattern "Y2" is such that in even numbered rounds (i.e., 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, and 10th round), the "left", that is, the second variable prize winning device 74 is opened and the second variable prize winning device 74 is opened. Balls can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the variable winning device 74, and the first variable winning device 72 is closed, making it impossible for balls to flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72. ing.

That is, in the opening/closing pattern "Y2", the ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 in the first round of the jackpot, and the ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 in the next round (i.e., the second round). Balls can flow into the unit 71, and then alternately from the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 into the attacker unit 71 every round until the end of the jackpot (that is, the end of the 10th round). Balls can now flow in. Therefore, the number of rounds that can be opened by the first variable winning device 72 is "5", and the number of rounds that can be opened by the second variable winning device 74 is "5".

In this way, the jackpot types with the same opening and closing patterns (i.e., jackpot types "time saving A" and "latent probability variation A", jackpot types "time saving B" and "latent probability variation B", and jackpot type "time saving C") ” and “latent probability variation C”), so that the type of jackpot cannot be determined only by the opening/closing pattern of each variable winning device 72, 74, making it difficult for the player to recognize which type of jackpot he has won. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which gaming state the player is playing the game.

Returning to FIG. 11, the explanation will be continued. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the opening patterns of the probability variable area 75 corresponding to each jackpot type of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are "time saving A", "latent probability variation B", and "time saving C". , the opening pattern is set to be "A", and for "Time saving B", "Latent probability variation A", and "Latent probability variation C", the opening pattern is set to be "B", and "Probability variation A" is set so that the opening pattern is "B". ", the opening pattern is set to be "C" (see FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, the opening pattern of the variable probability area 75 for each type of jackpot will be explained. FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the variable probability region opening/closing table 202g. The variable probability area opening/closing table 202g shown in FIG. 13 shows whether or not the variable probability area 75 is opened in each round for each jackpot type in each special symbol, and when the variable probability area 75 is opened, If the probability variable area 75 is closed without being opened, it is expressed as a blank.

In addition, for jackpot types in which the corresponding round is not performed ("time saving A", "time saving B", "latent probability variation A" and "latent probability variation B" in which the 6th round and subsequent rounds are not carried out), " -” is expressed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the opening pattern "A" of the probability variable area 75 in the jackpot type "Time saving A" and "Latent probability variation B" of the first special symbol and the jackpot type "Time saving C" of the second special symbol is In the first and third rounds, the variable probability area 75 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds from the start of opening of the variable winning devices 72 and 74), and then, in the round, the variable probability area 75 is closed. Note that the effective pattern "A" is set so that the probability variable region 75 remains closed in the other rounds (namely, the second round, the fourth round, and the fifth round).

That is, in the case of the opening pattern "A" of the variable probability area 75, when the ball passes through the variable probability area 75 that is opened in the first or third round, a "probability variable state" is given after the jackpot is completed. .

Here, the jackpot types "time saving A" and "time saving C" are the time required for the ball that has entered the attacker unit 71 to reach the variable probability area 75 in the first and third rounds when the variable probability area 75 is opened. The first variable winning device 72 is open for a long time (for example, about 3.3 seconds or more). Therefore, even if the probability variable area 75 is opened in the first and third rounds of the jackpot type "time saving A" and "time saving C", the ball that has won into the first variable winning device 72 will enter the probability variable area 75. By the time the ball reaches the placement position, the open time of the probability variable area 75 has ended and it has been closed, so the setting is such that the ball does not flow into the probability variable area 75. Therefore, the system is configured so that the "probability fluctuation state" does not occur after the jackpot ends.

In addition, in the jackpot types "time saving A" and "time saving C", the second variable winning device 74 has a short time until the ball that has entered the attacker unit 71 reaches the probability variable area (for example, about 1.0 seconds). , the variable probability area 75 is set to be opened in the second and fourth rounds when it is closed.

On the other hand, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation B", in the first and third rounds when the probability variable area 75 is opened, the second round where the time for the ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 to reach the probability variable area 75 is short. The variable winning device 74 is open. Therefore, in the first and third rounds of the jackpot type "Time Saving A" and "Time Saving C", when the probability variable area 75 is opened, the winning ball to the second variable winning device 74 is placed at the probability variable area 75 arrangement position. At the timing of reaching , the variable probability area 75 maintains an open state, and the setting is such that a ball can flow into the variable probability area 75. For this reason, the jackpot type "latent probability variation B" is configured so that a "probability variation state" can occur after the jackpot ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13, the opening pattern of the probability variable area 75 in the first special symbol jackpot type "time saving B" and "latent probability variation A" and the second special symbol jackpot type "latent probability variation C" "B" means that the variable probability area 75 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds from the start of opening of the variable winning devices 72 and 74) in the second and fourth rounds, and then, in the round, the variable probability area 75 is closed. Ru. Note that the effective pattern "B" is set so that the probability variable region 75 remains closed during the other rounds (namely, the 1st round, the 3rd round, and the 5th round).

That is, in the case of the opening pattern "B" of the probability variable area 75, when the ball passes through the probability variable area 75 that is opened in the second or fourth round, a "probability variation state" is given after the jackpot is completed. .

Here, in the jackpot type "time saving B", it takes a long time for the ball that has entered the attacker unit 71 to reach the variable probability area 75 in the second and fourth rounds when the variable probability area 75 is opened (for example, (about 3.3 seconds or more) the first variable winning device 72 is open. Therefore, in the second and fourth rounds of the jackpot type "time saving B", even if the variable probability area 75 is opened, the ball that has won into the first variable winning device 72 will reach the position where the variable probability area 75 is arranged. By then, the opening time of the probability variable area 75 has ended and it has been closed, so the setting is such that no balls will flow into the probability variable area 75. Therefore, the system is configured so that the "probability fluctuation state" does not occur after the jackpot ends.

In addition, in the jackpot type "time saving B", the second variable winning device 74 uses a short time for the ball that has entered the attacker unit 71 to reach the probability variable area 75 (for example, about 1.0 seconds). It is set to be opened in the 1st, 3rd, and 5th rounds, where the round is closed.

On the other hand, in the jackpot types "Latent probability variation A" and "Latent probability variation C", the ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 reaches the probability variable area 75 in the second and fourth rounds when the probability variable area 75 is opened. The second variable prize winning device 74, which has a short time until the end, is opened. Therefore, in the second and fourth rounds of the jackpot type "Latent probability variation A" and "Latent probability variation C", when the probability variable area 75 is opened, the ball that enters the second variable winning device 74 enters the probability variable area. 75 arrangement position, the probability variable area 75 maintains an open state, and the setting is such that the ball can flow into the probability variable area 75. For this reason, the jackpot types "latent probability variation A" and "latent probability variation C" are configured so that a "probability variation state" can occur after the jackpot ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13, the opening pattern "C" of the probability variable area 75 in the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the first, third, and ninth round. The variable probability area 75 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds from the start of opening of the variable winning devices 72, 74), and then, in the round, the variable probability area 75 is closed. Note that the effective pattern "C" is set so that the variable probability region 75 remains closed during the other rounds (namely, the 2nd round, the 4th round to the 8th round, and the 10th round).

That is, in the case of the opening pattern "C" of the probability variable area 75, when the ball passes through the probability variable area 75 that is opened in the first, third, or ninth round, the "probability variation state" occurs after the jackpot ends. will be granted.

Here, the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" is the time required for the ball that has entered the attacker unit 71 to reach the variable probability area 75 in the first, third, and ninth rounds when the variable probability area 75 is opened. The second variable prize winning device 74 with a short time is opened. Therefore, when the probability variable area 75 is opened in the first, third, and ninth rounds of the jackpot type "probability variation A", the winning ball to the second variable winning device 74 is placed at the probability variable area 75 arrangement position. At the timing of reaching , the variable probability area 75 maintains an open state, and the setting is such that a ball can flow into the variable probability area 75. For this reason, the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" is configured so that a "probability fluctuation state" can occur after the jackpot ends.

In this way, in each jackpot type, variable winning devices 72 and 74 are set to be opened for each round, and opening or closing of the variable probability area 75 is set corresponding to the round. Then, the type of jackpot cannot be determined only by the opening patterns of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, so that it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize which type of jackpot he has won, and in any gaming state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that makes the player guess whether he or she is playing the game.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when winning a jackpot type that generates a "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends, the second variable winning device 74 is used in a round in which the probability variable area 75 is opened in a plurality of rounds of the jackpot. is configured to be open. Therefore, even if the ball cannot pass through the variable probability area 75 in any one round in which the variable probability area 75 is open, by opening the variable probability area 75 again in another round, It becomes possible to allow the ball to pass through the probability variable area 75. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a firing abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), a problem arises in passing the ball to the probability variable area 75 in the first round in which the probability variable area 75 is opened. Even if the player is not at a disadvantage due to unforeseen circumstances, by opening the probability variable area 75 again in another round and providing the possibility for the ball to pass through the probability variable area 75, the player will not be disadvantaged due to unforeseen circumstances and will be able to play comfortably. The game can be realized and the interest of the game can be improved. It should be noted that if a ball enters the variable probability region 75 even once during one jackpot, it may be configured such that the ball does not flow into the variable probability region 75 in subsequent rounds.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a ball passes in a situation where the probability variation area 75 is set to be effective in a jackpot, a "probability variation state" is added (occurs) after the jackpot ends. The probability variation state is configured so that even if the ball passes through the probability variation region 75 which is set to be invalid, the "probability variation state" is not applied (occurred).

Conventionally, a probability variable area through which a ball can pass is provided in the attacker unit 71 that is opened when a jackpot is hit, and the opening and closing of the probability variable area is controlled by an opening/closing lever or the like, and when the ball that flows into the attacker unit 71 passes through the probability variable area. There is a pachinko machine that generates (provides) a "probability fluctuating state" after the jackpot ends.

In such pachinko machines, when a jackpot occurs, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the "time reduction state" or the "normal gaming state" is displayed without informing the player whether or not the "probability fluctuation state" will occur. is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, etc., and the player is shown a "probability variation state". '' instead of ``time reduction state'' or ``normal game state'' is performed. Then, during the jackpot, the release lever is controlled to open and close at a predetermined timing based on the jackpot type.

Specifically, for example, in the case of a jackpot type that causes a "probability variation state", the opening/closing lever is controlled to open and close so that the ball that has entered the attacker unit 71 passes through the probability variation area, and the jackpot is achieved. It is configured to generate a "probability fluctuating state" after completion. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot type that does not cause a "probability variation state", the opening/closing lever is controlled to open/close so that the ball that has entered the attacker unit 71 does not pass through the probability variation region, and after the jackpot is over, the "probability variation state" is The game is configured so that a "time reduction state" or a "normal gaming state" is generated without generating a "state".

By configuring it in this way, it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize whether the gaming state after a jackpot is a "probability fluctuation state", a "time reduction state", or a "normal gaming state". , it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which game state he/she is playing the game. In addition, even if the player is in a "time reduction state" or "normal gaming state," the player is made to guess (internally) that it may be in a "probability fluctuation state" contrary to the production mode, and is forced to continue playing the game. By doing so, the operating rate of the pachinko machine can be improved.

However, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, even if the "latent probability variable production mode" is executed, the "probability variable state" is generated every time the ball passes through the probability variable area, so the inside of the attacker unit 71 is The player continues to pay attention to whether or not the ball passes through the variable probability region, and at the stage when the player visually confirms that the ball passes through the variable probability region, the player realizes that a "probability variable state" will occur. The game will be recognized as such, and the expected gameplay will be disrupted. In addition, if the player continues to execute the "latent probability variation performance mode" after the occurrence of the "probability variation state" is recognized, the player will not be able to enjoy the game, and will actually lose interest in the game. There is a risk of becoming aroused.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the probability variable area 75 provided in the attacker unit 71 is configured to be switchable between a valid state and an invalid state, and the probability variable area is changed for each round of the jackpot depending on the type of jackpot. The variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a provided in the variable probability area 75 is controlled to be opened, and the setting of the variable probability area 75 is controlled to be switched (internally) between valid and invalid settings in a state that the player cannot recognize. Then, during a jackpot, if the ball passes through the effectively set probability variable region 75, the "probability variation state" is generated after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, even if the ball passes through the probability variable area 75 which is set to be invalid, the configuration is such that the "probability variation state" does not occur after the end of the jackpot.

That is, for example, if the probability variable area 75 is set to be effective in a state where the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a is opened and a ball can flow into the variable variable area 75, the ball enters the variable variable area 75 (probable variable area switch 75c). When the jackpot passes, a "probability fluctuation state" is generated after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a is open and the ball can flow into the variable variable area 75, and the variable variable area 75 is set to be invalid, the ball does not pass through the variable variable area 75 (the variable variable area switch 75c). Even if the jackpot is completed, the system is configured so that the "probability fluctuation state" does not occur after the end of the jackpot.

With this configuration, even if the ball passes through the probability variable area 75, if the probability variable area 75 is not internally set effectively, the "probability variation state" will not occur after the jackpot ends, so the probability variable area Even if the player visually recognizes the passing of the ball to the ball 75, the configuration can be such that the occurrence of the "probability fluctuation state" is not determined after the jackpot is completed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which gaming state the player is playing the game, even when the "latent probability variation performance mode" is being executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, even if a ball irregularly flows into the variable probability region 75 in a situation where the provision of a "probability variable state" is not expected, setting the variable probability region 75 to be invalid will prevent the ball from entering the variable probability region 75 as intended. It is possible to prevent game values from being awarded that are not intended to be played.

Returning to FIG. 9, the explanation of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99).

In the first embodiment, the rough performance mode of the variable performance at the time of jackpot and loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the number of pending variable performances and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. selected. Specifically, "Non-reach (shortened)" or "Non-reach (Normal)" production mode in which "Reach display" does not occur, and "Normal reach" in which only variable elements of "Normal reach" are executed as "Reach display" The "Normal Reach" production mode, the "Super Reach" production mode that develops from the variable elements of "Normal Reach" and executes the variable elements of "Super Reach", and the "Special Reach" production mode that also develops from the variable elements of "Normal Reach". Five performance modes are selected, including the "Special Reach" performance mode in which the variable element of "" is executed.

Here, each performance mode will be explained in detail. Among the production modes, the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode and the "non-reach (normal)" production mode are defined as "non-reach (shortened)" production mode and "non-reach (normal)" production mode in each display area Dm1 to Dm3 (see FIG. 7(a)) of the main display area Dm. This is a performance mode in which the same third symbol does not stop in the left display area Dm1 and right display area Dm3 and does not generate a "reach display" after the variable element of "high speed variation" is performed.

The variable elements of "high-speed variation" are displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 7(a)) in the variation performance performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7). This refers to a variable element in which the third symbol is scrolled at high speed downward in the vertical direction of the display screen. In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third symbol is fluctuated so that the display contents of the third symbol cannot be clearly recognized by the player, and the stop results of the previously stopped fluctuating performance are irregularly mixed (shuffled). is executed as

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "high-speed variation" is performed, the variable element of "low-speed variation" is performed except for a specific performance mode ("non-reach (shortened)" production mode). It is configured to be The variable element of "low-speed variation" is visually visible to the player after the variable element of the above-mentioned "high-speed variation" in the variation performance performed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 7(a)) of the third symbol display device 81. It refers to a variable element that scrolls the third symbol at a slow speed as possible. In this variable element of "low speed fluctuation", while making the player recognize the display contents of the third symbol, the third symbol row is changed in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 7(a)). Stop displaying the symbol. If the same third symbol stops in the left symbol row Z1 and right symbol row Z3, it is assumed that a "reach display" has occurred and develops into a variable element of "normal reach", while in the left symbol row Z1 and right symbol row Z3 When a different third symbol stops, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuating performance is ended (excluding when it develops into a "pseudo series" described later).

Therefore, in the "non-reach (normal)" performance mode, after the "high speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is performed, the "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is performed, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 7(a) ) stop in order, and the first variable performance ends. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode, the "low speed fluctuation" variable element is not performed after the "high speed fluctuation" is performed, and after the completion of the "high speed fluctuation" variable element, each symbol row Z1 ~ Z3 stops at the same time, and the fluctuating performance of 1 ends.

Among the presentation modes, the “normal reach” presentation mode refers to the variable presentation of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 7(a)) in the main display area Dm, where the same pattern is applied to the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3. Immediately after the third symbol stops, the variable element of "Normal reach" is executed, and other "reach display", that is, the "reach display" that does not develop into the variable element of "Super reach" or the variable element of "Special reach". This is one of the production modes. In this "normal reach" variable element, as described above, the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 (left display area Dm1) and right symbol row Z3 (right display area Dm3) of the main display area Dm Displayed larger than usual. Further, the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 (the middle display area Dm2) is scrolled downward in the vertical direction of the display screen at a low speed, and the third symbol in the middle display area Dm2 is displayed in a state where it can be visually recognized by the player. . Furthermore, in the variable element of this "normal reach", the sub-display area Ds is erased (not shown) along with the enlarged display of the main display area Dm.

Among the production modes, the "super reach" production mode is one of the production modes of "reach display" in which variable elements of "super reach" are executed, developed from variable elements of "normal reach". In this "Super Reach" performance mode, while the variable element of "Super Reach" is being executed, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 7(a)) is erased from the display state of the variable element of "Normal Reach", and this " The third symbol, the reach-forming symbol, which was the cause of the "reach display" is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display in the main display area Dm changes from the variable element of "normal reach", and a plurality of character designs are made to appear to perform "battle performance (for example, kickboxing)" (not shown).

In the first embodiment, the system is configured to suggest whether or not the variable performance is appropriate based on the result (win or loss) of the "battle performance". Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned "battle effect," if the player's character symbol wins over the enemy's character symbol, the variable effect suggests that it will be a "jackpot display," and the player If the side's character pattern loses to the enemy's character pattern, the fluctuating performance is configured to indicate a "loss display."

Among the production modes, the "special reach" production mode is one of the production modes of "reach display" in which variable elements of "special reach" are executed, which are developed from variable elements of "normal reach". In this "Special Reach" production mode, while the variable element of "Special Reach" is being executed, the display state of the variable element of "Normal Reach" is changed from the display state of the variable element of "Normal Reach" to the cockpit display area Db (Fig. 7 (see (a)) is erased, and the third symbol, the reach-forming symbol, which was the cause of this "reach display", is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 7(a)) changes from the variable elements of "Normal Reach", and multiple characters different from the variable elements of "Super Reach" appear, and the "Competitive Effect" (for example, a car race)” (not shown).

The first embodiment is configured to suggest the propriety of the variable performance based on the result (win or loss) of the "competitive performance". Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned "competitive effect," if the player's character symbol wins over the opponent's character symbol, the player's If the side's character pattern loses to the enemy's character pattern, the fluctuating performance is configured to indicate a "loss display."

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23)). Then, at the timing when the ball enters the first starting port 64a (starting prize), a ball is placed in the first holding ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64a (first special symbol). It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reservation area where the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the first reservation areas 1 to 4. In addition, at the timing when the ball enters the second starting hole 64b (starting prize), a ball is placed in the second holding ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting hole 64b (second special symbol). It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reservation area where the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the second reservation first to fourth areas.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is referred to according to the validity of the variable performance, the current game state, and the number of currently pending variable performances (number of pending balls). The stop pattern table 202d is configured differently. That is, the stop pattern table 202d is provided with a plurality of types, and is configured to be selected depending on the number of variable performances on standby (number of pending balls), etc.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when determining the detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation performance, first, based on the pending number table 202c provided in the ROM 202, the validity of the fluctuation performance, the current gaming state, and the current One of the stop pattern tables 202d corresponding to the number of variable performances (number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, a rough performance mode of the variable performance is selected based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Thereafter, a detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variation performance is determined based on the selected performance mode and the value of a variation type counter CS1, which will be described later.

The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 from which the performance mode is selected is different for each stop pattern table 202d. The reason why a plurality of stop pattern tables 202d are prepared is to change the selection ratio of the production mode of the variable production according to the propriety of the variation production, the game state, and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) a jackpot occurs in the variation performance of the acquired third symbol, or (2) the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "probability variation state", "time reduction state", or "normal gaming state". This is to change the selection ratio of the production mode depending on whether there is one or not, and (3) how many balls are on hold for the variable production that is on hold.

The first reason for this is to change the degree of expectation of a jackpot for each production mode. In other words, the percentage of selection of "Non-reach" presentation mode, "Normal reach" presentation mode, "Super reach" presentation mode, and "Special reach" presentation mode when winning the jackpot lottery and when losing the jackpot lottery. By configuring the system to be different, the degree of expectation of a jackpot is changed for each performance mode. Specifically, for example, if you win the jackpot lottery, you can easily select the "super reach" presentation mode or the "special reach" presentation mode, and if you do not win the jackpot lottery, you can select the "non-reach" presentation mode. To make it easy to select a mode and a "normal reach" performance mode. By configuring this way, the "Super Reach" performance mode and the "Special Reach" performance mode can be made easy to hit the jackpot, while the "Normal Reach" production mode and the "Non-Reach" production mode are difficult to hit the jackpot. It is possible to create a performance or a performance that does not lead to a jackpot, and it is possible to differentiate the degree of expectation of a jackpot for each performance mode. Therefore, when a performance that is easy to hit a jackpot appears in a fluctuating performance, it is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility of a jackpot occurring while the performance that is easy to hit a jackpot is being performed, thereby increasing the interest of the game. There is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the obtained lottery result is a jackpot, based on the stop pattern table 202d that makes it easy to select a performance that is easy to win a jackpot, and difficult to select a performance that is difficult to hit a jackpot. The present invention is configured to select a presentation mode of a variable presentation. On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is a loss, the stop pattern table 202d is configured so that it is difficult to select a performance that is likely to lead to a jackpot, and it is easy to select a performance that is difficult to win a jackpot. As a result, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in a variable performance, if a performance that is likely to lead to a jackpot is being executed, a jackpot is likely to occur with that variable performance, and a performance that is difficult to hit is executed. By making it difficult for a jackpot to occur in the fluctuating performance when the game is running, and by providing a difference in the expected jackpot value for each performance mode, it is possible to increase the interest of the game during the execution of the fluctuating performance.

In addition, as a second reason, the ball enters the first starting port 64a in a state where the number of times of waiting for the fluctuating performance of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, or the number of times of waiting for the fluctuating performance of the second special symbol is the upper limit. This is to reduce as much as possible the wasted balls (so-called non-lottery due to overflow winnings) based on balls entering the second starting port 64b in a state where the ball reaches the second starting port 64b. To explain more specifically, the number of standby times for the fluctuating effects of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is each set at a maximum of 4 times, and since the fluctuating effects are executed for at least a certain period of time, the "probability" In the game state in which balls are likely to enter the second starting port 64b in the "fluctuation state", it is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. In these game states, if a variable performance with a long variable time is selected, the ball will frequently enter the second starting port 64b when the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has been reached, and the second starting port Even though the ball enters 64b, the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol cannot be obtained. In addition, even in the "normal game state", if you select a variable performance with a long variation time when the maximum number of balls reserved for the first special symbol has been reached, the first special symbol will be suspended during the execution of the variable performance. Since the number of balls is not used up, even if a ball enters the first starting port 64a during that time, a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol cannot be obtained. In such a state, the player determines that no gaming value is obtained even if the ball enters the first starting port 64a, and the variable effect is exhausted and the player is able to obtain the number of reserved balls again. The ball stops firing until the end of the game and the game is interrupted. When the game is interrupted, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 decreases, which affects the management of the game parlor.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a game state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is easily reached, or a state where the maximum number of reserved balls is close to (or matches) Regarding the number of reserved pitches, the performance mode of the variable performance is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a relatively short fluctuation time is likely to be selected. This prevents balls from entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b when the maximum number of reserved balls for the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has been reached. can.

Furthermore, the third reason is to maintain the state in which the fluctuating performance is being executed for a long time by setting the execution time long and delaying the end of the fluctuating performance. To be more specific, when the number of pending balls in a variable performance is small (non-existent), a new ball is inserted into either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b within the variable time of the currently running variable performance. If the ball is not released, the next variable performance cannot be started, and a demonstration screen or the like must be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the player does not perform a variable performance on the third symbol display device 81 even though he or she is playing a game by shooting balls, the player may not be able to obtain the entertainment related to the jackpot lottery that the player is looking for. I get excited about the game. In addition, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is such that it is difficult for balls to enter the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b because the variable performance is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, There is a possibility that the player may decide that the machine is difficult to obtain gaming value from and stop playing the game on that pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to select the production mode of the variable production based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a relatively long variation time is likely to be selected when the number of balls on hold for the variable production is small. has been done. Thereby, a situation in which the variable performance is not performed on the third symbol display device 81 is made difficult to occur, and the execution state of the variable performance on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured such that, for example, it is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 199, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 199). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 35). Then, at the timing when the ball enters the first starting port 64a (starting prize), a ball is placed in the first holding ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64a (first special symbol). It is stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reservation area where the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first reservation first to fourth areas. In addition, at the timing when the ball enters the second starting hole 64b (starting prize), a ball is placed in the second holding ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting hole 64b (second special symbol). It is stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reservation area where the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the second reservation first to fourth areas.

The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 uses the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 to perform detailed processing in the performance mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation pattern. Determining the fluctuation pattern is specifically determining the fluctuation time of the fluctuation performance. The audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 change the reach type and detailed pattern of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1. The variation mode is determined, and whether or not to execute the preview performance and the execution mode of the preview performance are determined.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough variation pattern of the variation performance and determines only the variation time. With this configuration, there is no need for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to control detailed advance notice lottery etc. necessary for executing the variable effect, so the processing of the MPU 201 regarding the variable effect can be reduced. can. Further, it is no longer necessary to prepare commands for all the variation patterns of the variation effect in the main control device 110, and the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine detailed fluctuation patterns in the fluctuation performance based on the fluctuation time (rough fluctuation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, thereby controlling the fluctuation performance. You can increase your freedom of choice. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 where the gaming state changes from moment to moment, it becomes possible to select or change the production content of the variable production at any time in response to the change, and it is possible to execute an appropriate production according to the gaming state. can.

Here, each variable element making up the variation pattern will be explained. A variable element constitutes a part of one variable effect, and one variable effect is constructed by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable elements include a "high-speed variation" variation element, a "low-speed variation" variation element, a "pseudo-link" variation element, a "normal reach" variation element, and a "super reach" variation element. A variable element, a "special reach" variable element, and a "re-variation" variable element are provided.

The "high-speed variation" variation element is a variation element that scrolls and varies at high speed so that the content of the third symbol cannot be clearly recognized by the player. This variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed for "3 seconds" at the beginning of the variable performance when the "non-reach (shortened)" performance mode is selected, and the variable element other than "non-reach (shortened)" For example, if the performance mode "Non-reach (normal)" is selected, the variable performance is performed for "7 seconds" at the beginning. In addition, when the variable element of this "high-speed variation" ends, the variable element of "low-speed variation" to be described later is started (executed), or the variation effect ends as it is.

The variable element of "low-speed variation" starts after the execution of the variable element of "high-speed variation" of "7 seconds", and determines whether or not to scroll the third symbol to make it visible and generate a "reach display". It is a variable element that can be shown. This variable element of "low speed fluctuation" is not executed when the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode is selected, and is not executed when the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode is selected. )" effect mode) is selected, "3 seconds" is performed after the variation element of "high-speed variation". That is, in the "non-reach (shortened)" performance mode, after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm is displayed without passing through the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element. It is configured to stop rapidly (so-called "bitter stop"). In addition, when the variable element of "low speed fluctuation" ends, the variable element of "pseudo-link" described later will start (execution), or the variable element of "normal reach" described later will start (execute). , or the variable performance is configured to end immediately.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (normal)" performance mode includes the variable element of "high-speed variation" of "7 seconds" and the variable element of "low-speed variation" of "3 seconds". A variable performance is composed of the included variation patterns. In addition, in the "non-reach (shortened)" performance mode, the fluctuation performance is configured with a fluctuation pattern of only the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" of "3 seconds".

The variable element of "pseudo series" is a variable element in which the start of the variable effect occurs multiple times (the pseudo stop occurs once) in one variable effect. Specifically, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the third symbol display device 81, the variable element of "high speed fluctuation" is started and switched to the variable element of "low speed fluctuation", and then in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. This is a variable element in which a unit effect is performed in which a predetermined stop result (for example, pseudo consecutive chance number "677") is displayed after the variable effect is completed. The variable element of this "pseudo-connection" is that when the above-mentioned predetermined stop result stops after the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation", the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" starts again from that stop result, as if it were once again. A performance is executed as if a variable performance had started.

In this "pseudo-continuation" variation element, a predetermined stop result (so-called pseudo-continuation chance) appears after the execution of the "low-speed variation" variation element, and the second "high-speed variation" variation element is executed again. , which is a variable element that then develops into a variable element of "normal reach". In other words, for the variable element of "pseudo-connection", a pseudo-variation stop (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo-stop") is performed once in which a pseudo-run chance item is displayed, and after that, a predetermined stop result is achieved in that pseudo-stop. This is a variable element that appears and starts the variable element of "high-speed variation" again. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that after the "pseudo-reach" variable element ends, it always develops into at least a "normal reach" variable element. This "pseudo-continuation" variation element is performed "10 seconds" after the "low-speed variation" variation element.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the number of pseudo stops is set to one in the variable element of "pseudo series", but the number of pseudo stops is changed to execute the variable element of "pseudo series" in which the number of pseudo stops is performed twice or more. may be configured. Furthermore, it may be configured to perform a variable element (so-called "pseudo false" variable element) that indicates whether or not the pseudo consecutive chance will stop before the occurrence of the "pseudo consecutive" variable element. . In this "pseudo false" variable element, the effect of whether or not a predetermined stop result will appear after the execution of the "low speed change" variable element (for example, the symbol forming the above predetermined stop result is on the active line L1 ( (See Fig. 7 (a)) to perform a reciprocating motion on the top and whether or not to stop. It may be configured so that the variable element of "pseudo-connection" does not develop. By providing a variable element of this "pseudo false", after the variable element of the "pseudo false" ends, it will develop into a variable element of "normal reach", or a "loss display" will appear (for example, "687 ”) and the variable performance ends as it is.

The variable elements of "Normal reach" are the variable elements of "Low speed fluctuation" or the variable elements of "Pseudo chain" (hereinafter, the variable elements of "Low speed fluctuation" or the variable elements of "Pseudo chain") are collectively referred to as "Slow speed fluctuation" variable elements or "Pseudo chain" variable elements. A variation that shows whether or not a jackpot will occur depending on the fluctuation result of the middle symbol row Z2 when reach-forming symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 and right symbol row Z3 in the "variation element of "variation, etc."). is an element. This "normal reach" variation element is performed "10 seconds" after the "low speed variation, etc." variation element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "normal reach" is executed, there is a pattern that directly displays a "loss display", a pattern that directly displays a "jackpot display", and a pattern that directly displays a "super reach". There is a pattern that develops into a variable element, a pattern that develops into a variable element of "Special Reach", and a pattern that executes a variable element of "re-variation" after a temporary "loss display" appears. has been done.

The variable element of "Super Reach" is developed and executed when the fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 continues without stopping the "loss display" in the variable element of "Normal Reach", and the "Battle" is executed in the main display area Dm. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a jackpot will occur by performing "performance". This "super reach" variable element is performed "10 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "super reach" is executed, a pattern that directly displays a "loss display", a pattern that directly displays a "jackpot display", and a temporary A pattern is prepared in which the variable element of "revariation" is executed after the "loss display" appears.

The variable element of "Special Reach" is developed and executed when the "loss display" does not stop in the variable element of "Normal Reach" and the fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 continues, and the "Competitive Reach" variable element is developed and executed in the main display area Dm. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a jackpot will occur by performing "performance". This "special reach" variable element is performed "20 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "Special Reach" is executed, a pattern that directly displays a "loss display", a pattern that directly displays a "jackpot display", and a temporary A pattern is prepared in which the "re-variation" occurs after the "loss display" appears.

Note that the configuration is such that after the execution of the variable element of "Normal Reach", the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" develops, but instead of this configuration, reach formation is performed after "Slow Variation". When the symbol stops, it may be configured so that it suddenly develops into a "super reach" variable element or a "special reach" variable element without passing through the "normal reach" variable element. Further, the variable element of "Special Reach" may be configured to be executed after the variable element of "Super Reach" is executed.

The variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that is developed and executed after a "loss display" once appears in any "reach display", and a "jackpot display" appears. The variable element of this "re-variation" is performed for "10 seconds" after any "reach display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pattern is prepared in which a "jackpot display" appears after the variable element of "re-variation" is executed.

Further, the variable element of this "re-variation" is configured to occur only when a jackpot is won. That is, in the case of "loss indication", the variable element of "re-variation" is configured not to be executed. This is because the variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that changes the temporarily displayed "losing display" to one of the "jackpot displays", so if the "losing display" does not win the jackpot If you go to that, there will be a discrepancy in the production. Therefore, the variable element of this "re-variation" is selected only in the variation pattern table 202e for jackpots, and is configured not to be selected in the variation pattern table 202e for loses.

The random number counter C4 per common figure is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of, for example, "0 to 99" and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99"). Further, when the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure completes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the random number counter C4 per common map (value = "0 to 99"), and is updated every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23). It is updated once and repeatedly within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 35).

The value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23)), and when it is detected that the ball has passed through the ordinary symbol gate 67. At the same timing, the ball is stored in any one of the first to fourth areas provided in the ball storage area 203j of the RAM 203. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the normal pattern held ball execution area 203k in the order stored in the normal pattern held ball storage area 203j, and the value of the random number counter C4 per normal pattern stored in the normal pattern held ball execution area 203k is changed. Make a hit judgment against the target.

The value of the random number that becomes a hit for a normal symbol is set by a random number table for a normal symbol (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 for each gaming state (for example, "1/10" in a low probability state, 9/10) in the high probability state, and the value of the normal pattern winning counter C4 stored in the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203k is the random number value set by the normal pattern random number table. If it matches, it is determined to be a hit. Then, the normal symbol variation time table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is referred to according to the gaming state, and the variable display time of the normal symbol (for example, "3 seconds" or "0.5 seconds") is referred to. seconds") is set, and after the variable display time has elapsed on the normal symbol display device 83, a symbol "○" is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (normal symbol). Thereafter, the normal power win control table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is referred to according to the gaming state, and the opening time of the rotating plate of the normal power win 64c (for example, "0.5 During the opening time, the rotary plate rotates and the ball is configured to roll on the upper surface of the rotary plate.

On the other hand, if the value of the normal pattern counter C4 stored in the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203k does not match the random number value set by the normal pattern random number table (not shown), It is judged to be a failure. Then, a variable display time (for example, "3 seconds" or "0.5 seconds") is set by referring to the normal symbol variation time table (not shown) according to the gaming state, and the normal symbol display device 83 sets the variable display time. After the variable display time has elapsed, an "x" symbol is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (normal symbol).

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that variations in the probability of winning or failing the normal symbols, the variable display time of the normal symbols, and the opening time of the rotating plate of the normal electric winning combination 64c are different depending on each game state. . Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state" which does not have the "time saving function", the probability of winning or failing the normal symbols is low, the variable display time of the normal symbols is long, and the rotating board is The opening time is set to be short. In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" which has a "time function", the probability of winning or failing the normal symbol is high, the variable display time of the normal symbol is short, and the rotating plate is opened. The time is set to be long.

In this way, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with various counters, and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is provided with various tables. According to each of the tables 202a to 202g described above, the pachinko machine performs jackpot lottery, dynamic display and variable performance settings on the special symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, and display result lottery on the normal symbol display device 83. Ten main operations can be performed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 9, the RAM 203 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and input/output data. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as output (Input/Output; hereinafter abbreviated as "I/O") are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 35) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 34). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the non-maskable interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as "NMI") terminal of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power failure, etc. When the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 33) is immediately executed as processing at the time of a power outage.

The RAM 203 further includes a first held ball number counter 203a, a second held ball number counter 203b, a first held ball storage area 203d, a second held ball storage area 203e, a held ball execution area 203f, a probability variable area release timer 203g, and a probability variable area release timer 203g. It has at least a region valid flag 203h and a probability change transition flag 203i.

The first held ball counter 203a is configured to count the number of balls entering the first starting port 64a (hereinafter referred to as the number of balls entering the first starting port 64a) detected during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. The dynamic display of the first special symbol (the third symbol This is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of times of standby) of the variable performance of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol performed on the display device 81 up to four times.

This first reserved ball number counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (S913 in FIG. 34). Then, each time a starting winning into the first starting hole 64a is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) regarding the first special symbol increases, 1 is added to the maximum value "4" (Fig. 24 (See S203). On the other hand, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S308 in FIG. 25).

The second held ball counter 203b, like the first held ball number counter 203a, has a second start detected during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) that is periodically executed every "4 milliseconds". Dynamic display of the second special symbol performed on the special symbol display device 37 based on the starting winning in the mouth 64b (variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol performed on the third symbol display device 81) This is a counter that counts the number of balls held (number of times on standby) up to four times.

Like the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power is turned on (S913 in FIG. 34). Then, each time a starting winning into the second starting opening 64b is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) regarding the second special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (Fig. 24 (See S207). On the other hand, the second reserved ball counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is executed (see S305 in FIG. 25).

The value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (i.e., the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) or the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (i.e., the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is determined by the number of reserved balls command The audio lamp control device 113 is notified by (see S210 in FIG. 24). The held ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time a starting prize is detected and the first held ball number counter 203a or the second held ball number counter 203b is incremented by 1. This is a command.

The audio lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of balls held in the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main control device 110 by the number of balls commanded. can. Thereby, in the audio lamp control device 113, it is possible to manage the number of times the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) of each special symbol is held without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, each time a starting prize is detected, a command for the number of reserved balls is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, thereby dynamically displaying (variable) each special symbol managed in the audio lamp controller 113. Even if the number of balls on hold for the actual dynamic display (fluctuation effect) deviates from the number of balls on hold for the actual dynamic display (fluctuation effect) held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the number of balls on hold for the next received ball The deviation can be corrected using the pitch count command.

Note that the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display held pitch number command for notifying the number of held balls to the display control device 114 every time the number of held balls managed therein changes. The display control device 114 displays a reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by this display reserved pitch number command.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits a held ball number command to the audio lamp control device 113, in the held ball number command, the first held ball number counter 203a incremented by 1 or the Along with the above-mentioned starting prize that triggered the addition of not only the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b but also the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b, the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 9) It also includes the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained from the above.

That is, when there is a starting prize, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the main controller 110 are A number of commands are transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113.

In the audio lamp control device 113, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, which are transmitted by the number of reserved balls command, are used to execute a fluctuation performance based on the respective values. It reads ahead before executing the variable performance and determines how the variable performance will turn out (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what will be the variable time, etc.) before executing the variable performance. Then, based on the results of the pre-read judgment, it is possible to decide on the execution of various effects, and to determine the effect contents and execution timing of the "pending change notice".

In addition, the number of pending balls command indicating the number of pending balls for the variable performance and the command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 etc. may be transmitted separately. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, etc., which is different from the held ball number command, a held ball number command is generated at the timing of a ball entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, and the corresponding It may be configured to generate commands similar to the variation pattern command and stop type command based on ball entry (pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) and send them to the audio lamp control device 113. In this case, regarding the program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and the pre-stop type command, by reusing the program of the variation pattern command and the stop type command, it is possible to facilitate the creation of the program.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d contains the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of a starting prize into the first starting opening 64a. , a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), when the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first starting port 64a (starting winning), it reads the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. The first reserved ball storage area 203d has four reserved balls so that the data (each value of counters C1 to C3, CS1) corresponding to the first special symbol 1 starting winning can be stored (reserved) for up to four times. It has areas (first reservation areas 1 to 4) (see FIG. 9).

As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e contains the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of a starting prize into the second starting opening 64b. , a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), when the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the second starting port 64b (starting winning), it reads the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. The second reserved ball storage area 203e has four reserved balls so that the data (values of counters C1 to C3, CS1) corresponding to the first winning of the second special symbol can be stored (reserved) up to four times. It has areas (second reservation first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 9).

As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203f is used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that starts execution or is being executed, or the operation of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. This is a memory for storing data (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processes such as displaying targets and setting variable effects.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start executing the variable performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the MPU 201 performs the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. In order to execute processes such as dynamic display and variable performance settings of the device 81, data corresponding to each starting prize stored in the first held ball storage area 203d or the second held ball storage area 203e described above ( Among the values of counters C1 to C3, CS1), if data corresponding to a starting prize related to the second special symbol is stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the data corresponding to a starting winning of 1 of the data is stored. The data is shifted to this held ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, the data corresponding to the starting prize regarding the second special symbol is not stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the data corresponding to the starting winning regarding the first special symbol is stored in the first reserved ball storing area 203d. If so, the data corresponding to one starting prize of the data is shifted to this held ball execution area 203f. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display (variable performance) regarding the second special symbol is executed with priority, and the dynamic display (variable performance) regarding the first special symbol is executed with priority. It is configured to be executed on the condition that the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is not suspended. Note that a shift in the first embodiment refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 9 again, details of the first held ball storage area 203d, the second held ball storage area 203e, and the held ball execution area 203f will be described. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f are used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the operation of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform target display and setting of variable effects.

As described above, the jackpot random number counter used for the jackpot lottery is used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and for the dynamic display and variable effects settings of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. C1, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the jackpot type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the performance mode of the fluctuating performance, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used to determine the fluctuating pattern. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when a ball enters the first starting port 64a (starting winning), The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when a ball enters the second starting port 64b (starting winning).

The first holding ball storage area 203d is composed of four holding areas (first holding areas 1 to 4). The four holding areas (first holding areas 1 to 4) each include a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter storage area that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2. 203d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 that stores the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Further, the second holding ball storage area 203e is composed of four holding areas (second holding first to fourth areas), similar to the first holding ball storage area 203d. Each of the four holding areas (second holding first to fourth areas) includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter C2, similar to the first holding ball storage area 203d. A jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 for storing the value of , a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203e4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are provided. It is being

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1, 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2, 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 203d3, 203e3, and the fluctuation type counter storage areas 203d4, 203e4 are combined into one. Although these holding ball storage areas 203d and 203e are provided together, a plurality of holding ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

As described above, the first holding ball storage area 203d stores data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) obtained at the timing when a ball enters the first starting port 64a (starting winning) for up to four times. However, in that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four vacant areas (1st holding area 1st to 4th area). be remembered. In other words, the area with the smaller area number stores data corresponding to the starting winnings to the temporally oldest first starting opening 64a, and the data corresponding to the starting winnings to the temporally oldest first starting opening 64a are stored. Data corresponding to the starting winnings will be stored.

In addition, the second reserved ball storage area 203e stores up to four data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when a ball enters the second starting port 64b (starting winning). However, in that case, data will be stored in the vacant areas of the four holding areas (second holding areas 1st to 4th) in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). Ru. In other words, the area with the smaller area number stores the data corresponding to the winning start to the second starting port 64b that is older in time, and the second reservation first area stores the data that corresponds to the starting prize winning to the second starting port 64b that is the oldest in terms of time. Data corresponding to the starting winnings will be stored.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203f consists of only one area. Like the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, this reserved ball execution area 203f includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C2. A jackpot type counter storage area 203f2 for storing the value, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203f4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are provided. There is.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, the data (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) are stored in the second holding first area of the second holding ball storage area 203e. In this case, the data stored in the second holding first area is shifted to each area 203f1 to 203f4 of this holding ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, the MPU 201 determines that when it is time to start executing the variable effect, no data is stored in the second holding first area of the second holding ball storage area 203e, and the data is stored in the first holding ball storage area 203d. When data is stored in the first holding area, the data stored in the first holding area is shifted to each area 203f1 to 203f4 of this holding ball execution area 203f.

Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f is referred to in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 26), and a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data and the gaming state, and a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the lottery result is performed. and determine the stop type. In the special symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed under the control of the main controller 110 based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a fluctuation pattern command and a stop type command. Then, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

Details of data shifting will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable performance, it determines whether data is stored in the second reservation first area of the second reservation ball storage area 203e. As a result of the judgment, if it is determined that data is stored in the second reservation first area, the random value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reservation first area is used as the jackpot random number of the reservation ball execution area 203f. Shift to counter storage area 203f1. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reservation first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reservation first area is shifted, It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and shifts the random value in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second pending first area to the fluctuation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the shift of data to the held ball execution area 203f is completed, the second held first area becomes vacant, so it is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the second held ball storage area 203e. ) is shifted to an area (first to third) with one smaller area number. In the first embodiment, data is shifted only in the second holding areas (first to fourth) where data is stored (held) in the second holding ball storage area 203e.

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the second holding ball storage area 203e will be explained. For example, the value of the second held ball counter 203b when the start judgment of the variable effect is made is "4", and the data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the second held ball storage area 203e. Suppose that In this state, when the data in the second holding first area is shifted to the holding ball execution area 203f and the second holding first area becomes vacant, the MPU 201 transfers the data in the other areas (second to fourth). are shifted to the areas (first to third) whose area numbers are one smaller. That is, the data in the second reserved second area is shifted to the second reserved first area, the data in the second reserved third area is shifted to the second reserved second area, and the data in the second reserved fourth area is shifted. is shifted to the second holding area and the third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the second pending pitch counter 203b is "2" when the start judgment of the variable production is made, the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the second pending second area to the second pending ball counter 203b. Shift to 1 area and finish shifting the data. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the second holding areas (third to fourth) where no data is stored (held), so the number of data shifts is reduced. The control burden can be reduced.

Incidentally, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the second reservation area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area whose area number is one smaller. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (on hold) in the second holding area (second to fourth), making it easier to create a program.

On the other hand, if the MPU 201 determines that no data is stored in the second holding first area of the second holding ball storage area 203e when it is time to start executing the variable effect, then the MPU 201 It is determined whether data is stored in the first reservation first area of the ball storage area 203d. As a result of the judgment, if data is stored in the first reservation first area, the random value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reservation first area is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reservation ball execution area 203f. Shift to. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first reservation first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reservation first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2. It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and shifts the random value in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reservation first area to the fluctuation type counter storage area 203f4.

When the shift of the data to the held ball execution area 203f is completed, the first held ball storage area 203f becomes vacant, so it is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the first held ball storage area 203d. ) is shifted to an area (first to third) with one smaller area number. In the first embodiment, data is shifted only in the first holding areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held) in the first holding ball storage area 203d.

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d will be explained. For example, the value of the first held ball counter 203a when the start judgment of the variable production is made is "4", and the data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the first held ball storage area 203d. Suppose that In this state, when the data in the first holding first area is shifted to the holding ball execution area 203f and the first holding first area becomes vacant, the MPU 201 transfers the data in the other areas (second to fourth). are shifted to the areas (first to third) whose area numbers are one smaller. That is, the data in the first reserved second area is shifted to the first reserved first area, the data in the first reserved third area is shifted to the first reserved second area, and the data in the first reserved fourth area is shifted. is shifted to the first reservation third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the first pending pitch counter 203a is "2" when the start judgment of the variable performance is made, the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the first pending second area to the first pending pitch number counter 203a. Shift to 1 area and finish shifting the data. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the first holding areas (third to fourth) where no data is stored (held), so the number of data shifts is reduced. The control burden can be reduced.

Incidentally, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first reservation area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area whose area number is one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether data is stored (on hold) in the first holding area (second to fourth), making it easier to create a program.

Here, details of the standard ball holding area 203j and the standard ball holding area 203k will be described. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203j and the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203k are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the normal symbol winning lottery, the setting of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83, etc.

The normal figure holding ball storage area 203j is a memory for storing the normal figure counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of passage of a ball to the normal symbol gate 67. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 67 during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), it acquires the value of the normal symbol per-counter C4 from the counter buffer 203c, and displays the normal symbol reserved ball. It is stored in the storage area 203j. The normal figure holding ball storage area 203j has four holding areas (normal figure holding ball storage area 203j) so that the data (value of the counter C4 per normal symbol) corresponding to one held ball of the normal symbol can be stored (reserved) for up to four times. (Refer to FIG. 9).

The normal symbol holding ball execution area 203k is a memory for storing data (the value of the random number counter C4 per common symbol) to be referenced in the normal symbol winning lottery and variable display processing that starts execution or is currently being executed. It is.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start executing the variable display of the normal symbol, the MPU 201 displays the above-mentioned normal symbol reserved ball in order to execute processes such as winning lottery of the normal symbol and setting of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. Among the data (value of random number counter C4 per normal figure) stored in the storage area 203j, one piece of data is shifted to this normal figure holding ball execution area 203k. Note that a shift in the first embodiment refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

As described above, the normal symbol random number counter C4 used for the normal symbol winning lottery is used to set the normal symbol winning lottery and the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. The normal figure holding ball storage area 203j stores the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67.

In addition, as described above, the data (the value of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol) obtained at the timing when the ball passes the normal symbol gate 67 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203j for up to four times. In that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the four vacant reservation areas (general figure reservation areas 1 to 4). In other words, the smaller the area number is, the older the data corresponding to the passing of the ball to the normal symbol gate 67 is stored. Data corresponding to the passage of the ball will be stored.

On the other hand, the general ball holding ball execution area 203k consists of only one area. In this normal pattern held ball execution area 203k, similarly to the normal pattern held ball storage area 203j, a random number counter storage area per normal pattern (not shown) for storing the value of the random number counter C4 per normal pattern is provided. .

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to execute the variable display of the normal symbols, it transfers the data stored in the first area of the normal pattern holding ball storage area 203j to the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203k. shift.

Then, the data shifted to the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203k is referred to in the normal pattern fluctuation process (see S111 in FIG. 23), and a winning lottery is performed based on the reference data and the gaming state, and the variable display Decide on the content. In the normal symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed based on the determined content under the control of the main controller 110.

Details of data shifting will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable display of the normal symbols, the MPU 201 sets the random number value in the random number counter storage area (not shown) per normal symbol in the first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203j. is shifted to the random number counter storage area (not shown) per normal figure in the normal figure held ball execution area 203k.

Then, when the shift of the data to the general ball holding ball execution area 203k is completed, the first general ball holding area becomes vacant, so the data is stored in each area (second to fourth) of the general ball holding area 203j. Shift processing is performed to move the (held) data to areas (first to third) where the area number is one smaller. In the first embodiment, data is shifted only for the normal pattern holding areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held) in the normal pattern holding ball storage area 203j.

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the regular ball holding ball storage area 203j will be explained. For example, when the determination to start variable display of normal symbols is made, the number of normal symbols reserved is 4, and the data is stored in all areas (1st to 4th) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203j. Suppose there is. In this state, the data in the first area for holding the general ball is shifted to the holding ball execution area 203k, and when the first area for holding the general ball becomes vacant, the MPU 201 transfers the data to the other areas (second to fourth). data is shifted to the area (first to third) whose area number is one smaller. That is, the data in the second area for general reservations is shifted to the first area for general reservations, the data in the third area for general reservations is shifted to the second area for general reservations, and the data in the fourth area for general reservations are shifted to the second area for general reservations. is shifted to the 3rd general reservation area.

Further, for example, if the number of normal symbols reserved when the start judgment of the variable display of ordinary symbols is made is 2, the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the ordinary symbol reservation second area to the ordinary symbol reservation first area. Shift to finish shifting the data. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the general drawing reservation areas (third to fourth) where no data is stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts is reduced. The control burden can be reduced.

Note that, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the general drawing reservation area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (on hold) in the common drawing holding areas (second to fourth), and therefore it is possible to easily create a program.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation will be continued. The probability variable area opening timer 203g provided in the RAM 203 is a timer for determining the opening period of the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a. The variable probability region open timer 203g is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S913 in FIG. 34). Then, in the opening setting process of each round in the jackpot (see FIG. 29), when it is determined that it is the opening timing of the probability variable area 75 (for example, the first round of the jackpot type "probability variation A"), the release of the probability variable area 75 is determined. A predetermined value (for example, "7500") corresponding to the time is set (see S438 in FIG. 29), and accordingly, the probability variable area solenoid 75b is set on (see S439 in FIG. 29). When the variable probability region solenoid 75b is set from OFF to ON, the variable variable region opening/closing plate 75a changes from the protruding state to the retracted state, and the variable variable region 75 becomes in the open state.

Thereafter, on the premise that a value is set in the probability variable area opening timer 203g, a jackpot is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) that is executed periodically every "4 milliseconds". Each time the process during release (see FIG. 30) is executed, the value of the variable probability region release timer 203g is subtracted by 1 (see S442 in FIG. 30). Then, when the value of the probability variable region opening timer 203g becomes "0", it is assumed that the opening time of the probability variable region 75 has elapsed, and the probability variable region solenoid 75b is set to OFF (see S444 in FIG. 30). When the variable probability region solenoid 75b is set from on to off, the variable variable region opening/closing plate 75a changes from the retracted state to the protruded state, and the variable variable region 75 enters the closed state.

The probability variable area valid flag 203h is a flag for indicating that the probability variable area 75 is set to be valid in an on state. In the first embodiment, when a ball is detected by the variable probability area switch 75c in a situation where the variable probability area valid flag 203h is set to ON, the variable probability transition flag 203i, which will be described later, is set to ON, and after the jackpot ends, " The system is configured so that a "probability fluctuating state" occurs.

This probability variable area valid flag 203h is set to OFF as an initial value when the power of the Pachinko machine 10 is turned on. When a special symbol jackpot is won, based on the jackpot type of the jackpot, at the start of each round during the jackpot, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to activate the probability variable area 75 as the probability variable area 75 is opened. When it is determined that it is the timing to enable the variable probability region 75, the variable probability region validity flag 203h is set to ON (see S441 in FIG. 29).

Specifically, the probability variable area valid flag 203h is turned on at the start of opening of the probability variable area 75 in the jackpot types "Latent probability variation A", "Latent probability variation B", "Latent probability variation C", and "Probability variation A". is set to In addition, all rounds of jackpot types other than the above-mentioned jackpot types, that is, all rounds are set to OFF even when the probability variable area 75 is closed or when the probability variable area 75 is opened. In addition, when the timing to disable the probability variable area 75 comes while the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are being opened (for example, when 5 seconds have passed since the variable winning devices 72 and 74 started opening, or when the variable winning device 72, 74 are closed, or when the jackpot ends), this variable probability area valid flag 203h is set to OFF (see S454 in FIG. 30).

The probability variation transition flag 203i is a flag for indicating that a "probability variation state" occurs in the on state. This probability change transition flag 203i is set to OFF as an initial value when the power of the Pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, during a jackpot, when the probability variable area valid flag 203h is set to on, a ball is detected by the probability variable area switch 75c (S446 in FIG. 30: Yes), and the probability variable transition flag 203i, which is in the off state, is turned on. (See S447 in FIG. 30). After that, in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 32), when the probability variation transition flag 203i is turned on and the "probability variation state" is set, that is, when the value of the ST counter described later is set to "100". (see S472 in FIG. 30), the probability change transition flag 203i is set to OFF (see S473 in FIG. 32).

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. A payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a special symbol display device 37, a normal symbol display device 83, a normal symbol holding lamp 84, and an attacker unit 71 are connected to the input/output port 205. .

The attacker unit 71 includes, as a drive device, a first large winning opening solenoid 72b for opening and closing the first opening/closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 in a forward direction centering on the lower side of the first opening/closing plate 72a, and a second variable winning device 74. A second big prize opening solenoid 74b that opens and closes the second opening/closing plate 74a of the second opening/closing plate 74a in the forward direction as an axis, and a variable area solenoid 75b that opens and closes the variable area opening/closing plate 75a of the variable area 75 are provided. ing. In addition to the solenoids 72b, 74b, and 75b described above, other solenoids 209 for driving other drive devices (not shown) are connected to the input/output port 205. and send various commands and control signals to these devices.

In addition, the input/output port 205 includes a first big winning opening switch 72c as a detection device, which is provided in the first variable winning device 72 of the attacker unit 71 and detects a ball that has won in the first variable winning device 72. , a second big winning opening switch 74c provided in the second variable winning device 74 of the attacker unit 71 to detect a winning ball in the second variable winning device 74; Then, the probability variable area switch 75c detects the ball passing through the probability variable area 75, the discharge switch 76a detects the ball passing through the discharge passage 76 of the attacker unit 71, and the out port 66 (see FIG. 3). An out switch 66a for detecting a ball, other switches 208 consisting of a switch group, a sensor group, etc. (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253, which will be described later, provided in the power supply 115 are connected, and the MPU 201 outputs output from the various switches 208. and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 14 to 22, the ball detection mode in each round of each jackpot type and the opening/closing status of the first variable winning device 72 (i.e., the first opening/closing plate 72a that drives the opening/closing (on or off of the big winning port solenoid 72b), the detection status of the ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 (i.e., the on or off of the first big winning port switch 72c), and the opening/closing of the second variable winning device 74 situation (i.e., ON or OFF of the second big prize opening solenoid 74b that opens and closes the second opening/closing plate 74a) and the detection situation of the ball flowing into the second variable winning device 74 (i.e., the second big prize opening switch 74c) on or off), the status of the interval period (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "interval"), which is the period during which both the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are closed, and the probability variable area 75 (i.e., ON or OFF of the variable variable area solenoid 75b that drives the variable variable area opening/closing plate 75a to open/close), the state of the inflow of the ball into the variable variable area 75 (i.e., the ON or OFF of the variable variable area switch 75c), The state of transition to the "probability variation state" (that is, whether the probability variation transition flag 203i is turned on or off) will be explained.

In addition, in FIGS. 14 to 22, for convenience of explanation, the setting status of whether the variable probability region 75 is enabled or disabled (that is, whether the variable probability region valid flag 203h is on or off) is always set when the variable probability region solenoid 75b is turned on. A case will be described in which, while the probability variable area valid flag 203h is on, that is, while the probability variable area 75 is open, the probability variable transition flag 203i is turned on due to the detection of a ball by the probability variable area switch 75c.

First, with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15, the manner in which balls are detected in each round of the jackpot type "time saving A" will be described. FIG. 14 shows the operation timing of the first big winning hole solenoid 72b, the second big winning hole solenoid 74b, and the probability variable area solenoid 75b in each round of the first special symbol jackpot type "time saving A", and the first big winning hole switch. 72c is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of a ball in the second big prize opening switch 74c and the variable probability area switch 75c, and the setting timing of the interval and variable probability transition flag 203i. In addition, FIG. 15 shows the operation timings of the first big winning opening solenoid 72b, the second big winning opening solenoid 74b, and the probability variable area solenoid 75b from the first round to the third round of the jackpot type "time saving A" of the first special symbol. , the timing of the interval that is the closing period of the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74, and the ball that won the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 reaches the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a. The relationship between each time period, the ball detection timing in the first big winning opening switch 72c, the second big winning opening switch 74c and the probability variable area switch 75c, and the setting timing of the probability variable transition flag 203i is schematically shown. This is a timing chart. Hereinafter, while explaining each timing in FIG. 14, detailed time will be explained with reference to FIG. 15 as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 14, in the jackpot type "time saving A", a total of five rounds of jackpot games are executed, and at the start of each round, the opening pattern "X1" is used to select the first jackpot solenoid 72b or the second jackpot. The mouth solenoid 74b (hereinafter, the first big winning hole solenoid 72b and the second big winning hole solenoid 74b may be collectively referred to as "big winning hole solenoid 72b, 74b") is turned on, and the corresponding first big winning hole solenoid 74b is turned on. The opening/closing plate 72a or the second opening/closing plate 74a (hereinafter, the first opening/closing plate 72a and the second opening/closing plate 74a may be collectively referred to as "opening/closing plates 72a, 74a") is opened. That is, in the jackpot type "time saving A", the first big winning hole solenoid 72b is turned on and the first opening/closing plate 72a is opened in odd rounds, and the second big winning hole solenoid 74b is turned on and the second opening/closing is opened in even rounds. Plate 74a is opened. Then, in each round, under a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed since opening (see Max t1 in FIG. 15). ), or the first big winning opening switch 72c or the second big winning opening switch 74c (hereinafter, the first big winning opening switch 72c and the second big winning opening switch 74c are collectively referred to as "big winning opening switch 72c"), If one of the following events is established, the winning port solenoids 72b, 74b are turned off and the opening/closing plates 72a, 74a are turned off. The game is closed and one round ends.

In addition, in the jackpot type "time saving A", the opening/closing pattern of the probability variable area 75 is "A". Therefore, in the first round, in synchronization with the turning on of the first big prize opening solenoid 72b, the probability variable area solenoid 75b is turned on momentarily (for example, "50ms") as an initial operation, and the probability variable area solenoid 75b is turned on normally. It is configured so that it can be recognized whether or not it is driven. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, even if the variable probability region solenoid 75b is turned on for "50 ms", the opening time of the variable variable region opening/closing plate 75a is extremely short; During the initial motion period, the ball is configured to be difficult to enter into the variable probability region 75 (the same applies to each round hereinafter).

In this initial operation, if the variable probability region solenoid 75b does not drive normally, error processing such as predetermined error notification (for example, display of an error message such as "variable winning device 72, 74 drive abnormality has occurred") is executed. However, in response to the error processing, the current gaming state is backed up and the progress of the game is stopped. In this way, by stopping the progress of the game due to an error, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is disadvantaged, such as not being given the "probability fluctuating state". In addition, the trigger for starting the initial operation of the variable probability region solenoid 75b is not when the big winning opening solenoids 72b and 74b are turned on, but when the first count ball is detected by the big winning opening switches 72c and 74c. It may be configured as follows.

After the initial operation of the variable variable area solenoid 75b, the variable variable area solenoid 75b is once turned off for a predetermined period of time (for example, "50 ms"), and then the variable variable area solenoid 75b is turned off for a certain period of time (in the first embodiment, " 3000ms") is turned on (see t2 in FIG. 15. t2 = "3000ms"). In addition, the trigger for turning off the probability variable area solenoid 75b is not after a certain period of time after the big winning opening solenoids 72b and 74b are turned on, but after the big winning opening. It may be configured to be executed when a predetermined count (for example, the third count) of a ball is detected by the switches 72c and 74c.

At this time, since the opening pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 of the jackpot type "time saving A" is "X1", in the first round when the probability variable area 75 is opened, from the placement position of the probability variable area 75 The ball is set to flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 which is far away. As mentioned above, the winning ball in the first variable winning device 72 travels through the first big winning opening detection passage 72d (see "front right" in FIG. 15) for about 0.8 seconds (see t3 in FIG. 15. t3= "800ms".), and flows down the passage 72e after detecting the first big prize opening (see "Right rear" in FIG. 15) in about 2.5 seconds (see t4 in FIG. 15. t4 = "2500ms"). It is configured to flow downward. That is, even when a ball flows in from the first variable winning device 72, it takes at least about 3.3 seconds (i.e., "3300 ms") or more until the ball reaches the position where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is placed. It takes. Therefore, "3.1 seconds" (initial operation "50 ms" + closing time after initial operation "50 ms" + opening time of probability variable area 75 "3000 ms" = "3100 ms") in synchronization with the turning on of the first big prize opening solenoid 72b ), while the variable probability region solenoid 75b is turned on, the ball that has flowed in from the first variable winning device 72 cannot reach the position where the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a is provided. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot type "time saving A", although the probability variable area 75 is opened, the ball cannot flow into the probability variable area 75 and the ball is not detected by the probability variable area switch 75c, so the probability variable transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off (see FIGS. 14 and 15).

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "time saving A", the second big prize opening solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined time (see Max t1 in FIG. 15), and the second variable winning device 74 close to the placement position of the probability variable area 75 is turned on. A ball may flow into the attacker unit 71 from the outside. As mentioned above, the winning ball in the second variable winning device 74 travels through the second big winning opening detection passage 74d (see "front left" in FIG. 15) for about 0.3 seconds (see t5 in FIG. 15. t5= "300ms"), and flows down the passage 74e after detecting the second big prize opening (see "left rear" in FIG. 15) in about 0.7 seconds (see t6 in FIG. 15. t6 = "700ms"). It is configured to flow downward. That is, when a ball flows in from the second variable winning device 74, it takes at least about 1.0 seconds (i.e., t5+t6="1000ms") or more for the ball to reach the position where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided. However, it is configured to be able to reach the position where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided within about 3.0 seconds.

However, since the opening pattern of the probability variable area 75 of the jackpot type "time saving A" is "A", the probability variable area solenoid 75b is not turned on in the second round of the jackpot type "time saving A", and the ball enters the probability variable area 75. It is set so that no inflow is possible. That is, although a ball can flow in from the second variable winning device 74 near the placement position of the variable probability region 75, since the variable probability region 75 is not open, the ball cannot flow into the variable probability region 75, and the variable probability region switch Since the ball is not detected by the ball 75c, the probability change transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off (see FIGS. 14 and 15).

Here, between the second round and the third round in the jackpot type "time saving A", the first variable winning prize is set as a waiting time for the winning ball in the attacker unit 71 to be ejected outside the attacking unit 71. It is configured such that an interval in which both the device 72 and the second variable prize winning device 74 are not released is executed for a predetermined time (see t7 in FIG. 15; in the first embodiment, "2 seconds"). That is, in the second round, the next round cannot be executed until the ball that enters the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 passes through at least the position where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is arranged. has been done. Specifically, the time required for the winning ball of the second variable winning device 74 to reach the placement position of the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a (that is, t5+t6=“1000ms”) or longer (that is, t5+t6<t7) t7) is set as the interval time.

This is because the third round is started in a situation where the winning ball from the second variable winning device 74 is present in the attacker unit 71 in the second round, and in synchronization with the start of the third round, the probability variable area solenoid 75b If you turn on, the winning ball from the second variable winning device 74 in the second round will flow into the open probability variable area 75 in the third round, causing an unintended "probability variable state". There is a possibility that this could happen.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "time saving A" in which the "probability variation state" cannot occur, an interval is executed before the start of the middle round (i.e., the third round) of the jackpot in which the probability variation area 75 can be opened, and the attacker unit After making a state in which no ball exists in the area 71, a round is executed in which the variable probability area 75 is opened. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an unintended "probability fluctuation state" from being imparted. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a gaming value as expected in the gaming specifications, and to prevent unexpected losses from occurring at the gaming parlor.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the performance mode after the jackpot is determined by the player at least during the period in which the interval is being executed (for example, the period including the second round, the interval, and the third round). The system is configured so that a "character selection" effect is executed. By executing the "character selection" effect during the interval period, the player's attention is drawn to the "character selection" effect, and the degree of attention to the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 is relatively reduced. This makes it difficult to detect that an interval is being executed. Details of this "character selection" performance will be described later.

Next, after the end of the interval time, in the third round of the jackpot type "time saving A", the first jackpot solenoid 72b is turned on for a predetermined time (see Max t1 in FIG. 15) and is far from the placement position of the probability variable area 75. The ball is set to flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72. As in the first round, it takes at least about 3.3 seconds (i.e., t3+t4="3300ms") for the ball that wins in the first variable winning device 72 to reach the position where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is placed. It takes more than that. Therefore, "3.1 seconds" (initial operation "50 ms" + closing time after initial operation "50 ms" + opening time of probability variable area 75 "3000 ms" = "3100 ms") in synchronization with the turning on of the first big prize opening solenoid 72b ), while the variable probability region solenoid 75b is turned on, the ball that has flowed in from the first variable winning device 72 cannot reach the position where the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a is provided. Therefore, even in the third round of the jackpot type "time saving A", although the probability variable area 75 is opened, the ball cannot flow into the probability variable area 75 and the ball is not detected by the probability variable area switch 75c, so the probability variable transition flag is set. 203i remains off without being turned on (see FIGS. 14 and 15).

In addition, in the fourth and fifth rounds of the jackpot type "time saving A", the variable probability area solenoid 75b is not turned on, and the setting is such that the ball cannot flow into the variable probability area 75. That is, even if a ball enters from either of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, since the variable probability area 75 is not open, the ball cannot flow into the variable probability area 75, and the ball is not detected by the variable probability area switch 75c. , the probability change transition flag 203i remains off without being turned on (see FIGS. 14 and 15).

Therefore, in the jackpot type "time saving A", even if a ball flows into the attacker unit 71, the ball will be placed at the location of the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a at the timing when the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a is opened. It is configured so that it does not arrive. Therefore, since a ball is not detected by the variable probability region switch 75c, the variable probability transition flag 203i also remains off, and the configuration is configured so that the "probability variable state" cannot occur after the end of the jackpot type "time saving A". .

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the manner in which balls are detected in each round of the jackpot type "time saving B" will be described. FIG. 16 shows the operation timing of the first big winning hole solenoid 72b, the second big winning hole solenoid 74b, and the probability variable area solenoid 75b, and the first big winning hole switch in each round of the first special symbol jackpot type "time saving B". 72c is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of a ball in the second big prize opening switch 74c and the variable probability area switch 75c, and the setting timing of the interval and variable probability transition flag 203i.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the jackpot type "time saving B", a total of five rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoids 72b and 74b are turned on in the opening pattern "X2", The corresponding opening/closing plates 72a, 74a are opened. That is, in the jackpot type "time saving B", the second big winning hole solenoid 74b is turned on and the second opening/closing plate 74a is opened in odd rounds, and the first big winning hole solenoid 72b is turned on and the first opening/closing is opened in even rounds. Plate 72a is opened. Then, in each round, a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, one of the following events is satisfied: ``30 seconds'' have passed at most since the opening, or 10 balls have been detected by the big prize opening switches 72c and 74c). In this case, the big prize opening solenoids 72b, 74b are turned off, the opening/closing plates 72a, 74a are closed, and one round ends.

In addition, in the jackpot type "time saving B", the opening/closing pattern of the variable prize winning devices 72, 74 is "X2". For this reason, first, in the first round of the jackpot type "time saving B", the second big prize opening solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined period of time, and the ball is sent from the second variable winning device 74 near the position of the probability variable area 75 to the attacker unit. 71. As described above, the winning ball in the second variable winning device 74 flows down the path 74d before detecting the second big winning hole in about 0.3 seconds, and flows down the path 74e after detecting the second big winning hole in about 0.3 seconds. It is configured to flow down in 7 seconds. That is, when a ball flows in from the second variable winning device 74, it takes at least about 1.0 seconds (i.e., t5+t6="1000ms") or more for the ball to reach the position where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided. However, it is configured to be able to reach the position where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided within about 3.0 seconds.

However, since the opening pattern of the probability variable area 75 of the jackpot type "time saving B" is "B", the probability variable area solenoid 75b is not turned on in the first round of the jackpot type "time saving B", and the ball enters the probability variable area 75. It is set so that no inflow is possible. That is, although a ball can flow in from the second variable winning device 74 near the placement position of the variable probability region 75, since the variable probability region 75 is not open, the ball cannot flow into the variable probability region 75, and the variable probability region switch Since the ball is not detected by the ball 75c, the probability change transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off (see FIG. 16).

Next, between the first round and the second round in the jackpot type "Time Saving B", the waiting time for the ball that has entered the attacker unit 71 to be ejected to the outside of the attacking unit 71 is set as the waiting time for the jackpot type "Time Saving A". '', the configuration is such that an interval in which both the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are not released is executed for a predetermined time. That is, in the first round, the configuration is such that the next round cannot be executed until the ball that enters the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 passes through at least the placement position of the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a. has been done. Specifically, the interval time is set to be longer than the time required for the winning ball to arrive at the position of the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a.

Next, after the interval time ends, in the second round of the jackpot type "time saving B", the first big prize opening solenoid 72b is turned on for a predetermined period of time, and the ball is released from the first variable winning device 72 far from the placement position of the variable probability area 75. is set to flow into the attacker unit 71. The winning ball in the first variable winning device 72 takes at least about 3.3 seconds or more for the ball to reach the placement position of the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a.

Here, since the opening/closing pattern of the probability variable area 75 of the jackpot type "time saving B" is "B", the probability variable area 75 is opened in synchronization with the opening of the first opening/closing plate 72a in the second round. Therefore, while the probability variable area solenoid 75b is turned on for "3.1 seconds" in synchronization with the turning on of the first big prize opening solenoid 72b, the ball that flows in from the first variable prize winning device 72 is turned on. It is impossible to reach the position where the variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided. Therefore, in the second round of the jackpot type "time saving B", although the probability variable area 75 is opened, the ball cannot flow into the probability variable area 75 and the ball is not detected by the probability variable area switch 75c, so the probability variable transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off (see FIG. 16).

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "time saving B", the second big winning opening solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined period of time, and the ball enters the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 near the position where the probability variable area 75 is installed. There may be an influx. As described above, the winning ball in the second variable winning device 74 is configured to flow down in the second big winning opening pre-detection passage 74d and to flow down in the second big winning opening detection passage 74e. That is, when a ball flows in from the second variable winning device 74, it takes at least about 1.0 seconds or more for the ball to reach the position where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is placed, but within about 3.0 seconds. is configured to be able to reach the location where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided.

However, since the opening pattern of the probability variable area 75 of the jackpot type "time saving B" is "B", the probability variable area solenoid 75b is not turned on in the third round of the jackpot type "time saving B", and the ball enters the probability variable area 75. It is set so that no inflow is possible. That is, although a ball can flow in from the second variable winning device 74 near the placement position of the variable probability region 75, since the variable probability region 75 is not open, the ball cannot flow into the variable probability region 75, and the variable probability region switch Since the ball is not detected by the ball 75c, the probability change transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off (see FIG. 16).

Here, in the third round of the jackpot type "time saving B", the probability variable area solenoid 75b is not turned on, so no matter how the variable winning devices 72, 74 are opened, the probability variable area solenoid 75b is not turned on in the third round. Balls cannot flow in. Therefore, there is no need to provide an interval between the second round and the third round, and after the first variable winning device 72 of the second round is closed, the second variable winning device 72 of the third round is immediately opened without an interval. 74 is released. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the time required for a jackpot and quickly provide gaming value to the player.

On the other hand, between the third and fourth rounds in the jackpot type "time saving B", the first variable winning device is used as a waiting time for the winning ball to be ejected from the attacking unit 71 to the outside of the attacking unit 71. 72 and the second variable prize winning device 74 are configured such that an interval in which both the variable prize winning device 72 and the second variable prize winning device 74 are not released is executed for a predetermined time. Note that this interval time is equivalent to the interval time of the jackpot type "time saving A".

Next, after the interval time ends, in the fourth round of the jackpot type "time saving B", the first big prize opening solenoid 72b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the ball is released from the first variable winning device 72 far from the placement position of the variable probability area 75. is set so that it flows into the attacker unit 71. As in the second round, it takes at least about 3.3 seconds for the winning ball to arrive at the position of the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a. Therefore, while the probability variable area solenoid 75b is turned on for "3.1 seconds" in synchronization with the turning on of the first big prize opening solenoid 72b, the ball that flows in from the first variable prize winning device 72 is turned on. It is impossible to reach the position where the variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided. Therefore, even in the fourth round of the jackpot type "time saving B", although the probability variable area 75 is opened, the ball cannot flow into the probability variable area 75 and the ball is not detected by the probability variable area switch 75c, so the probability variable transition flag is set. 203i remains off without being turned on (see FIG. 16).

In the fifth round of the jackpot type "time saving B", the variable probability area solenoid 75b is not turned on, and the setting is such that the ball cannot flow into the variable probability area 75. That is, even if a ball enters from either of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, since the variable probability area 75 is not open, the ball cannot flow into the variable probability area 75, and the ball is not detected by the variable probability area switch 75c. , the probability change transition flag 203i remains off without being turned on (see FIG. 16).

Therefore, in the jackpot type "time saving B", even if a ball flows into the attacker unit 71, the ball will be placed at the position of the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a at the timing when the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a is opened. It is configured so that it does not arrive. Therefore, as with the jackpot type "time saver A", since no ball is detected by the probability variable area switch 75c, the probability change transition flag 203i also remains off, and after the jackpot type "time saver B" ends, the "probability variable state" is changed. Constructed so that it cannot occur.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18, the manner in which balls are detected in each round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" will be described. FIG. 17 shows the operation timings of the first big prize opening solenoid 72b, the second big prize opening solenoid 74b, and the probability variable area solenoid 75b in each round of the first special symbol jackpot type "latent probability variation A", and the first big winning prize. It is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of a ball in the opening switch 72c, the second big prize opening switch 74c, and the variable probability area switch 75c, and the setting timing of the interval and variable probability transition flag 203i. Moreover, FIG. 18 shows the operation of the first big winning opening solenoid 72b, the second big winning opening solenoid 74b, and the probability variable area solenoid 75b from the first round to the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" of the first special symbol. The timing, the timing of the interval which is the closing period of the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74, and the timing of the winning ball of the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 until the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a. The relationship between the time until reaching the ball, the detection timing of the ball in the first big winning opening switch 72c, the second big winning opening switch 74c and the variable probability area switch 75c, and the setting timing of the variable probability transition flag 203i is schematically shown. This is the timing chart shown in FIG. Hereinafter, while explaining each timing in FIG. 17, detailed time will be explained with reference to FIG. 18 as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", a total of five rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and the jackpot solenoids 72b and 74b are turned on in the opening pattern "X1" at the start of each round. Then, the corresponding opening/closing plates 72a, 74a are opened. That is, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", the first big winning hole solenoid 72b is turned on and the first opening/closing plate 72a is opened in the odd numbered rounds, and the second big winning hole solenoid 74b is turned on and the first opening/closing plate 72a is opened in the even numbered rounds. The second opening/closing plate 74a is opened. Then, in each round, similar to the jackpot type "time saving A", etc., a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed since the opening (see Max t1 in FIG. 18. Max t1 < "30000ms"). , or 10 balls are detected by the big winning opening switches 72c and 74c), the big winning opening solenoids 72b and 74b are turned off and the opening/closing plates 72a and 74a are closed, The first round ends.

Furthermore, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72, 74 is "X1". For this reason, first, in the first round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", the first big prize opening solenoid 72b is turned on for a predetermined period of time, and the ball is released from the first variable winning device 72 far from the placement position of the probability variable area 75. It may flow into the attacker unit 71.

As described above, the winning ball in the first variable winning device 72 flows down the first big winning opening detection passage 72d in about 0.8 seconds (see t3 in FIG. 18), and the first big winning opening is detected. It is configured to flow down the rear passage 72e in about 2.5 seconds (see t4 in FIG. 18). That is, when a ball flows in from the first variable prize winning device 72, it takes at least about 3.3 seconds (i.e., t3+t4="3300ms") for the ball to reach the position where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided. . At this time, since the opening/closing pattern of the probability variable area 75 of the jackpot type "Latent probability variation A" is "B", the probability variable area 75 is not opened in the first round of the jackpot type "Latent probability variation A". Therefore, the ball cannot enter the variable probability region 75 and the ball is not detected by the variable probability region switch 75c, so the variable probability shift flag 203i remains off without being turned on (see FIGS. 17 and 18).

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", the second big prize opening solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined time (see Max t1 in FIG. 18), and a second variable prize that is close to the placement position of the probability variable area 75 is generated. From the device 74 balls can flow into the attacker unit 71 . As mentioned above, the winning ball in the second variable winning device 74 travels through the second big winning opening detection passage 74d (see "front left" in FIG. 18) for about 0.3 seconds (see t5 in FIG. 18. t5= "300ms".), and flows down the passage 74e after detecting the second big prize opening (see "left rear" in Fig. 18) in about 0.7 seconds (see t6 in Fig. 18. t6 = "700ms"). It is configured to flow downward. That is, when a ball flows in from the second variable winning device 74, it takes at least about 1.0 seconds (i.e., t5+t6="1000ms") or more for the ball to reach the position where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided. However, it is configured to be able to reach the position where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided within about 3.0 seconds.

Here, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", the opening/closing pattern of the probability variable area 75 is "B". Then, in the second round, the probability variable area solenoid 75b performs an initial operation in synchronization with the turning on of the second big prize opening solenoid 74b, and then the probability variable area solenoid 75b operates for a certain period of time (in the first embodiment, 3000ms") is turned on (see t2 in FIG. 18. t2 = "3000ms"). Therefore, "3.1 seconds" (initial operation "50 ms" + closing time after initial operation "50 ms" + opening time of probability variable area 75 "3000 ms" = "3100 ms") in synchronization with turning on of the second big prize opening solenoid 74b ), while the variable probability region solenoid 75b is turned on, the ball flowing from the second variable winning device 74 can reach the position where the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a is provided (t5+t6<t2). Therefore, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", the ball that flowed into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 while the probability variable area 75 was being opened could flow into the probability variable area 75. , is detected by the variable probability region switch 75c, and the variable probability shift flag 203i is set to ON in accordance with the detection (see FIGS. 17 and 18).

Further, no interval time is set between the first and second rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A". Therefore, in the first round, immediately after the first variable winning device 72 is closed, the second variable winning device 74 in the second round is opened, and along with the opening, the probability variable area 75 is also opened. . That is, in the first round, in a state where the winning ball (for example, the 10th count) that achieved the closing condition of the first variable winning device 72 remains in the attacker unit 71, the probability variable area 75 is opened in the second round. will be held. Therefore, the winning ball that won in the first round is configured to be able to flow into the variable probability area 75 that is opened in the second round.

In this way, in the case of a jackpot type that can give a "probability fluctuation state", by not setting the interval time before the start of the round in which the probability variable area 75 is opened, the attacker can It becomes possible to cause the winning ball in the unit 71 to flow into the probability variable area 75. As a result, in a jackpot type that can be given a "probability fluctuation state", it is possible to more reliably make it easier to cause the ball to flow into the probability fluctuation region 75, and it is possible to accurately generate the "probability fluctuation state".

Next, between the second and third rounds in the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 both operate at the same timing as in the jackpot type "time saving A". It is configured such that the unreleased interval is executed for a predetermined time (see t7 in FIG. 18; in the first embodiment, "2 seconds"). That is, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are opened and closed in the same manner as the opening and closing manner of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 in the jackpot type "time saving A". This makes it impossible to determine the type of jackpot based solely on the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize which type of jackpot the player has won, and which gaming state It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that makes the player guess whether he or she is playing the game.

Next, after the interval period has elapsed, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", the first big winning opening solenoid 72b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the first variable winning device 72 which is far from the placement position of the probability variable area 75 is turned on. A ball may flow into the attacker unit 71 from the outside. As described above, the winning ball in the first variable winning device 72 flows down the first big winning opening detection path 72d in about 0.8 seconds (see t3 in FIG. 18), and the first big winning opening is detected. It is configured to flow down the rear passage 72e in about 2.5 seconds (see t4 in FIG. 18). That is, when a ball flows in from the first variable winning device 72, it takes at least about 3.3 seconds (i.e., t3+t4="3300ms") for the ball to reach the position where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided. . At this time, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", since the variable probability area 75 is not opened, the ball cannot flow into the variable probability area 75, and the ball is not detected by the variable probability area switch 75c. (See FIGS. 17 and 18).

Next, in the fourth round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", the second big prize opening solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined period of time, and the ball is sent to the attacker unit 71 from the second variable prize device 74 near the position where the probability variable area 75 is arranged. can flow into the interior. As in the second round, it takes at least about 1.0 seconds (i.e., t5+t6="1000ms") for the ball that has won in the second variable winning device 74 to reach the placement position of the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a. Although the above steps are required, the configuration is such that it is possible to reach the placement position of the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a within about 3.0 seconds.

Here, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", the opening/closing pattern of the probability variable area 75 is "B". Then, in the fourth round, similar to the second round, the variable probability region solenoid 75b performs the initial operation in synchronization with the turning on of the second big prize opening solenoid 74b, and after that, the variable probability region solenoid 75b operates for a certain period of time ( In one embodiment, it is turned on (“3000ms”). Therefore, "3.1 seconds" (initial operation "50ms" + closing time after initial operation "50ms" + opening time of probability variable area 75 "3000ms" = "3100ms") in synchronization with the turning on of the second big prize opening solenoid 74b ), while the variable probability region solenoid 75b is turned on, the ball flowing from the second variable winning device 74 can reach the position where the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a is provided (t5+t6<t2). Therefore, in the fourth round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", similarly to the second round, the ball that flowed into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable prize winning device 74 while the probability variation area 75 was open, It is configured such that it can flow into the region 75 and be detected by the variable probability region switch 75c. For this reason, if the variable probability transition flag 203i is not turned on in the second round, the variable probability transition flag 203i can be set to be on when the ball is detected by the variable probability region switch 75c in the fourth round (see FIG. 17).

It should be noted that in the fifth round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", the variable probability area solenoid 75b is not turned on, and the setting is such that the ball cannot flow into the variable probability area 75. That is, even if a ball enters from either variable winning device 72 or 74, since the variable probability area 75 is not open, the ball cannot flow into the variable probability area 75, and the ball is not detected by the variable probability area switch 75c. (See Figure 17).

Therefore, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", the probability variable area 75 is opened in the second round and the fourth round, and furthermore, the balls that flowed in from the second variable winning device 74 (first variable winning device 72) Since the variable probability area 75 is configured to be able to flow into the variable probability area 75 while the variable probability area 75 is open, the variable probability transition flag 203i can be set to ON in each round. Then, at the end of the jackpot, a "probability variation state" is set with reference to this probability variation transition flag 203i.

In addition, if you win the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" that causes a "probability variation state" after the jackpot ends, in multiple rounds of that jackpot (i.e., the second round and the fourth round), the probability variation area 75 will be entered. The ball is configured to be able to flow into the ball. Therefore, if in the previous round (i.e., the second round) in which the variable probability area 75 was open, a ball could not be passed through the variable probability area 75 due to some reason (for example, a lack of balls to be fired). However, it becomes possible to resolve the situation by a later round (ie, the fourth round) and allow the ball to pass through the probability variable area 75 in the subsequent round. Therefore, if a sudden trouble occurs (for example, a game abnormality such as a firing abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), it becomes difficult to pass the ball to the variable probability area 75 that is open in one round. However, by providing the possibility of passing the ball to the variable probability area 75 which is open in other rounds, the player can realize a comfortable game without suffering any disadvantage due to unforeseen circumstances.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the manner in which balls are detected in each round of the jackpot type "Latent Probability Variation B" will be described. FIG. 19 shows the operation timings of the first big prize opening solenoid 72b, the second big prize opening solenoid 74b, and the probability variable area solenoid 75b in each round of the first special symbol jackpot type "latent probability variation B", and the first big winning hole solenoid 74b. It is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of a ball in the opening switch 72c, the second big prize opening switch 74c, and the variable probability area switch 75c, and the setting timing of the interval and variable probability transition flag 203i.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation B", a total of five rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and the jackpot solenoids 72b and 74b are turned on in the opening pattern "X2" at the start of each round. Then, the corresponding opening/closing plates 72a, 74a are opened. That is, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation B", the second big winning hole solenoid 74b is turned on and the second opening/closing plate 74a is opened in the odd numbered rounds, and the first big winning hole solenoid 72b is turned on and the second opening and closing plate 74a is opened in the even numbered rounds. 1 opening/closing plate 72a is opened. Then, in each round, similar to the jackpot type "time saving A", etc., a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed from opening, or 10 balls are detected by the jackpot switch 72c, 74c) , when any one of the following events is established, the big prize opening solenoids 72b, 74b are turned off, the opening/closing plates 72a, 74a are closed, and one round ends.

Furthermore, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation B", the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72, 74 is "Y1". For this reason, first, in the first round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation B", the second big prize opening solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined period of time, and a ball is released from the second variable winning device 74 near the placement position of the probability variable area 75. It may flow into the attacker unit 71. As described above, the winning ball in the second variable winning device 74 flows down the path 74d before detecting the second big winning hole in about 0.3 seconds, and flows down the path 74e after detecting the second big winning hole in about 0.3 seconds. It is configured to flow down in 7 seconds. That is, when a ball flows in from the second variable winning device 74, it takes at least about 1.0 seconds or more for the ball to reach the position where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is placed, but within about 3.0 seconds. is configured to be able to reach the location where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided.

Here, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation B", the opening/closing pattern of the probability variable area 75 is "A". Then, in the first round, the probability variable area solenoid 75b performs an initial operation in synchronization with the turning on of the second big prize opening solenoid 74b, and then the probability variable area solenoid 75b operates for a certain period of time (in the first embodiment, 3000ms) is turned on. Therefore, "3.1 seconds" (initial operation "50 ms" + closing time after initial operation "50 ms" + opening time of probability variable area 75 "3000 ms" = "3100 ms") in synchronization with turning on of the second big prize opening solenoid 74b ), while the variable probability region solenoid 75b is turned on, the ball flowing from the second variable winning device 74 can reach the position where the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a is provided. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot type "Latent probability variation B", the ball that flowed into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable prize winning device 74 while the variable probability area 75 was open could flow into the variable probability area 75. , is detected by the variable probability region switch 75c, and the variable probability transition flag 203i is set to ON in accordance with the detection (see FIG. 19).

Next, between the first round and the second round in the jackpot type "latent probability variation B", the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are both operated at the same timing as in the jackpot type "time saving B". The unreleased interval is configured to run for a predetermined time. That is, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are opened and closed in the same manner as the opening and closing manner of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 in the jackpot type "time saving B". This makes it impossible to determine the type of jackpot based solely on the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize which type of jackpot the player has won, and which gaming state It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that makes the player guess whether he or she is playing the game.

Next, after the interval period has elapsed, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation B", the first big winning opening solenoid 72b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the first variable winning device 72 which is far from the placement position of the probability variable area 75 is turned on. A ball may flow into the attacker unit 71 from the outside. As described above, the winning ball in the first variable winning device 72 flows down the first big winning opening pre-detection passage 72d in about 0.8 seconds, and flows down the first big winning opening passage 72e after about 2 seconds. It is configured to flow down in 5 seconds. That is, when a ball flows in from the first variable winning device 72, it takes at least about 3.3 seconds or more for the ball to reach the position where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided. At this time, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation B", since the variable probability area 75 is not opened, the ball cannot flow into the variable probability area 75, and the ball is not detected by the variable probability area switch 75c. (See FIG. 19).

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", the second big prize opening solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined period of time, and the ball is sent from the second variable prize device 74 close to the placement position of the probability variable area 75 to the attacker unit 71. can flow into the interior. As in the first round, the winning ball in the second variable winning device 74 takes at least about 1.0 seconds or more to reach the placement position of the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a, but about 3.0 seconds It is configured to be able to reach the location where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is located within seconds.

Here, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation B", the opening/closing pattern of the probability variable area 75 is "A". Then, in the third round, similar to the first round, the probability variable area solenoid 75b performs the initial operation in synchronization with the turning on of the second big prize opening solenoid 74b, and then the probability variable area solenoid 75b operates for a certain period of time ( In one embodiment, it is turned on (“3000ms”). Therefore, "3.1 seconds" (initial operation "50 ms" + closing time after initial operation "50 ms" + opening time of probability variable area 75 "3000 ms" = "3100 ms") in synchronization with turning on of the second big prize opening solenoid 74b ), while the variable probability region solenoid 75b is turned on, the ball flowing from the second variable winning device 74 can reach the position where the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a is provided. Therefore, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation B", similarly to the first round, the ball that flowed into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable prize winning device 74 while the probability variation area 75 was open, It is configured such that it can flow into the region 75 and be detected by the variable probability region switch 75c. Therefore, if the variable probability transition flag 203i is not turned on in the first round, the variable probability transition flag 203i can be set to be on in the third round when a ball is detected by the variable probability region switch 75c (see FIG. 19).

Further, no interval time is set between the second and third rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability variation B". Therefore, in the second round, immediately after the first variable winning device 72 is closed, the second variable winning device 74 in the third round is opened, and along with the opening, the probability variable area 75 is also opened. . That is, in the second round, in a state where at least the winning ball (for example, the 10th count) that has achieved the closing condition of the first variable winning device 72 remains in the attacker unit 71, the probability variable area 75 in the third round is An opening will take place. Therefore, the winning ball that wins in the second round is configured to be able to flow into the variable probability area 75 that is opened in the third round.

Next, between the third and fourth rounds in the jackpot type "latent probability variation B", the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are both operated at the same timing as in the jackpot type "time saving B". The unreleased interval is configured to run for a predetermined time. That is, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are opened and closed in the same manner as the opening and closing manner of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 in the jackpot type "time saving B".

In addition, in the fourth and fifth rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability variation B", the probability variable area solenoid 75b is not turned on, and the setting is such that the ball cannot flow into the probability variable area 75. That is, even if a ball enters from either variable winning device 72 or 74, since the variable probability area 75 is not open, the ball cannot flow into the variable probability area 75, and the ball is not detected by the variable probability area switch 75c. (See Figure 19).

Therefore, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation B", the probability variable area 75 is opened in the first round and the third round, and furthermore, the balls that flowed in from the second variable winning device 74 (first variable winning device 72) Since the variable probability area 75 is configured to be able to flow into the variable probability area 75 while the variable probability area 75 is open, the variable probability transition flag 203i can be set to ON in each round. Then, at the end of the jackpot, a "probability variation state" is set with reference to this probability variation transition flag 203i.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the manner in which balls are detected in each round of the jackpot type "probability variation A" will be described. FIG. 20 shows the operation timings of the first big winning hole solenoid 72b, the second big winning hole solenoid 74b, and the probability variable area solenoid 75b in each round of the jackpot type "probability variation A" of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, It is a timing chart that schematically shows the detection timing of a ball in the first big winning opening switch 72c, the second big winning opening switch 74c, and the variable probability area switch 75c, and the setting timing of the interval and variable probability transition flag 203i.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", a total of 10 rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoids 72b and 74b are turned on in the opening pattern "Y1". , the corresponding opening/closing plates 72a, 74a are opened. That is, in the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", the second big winning hole solenoid 74b is turned on and the second opening/closing plate 74a is opened in odd rounds, and the first big winning hole solenoid 72b is turned on and the first opening and closing plate 74a is opened in even rounds. The opening/closing plate 72a is opened. Then, in each round, similar to the jackpot type "time saving A", etc., a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed from opening, or 10 balls are detected by the jackpot switch 72c, 74c) , when any one of the following events is established, the big prize opening solenoids 72b, 74b are turned off, the opening/closing plates 72a, 74a are closed, and one round ends.

Further, in the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is "Y1". For this reason, first, in the first round of the jackpot type "probability variation A", the second big prize opening solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined period of time, and a ball is sent from the second variable winning device 74 near the position of the probability variable area 75 to the attacker. may flow into unit 71. As described above, the winning ball in the second variable winning device 74 flows down the path 74d before detecting the second big winning hole in about 0.3 seconds, and flows down the path 74e after detecting the second big winning hole in about 0.3 seconds. It is configured to flow down in 7 seconds. That is, when a ball flows in from the second variable winning device 74, it takes at least about 1.0 seconds or more for the ball to reach the position where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is placed, but within about 3.0 seconds. is configured to be able to reach the location where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided.

Here, in the jackpot type "probability variation A", the opening/closing pattern of the probability variation area 75 is "C". Then, in the first round, the probability variable area solenoid 75b performs an initial operation in synchronization with the turning on of the second big prize opening solenoid 74b, and then the probability variable area solenoid 75b operates for a certain period of time (in the first embodiment, 3000ms) is turned on. Therefore, "3.1 seconds" (initial operation "50ms" + closing time after initial operation "50ms" + opening time of probability variable area 75 "3000ms" = "3100ms") in synchronization with the turning on of the second big prize opening solenoid 74b ), while the variable probability region solenoid 75b is turned on, the ball flowing from the second variable winning device 74 can reach the position where the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a is provided. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot type "probability variation A", the ball that flowed into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable prize winning device 74 while the probability variable area 75 was being opened may flow into the probability variable area 75, It is detected by the variable probability region switch 75c, and the variable probability shift flag 203i is set to ON in accordance with the detection (see FIG. 20).

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", the first big winning opening solenoid 72b is turned on for a predetermined period of time, and the ball enters the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 which is far from the placement position of the probability variable area 75. may flow into the country. As described above, the winning ball in the first variable winning device 72 flows down the first big winning opening pre-detection passage 72d in about 0.8 seconds, and flows down the first big winning opening post-detection passage 72e for about 2 seconds. It is configured to flow down in 5 seconds. That is, when a ball flows in from the first variable winning device 72, it takes at least about 3.3 seconds or more for the ball to reach the position where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided. At this time, in the second round of the jackpot type "probability variation A", since the variable probability area 75 is not opened, the ball cannot flow into the variable probability area 75, and the configuration is such that the ball is not detected by the variable probability area switch 75c. (See Figure 20).

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", the second big prize opening solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined period of time, and the ball enters the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 near the position where the probability variable area 75 is arranged. may flow into the country. As in the first round, the winning ball in the second variable winning device 74 takes at least about 1.0 seconds or more to reach the placement position of the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a, but about 3.0 seconds It is configured to be able to reach the location where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is located within seconds.

Here, in the jackpot type "probability variation A", the opening/closing pattern of the probability variation area 75 is "C". Then, in the third round, similar to the first round, the probability variable area solenoid 75b performs the initial operation in synchronization with the turning on of the second big prize opening solenoid 74b, and then the probability variable area solenoid 75b operates for a certain period of time ( In one embodiment, it is turned on (“3000ms”). Therefore, "3.1 seconds" (initial operation "50ms" + closing time after initial operation "50ms" + opening time of probability variable area 75 "3000ms" = "3100ms") in synchronization with the turning on of the second big prize opening solenoid 74b ), while the variable probability region solenoid 75b is turned on, the ball flowing from the second variable winning device 74 can reach the position where the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a is provided. Therefore, in the third round of the jackpot type "probability variation A", similarly to the first round, the ball that flowed into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable prize winning device 74 while the probability variable area 75 was being opened will enter the probability variable area 75. 75 and can be detected by the variable probability region switch 75c. Therefore, if the variable probability transition flag 203i is not turned on in the first round, the variable probability transition flag 203i can be set to be turned on when the ball is detected by the variable probability region switch 75c in the third round (see FIG. 20).

Furthermore, no interval time is set between the second and third rounds of the jackpot type "probability variation A" (same for all rounds of the jackpot type "probability variation A"). Therefore, in the second round, immediately after the first variable winning device 72 is closed, the second variable winning device 74 in the third round is opened, and along with the opening, the probability variable area 75 is also opened. . That is, in the second round, in a state where at least the winning ball (for example, the 10th count) that has achieved the closing condition of the first variable winning device 72 remains in the attacker unit 71, the probability variable area 75 in the third round is An opening will take place. Therefore, the winning ball that wins in the second round is configured to be able to flow into the variable probability area 75 that is opened in the third round.

Next, in the 4th to 8th rounds and the 10th round of the jackpot type "Latent probability variation B", the variable probability area solenoid 75b is not turned on, and the setting is made such that the ball cannot flow into the variable probability area 75. There is. That is, even if a ball enters from either variable winning device 72 or 74, since the variable probability area 75 is not open, the ball cannot flow into the variable probability area 75, and the ball is not detected by the variable probability area switch 75c. (See Figure 20).

On the other hand, in the 9th round of the jackpot type "probability variation A", the second big prize opening solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined period of time, and the ball enters the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 near the position where the probability variable area 75 is arranged. may flow into the country. The winning ball in the second variable winning device 74 takes at least about 1.0 seconds or more to reach the placement position of the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a, as in the first and third rounds. It is configured to be able to reach the position where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided within about 3.0 seconds.

Here, in the jackpot type "probability variation A", the opening/closing pattern of the probability variation area 75 is "C". Then, in the 9th round, similarly to the 1st and 3rd rounds, the probability variable area solenoid 75b performs the initial operation in synchronization with the turning on of the second big prize opening solenoid 74b, and then the probability variable area solenoid 75b It is turned on for a certain period of time ("3000ms" in the first embodiment). Therefore, "3.1 seconds" (initial operation "50 ms" + closing time after initial operation "50 ms" + opening time of probability variable area 75 "3000 ms" = "3100 ms") in synchronization with turning on of the second big prize opening solenoid 74b ), while the variable probability region solenoid 75b is turned on, the ball flowing from the second variable winning device 74 can reach the position where the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a is provided. Therefore, in the 9th round of the jackpot type "Probability Variation A", as in the 1st and 3rd rounds, the ball that entered the attacker unit 71 from the second variable prize winning device 74 while the probability variable area 75 was open. , can flow into the variable probability region 75 and be detected by the variable probability region switch 75c. For this reason, if the variable probability transition flag 203i is not turned on in the first and third rounds, the variable probability transition flag 203i can be set to on when the ball is detected by the variable probability region switch 75c in the ninth round (Fig. 20).

Therefore, in the jackpot type "probability variation A", the variable probability area 75 is opened in the first round, the third round, and the ninth round, and furthermore, the probability variable area 75 is opened from the second variable winning device 74 (first variable winning device 72). Since the ball is configured to be able to flow into the variable probability area 75 while the variable probability area 75 is open, the variable probability shift flag 203i can be set to ON in more rounds than the jackpot type "latent probability variation A". Then, at the end of the jackpot, a "probability variation state" is set with reference to this probability variation transition flag 203i. With this configuration, in the jackpot type "probability variation A", it is possible to more reliably cause the ball to flow into the probability variation area 75, and it is possible to accurately generate the "probability variation state".

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the manner in which balls are detected in each round of the jackpot type "time saving C" will be described. FIG. 21 shows the operation timing of the first big winning hole solenoid 72b, the second big winning hole solenoid 74b, and the probability variable area solenoid 75b, and the first big winning hole switch in each round of the second special symbol jackpot type "time saving C". 72c is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of a ball in the second big prize opening switch 74c and the variable probability area switch 75c, and the setting timing of the interval and variable probability transition flag 203i.

As shown in FIG. 21, in the jackpot type "time saving C", a total of 10 rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoids 72b and 74b are turned on in the opening pattern "Y2", The corresponding opening/closing plates 72a, 74a are opened. That is, in the jackpot type "time saving C", the first big winning hole solenoid 72b is turned on and the first opening/closing plate 72a is opened in odd rounds, and the second big winning hole solenoid 74b is turned on and the second opening and closing occurs in even rounds. Plate 74a is opened. Then, in each round, a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, either "30 seconds" has elapsed at most since the opening or 10 balls have been detected by the big prize opening switches 72c and 74c) is satisfied. In this case, the big prize opening solenoids 72b, 74b are turned off, the opening/closing plates 72a, 74a are closed, and one round ends.

In addition, in the jackpot type "time saving C", the opening/closing pattern of the variable prize winning devices 72, 74 is "Y2". For this reason, first, in the first round of the jackpot type "time saving C", the first big prize opening solenoid 72b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the ball is sent from the first variable winning device 72 far from the placement position of the probability variable area 75 to the attacker unit. 71. The winning ball in the first variable winning device 72 takes at least about 3.3 seconds or more for the ball to reach the placement position of the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a.

Here, since the opening/closing pattern of the probability variable area 75 of the jackpot type "time saving C" is "A", the probability variable area 75 is opened in synchronization with the opening of the first opening/closing plate 72a in the first round. Therefore, while the probability variable area solenoid 75b is turned on for "3.1 seconds" in synchronization with the turning on of the first big prize opening solenoid 72b, the ball that flows in from the first variable prize winning device 72 is turned on. It is not possible to reach the position where the variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot type "time saving C", although the probability variable area 75 is opened, the ball cannot flow into the probability variable area 75 and the ball is not detected by the probability variable area switch 75c, so the probability variable transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off (see FIG. 21).

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "time saving C", the second big prize opening solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined period of time, and the ball enters the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 which is close to the position where the probability variable area 75 is arranged. There may be an influx. As described above, the winning ball in the second variable winning device 74 is configured to flow down in the second big winning opening pre-detection passage 74d and flow down in the second big winning opening detection passage 74e. That is, when a ball flows in from the second variable winning device 74, it takes at least about 1.0 seconds or more for the ball to reach the position where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is placed, but within about 3.0 seconds. is configured to be able to reach the location where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided.

However, since the opening pattern of the probability variable area 75 of the jackpot type "time saving C" is "A", the probability variable area solenoid 75b is not turned on in the second round of the jackpot type "time saving C", and the ball enters the probability variable area 75. It is set so that no inflow is possible. That is, although a ball can flow in from the second variable winning device 74 near the placement position of the variable probability region 75, since the variable probability region 75 is not open, the ball cannot flow into the variable probability region 75, and the variable probability region switch Since the ball is not detected by the ball 75c, the probability change transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off (see FIG. 21).

Next, between the second and third rounds in the jackpot type "time saving C", the waiting time for the winning ball in the attacker unit 71 to be ejected to the outside of the attacking unit 71 is set as the waiting time for the jackpot type "time saving A". '', etc., the configuration is such that an interval in which both the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are not released is executed for a predetermined time. That is, in the second round, the next round cannot be executed until the ball that enters the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 passes through at least the position where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is arranged. has been done. Specifically, the interval time is set to be longer than the time it takes for the winning ball to reach the position of the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a in the second variable winning device 74.

Next, after the interval time ends, in the third round of the jackpot type "time saving C", the first big prize opening solenoid 72b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the ball is released from the first variable winning device 72 far from the placement position of the variable probability area 75. is set so that it flows into the attacker unit 71. The winning ball of the first variable winning device 72 takes at least about 3.3 seconds or more for the ball to reach the placement position of the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a.

Here, since the opening/closing pattern of the probability variable area 75 of the jackpot type "time saving C" is "A", the probability variable area 75 is opened in synchronization with the opening of the first opening/closing plate 72a in the third round. For this reason, while the probability variable area solenoid 75b is turned on for "3.1 seconds" in synchronization with the turning on of the first big prize opening solenoid 72b, the ball that flows in from the first variable prize winning device 72 is turned on. It is not possible to reach the position where the variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided. Therefore, in the third round of the jackpot type "time saving C", although the variable probability area 75 is opened, the ball cannot flow into the variable probability area 75 and the ball is not detected by the variable probability area switch 75c, so the variable probability transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off (see FIG. 21).

In addition, in the 4th round to the 10th round of the jackpot type "time saving C", the probability variable area solenoid 75b is not turned on, and the setting is such that the ball cannot flow into the probability variable area 75. That is, even if a ball enters from either of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, since the variable probability area 75 is not open, the ball cannot flow into the variable probability area 75, and the ball is not detected by the variable probability area switch 75c. , the probability change transition flag 203i remains off without being turned on (see FIG. 21).

Therefore, in the jackpot type "time saving C", even if a ball flows into the attacker unit 71, the ball will be placed at the position of the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a at the timing when the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a is opened. It is configured so that it does not arrive. Therefore, as with the jackpot types "time saver A" and "time saver B", since the ball is not detected by the probability change area switch 75c, the probability change transition flag 203i also remains off, and after the jackpot type "time saver B" ends, " The system is configured so that "probability fluctuation state" cannot occur.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the manner in which balls are detected in each round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation C" will be described. FIG. 22 shows the operation timing of the first big prize opening solenoid 72b, the second big prize opening solenoid 74b, and the probability variable area solenoid 75b in each round of the second special symbol jackpot type "latent probability variation C", and the first big winning prize. It is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of a ball in the opening switch 72c, the second big prize opening switch 74c, and the variable probability area switch 75c, and the setting timing of the interval and variable probability transition flag 203i.

As shown in FIG. 22, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", a total of 10 rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and the jackpot solenoids 72b and 74b are turned on in the opening pattern "Y2" at the start of each round. Then, the corresponding opening/closing plates 72a, 74a are opened. That is, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", the first big winning hole solenoid 72b is turned on and the first opening/closing plate 72a is opened in the odd numbered rounds, and the second big winning hole solenoid 74b is turned on and the first opening/closing plate 72a is opened in the even numbered rounds. The second opening/closing plate 74a is opened. Then, in each round, similar to the jackpot type "time saving C", etc., a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed from opening, or 10 balls are detected by the jackpot switch 72c, 74c) , when any one of the following events is established, the big prize opening solenoids 72b, 74b are turned off, the opening/closing plates 72a, 74a are closed, and one round ends.

Furthermore, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is "Y2". Therefore, first, in the first round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", the first big prize opening solenoid 72b is turned on for a predetermined period of time, and the ball is released from the first variable winning device 72 far from the placement position of the probability variable area 75. It may flow into the attacker unit 71.

As described above, the winning ball in the first variable winning device 72 flows down the first big winning opening pre-detection passage 72d in about 0.8 seconds, and flows down the first big winning opening passage 72e after about 2 seconds. It is configured to flow down in 5 seconds. That is, when a ball flows in from the first variable winning device 72, it takes at least about 3.3 seconds or more for the ball to reach the position where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided. At this time, since the opening/closing pattern of the probability variable area 75 of the jackpot type "Latent probability variation C" is "B", the probability variation area 75 is not opened in the first round of the jackpot type "Latent probability variation C". Therefore, the ball cannot enter the variable probability region 75 and the ball is not detected by the variable probability region switch 75c, so the variable probability transition flag 203i remains off without being turned on (see FIG. 22).

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "Latent probability variation C", the second big prize opening solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined period of time, and the ball is sent to the attacker unit 71 from the second variable prize device 74 near the placement position of the probability variable area 75. can flow into the interior. As described above, the winning ball in the second variable winning device 74 flows down the path 74d before detecting the second big winning hole in about 0.3 seconds, and flows down the path 74e after detecting the second big winning hole in about 0.3 seconds. It is configured to flow down in 7 seconds. That is, when a ball flows in from the second variable winning device 74, it takes at least about 1.0 seconds or more for the ball to reach the position where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is placed, but within about 3.0 seconds. is configured to be able to reach the location where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided.

Here, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", the opening/closing pattern of the probability variable area 75 is "B". Then, in the second round, the probability variable area solenoid 75b performs an initial operation in synchronization with the turning on of the second big prize opening solenoid 74b, and then the probability variable area solenoid 75b operates for a certain period of time (in the first embodiment, 3000ms) is turned on. Therefore, "3.1 seconds" (initial operation "50 ms" + closing time after initial operation "50 ms" + opening time of probability variable area 75 "3000 ms" = "3100 ms") in synchronization with turning on of the second big prize opening solenoid 74b ), while the variable probability region solenoid 75b is turned on, the ball flowing from the second variable winning device 74 can reach the position where the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a is provided. Therefore, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", the ball that flowed into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable prize winning device 74 while the variable probability area 75 was being opened could flow into the variable probability area 75. , is detected by the variable probability region switch 75c, and the variable probability shift flag 203i is set to ON in accordance with the detection (see FIG. 22).

Also, there is no interval time set between the first and second rounds of the jackpot type "Latent probability variation C", similar to the first and second rounds of the jackpot type "Latent probability variation A". . Therefore, in the first round, immediately after the first variable winning device 72 is closed, the second variable winning device 74 in the second round is opened, and along with the opening, the probability variable area 75 is also opened. . That is, in the first round, in a state where the winning ball (for example, the 10th count) that achieved the closing condition of the first variable winning device 72 remains in the attacker unit 71, the probability variable area 75 is opened in the second round. will be held. Therefore, the winning ball that won in the first round is configured to be able to flow into the variable probability area 75 that is opened in the second round.

Next, between the second and third rounds in the jackpot type "Latent probability variation C", the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are both operated at the same timing as in the jackpot type "Time saving C". It is configured such that the interval in which it is not released is executed for a predetermined time (in the first embodiment, "2 seconds"). That is, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are opened and closed in the same manner as the opening and closing manner of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 in the jackpot type "time saving C". This makes it impossible to determine the type of jackpot based solely on the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize which type of jackpot the player has won, and which gaming state It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that makes the player guess whether he or she is playing the game.

Next, after the interval period has elapsed, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", the first big winning opening solenoid 72b is turned on for a predetermined time, and the first variable winning device 72 which is far from the placement position of the probability variable area 75 is turned on. A ball may flow into the attacker unit 71 from the outside. As described above, the winning ball in the first variable winning device 72 flows down the first big winning opening pre-detection passage 72d in about 0.8 seconds, and flows down the first big winning opening passage 72e after about 2 seconds. It is configured to flow down in 5 seconds. That is, when a ball flows in from the first variable winning device 72, it takes at least about 3.3 seconds or more for the ball to reach the position where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided. At this time, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", since the variable probability area 75 is not opened, the ball cannot flow into the variable probability area 75, and the ball is not detected by the variable probability area switch 75c. (See FIG. 22).

Next, in the fourth round of the jackpot type "Latent probability variation C", the second big prize opening solenoid 74b is turned on for a predetermined period of time, and the ball is sent to the attacker unit 71 from the second variable prize device 74 near the position where the probability variable area 75 is arranged. can flow into the interior. As in the second round, the winning ball in the second variable winning device 74 takes at least about 1.0 seconds or more to reach the placement position of the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a, but about 3.0 seconds It is configured to be able to reach the location where the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is located within seconds.

Here, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", the opening/closing pattern of the probability variable area 75 is "B". Then, in the fourth round, similar to the second round, the probability variable area solenoid 75b performs the initial operation in synchronization with the turning on of the second big prize opening solenoid 74b, and then the probability variable area solenoid 75b operates for a certain period of time ( In one embodiment, it is turned on (“3000ms”). Therefore, "3.1 seconds" (initial operation "50 ms" + closing time after initial operation "50 ms" + opening time of probability variable area 75 "3000 ms" = "3100 ms") in synchronization with turning on of the second big prize opening solenoid 74b ), while the variable probability region solenoid 75b is turned on, the ball flowing from the second variable winning device 74 can reach the position where the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a is provided. Therefore, in the fourth round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", similarly to the second round, the ball that flowed into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable prize winning device 74 while the probability variation area 75 was open, It is configured such that it can flow into the region 75 and be detected by the variable probability region switch 75c. Therefore, if the variable probability transition flag 203i is not turned on in the second round, the variable probability transition flag 203i can be set to be on when the ball is detected by the variable probability region switch 75c in the fourth round (see FIG. 22).

In addition, in the 5th to 10th rounds of the jackpot type "latency probability variation C", the probability variable area solenoid 75b is not turned on, and the setting is such that the ball cannot flow into the probability variable area 75. That is, even if a ball enters from either variable winning device 72 or 74, since the variable probability area 75 is not open, the ball cannot flow into the variable probability area 75, and the ball is not detected by the variable probability area switch 75c. (See Figure 22).

Therefore, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", the probability variable area 75 is opened in the second round and the fourth round, and furthermore, the balls that flowed in from the second variable winning device 74 (first variable winning device 72) Since the variable probability area 75 is configured to be able to flow into the variable probability area 75 while the variable probability area 75 is open, the variable probability transition flag 203i can be set to ON in each round. Then, at the end of the jackpot, a "probability variation state" is set with reference to this probability variation transition flag 203i.

In addition, if you win the jackpot type "latent probability variation C" that causes a "probability variation state" after the jackpot ends, in multiple rounds (i.e., the second and fourth rounds) of the jackpot, the probability variation area 75 will be entered. The ball is configured to be able to flow into the ball. Therefore, if in the previous round (i.e., the second round) in which the variable probability area 75 was open, a ball could not be passed through the variable probability area 75 due to some reason (for example, a lack of balls to be fired). However, it becomes possible to resolve the situation by a later round (ie, the fourth round) and allow the ball to pass through the probability variable area 75 in the subsequent round. Therefore, if a sudden trouble occurs (for example, a game abnormality such as a firing abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), it becomes difficult to pass the ball to the variable probability area 75 that is open in one round. However, by providing the possibility of passing the ball to the variable probability area 75 which is open in other rounds, the player can realize a comfortable game without suffering any disadvantage due to unforeseen circumstances.

In this way, the jackpot types with the same opening and closing patterns (i.e., jackpot types "time saving A" and "latent probability variation A", jackpot types "time saving B" and "latent probability variation B", and jackpot type "time saving C") ” and “Latent probability variation C”), so that the type of jackpot cannot be determined only by the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, making it difficult for the player to recognize which type of jackpot he has won ( It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that makes the player guess in which game state he/she is playing after the jackpot.

On the other hand, the jackpot type "Probability Fluctuation A" which informs that it is in the "Probability Fluctuation State" opens and closes the variable winning devices 72, 74 in a unique opening/closing pattern (i.e. "Y1") that is different from other jackpot types. Control. Therefore, by recognizing the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, the player can recognize that the "probability fluctuation state" will be awarded.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation will be continued. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, includes a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 33) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting the paid out prize balls. Note that the prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. be. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is turned off (not operated), the operation handle is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is fired with a force corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, outputs turning on and off from a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and outputs variable effects and continuous output. It controls the setting of the display mode of performances performed on the third symbol display device 81, such as preview performances and "character selection" performances.

The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, includes a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. In the first embodiment, the configuration is such that commands are sent only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the configuration is such that commands cannot be sent from the audio lamp controller 113 to the main controller 110. ing. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to send and receive commands to and from each other.

The audio lamp control device 113 also monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and the display control device 114 is controlled so as to change the back image in the "Super Reach" production mode, etc., or change the selected character in the "Character Selection" production. Instructs the third symbol display device 81 to display a display based on the depression of the frame button 22.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply section 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminal of the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33). Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can successfully execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111 when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 23 to 35. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on (see FIG. 34), main processing that is executed after the startup processing (see FIG. 35), and periodic processing (see FIG. 35). In this case, there are a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) that is started at a "4 millisecond" cycle) and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, we will first explain timer interrupt processing (see Figure 23) and NMI interrupt processing (see Figure 33), and then explain startup processing (see Figure 34) and main processing (see Figure 35). Explain.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a regular process that is repeatedly executed every "4 milliseconds", for example. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt processing, various types of processing that should be periodically executed are performed.

In this timer interrupt processing, first, external output processing is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt processing and main processing, commands to be sent to the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, etc. are generated based on various processes, and are temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203. . In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

For example, a command for the number of reserved balls set in a starting winning process (see FIG. 24) to be described later is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the variation pattern command, stop type command, confirmation command, etc. set in the special figure variation process (see FIG. 25) and the variation start process (FIG. 26), which is a process of the special figure variation process, are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Send. In addition, a ball launch signal set when a ball is launched in the launch control process of S112, which will be described later, is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the jackpot process is executed to execute the process at the time of jackpot based on the first special symbol or the second special symbol ( S103). Details of this jackpot processing (S103) will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

Next, a normal power control process is executed to control the drive of the rotary plate of the normal power function 64c (S104). To explain briefly, a variable display of the normal symbol is performed on the normal symbol display device 83 on the condition that the ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67, and as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol, the winning symbol of the normal symbol (for example, When the "○" symbol) appears and a winning state occurs, the rotary plate of the normal electric combination 64c is driven to open for a predetermined period of time.

Next, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S105). That is, while reading the states of the first big winning opening switch 72c, second big winning opening switch 74c, probability variable area switch 75c, and various switches 208 connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switch 208 is determined. and save the detection information (winning detection information). Furthermore, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the winning detection information is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S106). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("899" in the first embodiment), it is cleared to "0". Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("99" in the first embodiment), it is cleared to "0" and the second initial value is The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the regular pattern random number counter C4 are updated (S107). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the random number counter C4 per common pattern are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (first implementation). In the format, when they reach "899", "99", "99", "199", "99" respectively, they are cleared to "0". In addition, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or the random number counter C4 per common figure completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is converted into the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the random number per common figure. The initial value is read as the initial value of the counter C4, and the initial value is set to the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal hit random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Next, a starting winning process is executed in response to a winning to the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b (S108), and then, as the ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67, the normal symbol's validity and variable display are displayed. A gate passing process is executed to determine the contents, etc. (S109). The details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

After executing the gate passing process (S109), the process for dynamically displaying the special symbol by the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the processing contents of the start winning process (S108) are performed. A special symbol variation process is executed to set the variation pattern of the third symbol, etc. (S110). The details of the special figure variation process (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

Next, based on the processing contents of the gate passage process (S109), a normal symbol variation process is executed (S111) to execute a process for variable display of normal symbols by the normal symbol display device 83. In the ordinary symbol variation process (S111), the lottery probability of the ordinary symbol is either high probability (for example, 9/10) or low probability (1/10), depending on the value of the time saving counter described later.

After executing the normal figure variation process (S111), a firing control process is executed (S112), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S113), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process (S112) is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to launch the ball on or off. Then, when the ball launch is on, in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112, information on the ball launch signal is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24, the start winning process (S108), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S108). The starting winning process is performed by entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (hereinafter, the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b may be collectively referred to as "starting ports 64a, 64b"). If there is a winning ball, the value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area corresponding to the winning starting opening 64a, 64b. A process of storing (holding) the data in the area 203e is executed. It also executes a process for transmitting the values of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the audio lamp control device 113.

In this starting winning process (S108), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has entered the first starting opening 64a (starting winning) (S201). Here, based on the output signal of the special figure 1 ball entrance switch (not shown) that detects the ball entering the first starting port 64a (winning), which was read in the switch reading process (see S105 in FIG. 23), , the entry of the ball into the first starting port 64a is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 23).

When it is determined that a ball has entered the first starting hole 64a (there is a starting prize) (S201: Yes), the value of the first held ball counter 203a (the number held in the main controller 110) is determined. It is determined whether or not the number of pending balls (N1) for the dynamic display (variable effect) of one special symbol is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the first embodiment) (S202). Then, even if there is a winning in the first starting port 64a, if the number of pending balls N1 is not 4 (S202: No), this starting winning process (S108) is ended, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) Return to

On the other hand, if the number of active pending balls N1<4 (S202: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the first pending ball number counter 203a (number of active pending balls N1) (S203). This time, since the prize is to be won in the first starting port 64a corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination for each random number value C1 to C3, CS1 (S204), and processing is performed. The process moves to S209.

In the process of S201, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the first starting port 64a (S201: No), then it is determined whether the ball has entered the second starting port 64b (starting winning). (S205). Here, similarly to the first starting port 64a, a special figure 2 ball entrance switch (not shown) is used to detect the ball entering the second starting port 64b (winning), which is read in the switch reading process (see S105 in FIG. 23). Based on the output signal of (1), the entry of the ball into the second starting port 64b is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 23).

When it is determined that the ball has entered the second starting hole 64b (there is a starting prize) (S205: Yes), the value of the second held ball counter 203b (the number held in the main controller 110) is determined. 2) It is determined whether or not the number of pending balls N2) for the dynamic display (variable effect) of the special symbol is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the first embodiment) (S206). Then, if there is no winning to the second starting port 64b (S205: No), or if there is a winning to the second starting port 64b but the number of pending balls N2<4 (S206: No), this The start winning process (S108) is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

On the other hand, if the number of active pending balls N2<4 (S206: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the second pending ball number counter 203b (number of active pending balls N2) (S207). This time, since the winning is for the second starting port 64b corresponding to the second special symbol, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination for each random number value C1 to C3, CS1 (S208), and processing is performed. The process moves to S209.

In the process of S209, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 9), and set as a storage destination in S204 or S208. The first reserved ball storage area 203d is the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e. If specified as the storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, and the fluctuation type counter in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first pending ball number counter 203a. Each is held (stored) in the storage area 203d4 (S209). In addition, when the second reserved ball storage area 203e is specified as the storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1, jackpot type counter storage area 203e2, and stoppage of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball number counter 203b are performed. It is held (stored) in the pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 and the variation type counter storage area 203e4 (S209).

Specifically, for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination in the process of S204 based on the winning to the first starting port 64a, and the first reserved ball number after addition in the process of S203 If the value of the counter 203a is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the first reservation first area. Furthermore, if the value of the first reserved pitch number counter 203a after addition is "2", the value of the first reserved pitch number counter 203a after addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reserved second area. If the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "4", the counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the first reserved third area, and if the value of the first reserved pitch counter 203a after addition is "4", the counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the first reserved third area. , CS1 are held.

Further, for example, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination in the process of S208 based on the winning to the second starting port 64b, and the second reserved ball number counter 203b after the addition in the process of S207. If the value is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in each storage area of the second storage first area. Further, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition is "2", the value of the second reserved pitch number counter 203b after addition is "3" in each storage area of the second reserved second area. If so, the counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the second reservation third area, and if the value of the second reservation pitch counter 203b after addition is "4", the counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the second reservation fourth area. , CS1 are held.

Next, the value of the first held ball number counter 203a or the second held ball number counter 203b (active held ball number N1 or active held ball number N2) after addition by the process of S203 or S207, and the first Speak a command for the number of held balls containing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 stored (held) in the held ball storage area 203d or the second held ball storage area 203e. In order to transmit it to the lamp control device 113, the command for the number of held balls is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S210). As a result, the held pitch count command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process in S101 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) to be executed next. After completing the process of S210, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

Note that the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 to be included in the held pitch count command in the process of S210 may be the values themselves read from the counter buffer 203c in the process of S209, or the values of the first held pitches in the process of S209 may be used. You may use the read value stored (reserved) in the ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the special figure variation process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this special figure variation process (S110). This special symbol variation processing (S110) is to control the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 and the variation performance performed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this special figure variation process (S110), first, it is determined whether or not there is currently a jackpot (S301). During a jackpot includes the middle of a jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of a jackpot, and the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if it is a jackpot (S301: Yes), the special symbol variation process (S110) is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

If it is not a jackpot (S301: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is dynamically displayed (S302), and the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is dynamically displayed. If not (S302: No), then it is determined whether a predetermined period of time has passed after the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 has stopped (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the dynamic display stopped (S303: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). As a result, the stopped symbols in the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) are displayed on the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined period of time, so that the stopped symbols can be visually recognized by the player. .

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S303, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the dynamic display stopped (S303: Yes), the value of the second reserved pitch counter 203b (the value of the second special pitch reserved in the main controller 110) It is determined whether or not the number of pending balls (N2) for dynamic display (fluctuating performance) related to symbols is greater than "0" (S304). As a result, if the value of the second held ball counter 203b (active held ball number N2) is not "0" (S304: Yes), it is the timing to start executing the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) regarding the second special symbol. First, the value of the second held ball counter 203b (number of active held balls N2) is subtracted by 1 (S305). This is because the execution of one of the dynamic displays (fluctuating effects) related to the second special symbol that has been suspended is started by the variation start process (S310) described later, so the second This is because the number of reserved balls related to the special symbol decreases by one.

Next, the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e is shifted (S306). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the second holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e toward the holding ball execution area 203f. 1 area → Hold ball execution area 203f, 2nd hold 2nd area → 2nd hold 1st area, 2nd hold 3rd area → 2nd hold 2nd area, 2nd hold 4th area → 2nd hold 3rd area The data in each area is shifted in this way.

On the other hand, in the process of S304, if it is determined that the value of the second held ball counter 203b (operated held ball number N2) is "0" (S304: No), then the first held ball number counter 203a It is determined whether or not the value (the number N1 of operation pending balls of the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) related to the first special symbol held in the main control device 110) is larger than "0" (S307). As a result, if the value of the first held ball counter 203a (operating held ball number N1) is not "0" (S307: Yes), it is the timing to start executing the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) regarding the first special symbol. First, the value of the first held ball counter 203a (actual held ball number N1) is subtracted by 1 (S308). This is because the execution of one dynamic display (variable effect) among the dynamic displays (variable effects) related to the first special symbol that has been held is started by the movement start process (S310) described later, so the held ball This is because the number decreases by one.

Next, the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S309). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first holding areas 1 to 4 of the first holding ball storage area 203d toward the holding ball execution area 203f. 1 area → Hold ball execution area 203f, 1st hold 2nd area → 1st hold 1st area, 1st hold 3rd area → 1st hold 2nd area, 1st hold 4th area → 1st hold 3rd area The data in each area is shifted in this way.

After the data shift process in S306 or S309, a fluctuation start process is executed for the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of various counters stored in the held ball execution area 203f by the data shift process. (S310), and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). Note that the fluctuation start process (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

In the process of S307, if it is determined that the value of the first held ball counter 203a (operated held ball number N1) is "0" (S307: No), a demonstration effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. In other words, it is determined whether the demonstration is in progress (S311). In this determination process, after transmitting a demo command to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the first held ball number counter 203a or the second held ball number counter 203b (active held ball number N1 or activated The period until any value of the number of reserved pitches (N2) is determined to be greater than "0" is determined to be during the demonstration.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S311: No), a demo command to be sent to the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S312), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). On the other hand, if it is determined that the demo is in progress (S311: Yes), the process directly returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). The demo command set in the process of S312 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is then executed during the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 23). It is sent to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, it sends a display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 sends a demo command to the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Performs control to display effects.

Here, the demonstration command is set when, as described above, there is no held ball when a predetermined period of time has passed after the fluctuation has stopped. Therefore, if the variation effect is not started even after a predetermined period of time has passed after the variation is stopped, a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Note that if it is determined in the process of S311 that the demo is not in progress (S311: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time period longer than the predetermined time period has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped is performed. The demo command may be set by executing the process of S312 when the second predetermined time period has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped. Thereby, when there are no reserved balls after the fluctuation is stopped, the stopped symbols of the stopped fluctuation performance can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without starting the demonstration performance immediately.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is dynamically displayed (S302: Yes), it is determined whether the dynamic display time (variable time) has elapsed (S313 ). The display time during the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this dynamic display time If the (variable time) has not elapsed (S313: No), the display on the special symbol display device 37 is updated (S314), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

In the first embodiment, for example, the display mode of the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is set until a variable time period elapses after the dynamic display is started.

On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (fluctuating time) of the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S313: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol is set for the special symbol display device 37. (S315). The stop symbols are set in advance by a variation start process (S310) which will be described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined according to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the process of S306 or S309, and if it is a jackpot, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is determined. Accordingly, the number of rounds at the time of a jackpot and the gaming state that may occur after the jackpot are determined.

When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S315, the stop symbol of the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the second LED group 37b in the special symbol display device 37. In order to synchronize and confirm the display, a confirmation command is set (S316), and the process moves to S317. The confirmation command is a command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to confirm and display the variable performance being executed. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 is configured to stop the fluctuating performance of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 and display the stopped symbol in a determined manner by receiving the display confirmation command.

In the process of S317, in order to determine whether the state is in a "probability fluctuation state", it is determined whether the value of an ST counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is greater than "0" (S317). This ST counter is set to "100" when the "probability variation state" is started by the probability variation transition flag 203i being set to ON in the jackpot end process (see S415 in FIG. 27) in the jackpot process described later. is set (see S472 in FIG. 32).

In the process of S317, if the value of the ST counter is not "0" (S317: Yes), it is a "probability fluctuation state" and the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of one of the special symbols has been completed once. The value of the ST counter is decremented by 1 (S318), and the process moves to S319. Here, if the value of the ST counter becomes "0" through the process of S318, the gaming state is transitioned from the "probability fluctuation state" to the "normal gaming state", and the audio lamp control device 113 etc. A gaming state command indicating that the gaming state changes (the "probability fluctuation state" ends, the "normal gaming state" occurs, the "probability fluctuation state" changes to the "normal gaming state," etc.) is transmitted. On the other hand, in the process of S317, if the value of the ST counter is "0" (S317: No), it is the "normal gaming state" or the "time reduction state", so the process of S318 is skipped and the process returns to S319. Move to.

In the process of S319, in order to determine whether or not the gaming state has a "time saving function" added, it is determined whether the value of a time saving counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is greater than "0". It is determined (S319). This time saving counter is set to ``100'' when the jackpot type is determined to be ``probability variation A'', ``time saving C'', or ``latent probability variation C'' in the jackpot end process (see S415 in FIG. 27) in the jackpot process described later. " is set (see S475 in FIG. 32), and "50" is set when the jackpot type is determined to be "time saving A", "time saving B", "latent probability variation A", or "latent probability variation B". (See S476 in FIG. 32).

In the process of S319, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (S319: Yes), the game state is in which a "time-saving function" is added, and the dynamic display (variable effect) of any of the special symbols is Since it has been completed once, the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (S320), this special symbol variation process (S110) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). Here, if the value of the time saving counter becomes "0" through the process of S320, the gaming state is changed from "time saving state" or "probable variable state with time saving" to "normal gaming state" or "probable variable state without time saving". At the same time, the gaming state changes for the audio lamp control device 113, etc. (the "time saving state" ends, the "normal gaming state" occurs, and the "time saving definite variable state" changes to the "time saving definite variable state") etc.) will be sent. On the other hand, in the process of S319, if the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (S319: No), the "time-saving function" is not added, so the process of S320 is skipped, and this special figure fluctuation process (S110 ) and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

The above game state command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) that is executed next, the game state command is sent to the voice lamp control device. 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the game state command, it generates a display game state command based on it and transmits it to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the variation start process (S310) which is one process of the special figure variation process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S310). This fluctuation start process (S310) performs a jackpot or loss lottery (jackpot lottery) based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f according to the game state, and also performs a jackpot lottery (jackpot lottery). 3. The dynamic display and the dynamic pattern (variation pattern and stop type) of the variation effect performed on the 3-symbol display device 81 are determined.

In the fluctuation start process (S310), first, in order to determine the gaming state, it is determined whether the value of an ST counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is greater than "0" (S321). As a result of the determination, if the value of the ST counter is "0" (S321: No), the gaming state is "normal gaming state" or "time reduction state", and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is low probability state. , sets the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state (S322), and moves the process to S324. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the ST counter is larger than "0" (S323: Yes), the gaming state is "probability variable state" (that is, "probability variable state with time saving" and "probable variable state without time saving"). Since the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a high probability state, the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S323), and the process moves to S324.

In the process of S324, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 10) set in S322 or S323. A jackpot lottery (determination of success or failure) processing is performed (S324).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not there is a jackpot is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the gaming state (mode) at the time. As mentioned above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal low probability state (“normal gaming state” or “time reduction state”), “7,307 , 582'' is defined as the jackpot random value. In addition, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (“probability fluctuation state”), “28,122,298,390,486,567,656,750,866” is a jackpot. Specified as a random value.

In the process of S324, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number values defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and if they match, the jackpot is determined. It is determined that As a result of the processing in S324, if it is determined that it is a jackpot (S324: Yes), the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot for special figure 1 corresponding to the first special symbol. The display mode at the time of jackpot is set based on the type table 202b1 (see FIG. 11(a)) or the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 11(b)) corresponding to the second special symbol (S325 ).

In this process, according to the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, that is, after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10, is changed to a "probability fluctuation state". Either "Probability Variation A" corresponds to the "10R Probable Variable Jackpot" which transitions to "10R Probable Variable Jackpot" which transitions to "10R Latent Probable Variable Jackpot" which shifts to the "Probability Variable State" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, or "Latent Probability Variation C" which corresponds to the "10R Probable Variable Jackpot" which transitions to the "Probability Variable State". Or, "Time saving C" corresponding to "10R time saving jackpot" which shifts to "time saving state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10, or shifts to "probability fluctuation state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds. "Latent probability variation A" or "Latent probability variation B" corresponding to "5R latent probability variable jackpot", or "5R time saving jackpot" which shifts to "time shortening state" after the maximum number of rounds is 5 rounds jackpot. It is determined whether it is "time saving A" or "time saving B". Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (display mode of the second LED group 37b) at the time of a jackpot on the special symbol display device 37 is set.

Specifically, when the data stored in the held ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the first held ball storage area 203d, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the held ball execution area 203f. The jackpot type is determined based on the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 (see FIG. 11(a)). In addition, if the data stored in the held ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the second held ball storage area 203e, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the held ball execution area 203f and the special The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type table 202b2 for FIG. 2 (see FIG. 11(b)).

Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined (S326), and the process moves to S329. Specifically, a rough production mode is selected based on the jackpot type (display mode) determined in S325 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, and the selected performance mode is selected. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, a dynamic time (variation time) of a specific dynamic display (variation production) is determined from among the rough production modes. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of this jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d to be used is selected according to the jackpot type (display mode).

Specifically, when "probability variation A" corresponding to "10R probability variation jackpot" is set as the jackpot type in the process of S325, the stop pattern table 202d provided for "probability variation A" (for example, probability variation In the stop pattern table for variation A), the performance mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the held ball execution area 203f is selected. In addition, when the "latent probability variation C" corresponding to "10R latent probability variable jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, the stop pattern table 202d provided for "latent probability variation C" (for example, for latent probability variation C) is set. In the stop pattern table), the performance mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the held ball execution area 203f is selected. In addition, when "Time-saving C" corresponding to "10R Time-saving jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, in the stop pattern table 202d provided for "Time-saving C" (for example, the stop pattern table for Time-saving C), the hold The performance mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the ball execution area 203f is selected. In addition, if "latent probability variation A" or "latent probability variation B" corresponding to "5R latent probability variable jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, the stop pattern table provided for "latent probability variation A/B" is set. In 202d (for example, the stop pattern table for latent probability fluctuations A and B), the performance mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the held ball execution area 203f is selected. In addition, when "time saving A" or "time saving B" corresponding to "5R time saving jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, the stop pattern table 202d provided for "time saving A/B" (for example, time saving A/B) is set. In the stop pattern table for B), the performance mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the held ball execution area 203f is selected.

Then, in the group of the variation pattern table 202e provided for each performance mode set in the process of S326, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f is selected. . Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predefined variation pattern and the variation time. Note that the selection rate of the variation pattern may be configured to be different between the "probability variation state", ie, "probability variation state with time saving" and "probability variation state without time saving". Further, the selection rate of the variation pattern may be configured to be the same between the "no time saving definite variable state" and the "time reduction state".

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S324 that it is not a jackpot (S324: No), a display mode for a loss is set (S327). In the process of S327, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the losing symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the first reserved ball number counter stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f are set. Based on the value of 203a or (and) second reserved ball number counter 203b and the current gaming state, the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is "non-reach (shortened)" production mode, "non-reach (Normal)", "Normal Reach", "Super Reach", or "Special Reach".

In the first embodiment, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a "probability fluctuation state", a "time reduction state", or a "normal gaming state", a stop corresponding to each performance mode is provided. The stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of values of the pattern selection counter C3 is different.

Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a loss is determined (S328), and the process moves to S329. In the process of S328, a variable time is determined in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 until the symbol is stopped and displayed in the case of a losing symbol. Specifically, in the group of the variation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (performance mode) at the time of loss determined in the process of S327, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f. Select the variation pattern associated with. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predefined variation pattern and the variation time. Note that the selection rate of the variation pattern may be configured to be different between the "probability variation state", ie, "probability variation state with time saving" and "probability variation state without time saving". Further, the selection rate of the variation pattern may be configured to be the same between the "no time saving definite variable state" and the "time reduction state".

In this way, the process of setting the production mode and variation pattern at the time of a jackpot and the process of setting the production mode and variation pattern at the time of a loss are judged and determined by the same determination program using the same random numbers C3 and CS1. This makes it possible to standardize programs and reduce development man-hours during development.

In the process of S329, based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the processes of S326 and S328, the display control device 114 is notified of the variation time according to the variation pattern via the audio lamp control device 113. A pattern command is set (S329). Specifically, for example, if you win a jackpot lottery, the jackpot is "probability variation A" corresponding to "10R probability variable jackpot", and furthermore, a variation pattern of "super reach" of "25 seconds" is selected. If so, a variation pattern command indicating a jackpot, "probability variation A", and "super reach" of "25 seconds" is set. In addition, if you lose the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern of "25 seconds" "Super Reach" is selected, a variation pattern command indicating the loss/"25 seconds" "Super Reach" will be set. . In this way, even if the variable effects have the same variation time, by setting the appropriateness of the variable effect and the general content of the variation pattern in the variable pattern command, the audio lamp control device 113 can control the effect mode including the appropriateness. By understanding the contents and the variation time, it is possible to determine the variation pattern of the variation performance in more detail based on that information.

In addition, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S325 or S327 (S330), and the special figure fluctuation process (see FIG. 25) ) Return to Specifically, for example, if you win a jackpot and the content of the jackpot is "probability variation A" which is a "10R probability variation jackpot", the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, "7" symbol, etc.) ) is not specified, but a stop type command indicating that it is "probability fluctuation A" is set. Also, if you win a jackpot and the content of the jackpot is "latent probability variation A" which is "5R latent probability variable jackpot", the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, "3" symbol, etc.) is specific. Instead, set a stop type command that indicates "latent probability variation A".

On the other hand, if you do not win the jackpot and the "Super Reach" production mode is selected, the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, "787" etc.) will not be specified, and the " Set a stop type command that indicates the "Super Reach" production mode. In addition, if you do not win the jackpot and the "Normal Reach" production mode is selected, the "Normal Reach" effect at the time of loss without specifying the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, "737", etc.) ” Set a stop type command that indicates the production mode. Furthermore, if you do not win the jackpot and the "non-reach" production mode is selected, the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, "258" etc.) will not be specified, and the " Set a stop type command that indicates the "non-reach" production mode.

In this way, by setting a rough stop type based on the propriety of the variation effect in the stop type command, the audio lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) can grasp the stop type based on the propriety of the variation effect and Based on this information, it is possible to determine the stopping result of the variable effect in more detail.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are stored in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) that is executed next. It is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command, it generates a display fluctuation pattern command and a display type command based on the fluctuation pattern command and transmits them to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the jackpot process (S103), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot processing (S103).

As described above, this jackpot processing (S103) is performed when a special symbol jackpot occurs and the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 is opened in each round depending on the type of jackpot. In order to set the number of openings (number of rounds), the big winning opening opening/closing table 202f (see FIG. 12) is set, and the opening time of the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 is set. Further, based on the jackpot type, a variable probability area opening/closing table 202g (see FIG. 13) is set in order to set variable probability areas 75 to be opened for each round. In addition, in this jackpot process, a variable probability area validity table (not shown) may be configured to set validity or invalidity of the variable probability area 75 for each round (round elapsed time).

In addition, in the jackpot processing (S103), in the case of a jackpot state, a jackpot opening/closing control process (see FIG. 28) for opening or closing the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is executed. That is, either one of the variable winning devices 72, 74 is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time (in the first embodiment, "30 seconds") of each variable winning device 72, 74 has elapsed; Alternatively, the closing condition is determined as to whether a prescribed number of balls (10 in the first embodiment) have been won in each variable winning device 72, 74. Then, when any of these closing conditions is satisfied, the open variable prize winning devices 72 and 74 are closed. The control related to opening and the control related to closing of the variable prize winning devices 72 and 74 are repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds.

Also, within this big winning opening opening/closing process, a process for opening or closing the variable probability area 75 is executed based on the set variable probability area opening/closing table 202g (see FIG. 13). That is, for each round in the jackpot state, the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a of the variable probability area 75 is driven and controlled according to the set variable probability area opening/closing table 202g.

In this jackpot processing (S103), first, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot (S401). As a result of the determination, if it is not a jackpot (S401: No), then it is determined whether the dynamic display of the special symbol (fluctuation effect) has ended (S402).

As a result of the determination in S402, if the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the special symbol has not ended (S402: No), this jackpot process (S103) is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). On the other hand, if the dynamic display (variable performance) of the special symbol has ended (S402: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been won in the dynamic display (variable performance) (S403).

As a result of the determination in S403, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) (S403: No), this jackpot processing (S103) is ended, and the timer interrupt processing (Fig. 23 Reference). On the other hand, if it is determined that a jackpot has been won in the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) (S403: Yes), in order to execute control regarding the won jackpot, first check whether the number of rounds of the won jackpot is 10R. No, that is, "probability variation A" corresponding to "10R probability variable jackpot", "latent probability variation C" corresponding to "10R potential probability variable jackpot", or "time saving C" corresponding to "10R time saving jackpot" It is determined whether or not the winner has been won (S404).

As a result of the determination in S404, if the number of rounds of the won jackpot is 10R (S404: Yes), "10" is set in the round counter so that the opening control of the variable prize winning devices 72, 74 is performed 10 times in this jackpot. (S405), and the process moves to S407. On the other hand, if the number of rounds of the won jackpot is not 10R, that is, "latent probability variation A" or "latent probability variation B" corresponding to "5R latent probability variable jackpot", or "time saving" corresponding to "5R time saving jackpot" If you have won "A" or "Time Saving B" (S404: No), set "5" in the round counter in order to control the opening of the variable winning devices 72, 74 five times in the main jackpot (S406). ), the process moves to S407. The MPU 201 checks the value of the round counter, and if a value is set in the round counter (that is, "1" or more), the MPU 201 controls the opening of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 and changes the value of the round counter. Subtract 1 from . Then, when the value of the round counter becomes "0", the jackpot being executed is terminated.

In the process of S407, in order to transmit the opening command to the audio lamp control device 113, the opening command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S407). Next, the opening time (for example, "10 seconds") of the jackpot is set (S408), and the process moves to S409. The opening command set in the process of S407 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 during the external output process (see S101 in FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, it outputs a sound indicating that a jackpot has started, controls the lamp, etc., and transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an opening effect (for example, notification of the total number of rounds, etc.) based on the reception of the display opening command.

In the process of S409, the big winning opening opening/closing table 202f (see FIG. 12) is set according to the type of jackpot (jackpot type) (S409), and the process moves to S410. Specifically, if the jackpot type is "time saving A" and "latent probability variation A", the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72, 74 is set to "X1", and the jackpot type is "time saving B" and "latent probability variation". B", the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72, 74 is set to "X2", and if the jackpot type is "probability variation A", the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72, 74 is set to "Y1". , if the jackpot type is "time saving C" and "latent probability variation C", the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72, 74 is set to "Y2".

Next, in the process of S410, the probability variable area opening/closing table 202g (see FIG. 13) is set according to the type of jackpot (jackpot type) (S410), and the process moves to S411. Specifically, if the jackpot type is "time saving A", "time saving C", and "latent probability fluctuation B", the opening/closing pattern of the probability variable area 75 is set to "A", and the jackpot type is "time saving B", "latent probability fluctuation". If the jackpot type is "variation A" and "latent probability variation C", the opening/closing pattern of the probability variable area 75 is set to "B", and if the jackpot type is "probability variation A", the opening/closing pattern of the probability variable area 75 is set to "C". .

In the process of S411, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the current jackpot is "probability fluctuation A" (S411). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the state is "probability variation A" (S411: Yes), a probability variation notification command is set to notify the player of the "probability variation state" (S412). , ends the jackpot process (S103) and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

The probability change notification command set in the process of S412 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 23) to be executed next. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 is configured to execute a ``probability change notification mode'' in order to notify the player that the probability change notification command is received, that the probability change notification command is received.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S411 that it is not "probability variation A" (S411: No), the process of S412 is skipped so as not to set the probability variation notification command, since the gaming state will not be clearly notified. , ends the main jackpot process (S103) and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

In the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, when the audio lamp control device 113 has not received the above-mentioned probability change notification command, when the jackpot being executed ends, the "time saving notification performance mode" is executed without exception for the performance after the jackpot. The system is configured so that it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize whether the game is in a "probability fluctuation state" or a "time reduction state."

In the process of S401, if it is determined that the jackpot has already been won (S401: Yes), a big winning opening opening/closing control process (S413) that executes opening/closing control of the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74. Execute.

Here, with reference to FIG. 28, the jackpot opening/closing control process (S413), which is one process of the jackpot process (S103) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing control process (S413). As described above, in this jackpot opening/closing control process (S413), the opening/closing control of the variable winning openings 72, 74 is controlled based on the number of openings of the variable winning openings 72, 74 set in the jackpot processing (S103), Opening/closing control of the probability variable area 75 and various processes based on the passage of the ball to the variable winning devices 72, 74 or the probability variable area 75 are executed. In addition, in this big winning opening opening/closing control process (S413), it may be configured to perform a valid setting process or a invalid setting process for the variable probability area 75.

In this jackpot opening/closing control process (S413), first, it is determined whether the opening time at the time of the current jackpot or the interval time between each round (for example, "1 second") has elapsed (S421) . As a result of the determination, if the opening time or the interval time has not elapsed (S421: No), the opening condition for either variable prize winning device 72, 74 has not yet been satisfied, so the process of S422 is skipped and the process is continued. The process moves to S423. On the other hand, if the opening time or the interval time has elapsed (S421: Yes), the opening condition for either of the variable winning devices 72, 74 has been established, so the opening setting process for the variable winning devices 72, 74 is performed (S422 ), the process moves to S423.

Here, with reference to FIG. 29, the open setting process (S422) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the release setting process (S422). As described above, in this opening setting process (S422), various setting processes for opening the variable winning devices 72, 74 and the variable probability area 75 are executed.

In this opening setting process (S422), first, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to open the variable prize winning devices 72, 74 (S431). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that it is not the timing to open the variable winning devices 72, 74 (S431: No), the processing of S432 to S437 is skipped and the process moves to S438, while the variable winning devices 72, If it is determined that it is the opening timing of 74 (S431: Yes), it is determined whether it is the opening timing of either variable winning device 72 or 74 (S432). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that it is the timing to open the first variable winning device 72 (S432: "first variable winning device"), the timing for opening the first opening/closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 is The first variable winning device opening setting is performed (S433), and the process moves to S435. By performing this first variable winning device opening setting process, the first big winning hole solenoid 72b is driven, the first opening/closing plate 72a is opened, and balls can flow into the first variable winning device 72.

On the other hand, in the process of S432, if it is determined that it is the timing to open the second variable winning device 74 (S432: "Second variable winning device"), the second opening/closing plate 74a of the second variable winning device 74 is opened. The second variable prize-winning device opening setting is performed in order to do so (S434), and the process moves to S435. By performing this second variable winning device opening setting process, the second big winning hole solenoid 74b is driven, the second opening/closing plate 74a is opened, and balls can flow into the second variable winning device 74.

Next, in the process of S435, in order to count the balls that have won into the opened variable winning devices 72 and 74, the winning counter is set to "10" (S435), and the process moves to S436. In the first embodiment, the value of this winning counter is configured to be decremented by 1 each time one ball enters the open variable winning devices 72, 74, and the MPU 201 After the devices 72, 74 are opened, the open variable winning devices 72, 74 are closed when a predetermined opening time has elapsed or when the value of the winning counter becomes "0". It is configured.

Next, in the process of S436, the maximum opening time (for example, "30 seconds") of the variable winning devices 72, 74 is set (S436), and the variable winning devices 72, 74 are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 that the variable winning devices 72, 74 are open. A release command indicating this is set (S437), and the process moves to S438. The release command set in the process of S437 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is then executed during the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 23). It is sent to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the release command, it outputs a sound indicating that the round has started, controls the lamp, etc., and also sends a display release command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 , based on the reception of the display opening command, controls the third symbol display device 81 to display a round effect (for example, round number notification, suggestion of the variable prize winning device 72, 74 that is opened, etc.) .

Next, in the process of S438, based on the probability variable area opening/closing table 202g set according to the jackpot type in the jackpot process (see FIG. 27), it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the probability variable area 75 in the round (S438 ). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the probability variable area 75 (for example, the second round of the jackpot type "time saving A") (S438: No), the processing of S439 to S443 is skipped and this opening setting is changed. The process (S422) is ended and the process returns to the grand prize opening opening/closing control process (see FIG. 28). On the other hand, in the process of S438, if the opening timing of the probability variable area 75 (for example, at the start of the first round in the jackpot type "probability variation A") (S438: Yes), the probability variable area where the opening time of the probability variable area 75 is counted The value of the release timer 203g is set to "7500" (S439), and the process moves to S440.

In the process of S439, the value of the probability variable area opening timer 203g is set to "7500" which corresponds to "3 seconds" which is the opening time of the probability variable area 75 (i.e., 7500 x 4 ms (execution interval of timer interrupt processing) = 30000 ms). is set, and the value of the variable probability region opening timer 203g is subtracted by "1" each time the passage determination process (see FIG. 30) that will be executed later is executed (see S458 in FIG. 30). When the value of the probability variable area opening timer 203g is larger than "0", the open state of the probability variable area 75 is maintained, and when the value of the probability variable area opening timer 203g becomes "0", Control is performed to close the open variable probability region 75.

Next, in the process of S440, the probability variable area solenoid 75b is turned on (S440), and the process moves to S441. The variable variable area solenoid 75b turned on here is maintained in the on state until the value of the variable variable area release timer 203g becomes "0", and when the value of the variable variable area release timer 203g reaches "0", the variable variable area solenoid 75b is turned on. It is switched to the off state (see S460 in FIG. 30).

Next, in the process of S441, a probability variable area release command is set to the audio lamp control device 113 to indicate that the probability variable area 75 has been released (S441), and the process proceeds to S442. The variable probability region release command set in the process of S441 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process of the timer interrupt process to be executed next (see S101 in FIG. 23). and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

Upon receiving the probability variable area opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a sound indicating that the probability variable area 75 has been opened if a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the "character selection" effect is not executed). output, lamp control, etc., as well as a variable area open notification indicating that the variable area 75 is open (for example, "Aim for V!", ``V is open'', and the rest of the variable area 75 that is open). control to execute (display or audio output) (time notification, etc.).

Next, in the process of S442, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to enable the variable probability region 75 (S442). In the first embodiment, the opening timing and the valid timing of the variable probability region 75 are configured to be synchronized. As a result of the determination in S442, if it is determined that it is the timing to enable the variable variable area 75 (S442: Yes), that is, if it is determined that it is the timing to start opening the variable variable area 75, the variable variable area valid flag 203h is set. is set to ON (S443), this opening setting process (S422) is ended, and the process returns to the big winning opening opening/closing control process (see FIG. 28). On the other hand, in the process of S442, if it is determined that it is not the timing to enable the probability variable area 75 (S442: No), the process of S443 is skipped, this opening setting process (S422) is ended, and the big prize is won. Returning to the mouth opening/closing control process (see FIG. 28).

Returning to FIG. 28, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S423, it is determined whether a ball has flowed into each variable winning device 72, 74, probability variable area 75, or discharge passage 76 (winning or passing), and each process is executed based on the determination result. A determination process (S423) is performed, and the process moves to S424.

Here, with reference to FIG. 30, the passage determination process (S423) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the passage determination process (S423). As described above, in this passage determination process (S423), the balls are detected by the switches 72c, 74c, 75c, and 76a provided in the variable winning devices 72, 74, the probability variable area 75, or the discharge passage 76. or passing) is detected, and each process is executed based on the detection result.

In this passage determination process (S423), first, it is determined whether or not the first big prize opening switch 72c is turned on (S451). This determination is performed not only when the first variable winning device 72 is open but also when the first variable winning device 72 is closed. With this configuration, the first variable winning device 72 is closed before the ball that flows in while the first variable winning device 72 is open is detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c. In this case, it is possible to pay out a prize ball based on the ball. Therefore, by determining the validity of the balls that have flowed in while the first variable winning device 72 is open and assigning a gaming value to them, it is possible to make as many balls flow into the first variable winning device 72 and obtain a large amount of gaming value. It is possible to create a gameplay experience in which players are asked whether they can win or not, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the process of S451, if the first big winning opening switch 72c is turned on (S451: Yes), the first big winning opening switch 72c indicates to the audio lamp control device 113 that a ball has been detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c. A big winning opening winning command is set (S452), and the process moves to S455. The first big winning opening winning command set in the process of S452 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process of the timer interrupt process to be executed next (see S101 in FIG. 23). ) is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the first grand prize opening winning command, it outputs a sound indicating that a ball has won in the first variable winning device 72, controls the lamp, etc., and also outputs a sound indicating that a ball has won a prize in the first variable winning device 72, and also outputs an acquired prize ball based on the winning prize. Control is performed to notify the number (display or audio output).

On the other hand, in the process of S451, if the first big winning opening switch 72c is not turned on (S451: No), then it is determined whether the second big winning opening switch 74c is turned on (S453). This determination is made not only when the second variable winning device 74 is open, but also when the second variable winning device 74 is closed, similar to the first big winning opening switch 72c. With this configuration, the second variable winning device 74 is closed before the ball that flows in while the second variable winning device 74 is open is detected by the second big winning opening switch 74c. In this case, it is possible to pay out a prize ball based on the ball. Therefore, by determining the validity of the balls that have flowed in while the second variable winning device 74 is open and assigning a gaming value to them, it is possible to make as many balls flow into the second variable winning device 74 and obtain a large amount of gaming value. It is possible to create a gameplay experience in which players are asked whether they can win or not, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the process of S453, if the second big winning port switch 74c is turned on (S453: Yes), a second message indicating that a ball has been detected by the second big winning port switch 74c to the audio lamp control device 113 is displayed. A big winning opening winning command is set (S454), and the process moves to S455. The second grand prize opening winning command set in the process of S454 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process of the timer interrupt process to be executed next (see S101 in FIG. 23). ) is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the second grand prize opening winning command, it outputs a sound indicating that a ball has won to the second variable winning device 74, controls the lamp, etc., and also outputs a sound indicating that a ball has won a prize in the second variable winning device 74, and also outputs an acquired prize ball based on the winning prize. Control is performed to notify the number (display or audio output).

Next, in the process of S455, the permissible time period after a ball flows into the attacker unit 71 (i.e., the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74) becomes detectable by the probability variable area switch 75c. Measurement of the residence (possible) time is started (S455), and then the process moves to S456.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a ball is detected by the first big winning port switch 72c or the second big winning port switch 74c, a predetermined residence allowable time (for example, whether the first big winning port switch 72c The ball is configured to be able to flow into the position of the probability variable area switch 75c within 10 seconds if the second big prize opening switch 74c is used, and 5 seconds if the second big prize opening switch 74c is installed. In other words, in a state where the allowable stay time is not set based on the detection of the ball of the first big winning port switch 72c or the second big winning port switch 74c (that is, after the allowable staying time or more has elapsed), the probability change area switch If the switch 75c is turned on, there is a possibility that the probability variable area switch 75c was turned on due to fraudulent activity or an abnormality. Therefore, in the process of S455, based on the detection of the ball by the first big winning port switch 72c or the second big winning port switch 74c, the allowable residence time in the attacking unit 71 of the ball that has flowed into the attacking unit 71 is set, By configuring the "probability variation state" to be set only based on the detection of the probability variation area switch 75c within the permissible residence time, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the "probability variation state" due to fraud or abnormality.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a ball is detected by the first big winning port switch 72c or the second big winning port switch 74c, the ball is moved to the disposed position of the discharge switch 76a within the above-mentioned residence allowable time. is configured to allow inflow. In other words, the ejection switch 76a is activated in a state where the allowable residence time is not set based on the detection of the ball of the first big prize opening switch 72c or the second big prize opening switch 74c (that is, after the permissible staying time or more has elapsed). is turned on, or if the ball is not detected by the discharge switch 76a within the residence allowable time set based on the detection of the ball by the first big winning port switch 72c or the second big winning port switch 74c, the attacker unit There is a possibility that the ball is stuck inside 71. Therefore, in the process of S455, based on the detection of the ball by the first big winning port switch 72c or the second big winning port switch 74c, the allowable residence time in the attacking unit 71 of the ball that has flowed into the attacking unit 71 is set, If a ball is not detected by the discharge switch 76a within the allowable residence time, it is configured to suggest that a winning abnormality such as ball clogging has occurred in the attacker unit 71. With this configuration, it becomes possible to detect an abnormal state such as ball clogging in the attacker unit 71 at an early stage.

Next, in the process of S456, 15 prize balls are awarded to the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 based on the passage of the ball to the first big winning port switch 72c or the second big winning port switch 74c. A 15 prize balls command indicating that the balls will be paid out is set (S456), and the process moves to S457. The 15 prize balls command set in the process of S456 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent during the external output process (see S101 in FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. Then, it is transmitted to the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113.

When the payout control device 111 receives the 15 prize balls command, it drives the payout unit 93 (see FIG. 2) to perform payout control to pay out 15 prize balls.

In addition, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the 15 prize balls command, it outputs a sound indicating that 15 prize balls have been paid out, controls the lamp, etc., and also outputs a sound to the third symbol display device 81. A prize ball number command for adding up the cumulative number of prize balls acquired by the player is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the prize ball number command from the audio lamp control device 113, it executes display control to add the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number command to the value of the cumulative prize ball number display.

Next, in the process of S457, it is determined whether the value of the variable probability region open timer 203g is greater than "0" (S457). If the value of the variable probability region open timer 203g is greater than "0" (S457: Yes), the variable probability region 75 is being opened, so opening/closing control regarding the variable probability region 75 is performed in S458 to S460, and the process proceeds to S461. On the other hand, if the value of the variable probability region release timer 203g is "0" (S457: No), the processes of S458 to S460 are skipped and the process proceeds to S461.

As for the opening/closing control of the variable variable area 75 in S458 to S460, on the premise that the value of the variable variable area open timer 203g is greater than "0", the value of the variable variable area open timer 203g is subtracted by "1" (S458), and then, It is determined whether the value of the variable probability region open timer 203g, which has been subtracted by "1" in S458, is still a value greater than "0" (S459). As a result of the determination, if the value of the probability variable region opening timer 203g is not larger than "0" (S459: No), that is, if the value of the probability variable region opening timer 203g becomes "0", the probability variable region 75 is closed. It is determined that the timing has arrived, and the probability variable area solenoid 75b is set to OFF (S460), and the process proceeds to S461. On the other hand, in the process of S459, if it is determined that the value of the probability variable area opening timer 203g is a value larger than "0" (S459: Yes), the closing timing of the probability variable area 75 has not yet arrived, so S460 This process is skipped and the process proceeds to S461.

Next, in the process of S461, it is determined whether the variable probability region switch 75c is turned on (S461). As a result of the determination, if the variable probability region switch 75c is turned on (S461: Yes), the ball has entered the variable probability region 75, and then it is determined whether the permissible residence time set in S455 has not elapsed. It is determined (S462). As a result of the determination, if it is not within the permissible residence time (S462: No), that is, if the permissible residence time has elapsed, the probability variable area switch 75c detects a ball that exceeds the permissible residence time, and an abnormal winning is detected. Therefore, the process moves to S468. On the other hand, in the process of S462, if it is within the allowable residence time (S462: Yes), this means that the normal probability variable area switch 75c is detected while the attacker unit 71 is open, so the process moves to S463.

Next, in the process of S463, it is determined whether the variable probability region valid flag 203h is set to on (S463). As a result of the determination, if the probability variable area valid flag 203h is set to ON (S463: Yes), the ball enters the probability variable area 75 in a situation where the probability variable area 75 is set to be valid, so the jackpot is determined. In order to generate a "probability variation state" after the end of , the probability variation shift flag 203i is set to ON (S464), and the process moves to S465. On the other hand, in the process of S463, if the probability variable area valid flag 203h is not set to ON (S463: No), this is because the ball has entered the probability variable area 75 in a situation where the probability variable area 75 is not set to be valid. , skips the process of S464 and moves the process to S465.

In addition, in the process of S461, if the variable probability region switch 75c is not turned on (S461: No), the variable probability region switch 75c has not detected a ball and the ball has not flowed into the variable probability region 75, so the processing from S462 to The process of S464 is skipped and the process moves to S465.

Next, in the process of S465, it is determined whether the discharge switch 76a is turned on (S465). As a result of the determination, if the discharge switch 76a is not turned on (S465: No), the processes of S466 to S468 are skipped, this passage determination process (S423) is ended, and the process is carried out by the big prize opening/closing control shown in FIG. The process moves to S424 of the process (S413). On the other hand, if the ejection switch 76a is turned on (S465: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the ejection passage 76, and therefore the ejection detection command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 to indicate that the ball has passed through the ejection passage 76. is set (S466), and the process moves to S467. The ejection detection command set in the process of S466 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 23) that is executed next. It is sent to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ejection detection command, it outputs a sound indicating that the ball that has entered the attacker unit 71 has been ejected out of the attacker unit 71, performs lamp control, and the like.

Next, in the process of S467, it is determined whether or not it is within the permissible staying time set based on the detection of the ball by the first big prize opening switch 72c or the second big winning opening switch 74c (S467), and within the permissible staying time. It is determined whether a ball is detected by the ejection switch 76a (S467). As a result of the determination, if the residence time is within the allowable time (S467: Yes), the ball has been detected by the discharge switch 76a normally, so the process of S468 is skipped, this passing determination process (S423) is ended, and the process is continued. The process proceeds to S424 of the big winning opening opening/closing control process in FIG. On the other hand, if the allowable staying time has elapsed (S467: No), the ball is detected by the discharge switch 76a after the allowable staying time has elapsed, and this is an abnormal winning, so the process moves to S468.

In the process of S468, based on the detection of the ball by the probability variable area switch 75c or the ejection switch 76a after the allowed residence time has elapsed, a winning abnormality indicating that a winning abnormality such as a fraudulent act or a ball clogging in the attacker unit 71 has occurred is detected. A command is set (S468), this passage determination process (S423) is ended, and the process moves to S424 of the big winning opening opening/closing control process in FIG.

The winning abnormality command set in the process of S468 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is then executed during the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 23). It is sent to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning abnormality command, it outputs a sound indicating that an abnormal state such as illegal activity or ball jamming in the attacker unit 71 has occurred, performs lamp control, etc. With this configuration, it is possible to early discover irregularities in winnings, such as fraudulent activity against the attacker unit 71 or ball jamming.

In addition, in the passage determination process (S423), the permissible residence time is counted, and when the permissible residence time has elapsed, a winning abnormality command indicating that a winning abnormality such as ball clogging has occurred in the attacker unit 71 is issued. It may also be configured to output.

Returning to FIG. 28, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S424, it is determined whether either variable winning device 72, 74 is open (S424). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that neither variable winning device 72, 74 is open (S424: No), the process of S425 is skipped and this big winning opening/closing control process (S413) is ended. , the process moves to S414 of jackpot processing (see FIG. 27). On the other hand, if it is determined that one of the variable winning devices 72, 74 is open (S424: Yes), a process is performed to determine whether the closing condition for the variable winning device 72, 74 that is open is satisfied. , performs a closing condition determination process (S424) in which the variable prize winning devices 72, 74 are closed based on the determination process.

Here, with reference to FIG. 31, the closing condition determination process (S424) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the closing condition determination process (S424). As described above, in this closing condition determination process (S424), it is determined whether the closing condition for either of the open variable prize winning devices 72, 74 is satisfied, and based on the determination result, A process for closing the variable prize winning devices 72 and 74 is executed.

In this closing condition determination process (S424), first, it is determined whether or not one opening time of the variable prize winning devices 72, 74 set in the above-mentioned opening time setting process (see S436 in FIG. 29) has elapsed. (S471). In the process of S471, if the opening time of the variable winning devices 72, 74 has elapsed (S471: Yes), the closing condition of the open variable winning devices 72, 74 is satisfied, and the variable winning devices in that round are closed. 72, 74, the value of the prize winning counter is cleared to "0" (S472), and the process moves to S478 in order to close the variable prize winning devices 72, 74. The closing process of the variable prize winning devices 72 and 74 from S478 will be described later. On the other hand, in the process of S471, if the opening time of the variable winning devices 72, 74 has not elapsed (S471: No), then the ball enters the variable winning devices 72, 74 that are open, and one of the variable winning devices 72, 74 wins. It is determined whether the big prize opening switches 72c, 74c are turned on (S473).

In the process of S473, if either of the big prize opening switches 72c, 74c is turned on (S473: Yes), a ball has won in either of the variable winning devices 72, 74, so the value of the winning prize counter is It is subtracted by 1 (S474), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the prize winning counter that has been subtracted by 1 is greater than "0" (S475). If the value of the winning counter is not larger than "0" (S475: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is less than or equal to "0", 10 balls are won in the open variable winning devices 72, 74. Since the conditions for closing the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are satisfied, the process moves to S478 in order to close the variable winning devices 72 and 74 that are open. In addition, in the first embodiment, it is configured to control the awarding of prize balls, etc. based on the detection of each big winning hole switch 72c, 74c in the passage determination process (see FIG. 30), but the process of S473 In this case, the awarding of prize balls, etc. may be controlled based on the detection of each of the big prize opening switches 72c and 74c.

On the other hand, in the process of S473, if neither of the big prize opening switches 72c, 74c is turned on (S473: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the timing to invalidate the probability variable area 75 (S476). In the first embodiment, the variable probability region 75 is configured to be enabled or disabled in synchronization with the opening and closing of the variable probability region 75, and the timing for disabling the variable probability region 75 is the timing when the variable probability region 75 is closed. If it is determined that the timing is the same (S476: Yes), the probability variable area valid flag 203h is set to OFF (S477), this closing condition determination process (S424) is ended, and the process is changed to the big winning opening opening/closing control process (S477). (See Figure 28).

In addition, in S476, if it is determined that it is not the timing to invalidate the probability variable area 75 (including the state in which the probability variable area 75 is invalid in the first place) (S476: No), the process of S477 is not performed and this closing condition determination process is performed. (S424) is ended, and the process returns to the grand prize opening/closing control process (see FIG. 28). In addition, in the process of S475, if it is determined that the value of the winning prize counter is larger than "0" (S475: Yes), the closing condition for the open variable winning devices 72 and 74 is not satisfied. In order to continue opening the variable winning devices 72 and 74, this closing condition determination process (S424) is ended and the process returns to the big winning opening opening/closing control process (see FIG. 28).

In the closing process of the variable winning devices 72, 74 from S478, first, the closing setting of the variable winning devices 72, 74 is performed (S478), and the big winning opening solenoids 72b, 74b are turned off to close the opening/closing plates 72a, 74a. . Next, a closing command indicating that the variable prize winning devices 72, 74 are closed is set in the audio lamp control device 113 (S479), and the process moves to S480. Note that the closing command set in the process of S479 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 23) to be executed next. and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the closing command, it outputs a voice indicating that one round has ended, controls the lamp, etc., and transmits a display closing command to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 ends the round production (for example, round number notification) being executed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display close command, and if the jackpot continues, the interval time Control is performed to switch to an interval display (i.e., "character selection" display, etc. described later) depending on the presence or absence of a round display, and a round display indicating the start of the next round is performed, and when a jackpot ends, a jackpot is displayed. Performs control to terminate the process.

Next, in the process of S480, since 1 round in the jackpot has been completed, the value of the round counter is subtracted by 1 (S480), and it is determined whether the value of the round counter subtracted by 1 is a value larger than "0". (S481). If the value of the round counter is larger than "0" (S481: Yes), the number of rounds in the jackpot (remaining number of openings of the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74) remains. Therefore, it is determined whether there is an interval time (for example, "2 seconds") until the next first variable winning device 72 or second variable winning device 74 is opened (S482). As a result of the determination, if there is an interval time (S482: Yes), a predetermined interval time (in the first embodiment, "2 seconds") is set (S483), and then a message is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. An interval command indicating that both the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are closed is set (S484), this closing condition determination process (S424) is ended, and the process starts with the big winning opening/closing control process (see FIG. 28). return. Note that the interval command set in the process of S484 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used during the external output process (see S101 in FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the interval command, it recognizes that both the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are closed, and if it is the first interval command in the jackpot, the audio lamp control device 113 performs a command related to the "character selection" effect. It performs control, etc., and transmits a display character selection effect command to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to switch to and display the "character selection" effect based on the reception of the display character selection effect command.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the opening pattern (opening timing) of the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 is configured to be different for each jackpot type, and also for each jackpot type. The opening patterns (opening timings) of the variable probability regions 75 are configured to be different. Therefore, by recognizing the jackpot type, the audio lamp control device 113 can also recognize the opening pattern of each variable winning device 72, 74 and the opening pattern of the probability variable area 75, and as a result, it can also calculate the interval time. Although it is possible, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the opening pattern of each variable winning device 72, 74 and the opening pattern of the probability variable area 75 for each jackpot type based only on the jackpot type command sent from the main control device 110. If the effects and the like are controlled while determining the interval time, the processing becomes complicated and the control burden increases. Therefore, from the main control device 110, an open command indicating that each variable winning device 72, 74 has been released, a variable variable area opening command indicating that the variable variable winning area 75 has been released, and a variable winning device 72, 74 are both activated. The control burden on the audio lamp control device 113 is reduced by receiving interval commands indicating that the lamp is closed and performing various controls based on each command based on the timing at which each command is received. At the same time, it is possible to perform appropriate effects according to the timing of each event.

On the other hand, in the process of S482, if it is determined that there is no interval time (S482: No), the processes of S483 and S484 are skipped, this closing condition determination process (S424) is ended, and the big winning opening opening/closing control is Return to the process (see FIG. 28).

In addition, in the process of S481, if the value of the round counter is not larger than "0" (S481: No), that is, if the value of the round counter is less than or equal to "0", the variable winning device 72 in this jackpot, Since all 74 opening operations have been completed, in order to end the jackpot state, the closing condition determination process (S424) is finished, and the jackpot process (see FIG. 27) of S414 is performed.

Returning to FIG. 27, the explanation will be continued. After executing the big winning opening control process (S413), it is determined whether the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S414). In the closing condition determination process (see FIG. 31) of the above-mentioned big winning opening opening/closing control process, the value of the round counter is decremented as the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are closed (see FIG. 31). (see S480), if the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S414: Yes), in order to continue the jackpot, the process of S415 is skipped and this jackpot process (S103) is executed. The process ends and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

On the other hand, if the value of the round counter is not larger than "0", that is, if the value of the round counter is "0" or less (S414: No), the jackpot termination condition is satisfied, so the jackpot is In order to end the process, a jackpot ending process is executed (S415), this jackpot process (S103) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

Here, with reference to FIG. 32, the jackpot end process (S415), which is one process of the jackpot process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (S415). As mentioned above, in this jackpot end processing (S415), the end setting control of the jackpot, such as the setting of the ending time (for example, "5 seconds"), the inflow of balls into the probability variable area 75 during the jackpot, and the jackpot type are controlled. The setting control of the gaming state after a jackpot is executed based on the above.

In this jackpot end process (S415), first, it is determined whether or not the probability change transition flag 203i is turned on (S491). As a result of the determination, if the variable probability transition flag 203i is turned on (S491: Yes), it indicates that the ball passed through the effectively set variable probability region 75 during this jackpot. Therefore, since the conditions for transition to the "probability fluctuation state" are satisfied at this stage, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot will remain in the "probability fluctuation state" until the dynamic display of the special symbol (fluctuation effect) is executed 100 times. '', the value of the ST counter is set to ``100'' (S492), the probability change shift flag 203i is set to OFF (S493), and the process proceeds to S494.

On the other hand, in the process of S491, if the probability change transition flag 203i is not turned on (S491: No), the ball does not pass through the validly set probability variation region 75 during this jackpot, so the state changes to the "probability variation state". Since the transition condition is not satisfied, the processing in S492 and S493 is skipped and the processing shifts to S494.

In the process of S494, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is "probability variation A", "latent probability variation C", or "time saving C" (S494). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is one of "probability fluctuation A", "latent probability fluctuation C", or "time saving C" (S494: Yes), the gaming state after the jackpot is In order to add the "time-saving function" until the dynamic display (variable performance) of the special symbol is executed 100 times, the value of the time-saving counter is set to "100" (S495), and the process moves to S497.

On the other hand, in the process of S494, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not "probability variation A", "latent probability variation C", or "time saving C" (S494: No), that is, the current jackpot type is "time saving". A", "Time Saving B", "Latent Probability Variation A" or "Latent Probability Variation B", the dynamic display of the special symbol (variation effect) will change the gaming state after the jackpot is over by 50%. In order to add the "time-saving function" until the time-saving function is executed, the value of the time-saving counter is set to "50" (S496), and the process moves to S497.

Next, in the process of S497, an ending command indicating the start of a jackpot ending performance is set for the audio lamp control device 113 (S497). Then, a jackpot end setting process for setting the ending time, etc. is performed (S498), this jackpot end process (S415) is ended, and the process returns to the jackpot process (see FIG. 27). Note that the ending command set in the process of S497 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process of the timer interrupt process to be executed next (see S101 in FIG. 23). and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it outputs a sound indicating that the jackpot is over, controls the lamp, etc., and also transmits an ending command for display to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114, Based on the reception of the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 is controlled to display an ending effect (for example, a suggestion of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot, etc.).

In this way, in each process in the jackpot process (see FIG. 27), the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are controlled to open and close, and the probability variable area 75 is controlled to open and close, and the probability variable area 75 that is set to be valid is controlled. When a ball passes through, a "probability fluctuation state" is generated after the jackpot is completed. With this configuration, in each round, the variable winning device can determine whether the variable probability area 75 is opened or not, and allow balls to flow into the variable probability area 75 at the timing when the variable probability area 75 is opened. 72, 74 (that is, the second variable winning device 74) can be created to create a gameplay that depends on whether or not they are opened, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the NMI interrupt process executed in main controller 110 when a power outage or the like occurs will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like.

Through this NMI interrupt processing, information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, and stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the power failure occurrence information setting (S801 ), the NMI interrupt processing ends.

Note that the above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In the start-up process, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational, a wait process (in the first embodiment, “1 second”) is performed. ) is executed (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process moves to S911. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). , since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process also moves to S911 in this case.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process also moves to S911 in such a case.

Note that, as will be explained in S926 of FIG. 35, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S911, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S911). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S912, S913).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM 203 initialization process (S912, S913) is executed. In addition, in the case where power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S912, S913) is similarly executed. . In the RAM 203 initialization process (S912, S913), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S912), and then an initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S913). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Then, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start ball payout control while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, interrupts are permitted (S910). Then, the process moves to main processing (see FIG. 35), which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a description will be given of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up processing described above. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is broadly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

In the main process, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S921). If the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S921: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S922, S923).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S922). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and the counter value reaches the maximum value ("899", "99" in the first embodiment), , clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process in S107 (see FIG. 23) (S923), and the process moves to S921.

Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 23 is activated and executed at predetermined time intervals ("4 milliseconds" in the first embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during a jackpot, control is performed to open and close the variable winning devices 72 and 74, and if a ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67, display control regarding the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 83 is performed. will be held. In addition, in the jackpot lottery executed when starting the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37, the number of jackpot random numbers compared with the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether it is in a high probability state or a low probability state. It's coming. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process will vary depending on the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes depending on the state of the game at the time.

The processes of S922 and S923 described above, which are part of the main process, are executed within the remaining time of this timer interrupt process. In other words, since the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated in the same way. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the jackpot random number counter C1 and the common symbol random number counter C4 are updated using these as initial values for updating. It can have randomness.

In addition, in the process of S921, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S921: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 33 has been executed, so that the process at power-off after S924 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S924), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and transmits it (S925). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S926), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S927), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S921 is executed at the end of one cycle of the processes in S922 and S923, which are performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). As a result, in the main processing of the main controller 110, various settings by the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) are completed, and at the timing when each counter CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 has been updated, information on the occurrence of power outage is generated. has been confirmed. Therefore, when recovering from a power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S921 after the start-up process (see FIG. 34) is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S921, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved during power-off processing, the stack pointer is saved during the initial setting process (S901). By setting it to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S921. As a result, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

In the first embodiment, the process to be executed periodically is executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and in the main process (see FIG. 35), each counter is Although we have described the case where CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated, some or all of the processing that was being executed in the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 23) can be performed as specified in the main processing (see Figure 35). It may be configured to be executed every time (for example, "4 milliseconds"). For example, the prize ball counting signal and payout abnormal signal reading process (S102), the jackpot process (S103), and the normal power control process (S104) that were executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) in the first embodiment And some or all of the switch reading process (S105), start winning process (S108), gate passage process (S109), special figure variation process (S110), regular figure variation process (S111), and launch control process (S112) , may be configured to be executed every "4 milliseconds" in the main processing (see FIG. 35) instead of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23).

In this case, a step is provided in the main process (see Figure 35) to determine whether a predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has elapsed, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the step is executed every predetermined time. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As a result, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated during the remaining time of the process that is executed at predetermined time intervals, but the process that is executed at predetermined time intervals is executed depending on the state of the game. Since the time required for this changes, even with this configuration, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be randomly updated.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into a start-up process (see FIG. 36) that is started upon power-on, and a main process (see FIG. 37) that is executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 36, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When startup processing is executed, first, initialization processing associated with power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage"), resulting in the power-off processing in S1115 (see Figure 37). ) is started during execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 37, upon receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1115. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1115 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing in S1115 was started. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process moves to S1004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process moves to S1008.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process moves to S1004. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off process in S1115 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process moves to S1008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power outage occurs, and during the execution of the power-off process in S1115, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is in the middle of execution, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to "0".

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), a keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S1006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You can also do this.

In the process of S1008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1116 is executed (see S1115 in FIG. 37). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1116 is executed, so the reason why the process in S1008 is reached with the power-off flag on is because the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), the interrupt Permission is set (S1011) and the process moves to main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process reaches S1008 with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after the power was completely shut off, so the process goes through S1004 to S1006 and then S1008. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is processing to clear the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process moves to S1010, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), interrupt permission is set. (S1011), and the process moves to main processing.

Note that the reason why the clearing process in S1009 is skipped is because if the process has reached S1008 from S1004 via the process in S1006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1004. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not "1 millisecond" or more has passed since the previous processing of S1101 was executed (S1101), and if "1 millisecond" or more has not passed ( S1101: No), the process proceeds to S1110 without performing the processes of S1102 to S1109. In the process of S1101, determining whether "1 millisecond" has elapsed is not necessary in S1102 to S1109 in a short cycle (within "1 millisecond"), but in S1110. This is because the fluctuation effect processing in S1111 and the command determination processing in S1111 are processes that are preferably executed in short cycles. By executing the process in S1111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands sent from the main controller 110, and by executing the process in S1110 in a short cycle, commands received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, settings regarding variable effects can be made without delay.

In the process of S1101, if it is determined that "1 millisecond" or more has elapsed since the last time the process of S1101 was executed (S1101: Yes), the process moves to S1102. Note that if the process in S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 36, the process directly advances to S1102.

In the process of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S1103 to S1112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1107, which will be described later (S1103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S1104). . The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, "30 seconds") when the power is turned on. 227. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1105 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

Next, in the process of S1105, a jackpot performance process is performed to execute a performance related to the jackpot set by the command determination process of S1111, which will be described later (S1105), and the process moves to S1106.

Next, in the process of S1106, a frame button input monitoring/presentation process is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring/performance processing, during the valid period of the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the performance effect, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed is monitored, and This is a process of setting to perform a corresponding effect when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed.

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation process (S1106) is finished, a lamp editing process is then executed (S1107), and then a sound editing/output process is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1108, a liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (S1109), and the process moves to S1110. In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable presentation performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process in S1107 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal performance execution monitoring process, and the sound editing/output process in S1108 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable performance performed on the third symbol display device 81. executed in time.

In the process of S1110, in order to display a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable effect process is performed, which is a process for starting a variable effect based on the variable pattern command and stop type command received from the main control device 110. Execute. After the fluctuation effect processing, a command determination process is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1111), and the process moves to S1112. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In S1112, counter update processing is executed to update various counters provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1112). For example, a counter that determines a detailed variation pattern of a variation performance is updated during this counter update process. The counter is updated by sequentially incrementing the counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, "0 to 99") and returning it to "0" after reaching the maximum value ("99").

When the process of S1112 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1115), and the power-off process is executed (S1116). After executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1114: No), the process returns to S1101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he or she can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1111). This command determination process (S1111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 37) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command is received from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Determine which command was executed.

In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether a command from the main controller 110 is received in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 (S1201). As a result of the determination, if no command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1201: No), this command determination process (S1111) is ended and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 37).

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if a command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1201: Yes), the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out and analyzed, and the main controller 110, it is determined whether or not a probability change notification command has been received (S1202). If it is determined that the probability change notification command has been received (S1202: Yes), a "probability change notification effect mode" is set in order to notify the player of the "probability change state" (S1203).

Here, the "probability change notification presentation mode" means that when a jackpot occurs, the notification mode (for example, character display of "SUPER LUCKY!") in which a "probability change state" occurs after the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device. 81, and if a variation effect is in progress, the third symbol display device 81 displays text to indicate that a “probability variation state” is occurring, or changes the background color of the third symbol display device 81 to a normal color. By changing the background color to a different color (for example, from blue to red), the player is made aware that the game is in a "probability fluctuation state." Thereafter, this command determination process (S1111) is ended and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 37).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the audio lamp control device 113 does not receive the probability change notification command at the end of the jackpot, the "time saving notification effect" indicating the "time reduction state" is performed as the effect after the jackpot ends. The system is configured to execute all aspects of the system. In other words, even if the jackpot is a jackpot with the jackpot type "Latent probability variation A", "Latent probability variation B", or "Latent probability variation C", the jackpot is not notified to the player that it is in the "probability variation state". An effect equivalent to the type "time saving A", "time saving B", or "time saving C" is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, if the probability change notification command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S1202: No), then it is determined whether or not an interval command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1204). As a result of the determination, if an interval command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1204: Yes), the production mode after the jackpot is determined to confirm whether or not to execute the "character selection" production during this interval time. Determine whether or not the determining factor (for example, character A, character B, character C, character D, or character E) has not been set in the jackpot (in other words, whether or not it has already been selected) ( S1205).

As a result of the determination, if the "character selection" performance has not yet been executed in the jackpot and the character that will be the factor for determining the performance mode after the jackpot is not set (S1205: Yes), the game A "character selection" effect for allowing the user to select a character is set (eg, generating and transmitting a display character selection effect command to the display control device 114, etc.) (S1206).

In addition, even if the interval command is not received, if it is recognized that both variable prize winning devices 72 and 74 are closed, that is, if the opening command is not received immediately after receiving the closing command, the interval command is not received. It may be configured such that it is determined that the time has elapsed and a "character selection" effect is performed. Also, based on the reception of the second interval command in the first jackpot, the "character selection" performance may be executed again, or a performance different from the "character selection" performance (for example, the selected character appears) It may also be configured to perform a mini-game in which the player participates, a detailed movie production regarding the selected character, etc.).

Here, with reference to FIG. 39, the "character selection" effect executed during the interval period will be described. FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the "character selection" effect, and FIG. 39(a) shows the character "Character A" selected on the third symbol display device 81 during the interval period of the jackpot state. This is a diagram illustrating a "character selection" effect in which a selection screen appears, and FIG. 39(b) shows that the selection target has been changed from the state of FIG. 39(a) and "Character B" has been selected. It is a diagram illustrating a "character selection" effect in which a character selection screen appears.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in a jackpot (a jackpot type other than the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A"; the same applies hereinafter), at the start of the first interval time in the jackpot, the third symbol display device 81 displays The sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are erased, and the "character selection" effect is executed in the entire display area of the third symbol display device 81. In this "character" production, songs for five characters ("character A", "character B", "character C", "character D", and "character E") are configured to be selectable.

In this "character selection" performance, a plurality of character icons 81a corresponding to selectable characters are displayed in a superimposed and distinguishable manner, and the character icon 81a displayed in the foreground is the currently selected character. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 39(a), the character A icon 81a1 is displayed closest to the front and is displayed in an emphasized manner (for example, the characters are enlarged). There is. Then, on the rear side of the character A icon 81a1, a character B icon 81a2, a character C icon 81a3, a character D icon 81a4, and a character They are displayed in the order of E icons 81a5.

In addition to the character icon 81a, the character selection screen in this "character selection" performance includes a frame button icon 81b imitating the frame button 22, and an arrow icon (see upper left of the figure) indicating the direction in which the character icon 81a is to be changed. configured to be displayed.

The frame button icon 81b is a display object corresponding to the frame button 22, and is displayed in a manner imitating the shape of the frame button 22 at the lower right of the character selection screen. By displaying this frame button icon 81b on the character selection screen of the "character selection" performance, it is configured to indicate to the player that the pressing operation corresponding to the frame button 22 is valid.

The arrow icon is a display object that indicates the direction in which the character icon 81a is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, and is displayed near (on the left side) of the frame button icon 81b. This arrow icon is displayed so as to point from the depth direction of the screen to the front side of the screen, and in this pachinko machine 10, when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player, the arrow icon is displayed in a manner that corresponds to the display of the arrow icon. , the display position of the character icon 81a is changed.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 39(a), in the "character selection" performance, the character A icon 81a1 is displayed furthest to the front, and behind it, in order from the front, the character B icons 81a2, A character C icon 81a3, a character D icon 81a4, and a character E icon 81a5 are displayed. In this state, when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player, the character A icon 81a1 that was displayed furthest from the front is moved to the rear, and the character B that was displayed second from the front is displayed. The icon 81a2 is moved and displayed furthest to the front, the character C icon 81a3 that was displayed third from the front is moved and displayed to the second from the front, and the character D icon 81a4 that was displayed fourth from the front is moved from the front. The character E icon 81a5, which was moved and displayed third and displayed fifth from the front (that is, at the rearmost side), is moved and displayed fourth from the front (see FIG. 39(b)).

That is, when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player during the "character selection" performance, each of the character icons 81a starting from the second from the front are displayed moving from the depth direction toward the front by one step. , the character icon 81a that was displayed at the frontmost side is moved and displayed at the rearmost side. With this configuration, the player can change the character in the "character selection" effect.

Then, during the preset execution time of the "character selection" performance, that is, a predetermined time (for example, "10 seconds") that includes the time from the start to the end of the interval period and at least the middle of the next round. During this period, the "character selection" effect is executed, and at the timing when the predetermined period has elapsed, it is determined that the character corresponding to the character icon 81a displayed on the nearest side has been selected. That is, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, if the character A icon 81a1 is displayed furthest to the front, character A is selected, and if the character B icon 81a2 is displayed furthest to the front, character B is selected, and the character If the C icon 81a3 is displayed furthest to the front, character C is selected; if the character D icon 81a4 is displayed furthest to the front, character D is selected; and the character E icon 81a5 is displayed furthest to the front. If it is displayed, character E is selected.

The presentation mode after the end of the jackpot is configured to be different for each character selected by this "character selection" presentation. Specifically, for example, if character A is selected, an effect related to character A is executed, and a direct effect indicating that the character is in a "time reduction state" or "incubation probability variation state" is performed. The first direct suggestion production that includes expressions (e.g., ``Maybe it's time-saving!'' or ``It looks like you're hiding!'') is the first rate at the first interval (for example, every 20 variable productions). (For example, the probability is 1/10). In addition, when character B is selected, an effect related to character B is executed, and a second expression that includes an indirect expression as a suggestive effect indicating that the character is in a "time reduction state" or "incubation probability variation state" is executed. 1 indirect suggestion production (e.g., ``Time is short'', ``Something is lurking'', etc.) occurs at a second interval (for example, every 50 variable productions) that is longer than the first interval, and the second rate is higher than the first rate ( For example, it is executed with a probability of 1/3). Furthermore, if character C is selected, a production related to character C is executed, and furthermore, as a suggestion production indicating that the character is in a "time reduction state" or "incubation probability variation state", the first indirect suggestion production is further executed. The second indirect suggestion performance (e.g., "It's time", "Lie down!", etc.), which is executed with an abstract expression, is always executed at a third rate (for example, a probability of 1/20) that is lower than the first rate. be done. Additionally, if character D is selected, a performance related to character D will be executed, and the "time shortened state" will end as a hint that the "time shortened state" or "latency probability variation state" is in effect. In other words, at the timing of 100 times after the end of the jackpot, a second direct suggestion performance that includes more direct expressions than the first direct suggestion performance (for example, ``That was a short time'' or ``Don't stop yet! ” etc.) are always executed. Furthermore, if character E is selected, a performance related to character E is executed, and the third ratio is set by the player pressing the frame button 22 once for each variable performance. The above-described second indirect suggestion effect is executed with the same probability (that is, a probability of 1/20). In addition, in the suggestion presentation, the suggestion content is the exact opposite of the actual gaming state. ', etc.) are executed at a lower rate than the execution rate of each suggestion effect.

In this way, in the interval period that is executed before the start of the round in which the probability variable area 75 is opened, at least during the period in which the interval is being executed (for example, the period including the interval and the third round), the player ends the jackpot. It is configured such that a "character selection" performance is executed to determine the subsequent performance mode. By executing the "character selection" effect during the interval period, the player's attention is drawn to the "character selection" effect, and the degree of attention to the opening mode of the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 is relatively increased. At the same time, it is possible to reduce the degree of attention to the opening mode of the variable probability region 75. That is, by executing a "character selection" effect that is easy for the player to pay attention to during the interval period, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to recognize the result of the ball flowing into the variable probability area 75 that is opened. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the ball has passed through the probability variable area 75, and it is difficult for the player to recognize in which gaming state the player is playing the game after the jackpot is over. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that makes players guess. In addition, even if the player is in a "time reduction state" or "normal gaming state," the player is made to guess (internally) that it may be in a "probability fluctuation state" contrary to the production mode, and is forced to continue playing the game. By doing so, the operating rate of the pachinko machine can be improved.

In addition, when a player wins a jackpot, the player can select a character that will be a factor in determining the performance mode after the jackpot, so that the performance mode (character) that matches the player's taste in the performance after the jackpot can be selected. can be executed. In addition, the player can select a performance that suggests the content of the game state to be executed according to his/her own will, and it is possible to provide a wide variety of performances in which the player can participate. Therefore, it is possible to add further interest to the situation where the player is feeling the pleasure of winning a jackpot, and to improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 38, the explanation will be continued. After setting the "character selection" effect in S1206, this command determination process (S1111) is ended and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 37). In addition, in the process of S1205, if the "character selection" effect is not set in the jackpot, that is, if the "character selection" effect has already been executed during the jackpot (S1205: No), the process of S1206 The process is skipped, this command determination process (S1111) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 37).

In addition, if the interval command is not output, that is, in the case of the jackpot type "probability variation A", the "character selection" effect will be performed in a predetermined round (for example, the 10th round, which is the final round) even if the interval command is not received. may be configured so that it is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, if the interval command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S1204: No), then it is determined whether or not an open command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1207). As a result of the determination, if an opening command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1207: Yes), it is the start time of one of the rounds in the jackpot, so the number of rounds is set to notify the player of the number of rounds to be started. Settings for display (for example, generation and transmission of a display round number command to the display control device 114) are performed (S1208). After setting the round number display (S1208), the command determination process (S1111) is ended and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 37).

On the other hand, in the process of S1207, if the command received from the main control device 110 is not a release command (S1207: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning abnormality command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1209). . As a result of the determination, if a winning abnormality command is received from the main control device 110 (S1209: Yes), the player and The attacker unit winning abnormality notification to be shown to the hall personnel is set (S1210), this command determination process (S1111) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 37). In this attacker unit winning abnormality notification, as described above, an abnormality is detected in the output of the sound and lamp control indicating that an abnormal state such as fraudulent activity or ball jamming has occurred in the attacker unit 71, and in the third symbol display device 81. Performs time performances, etc. With this configuration, it is possible to early discover irregularities in winnings, such as fraudulent activity against the attacker unit 71 or ball jamming.

On the other hand, in the process of S1209, if the winning abnormality command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S1209: No), then it is determined whether or not the probability variable area opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1211). ). As a result of the determination, if the probability variable area release command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1211: Yes), first, in order to determine whether or not the probability variable area release notification is executable, the "character selection" performance is It is determined whether or not it is being executed (S1212). In the first embodiment, when the "character selection" effect is being executed, the effect reduces the degree of attention to the opening mode of the probability variable area 75, so the probability variable area contradicts the positioning of the "character selection" effect. It is configured not to perform release notification. Therefore, in the process of S1212, if it is determined that the "character selection" effect is being executed (S1212: Yes), the process of S1213 is skipped, the probability variable area opening notification is not performed, and this command determination process ( S1111) is finished, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 37).

On the other hand, in the process of S1212, if the "character selection" effect is not executed (S1212: No), it is possible to execute the probability variable area opening notification, so the probability variable area opening notification is set (S1213), and this The command determination process (S1111) is ended and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 37). In this probability variable area opening notification, the characters "Aim for V!" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate that the probability variable area 75 is open, and the output of the voice "Aim for V!" is controlled. I do. With this configuration, the player can be made aware of the opening of the variable probability region 75 in which the "probability variable state" can be obtained, and can be encouraged to shoot the ball.

On the other hand, in the process of S1211, if the probability variable area opening command is not received from the main controller 110 (S1211: No), processes corresponding to other commands are executed (S1214), and this command determination process (S1111) is executed. ) and returns to the main process (see FIG. 36).

Here, with reference to FIG. 40, the probability variable area release notification executed during the jackpot state will be described. FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram showing whether or not variable probability area opening notification is executed, and FIG. 40(a) illustrates a state where variable probability area opening notification is not executed on the third symbol display device 81 during a jackpot state. FIG. 40(b) is a diagram illustrating a state in which probability variable area opening notification is executed on the third symbol display device 81 during a jackpot state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, on the third symbol display device 81 during a jackpot, a round number display indicating the progress of the jackpot (i.e., the number of rounds) and a total number indicating the total number of prize balls obtained in the jackpot are displayed. A display of the number of winning prize balls, a firing mode suggestion display showing the firing mode of winning balls to the variable winning devices 72 and 74, and an opening suggestion display as a probability variable area opening notification indicating that the probability variable area 75 is open. is configured so that it can be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 40(a), "Round 1" is displayed as the number of rounds in the upper left part of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and "Round 1" is displayed in the lower left part of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. "0080 shots" is displayed as the number of award pitches acquired, and "hit right" as a firing mode suggestion display and an arrow pointing to the right side of the screen are displayed in the upper right part of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. There is. In addition, in FIG. 40(a), the opening suggestion display as the probability variable area opening notification is not displayed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 40(b), as in FIG. 40(a), "Round 2" is displayed as the round number display in the upper left part of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the third symbol display "0150 shot" is displayed in the lower left part of the display area of the device 81 as the total number of award pitches won, and "Right hit" as a firing mode suggestion display is displayed in the upper right part of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the screen An arrow display pointing to the right side is displayed, and an arrow display pointing to the lower right of the screen corresponding to the location of the attacker unit 71 and an opening suggestion display "Aim for V!" as a variable area release notification are also displayed. has been done. Further, the system is configured to control the output of the voice "Aim for V!" in accordance with the appearance of "Aim for V!" which is the opening suggestion display. With this configuration, the player can be made aware of the opening of the variable probability region 75 in which the "probability variable state" can be obtained, and can be encouraged to shoot the ball.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the winning ball from the second variable winning device 74 is placed at the position of the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a while the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a is opened. On the other hand, the winning ball from the first variable winning device 72 can be detected by the variable probability area switch 75c when the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a is opened. Since it cannot reach the position, it is configured so that it cannot be detected by the variable probability area switch 75c. With this configuration, by alternately opening the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 during one jackpot, the interval period of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 for dividing the round can be shortened. The variable winning devices 72, 74 can share the probability variable area 75 in the two variable winning devices 72, 74 while reducing the time required for the first jackpot and quickly giving gaming value to the player. It is no longer necessary to provide the probability variable area 75 and the discharge passage 76 for each machine, and the number of parts of the attacker unit 71 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in each process in the jackpot process (see FIG. 27), the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are controlled to open and close, and the probability variable area 75 is controlled to open and close. , when the ball passes through the probability variation area 75 that is set effectively, a "probability variation state" is generated after the jackpot is completed. With this configuration, in each round, the variable winning device can determine whether the variable probability area 75 is opened or not, and allow balls to flow into the variable probability area 75 at the timing when the variable probability area 75 is opened. 72, 74 (that is, the second variable winning device 74) can be created to create a gameplay that depends on whether or not they are opened, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the jackpot types with the same opening and closing patterns (i.e., jackpot types "time saving A" and "latent probability variation A", jackpot types "time saving B" and "latent probability variation ``B'', jackpot type ``time saving C'' and ``latent probability variation C''), and the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening/closing pattern of each variable prize winning device 72, 74. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by making it difficult (to make it impossible) to recognize whether a type has won or not, and by creating a game property in which the player guesses in which game state he/she is playing the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in each jackpot type, the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are set to be opened for each round, and the probability variable area 75 is opened or closed in accordance with the round. Set. Then, the type of jackpot cannot be determined only by the opening patterns of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, so that it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize which type of jackpot he has won, and in any gaming state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that makes the player guess whether he or she is playing the game.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when winning a jackpot type that generates a "probability variation state" after the jackpot ends, the second variable winning device 74 is used in a round in which the probability variable area 75 is opened in a plurality of rounds of the jackpot. is configured to be open. Therefore, even if the ball cannot pass through the variable probability area 75 in any one round in which the variable probability area 75 is open, the variable probability area 75 may be opened again in another round. Therefore, it becomes possible to pass the ball through the variable probability region 75. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a firing abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), a problem arises in passing the ball to the probability variable area 75 in the first round in which the probability variable area 75 is opened. Even if the player is not at a disadvantage due to unforeseen circumstances, by opening the probability variable area 75 again in another round and providing the possibility for the ball to pass through the probability variable area 75, the player will not be disadvantaged due to unforeseen circumstances and will be able to play comfortably. The game can be realized and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a ball passes in a situation where the probability variation area 75 is set to be effective in a jackpot, a "probability variation state" is added (occurs) after the jackpot ends. The probability variation state is configured so that even if the ball passes through the probability variation region 75 which is set to be invalid, the "probability variation state" is not applied (occurred).

Conventionally, a probability variable area through which a ball can pass is provided in the attacker unit 71 that is opened when a jackpot is hit, and the opening and closing of the probability variable area is controlled by an opening/closing lever or the like, and when the ball that flows into the attacker unit 71 passes through the probability variable area. There is a pachinko machine that generates (provides) a "probability fluctuating state" after the jackpot ends.

In such pachinko machines, when a jackpot occurs, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the "time reduction state" or the "normal gaming state" is displayed without informing the player whether or not the "probability fluctuation state" will occur. is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, etc., and the player is shown a "probability variation state". '' instead of ``time reduction state'' or ``normal game state'' is performed. Then, during the jackpot, the release lever is controlled to open and close at a predetermined timing based on the jackpot type.

Specifically, for example, in the case of a jackpot type that causes a "probability variation state", the opening/closing lever is controlled to open and close so that the ball that has entered the attacker unit 71 passes through the probability variation area, and the jackpot is achieved. It is configured to generate a "probability fluctuating state" after completion. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot type that does not cause a "probability variation state", the opening/closing lever is controlled to open/close so that the ball that has entered the attacker unit 71 does not pass through the probability variation region, and after the jackpot is over, the "probability variation state" is The game is configured so that a "time reduction state" or a "normal gaming state" is generated without generating a "state".

By configuring it in this way, it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize whether the gaming state after a jackpot is a "probability fluctuation state", a "time reduction state", or a "normal gaming state". , it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which game state he/she is playing the game. In addition, even if the player is in a "time reduction state" or "normal gaming state," the player is made to guess (internally) that it may be in a "probability fluctuation state" contrary to the production mode, and is forced to continue playing the game. By doing so, the operating rate of the pachinko machine can be improved.

However, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, even if the "latent probability variable production mode" is executed, the "probability variable state" is generated every time the ball passes through the probability variable area, so the inside of the attacker unit 71 is The player continues to pay attention to whether or not the ball passes through the variable probability region, and at the stage when the player visually confirms that the ball passes through the variable probability region, the player realizes that a "probability variable state" will occur. The game will be recognized as such, and the expected gameplay will be disrupted. In addition, if the player continues to execute the "latent probability variation performance mode" after the occurrence of the "probability variation state" is recognized, the player will not be able to enjoy the game, and will actually lose interest in the game. There is a risk of becoming aroused.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the probability variable area 75 provided in the attacker unit 71 is configured to be switchable between a valid state and an invalid state, and the probability variable area is changed for each round of the jackpot depending on the type of jackpot. The variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a provided in the variable probability area 75 is controlled to be opened, and the setting of the variable probability area 75 is controlled to be switched (internally) between valid and invalid settings in a state that the player cannot recognize. Then, during a jackpot, if the ball passes through the effectively set probability variable region 75, the "probability variation state" is generated after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, even if the ball passes through the probability variable area 75 which is set to be invalid, the configuration is such that the "probability variation state" does not occur after the end of the jackpot.

That is, for example, if the probability variable area 75 is set to be effective in a state where the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a is opened and a ball can flow into the variable variable area 75, the ball enters the variable variable area 75 (probable variable area switch 75c). When the jackpot passes, a "probability fluctuation state" is generated after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a is open and the ball can flow into the variable variable area 75, and the variable variable area 75 is set to be invalid, the ball does not pass through the variable variable area 75 (the variable variable area switch 75c). Even if the jackpot is completed, the system is configured so that the "probability fluctuation state" does not occur after the end of the jackpot.

With this configuration, even if the ball passes through the probability variable area 75, if the probability variable area 75 is not internally set effectively, the "probability variation state" will not occur after the jackpot ends, so the probability variable area Even if the player visually recognizes the passing of the ball to the ball 75, the configuration can be such that the occurrence of the "probability fluctuation state" is not determined after the jackpot is completed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which gaming state the player is playing the game, even when the "latent probability variation performance mode" is being executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, even if a ball irregularly flows into the variable probability region 75 in a situation where the provision of a "probability variable state" is not expected, setting the variable probability region 75 to be invalid will prevent the ball from entering the variable probability region 75 as intended. It is possible to prevent game values from being awarded that are not intended to be played.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the jackpot types with the same opening and closing patterns (i.e., the jackpot types "time saving A" and "latent probability variation A", the jackpot types "time saving B" and "latent probability variation ``B'', jackpot type ``time saving C'' and ``latent probability variation C''), respectively, so that the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, and the jackpot type cannot be determined by the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by making it difficult (impossible) to recognize whether the player has won a jackpot, and by creating a gameplay that makes the player guess in which gaming state he/she is playing after winning the jackpot. can. On the other hand, the jackpot type "Probability Fluctuation A" which notifies the "Probability Fluctuation State" opens and closes the variable winning devices 72, 74 in a unique opening/closing pattern (i.e. "Y1") different from other jackpot types. Control. Therefore, by recognizing the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, the player can recognize that the "probability fluctuation state" will be awarded.

Furthermore, in the jackpot type "time saving A" in which the "probability variation state" cannot occur, an interval is executed before the start of the middle round (i.e., the third round) of the jackpot in which the probability variation area 75 can be opened, and the attacker unit After making a state in which no ball exists in the area 71, a round is executed in which the variable probability area 75 is opened. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent unintended addition of a "probability fluctuation state". Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a gaming value as expected in the gaming specifications, and to prevent unexpected losses from occurring at the gaming parlor.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the interval period executed before the start of the round in which the probability variable area 75 is opened, at least the period in which the interval is executed (for example, the interval and the third round). (including period), the player executes a "character selection" performance for determining the performance mode after the jackpot ends. By executing the "character selection" effect during the interval period, the player's attention is drawn to the "character selection" effect, and the degree of attention to the opening mode of the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 is relatively increased. At the same time, it is possible to reduce the degree of attention to the opening mode of the variable probability region 75. That is, by executing a "character selection" effect that is easy for the player to pay attention to during the interval period, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to recognize the result of the ball flowing into the variable probability area 75 that is opened. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the ball has passed through the probability variable area 75, and it is difficult for the player to recognize in which gaming state the player is playing the game after the jackpot is over. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that makes players guess. In addition, even if the player is in a "time reduction state" or "normal gaming state," the player is made to guess (internally) that it may be in a "probability fluctuation state" contrary to the production mode, and is forced to continue playing the game. By doing so, the operating rate of the pachinko machine can be improved.

Furthermore, when a player wins a jackpot, the player can select a character that determines the performance mode after the jackpot, so that the performance mode (character) that matches the player's taste in the performance after the jackpot can be selected. can be executed. In addition, the player can select a performance that suggests the content of the game state to be executed according to his/her own will, and it is possible to provide a wide variety of performances in which the player can participate. Therefore, it is possible to add further interest to the situation where the player is feeling the pleasure of winning a jackpot, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a pachinko machine 10 in a second embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the game board is arranged such that a part of the first variable winning device 72 (i.e., the right side when viewed from the front) and a part of the second variable winning device 74 (i.e., the left side when viewed from the front) overlap in the vertical direction. 13, and the parts other than the part are arranged so as not to overlap in the vertical direction.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which the vertical width is larger than the width of the entire pachinko machine 10, and the design constraints on the left and right widths are larger than the design constraints on the top and bottom widths. Therefore, if the horizontal arrangement area of the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 becomes large, a predetermined area in the gaming area of the game board 13 is There is a risk that the two-variable winning device 74 may occupy the space, which may reduce the degree of freedom in designing other game components.

Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed on a game island to be installed in a game hall, restrictions are placed on the design dimensions in the depth direction so as not to come into contact with the equipment of the game island. Therefore, it is necessary to design each part while limiting the depth dimension, and similar restrictions occur for the first variable winning device 72, the second variable winning device 74, and the attacker unit 71 having the probability variable area 75. If the depth dimension of the attacker unit 71 becomes large, it may become a factor that reduces the degree of freedom in designing other game components.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the width dimension of the attacker unit 71 is made equal to the width dimension of the first variable winning device 72, and the width dimension of the second variable winning device 74 is made equal to the width dimension of the first variable winning device 72. The variable probability area 75 is also configured to fit within the width dimension of the first variable prize winning device 72. In addition, each passage 72d, 72e from the first variable winning device 72, each passage 74d, 74e from the second variable winning device 74, the probability variable area 75, and the discharge passage 76 are arranged within the width dimension of the attacker unit 71. The depth dimensions of each of the passages 72d, 72e, 74d, 74e, the variable probability area 75, and the discharge passage 76 are approximately one ball from the surface of the game board 13 toward the back of the pachinko machine 10. Configure it so that With this configuration, the width and depth of the attacker unit 71 can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in designing other game parts can be improved, while the probability variable area 75 can be reduced for the second variable winning device 72, 74. By providing this, the effects of the first embodiment can be achieved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Details of the attacker unit 71 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a diagram schematically showing the attacker unit 71 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 41(a) shows the first variable winning device 72, the second variable winning device 74, and the probability variable area of the second embodiment. 41(b) is a front enlarged view schematically showing a front view of the attacker unit 71 equipped with 75, and FIG. It is an enlarged view of the right side.

As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), the attacker unit 71 of the second embodiment mainly includes a first variable winning device 72, a second variable winning device 74, a probability variable area 75, and a discharge passage 76. The second variable winning device 74, the probability variable area 75, and the discharge passage 76 are configured in a size and position such that the width dimensions of the second variable winning device 74, the probability variable area 75, and the discharge passage 76 fit within the width dimension of the first variable winning device 72.

Furthermore, the attacker unit 71 is configured such that all parts for guiding the ball (excluding the solenoids 72b, etc.) are accommodated within a depth range of about one ball from the surface of the game board 13.

Furthermore, similar to the first embodiment, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are configured to allow balls fired in so-called right-handed games to flow in, and balls fired in so-called left-handed games. The structure is such that the ball cannot enter the ball.

Here, in the attacker unit 71 of the second embodiment, the ball that has flowed down from the right side to the left side in the front view of the first variable winning device 72 due to the right-handed game is transferred to the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device. It is configured so that it can flow evenly within the width of the area. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, guiding means such as the left nail group 77 and the right nail group 78 that guide the ball to the area where the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 overlap in the vertical direction are provided. This eliminates the need for guiding means such as the left nail group 77 and the right nail group 78, and makes it possible to effectively utilize (improve the degree of freedom in designing) the area on the upper side of the attacker unit 71 when viewed from the front.

When the first opening/closing plate 72a is open, the first large winning opening pre-detection passage 72d allows the ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 to pass through the first large winning opening through a bottom that is gently inclined to the right side in front view. It is configured to guide the player toward the winning opening switch 72c. While the first opening/closing plate 72a is open, balls fired in a right-handed game flow down evenly from above the attacker unit 71 when viewed from the front, and then collide with the first opening/closing plate 72a to cause the first opening/closing plate 72a to fall. It flows into the big winning opening detection passage 72d. Then, the ball rolls on the bottom of the first big winning opening detection passage 72d to the right side in front view, reaches the first big winning opening switch 72c, and is detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c. be done. It should be noted that the time required to reach the first big winning opening switch 72c from the first big winning opening pre-detection passage 72d is configured to take about 0.4 seconds on average.

The first big winning opening detection passage 72e is a passage for guiding the ball detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c to the probability variable area 75 provided in the attacker unit 71. Unlike the first embodiment, this first large prize opening post-detection passage 72e is not provided with a deceleration rib 72f that reduces the speed of the ball flowing down the passage. Therefore, the time required to reach the variable probability area 75 from the most upstream side of the passage 72e after detecting the first big winning opening is configured to take about 1.6 seconds.

That is, the ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 of the second embodiment flows down the first big winning opening pre-detection passage 72d at least for about a time before reaching the variable probability area 75 in the attacker unit 71. It is configured to take a total of about 2.0 seconds, which is 0.4 seconds and about 1.6 seconds for flowing down the passage 72e after detecting the first big winning opening. As a result, for example, even if a ball flows into the first variable winning device 72 immediately after the first opening/closing plate 72a is opened, it will take at least about 2.0 seconds for the ball to reach the variable probability area 75. Therefore, if the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a of the probability variable area 75 is not opened for approximately 2.0 seconds or more from the start of opening of the first opening/closing plate 72a, the structure is such that the ball does not flow into the probability variable area 75. ing.

Therefore, when the first opening/closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 is opened, the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a is closed at least within about 2.0 seconds after the first opening/closing plate 72a is opened. If this occurs, the setting is such that even if a ball wins in the first variable winning device 72, the ball cannot flow into the variable probability area 75.

The second variable winning device 74 mainly includes a second opening/closing plate 74a that has a horizontally long rectangular shape that covers the second large winning opening pre-detection passage 74d and has a width shorter than the width of the first variable winning device 72. A second grand prize opening solenoid 74b (see FIG. 8) for driving the second opening/closing plate 74a to open/close is located on the front side with the lower side of the second opening/closing plate 74a as an axis, and a winning hole in the second variable winning device 74. A second big winning opening switch 74c that detects the ball, a second big winning opening detection passage 74d through which the ball flows down before being detected by the second big winning opening switch 74c, and a second big winning opening switch 74c. A second large prize opening post-detection passage 74e is provided through which the detected ball flows down. The second large winning opening post-detection passage 74e is configured to merge with the first large winning opening post-detection passage 72e of the first variable winning a prize device 72 at the merging portion 73.

When the second opening/closing plate 74a is open, the second large winning opening detection passage 74d passes the ball that has flowed into the second variable winning device 74 to the second large winning opening by means of a bottom portion that gently slopes to the right side when viewed from the front. It is configured to guide the player toward the winning opening switch 74c. While the second opening/closing plate 74a is open, balls fired in a right-handed game flow down evenly from above the attacker unit 71 when viewed from the front, and then collide with the second opening/closing plate 74a to cause the second opening/closing plate 74a to fall. It flows into the big winning opening detection passage 74d. Then, the ball rolls on the bottom of the second big winning opening detection passage 74d to the right side in front view, reaches the second big winning opening switch 74c, and is detected by the second big winning opening switch 74c. be done. In addition, since the second opening/closing plate 74a has a shorter width than the first opening/closing plate 72a, the time it takes to reach the second big winning opening switch 74c from the second big winning opening detection passage 74d is about 0.3 seconds on average. It is configured as required.

The second big winning opening detection passage 74e is a passage for guiding the ball detected by the second big winning opening switch 74c to the probability variable area 75 provided in the attacker unit 71. This second big winning hole detection passage 74e is configured to be shorter than the first big winning hole detection passage 72e (for example, 1/3 the length of the first big winning hole detection passage 72e). It is configured. Therefore, the time required to reach the variable probability area 75 from the most upstream side of the passage 74e after detecting the second big winning opening is configured to take about 0.7 seconds.

That is, the ball flowing into the second variable winning device 74 flows down the second big winning opening pre-detection passage 74d for at least about 0.3 seconds before reaching the variable probability area 75 in the attacker unit 71. It is configured to take about 1.0 seconds in total, including about 0.7 seconds for flowing down the passage 74e after detecting the second big prize opening. As a result, for example, when a ball flows into the second variable winning device 74 immediately after the second opening/closing plate 74a is opened, it takes at least about 1.0 seconds for the ball to reach the probability variable area 75. Therefore, if the opening time of the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a of the variable probability region 75 is not opened for approximately 1.0 seconds or more from the start of opening of the second opening/closing plate 74a, the ball is prevented from flowing into the variable probability region 75. On the other hand, if the second opening/closing plate 74a is opened for about 2 seconds from the start of opening, and if balls are fired one at a time at 0.6 second intervals, a maximum of about three balls will be fired. It is configured to be able to flow into the variable probability region 75.

Therefore, when the second opening/closing plate 74a of the second variable winning device 74 is opened, the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is opened for at least about 2.0 seconds after the second opening/closing plate 74a is opened. When the winning ball is in the second variable winning device 74, it is set to be able to flow into the probability variable area 75.

In addition, a deceleration rib like the first embodiment is provided in the passage of the first big winning opening post-detection passage 72e, and the time from when it is detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c until it flows down to the probability variable area 75 is reduced. It may be configured to be delayed.

The width dimension and arrangement of the entire probability variable area 75 and the width dimension and arrangement of the discharge passage 76 are configured to fall within the width dimension of the first variable prize winning device 72.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the width dimension of the attacker unit 71 is made equal to the width dimension of the first variable winning device 72, and the width dimension of the second variable winning device 74 is made equal to the width dimension of the first variable winning device 72. The probability variable area 75 is configured to have a size that falls within the width dimension of the first variable winning device 72, and the probability variable area 75 also falls within the width dimension of the first variable winning device 72. In addition, each passage 72d, 72e from the first variable winning device 72, each passage 74d, 74e from the second variable winning device 74, the probability variable area 75, and the discharge passage 76 are arranged within the width dimension of the attacker unit 71. The depth dimensions of each of the passages 72d, 72e, 74d, 74e, the variable probability area 75, and the discharge passage 76 are approximately one ball from the surface of the game board 13 toward the back of the pachinko machine 10. Configure it so that With this configuration, the width and depth of the attacker unit 71 can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in designing other game parts can be improved, while the probability variable area 75 can be reduced for the second variable winning device 72, 74. The effect of the first embodiment is achieved by providing this.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment and has the same effects.

<Third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a pachinko machine 10 in a third embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the probability variable area 75 and the discharge passage 76 in the attacker unit 71 are arranged in a horizontal position when viewed from the front.

Here, when the balls flowing into the attacker unit 71 are visually recognized from the front side of the Pachinko machine 10, the probability variation area 75 and the discharge passage 76 are arranged in parallel in the lateral direction when viewed from the front. Therefore, by visually following the ball that has flowed down into the attacker unit 71 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to determine whether the ball has flowed into the probability variable area 75 or the discharge passage 76. It is configured so that it can be done (and easily done).

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, a discharge passage 76 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 in the variable probability area 75, and both the variable probability area 75 and the discharge passage 76 are made of a light-transmissive transparent resin (for example, Constructed from polycarbonate or acrylic. Further, the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a is also made of a light-transmitting transparent resin (for example, polycarbonate or acrylic). That is, the probability variable area 75 and the discharge passage 76 are configured to overlap in the front-rear direction (depth direction) of the Pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front. In general, human vision is more difficult to perceive differences between depth images than differences between plane images. When the discharge passage 76 is arranged in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, a player who views the variable probability region 75 and the discharge passage 76 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can recognize whether or not the player has entered the variable probability region 75 or the discharge passage 76. It can be difficult. In particular, by configuring the variable probability region 75 (including members related to the variable variable region opening/closing plate 75a and the variable variable region solenoid 75b) and the discharge passage 76 from transparent members, it is possible to maintain the state in which balls can flow into the variable variable region 75, and the discharge passage 76 This can make it difficult to recognize whether a ball is flowing into the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 has flown into the variable probability region 75 or the discharge passage 76, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 has flown into the variable probability region 75 or the discharge passage 76. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not "fluctuation state" has been added. As a result, even when the "latent probability variation mode" is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether it is in the "probability variation state," "time reduction state," or "normal gaming state." In this way, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which gaming state he/she is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first and second embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as in the first embodiment and the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Details of the attacker unit 71 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a diagram schematically showing the attacker unit 71 of the third embodiment, and FIG. 42(a) shows the first variable winning device 72, the second variable winning device 74, and the probability variable area of the third embodiment. 42(b) is a front enlarged view schematically showing a front view of the attacker unit 71 equipped with the attack unit 75, and FIG. It is an enlarged view of the right side.

As shown in FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b), the attacker unit 71 of the third embodiment mainly includes a first variable winning device 72, a second variable winning device 74, a probability variable area 75, and a discharge passage 76. The second variable winning device 74, the probability variable area 75, and the discharge passage 76 are configured in a size and position such that the width dimensions of the second variable winning device 74, the probability variable area 75, and the discharge passage 76 fit within the width dimension of the first variable winning device 72.

Further, the probability variable region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are configured to overlap in the depth direction of the Pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front. That is, the attacker unit 71 is configured such that all the parts for guiding the balls (excluding the solenoids 72b, etc.) are contained within a depth range of about two balls from the surface of the game board 13.

Furthermore, similar to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are configured to allow balls fired in a so-called right-handed game to flow into the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74. The ball fired in a left-handed game is configured to be unable to enter.

Here, in the attacker unit 71 of the third embodiment, at least the variable probability region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are both made of a light-transmitting transparent resin material, and the ball flowing down the variable probability region 75 or the discharge passage 76 is It is configured so that it can be recognized from the front side of the machine 10. Further, in the closed state (initial state), the variable area opening/closing plate 75a that covers the variable area 75 covers the passage flowing down to the variable area switch 75c, and its upper surface is inclined toward the discharge passage 76. The ball collided with the ball is guided to the discharge passage 76 by rolling the upper surface of the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a toward the discharge passage 76. On the other hand, in the open state (driving state), the variable variable area opening/closing plate 75a covers the passage flowing down to the discharge passage 76, and opens the passage flowing down to the variable variable area switch 75c, so that the inside of the attacker unit 71 can be opened from the merging section 73. The ball flowing down is flown down to the variable probability region switch 75c side.

In this case, both the variable probability region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are made of transparent resin that transmits light, and the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a is also made of transparent resin that transmits light. Therefore, it is difficult for a player to understand from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 which variable variable area 75 or discharge passage 76 is opened (closed) by the variable variable area opening/closing plate 75a, and the variable variable area 75 and the discharge passage 76 are 76 in the depth direction of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to determine whether the ball flowing down inside the attacker unit 71 is flowing down the probability variable area 75 or the discharge passage 76. Constructed so that it is difficult to grasp from the front side. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 has flowed into the variable probability region 75 or the discharge passage 76, and whether the ball has passed through the variable probability region 75 can be made difficult for the player. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not a "probability fluctuating state" that can occur due to the above is given. As a result, even when the "latent probability variation mode" is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether it is in the "probability variation state," "time reduction state," or "normal gaming state." In this way, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which gaming state he/she is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the discharge passage 76 may be arranged on the front side of the Pachinko machine 10 and the probability variable area 75 may be arranged on the back side of the Pachinko machine 10. Specifically, in normal times, the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a is in the retracted state to cover the variable variable region 75, so that the ball does not flow down into the variable variable region 75, and the ball flows only into the discharge passage 76. However, only when it is desired to cause the ball to flow into the variable probability region 75, the variable variable region opening/closing plate 75a is made to protrude, and the discharge passage 76 is covered by the variable variable region opening/closing plate 75a, so that the ball flowing down inside the attacker unit 71 is directed to the variable variable region. The ball is configured to collide with the opening/closing plate 75a so that the ball can flow down into the variable probability area 75.

In addition, the ball flowing down the first large winning hole detection passage 72e of the first variable winning device 72 and the second large winning hole detection passage 74e of the second variable winning device 74 is made invisible or difficult to see. It may also be configured to apply a predetermined coating or a process that makes it difficult to see (for example, a textured process or a knurling process). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to determine from which variable winning device 72, 74 the ball that becomes visible at the merging portion 73 of the attacker unit 71 has flowed in.

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the discharge passage 76 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 in the variable probability area 75, and both the variable probability area 75 and the discharge passage 76 are made of a transparent material that transmits light. Constructed from resin. Further, the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is also made of a light-transmitting transparent resin. That is, the probability variable area 75 and the discharge passage 76 are configured to overlap in the front-rear direction (depth direction) of the Pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front. In general, human vision is more difficult to perceive differences between depth images than differences between plane images. When the discharge passage 76 is arranged in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, a player who views the variable probability region 75 and the discharge passage 76 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can recognize whether or not the player has entered the variable probability region 75 or the discharge passage 76. It can be difficult. In particular, by configuring the variable probability region 75 (including members related to the variable variable region opening/closing plate 75a and the variable variable region solenoid 75b) and the discharge passage 76 from transparent members, it is possible to maintain the state in which balls can flow into the variable variable region 75, and the discharge passage 76 This can make it difficult to recognize whether the ball is flowing into the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 has flown into the variable probability region 75 or the discharge passage 76, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the ball that has flowed into the attacker unit 71 has flown into the variable probability region 75 or the discharge passage 76. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not "fluctuation state" has been added. As a result, even when the "latent probability variation mode" is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether it is in the "probability variation state," "time reduction state," or "normal gaming state." In this way, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which gaming state he/she is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment or the second embodiment, and has the same effects.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a pachinko machine 10 in a fourth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a variable probability region 75 is provided on the downstream side of the confluence section 73, which is the confluence point of the balls flowing into the first variable winning device 72 and the balls flowing into the second variable winning device 74. At the timing when the ball flows down the downstream side of the merging portion 73, the ball can flow into the variable probability region 75 depending on whether or not the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a is open.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the path 72e after first variable winning device 72 detects the first big winning hole and the second path after detecting the second big winning hole of second variable winning device 74 The probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is arranged so as to straddle directly under the area 74e. Immediately after the ball flows down the first large winning hole detection passage 72e of the first variable winning device 72, or immediately after the ball flows down the second large winning hole detection passage 74e of the second variable winning device 74. When the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a is opened, the ball is configured to flow into the passageway in which the variable probability region switch 75c is disposed. On the other hand, immediately after the ball flows down the path 72e after detecting the first big winning hole of the first variable winning device 72, or immediately after the ball flows down the path 74e after detecting the second big winning hole of the second variable winning device 74. When the variable variable area opening/closing plate 75a is closed, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable variable area opening/closing plate 75a toward the discharge passage 76, and is configured to flow into the discharge passage 76. With this configuration, the first large winning hole detection passage 72e of the first variable winning device 72, the second large winning hole detection passage 74e of the second variable winning device 74, the probability variable area 75, and the discharge passage 76 By reducing the passage length and reducing the overall dimension (particularly the vertical dimension) of the attacker unit 71, the degree of freedom in designing other game components is improved, and the variable winning devices 72 and 74 shown in FIG. The effects of the first to third embodiments are achieved by providing the region 75.

The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to third embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to third embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Details of the attacker unit 71 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is an enlarged front view schematically showing the front view of the attacker unit 71 including the first variable winning device 72, the second variable winning device 74, and the variable probability area 75 of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 43, the attacker unit 71 of the fourth embodiment mainly includes a first variable winning device 72, a second variable winning device 74, a probability variable area 75, and a discharge passage 76. The second variable prize winning device 74, the probability variable area 75, and the discharge passage 76 are configured to have a size and position that fit within the width dimension of the device 72.

Further, the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a covering the variable probability region 75 is located at a position where it straddles at least directly below the passage width of the first large winning opening post-detection passage 72e and the passage width of the second large winning opening post detection passage 74e. are arranged consecutively in (range). Therefore, when the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a is open, the ball that has flown into the first variable winning device 72 can flow into the variable probability area 75 immediately after flowing down the passage 72e after detecting the first large winning opening. It is configured such that the ball that has flowed into the second variable winning device 74 can flow into the variable probability region 75 immediately after flowing down the passage 74e after detecting the second big winning hole.

That is, the placement position of the probability variable area is arranged at a position that straddles at least the passage width of the first big winning opening post-detection passage 72e and the passage width of the second big winning opening post-detection passage 74e, for example. By arranging the placement position of the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a only in the range directly below the passage width of the passage 72e after detecting the first big prize opening and the passage width of the passage 74e after detecting the second large prize opening, the variable probability area The arrangement positions of 75 and the discharge passage 76 can be made compact. With this configuration, the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the entire attacker unit 71 are reduced, and while the degree of freedom in designing other game components is improved, the variable winning area 75 is The effects of the first to third embodiments are achieved by providing the above.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment has the same configuration as the first to third embodiments, and has the same effects.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a pachinko machine 10 in a fifth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, by rotating the rotatable first opening/closing plate 72a or the second opening/closing plate 74a, balls flow into the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74. It is configured so that it is possible.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, a retractable first opening/closing plate 72a and a second opening/closing plate 74a are provided. By recessing either one of the opening/closing plates 74a, the ball can flow into the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74. In addition, a front side deceleration rib 79a with which the ball rolling on the upper surface of the first opening/closing plate 72a can collide is provided, and the time period during which the ball rolling on the upper surface of the first opening/closing plate 72a remains on the first opening/closing plate 72a. Configure it so that it is long. Further, a rear deceleration rib 79b is provided with which the ball rolling on the upper surface of the second opening/closing plate 74a can collide, and the time period during which the ball rolling on the upper surface of the second opening/closing plate 74a remains on the second opening/closing plate 74a. Configure it so that it is long. The second variable winning device 74 is configured so that only the ball that has crossed the first opening/closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 can win.

With this configuration, when the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are opened and closed alternately, the first variable winning device 72 is closed and the second variable winning device 74 is opened immediately. Even when the ball enters the second variable winning device 74, it takes time to cross the first opening/closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72. It can be delayed. Therefore, for example, in a case where it takes a predetermined time for the winning ball of the first variable winning device 72 to reach the variable probability area 75, the variable probability area 75 is opened after the predetermined time has elapsed from the opening of the second variable winning device 74. With this configuration, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 can be opened continuously without any interruption without providing an interval time. Therefore, since either variable prize winning device 72 or 74 is visually open, eliminating the interval time suppresses the prolongation of the game and provides a state in which the player can be given gaming value quickly. It can be recognized.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the points that are different from the pachinko machines 10 according to the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fourth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Details of the attacker unit 71 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is an enlarged front view schematically showing the front view of the attacker unit 71 including the first variable winning device 72, the second variable winning device 74, the probability variable area 75, and the discharge passage 76 of the fifth embodiment. .

As shown in FIG. 44, the attacker unit 71 of the fifth embodiment mainly includes a first variable winning device 72, a second variable winning device 74, a probability variable area 75, and a discharge passage 76. A second variable prize winning device 74 is arranged on the left side (downstream side) of the device 72 when viewed from the front.

In addition, similar to the first embodiment, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 have an upper right corner formed in the upper right portion of the attacker unit 71 from the right side in front view when fired in a so-called right-handed game. While the ball rolling along the slope of the rolling portion 71a is configured to be able to flow in from the right side of the attacker unit 71, the ball fired in a so-called left-handed game is not configured to flow in.

The first variable winning device 72 of the fifth embodiment mainly includes a plate-shaped first opening/closing plate 72a that covers the first big winning opening front passage 72d, and a first opening/closing plate 72a for driving the first opening/closing plate 72a to appear and retract. The first big winning opening solenoid 72b (see FIG. 8), the first big winning opening switch 72c that detects the winning ball in the first variable winning device 72, and the first big winning opening solenoid 72b (see FIG. 8), There are provided a first big winning opening pre-detection passage 72d through which the ball flows down, and a first big winning opening post-detection passage 72e through which the ball after being detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c flows down. The first large winning opening detection passage 72e is configured to merge with a second large winning opening detection passage 74e of a second variable winning a prize device 74, which will be described later, at the merging section 73.

The first opening/closing plate 72a is configured such that a ball can roll on its upper surface, and is controlled to be driven alternately with a second opening/closing plate 74a of a second variable winning device 74 to be in a protruding state or a retracted state when a special symbol hits the jackpot. is configured to be When the first opening/closing plate 72a is in the protruding state (that is, in the closed state), the upper surface of the first opening/closing plate 72a is rolled to the left along the inclination, and the first opening/closing plate 72a is in the protruding state. When the ball rolls to the left end of the first opening/closing plate 72a while maintaining , the ball can be guided to the second opening/closing plate 74a side of the second variable winning device 74, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the first opening/closing plate 72a is in the retracted state (that is, in the open state), the ball fired in the right-handed game rolls from the right side of the attacker unit 71 when viewed from the front, and enters the first variable winning device 72. flow into. Further, when the first opening/closing plate 72a is retracted (opened) while the ball fired in a right-handed game is rolling on the upper surface of the first opening/closing plate 72a, the first opening/closing plate 72a The balls rolling on the upper surface of the ball flow into the first variable winning device 72 all at once.

Here, a front side deceleration rib 79a is provided on the upper left side of the first opening/closing plate 72a when viewed from the front to reduce the rolling (flowing) speed of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the first opening/closing plate 72a. This front side deceleration rib 79a is arranged such that a back side rib provided on the back side in a front view and a plurality of front side ribs provided on the front side in a front view are alternately and evenly spaced apart from each other. When rolling on the upper surface of the first opening/closing plate 72a, the ball repeatedly collides with each rib, meandering and decelerating as it flows down. Therefore, the configuration is such that it takes about 2.0 seconds to reach from the rightmost end to the leftmost end of the first opening/closing plate 72a.

When the first opening/closing plate 72a is opened, the first large prize winning opening pre-detection passage 72d allows the ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 to pass through the first large prize opening by means of a bottom portion gently inclined to the right side in front view. It is configured to guide the player toward the winning opening switch 72c. While the first opening/closing plate 72a is displaced from the protruding state to the retracted state, that is, while the first variable prize winning device 72 is open, the ball fired by the right-handed game is in front of the attacker unit 71. Then, when the first opening/closing plate 72a is in the closed state (protruding state), it rolls on the upper surface of the first opening/closing plate 72a and moves to the downstream side (second variable winning device 74). side). On the other hand, when the first opening/closing plate 72a is in the open state (retracted state), it flows into the first big prize opening pre-detection passage 72d. Then, the ball rolls the bottom of the first big winning opening pre-detection passage 72d to the left side in front view due to the inflowing force, and then, due to its own weight, the ball rolls the bottom of the first big winning opening pre-detection passage 72d from the front. It rolls to the right side as viewed, reaches the first big winning opening switch 72c, and is detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c. That is, the first big winning opening pre-detection passage 72d once guides the ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 in a direction away from the placement position of the probability variable area 75. In addition, the width (height) between the first opening/closing plate 72a and the bottom of the first big prize opening detection passage 72d is configured to be about two balls apart, and when the first opening/closing plate 72a tries to protrude. In addition, the projection of the first opening/closing plate 72a is not easily obstructed by the ball.

Here, the ball hit by the right-handed game rolls from the upper right rolling part 71a of the first variable winning device 72 to the left side in front view, and the first opening/closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 is opened. If so, it flows into the first variable prize winning device 72. The ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 rolls in the left direction in the front view through the first large winning opening detection passage 72d while maintaining the momentum of flowing down in the left direction in the front view. Then, the momentum of the ball rolling toward the left side is canceled by the right-down slope of the first big winning opening pre-detection passage 72d, and the ball moves along the right-down slope of the first big winning opening front passage 72d in the right direction in front view. flowing down to Therefore, the time it takes to reach the first big winning opening switch 72c from the leftmost end in front view of the first big winning opening pre-detection passage 72d is determined by going up the slope of the first big winning opening front passage 72d to the left side in front view. It is configured so that it takes about 1.0 seconds because it stagnates a little.

The first big winning opening detection passage 72e is a passage for guiding the ball detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c to the probability variable area 75 provided in the attacker unit 71. This first large winning opening post-detection passage 72e is configured to have a longer passage length (for example, five times) than a second large winning opening post-detection passage 74e, which will be described later. Therefore, the time required to reach the variable probability area 75 from the most upstream side of the passage 72e after detecting the first big winning opening is configured to take about 1.5 seconds.

That is, the ball that has flown into the first variable winning device 72 takes at least about 1.0 seconds to flow down the first big winning opening pre-detection passage 72d before reaching the variable probability area 75 in the attacker unit 71. It is configured so that it takes about 2.5 seconds in total, including about 1.5 seconds for it to flow down the passage 72e after detecting the first big prize opening. As a result, for example, even if a ball flows into the first variable winning device 72 immediately after the first opening/closing plate 72a is opened (retracted), the ball will take at least about 2.5 seconds to reach the probability variable area 75. Since it takes seconds, if the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a of the probability variable area 75 is not opened for approximately 2.5 seconds or more from the start of opening of the first opening/closing plate 72a, the ball will not flow into the probability variable area 75. It is composed of

Therefore, when the first opening/closing plate 72a of the first variable prize winning device 72 is opened (retracted), for example, the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is opened within at least about 2.5 seconds from the opening of the first opening/closing plate 72a. When the ball is closed, the setting is such that even if a ball wins in the first variable winning device 72, the ball cannot flow into the variable probability area 75.

In addition, the first large winning a prize opening post-detection passage 72e of the fifth embodiment is not provided with the deceleration rib 72f (see FIG. 4) like the first embodiment. As a result, it is possible to simplify the configuration inside the first large winning opening post-detection passage 72e and reduce the design man-hours, and it is also possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging, etc. in the first large winning opening post-detection passage 72e. can.

In addition, after the ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 is detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c, the ball may flow into the probability variable area 75 within the first predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) or not. , so that it can be detected by a discharge switch 76a provided in the discharge passage 76. In other words, the ball detected by the first big prize opening switch 72c is configured to be detected by the discharge switch 76a within the first predetermined period. With this configuration, if the ball detected by the first big winning port switch 72c is not detected by the ejection switch 76a within the first predetermined period, some kind of fraudulent activity or winning abnormality such as ball clogging will occur. It is possible to detect the possibility that

The second variable winning device 74 of the fifth embodiment mainly includes a second opening/closing plate 74a that covers the second big winning opening detection passage 74d, and a second opening/closing plate 74a for driving the second opening/closing plate 74a to appear and retract. A mouth solenoid 74b (see FIG. 8), a second big winning port switch 74c that detects a ball that has won in the second variable winning device 74, and a ball that has not yet been detected by the second big winning port switch 74c flows down. There are provided a second big winning opening pre-detection passage 74d, and a second big winning opening detection passage 74e, through which the ball flows down after being detected by the second big winning opening switch 74c. The second large winning hole detection passage 74e is configured to merge with the first large winning hole detection passage 72e of the first variable winning device 72 at the merging portion 73.

Like the first opening/closing plate 72a, the second opening/closing plate 74a is used for rolling the ball that is fired in a right-handed game and rolling on the upper right rolling part 71a of the attacker unit 71 and the upper surface of the first opening/closing plate 72a. It is configured to be movable, and is configured to be driven and controlled alternately with the first opening/closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 to a protruding state or a retracted state when a special symbol hits a jackpot. When the second opening/closing plate 74a is in the protruding state (that is, in the closed state), the upper surface of the second opening/closing plate 74a is rolled to the left along the inclination, and the second opening/closing plate 74a is in the protruding state. When the ball rolls to the left end of the second opening/closing plate 74a while maintaining this, the ball is configured to be guided toward the center of the game board 13 (in the direction of the arrangement position of the starting port unit 64). There is.

On the other hand, when the second opening/closing plate 74a is in the retracted state (that is, the open state), the ball fired in the right-handed game rolls from the upper right rolling part 71a of the attacker unit 71 to the left side in front view, and further , after rolling on the upper surface of the first opening/closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72, it flows into the second variable winning device 74. Further, when the second opening/closing plate 74a is retracted (opened) while the ball fired in a right-handed game is rolling on the upper surface of the second opening/closing plate 74a, the second opening/closing plate 74a The balls rolling on the upper surface of the ball flow into the second variable winning device 74 all at once.

Here, on the upper left side of the second opening/closing plate 74a when viewed from the front, there is provided a rear side deceleration rib 79b that reduces the rolling (flowing) speed of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the second opening/closing plate 74a. Similar to the front deceleration rib 79a, this rear deceleration rib 79b has a rear rib provided on the rear side in front view and a plurality of front side ribs provided on the front side in front view, which are alternately and equally spaced apart. When the ball rolls on the upper surface of the second opening/closing plate 74a, the ball repeatedly collides with each rib and flows down while meandering and decelerating. Therefore, the configuration is such that it takes about 2.0 seconds to reach from the rightmost end to the leftmost end of the second opening/closing plate 74a. That is, the configuration is such that it takes about 4.0 seconds for the attacker unit 71 to roll from the rightmost end to the leftmost end.

When the second opening/closing plate 74a is retracted (opened), the second large winning opening detection passage 74d passes the ball that has flowed into the second variable winning device 74 through a bottom that gently slopes downward to the left when viewed from the front. It is configured to guide the player to the second big prize opening switch 74c. That is, while the second variable winning device 74 is closed (projected), the ball fired in the right-handed game rolls from the right side of the attacker unit 71 when viewed from the front, and then the first opening/closing device which is closed. After rolling on the upper surface of the plate 72a, it rolls on the upper surface of the second opening/closing plate 74a and flows down to the downstream side (starting port unit 64 side). On the other hand, when the second opening/closing plate 74a is in the open state (retracted state), it flows into the second big prize opening pre-detection passage 74d. Then, due to the inflowing force, the ball further rolls to the left side in front view at the bottom of the second big winning port detection passage 74d, reaches the second big winning port switch 74c, and reaches the second big winning port. It is detected by the mouth switch 74c.

Here, the ball that has rolled from the right side in the front view of the second variable winning device 74 (i.e., the upper surface of the first opening/closing plate 72a) maintains the momentum of flowing down to the left side in the front view, and enters the second big prize. It rolls to the left in front view through the mouth detection pre-passage 74d. Then, while the momentum of the ball rolling to the left is amplified by the left-down slope of the second big winning opening pre-detection passage 74d, the front view is seen along the left-down slope of the second big winning opening pre-detection passage 74d. Flowing down to the left. Therefore, the time it takes to reach the second large winning opening switch 74c from the rightmost end of the second large winning opening pre-detection passage 74d in front view is accelerated by the inclination of the second large winning opening pre-detection passage 74d. It is configured to take approximately 0.3 seconds.

The second big winning hole detection passage 74e is a passage for guiding the ball detected by the second big winning hole switch 74c to the probability variable area 75 provided in the attacker unit 71, and A probability variable area 75 is arranged directly below the large winning opening detection passage 74e. This second big winning hole detection passage 74e is shorter than the first big winning hole detection passage 72e (for example, 1/5 length of the first big winning hole detection passage 72e). . Therefore, the time required to reach the variable probability area 75 from the most upstream side of the passage 74e after detecting the second big winning opening is configured to take about 0.3 seconds.

That is, the ball flowing into the second variable winning device 74 flows down the second big winning opening pre-detection passage 74d for at least about 0.3 seconds before reaching the variable probability area 75 in the attacker unit 71. It is configured to take about 0.6 seconds in total, including about 0.3 seconds for flowing down the passage 74e after detecting the second big prize opening. As a result, for example, when a ball flows into the second variable winning device 74 immediately after the second opening/closing plate 74a is opened, it takes at least about 0.6 seconds for the ball to reach the probability variable area 75. Therefore, if the opening time of the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a of the variable probability region 75 is not opened for approximately 0.6 seconds or more from the start of opening of the second opening/closing plate 74a, the ball is prevented from flowing into the variable probability region 75. On the other hand, if the second opening/closing plate 74a is opened for about 3 seconds from the start of opening, and if balls are fired one at a time at 0.6 second intervals, a maximum of about four balls will be fired. It is configured to be able to flow into the variable probability region 75.

Therefore, when the second opening/closing plate 74a of the second variable winning device 74 is opened, the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is opened for at least about 3.0 seconds after the second opening/closing plate 74a is opened. When there is a winning ball in the second variable winning device 74, the setting is such that the winning ball can flow into the variable probability area 75.

In addition, after the ball that has flowed into the second variable winning device 74 is detected by the second big winning opening switch 74c, the ball enters the probability variable area 75 within a second predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) shorter than the first predetermined period. Regardless of the inflow of the liquid, the discharge switch 76a provided in the discharge passage 76 can detect the inflow. In other words, the ball detected by the second big prize opening switch 74c is configured to be detected by the discharge switch 76a within the second predetermined period. With this configuration, if the ball detected by the second big prize opening switch 74c is not detected by the ejection switch 76a within the second predetermined period, some kind of fraudulent activity or winning abnormality such as ball clogging will occur. It is possible to detect the possibility that

The probability variable area 75 is located directly below the confluence 73 of the first large winning opening post-detection passage 72e and the second large winning opening post detection passage 74e, and mainly consists of a probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a and the probability variable area opening/closing plate. It is composed of a variable probability region solenoid 75b (see FIG. 8) which can be driven to open and close 75a, and a variable variable region switch 75c.

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the retractable first opening/closing plate 72a and the second opening/closing plate 74a are provided, and when a jackpot is hit, the first opening/closing plate is in the protruding state as an initial state. By recessing either the opening/closing plate 72a or the second opening/closing plate 74a, the ball can flow into the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74. In addition, a front side deceleration rib 79a with which the ball rolling on the upper surface of the first opening/closing plate 72a can collide is provided, and the time period during which the ball rolling on the upper surface of the first opening/closing plate 72a remains on the first opening/closing plate 72a. Configure it so that it is long. Further, a rear deceleration rib 79b is provided with which the ball rolling on the upper surface of the second opening/closing plate 74a can collide, and the time period during which the ball rolling on the upper surface of the second opening/closing plate 74a remains on the second opening/closing plate 74a. Configure it so that it is long. The second variable winning device 74 is configured so that only the ball that has crossed the first opening/closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 can win. With this configuration, when the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are opened and closed alternately, the first variable winning device 72 is closed and the second variable winning device 74 is opened immediately. Even when the ball enters the second variable winning device 74, it takes time to cross the first opening/closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72. It can be delayed. Therefore, for example, in a case where it takes a predetermined time for the winning ball of the first variable winning device 72 to reach the variable probability area 75, the variable probability area 75 is opened after the predetermined time has elapsed from the opening of the second variable winning device 74. With this configuration, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 can be opened continuously without any interruption without providing an interval time. Therefore, since either of the variable prize winning devices 72, 74 is visually open, eliminating the interval time suppresses the prolongation of the game and allows the player to quickly receive the game value. It can be recognized.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment has the same configuration as the first to fourth embodiments, and has the same effects.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 in a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the number of prize balls based on winnings in the first variable winning device 72 and the number of prize balls based on winnings in the second variable winning device 74 are both 15. It is set. Further, in all jackpot types, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are configured to be opened alternately.

In this case, when the number of rounds for each type of jackpot is the same, the gaming value given to the player will be the same, and the variations in giving the gaming value will be monotonous, which may cause the player to lose interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the number of prize balls based on winnings in the first variable winning device 72 is set to 10, and the number of prize balls based on winnings in the second variable winning device 74. is set to 15, and the game value given to each variable winning device 72, 74 is configured to be different. In addition, when there is a jackpot, there is a jackpot type in which only the first variable winning device 72 is released, a jackpot type in which only the second variable winning device 74 is released, and the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74. It is configured to provide a jackpot type in which both are opened. With this configuration, even if the jackpot type has the same number of rounds, the variable winning devices 72 and 74 that are opened are different, so the time required for the jackpot (jackpot consumption time) is the same (almost the same). Even if there is, the game value given can be clearly different. That is, even for the same five-round jackpot, whether it is a jackpot type in which only the first variable winning device 72 is opened, a jackpot type in which only the second variable winning device 74 is opened, or a jackpot type in which only the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are opened, Depending on the type of jackpot in which the two variable winning devices 74 are both (alternately) released, the game value that can be given to the player can be varied even if the jackpot consumption time is the same (almost the same). By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the time efficiency of the game value provided, enrich the variations of the game, and improve the interest of the game.

The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 in the first to fifth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fifth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 45, the number of prize balls of the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 in the sixth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 45 shows the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 that can be opened in each jackpot type of the sixth embodiment, and the amount of money per winning in the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74. It is a diagram for explaining the number of prize balls. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the first variable winning device 72 will be expressed as "upper", and the second variable winning device 74, which is arranged below the game board 13 from the first variable winning device 72, will be expressed as "lower". There are cases.

As shown in FIG. 45, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is configured so that variations of the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 that are opened for each jackpot type are different. Specifically, in the case of the jackpot type "time saving A" and the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", only the first variable winning device 72 is opened over five rounds, and the jackpot type "time saving B" and the jackpot type " In the case of "Latent probability variation B", only the second variable winning device 74 is opened over 5 rounds, and in the case of jackpot type "Probability variation A", jackpot type "Time saving C", and jackpot type "Latent probability variation C" In this case, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are opened alternately.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, when a ball wins in the first variable winning device 72, ten prize balls are paid out for each winning, and when a ball wins in the second variable winning device 74, is configured so that 15 prize balls are paid out for each winning. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot with the same number of rounds, the gaming value given to the player is greater in the jackpot type in which the second variable winning device is released than in the jackpot type in which the first variable winning device 72 is released. configured.

More specifically, in the jackpot type "Time saving A" or the jackpot type "Latent probability variation A", only the first variable winning device 72 is opened over 5 rounds, so 10 pieces x 10 balls x 5 rounds = 500 The starting prize ball is paid out. In addition, in the jackpot type "Time saving B" or the jackpot type "Latent probability variation B", only the second variable winning device 74 is opened over 5 rounds, so 15 balls x 10 balls x 5 rounds = 750 prizes The ball is paid out. Furthermore, in the jackpot type "probability variation A", the jackpot type "time saving C", or the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are alternately opened over 10 rounds. Since each variable winning device 72, 74 is opened for 5 rounds, (10 balls x 10 balls x 5 rounds) + (15 balls x 10 balls x 5 rounds) = 1250 prize balls are paid out.

With this configuration, even if the jackpot type has the same number of rounds, the variable winning devices 72 and 74 that are opened are different, so the time required for the jackpot (jackpot consumption time) is the same (almost the same). Even if there is, the game value given can be clearly different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the time efficiency of the game value provided, enrich the variations of the game, and improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the opening/closing patterns of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 for each jackpot type in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 46 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the big prize opening opening/closing table 202f of the sixth embodiment. The big winning opening opening/closing table 202f shown in FIG. 46 shows variable winning devices 72 and 74 that are opened for each round for each jackpot type in each special symbol, and the front view of the attacker unit 71 is shown for each round. When the first variable winning device 72 located on the right side is opened, it is expressed as "upper", and when the second variable winning device 74 located on the left side of the attacker unit 71 when viewed from the front is opened, it is expressed as "upper". below. In addition, in the sixth embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, when one variable winning device 72, 74 (for example, the first variable winning device 72) is opened, the other variable winning device 74, 72 ( For example, the second variable winning device 74) is configured to be closed, and only one of the variable winning devices 72, 74 is opened, and the two variable winning devices 72, 74 are not opened at the same time. It is configured as follows.

As shown in FIG. 46, the opening/closing pattern "top only" of each variable winning device 72, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving A" and "latent probability variation A", which is a jackpot with a maximum of five rounds of the first special symbol, is , in all rounds, only the first variable prize winning device 72 that is "top", that is, the number of prize balls per winning ball is 10, is opened, and balls are sent from the first variable prize winning device 72 into the attacker unit 71. At the same time, the second variable winning device 74 is closed, and balls cannot flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74.

That is, in the opening/closing pattern "top only", the ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 in the first to fifth rounds of the jackpot. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, when a ball flows into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 far from the placement position of the probability variable area 75, the jackpot type ( That is, in the jackpot type "time saving A"), the probability variable area 75 is closed before the ball flowing in from the first variable winning device 72 reaches the placement position of the probability variable area 75 (including the case where it is not opened at all). On the other hand, in a jackpot type that can cause a "probability variation state" (i.e., jackpot type "latent probability variation A"), the ball flowing in from the first variable winning device 72 reaches the placement position of the probability variation area 75. The variable probability area 75 is configured to be open until the target is obtained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46, the opening/closing pattern of each variable winning device 72, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving B" and "latent probability variation B" which is a maximum of five rounds of jackpot of the first special symbol is "lower only". ", in all rounds, only the second variable prize winning device 74 that is "lower", that is, the number of prize balls per winning ball is 15, is opened, and the second variable prize winning device 74 is in the attacker unit 71 At the same time, the first variable winning device 72 is closed, and balls cannot flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72.

That is, in the opening/closing pattern "lower only", the ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 in the first to fifth rounds of the jackpot. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, when a ball flows into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 near the placement position of the probability variable area 75, the jackpot type ( That is, in the jackpot type "time saving B"), the probability variable area 75 is closed before the ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 reaches the placement position of the probability variable area 75 (including the case where it is not opened at all). On the other hand, in a jackpot type that can cause a "probability variation state" (i.e., jackpot type "latent probability variation B"), the ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 reaches the placement position of the probability variation area 75. The variable probability area 75 is configured to be open until the target is obtained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46, the opening/closing pattern of each variable winning device 72, 74 is "alternately up and down" corresponding to the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" which is a jackpot of maximum 10 rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In odd-numbered rounds (i.e., 1st, 3rd, 5th, 7th, and 9th rounds), the "upper", ie, the first variable winning device 72 is opened and the attacker unit is released from the first variable winning device 72. While the ball can flow into the attacker unit 71, the second variable winning device 74 is closed, and the ball cannot flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74.

In addition, the opening/closing pattern "alternately upper and lower" is set to "lower", that is, the second variable prize winning device 74 is opened and the second Balls can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74, and the first variable winning device 72 is closed, making it impossible for balls to flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72. It has become.

That is, in the opening/closing pattern "alternating up and down", the ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 in the first round of the jackpot, and the ball can flow from the second variable winning device 74 in the next round (i.e., the second round). Balls can flow into the attacker unit 71, and thereafter, the balls are alternately sent from the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 into the attacking unit 71 every round until the end of the jackpot (that is, the end of the 10th round). The ball is allowed to flow into the area. Therefore, the number of rounds that can be opened by the first variable winning device 72 is "5", and the number of rounds that can be opened by the second variable winning device 74 is "5".

In addition, in the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" of the sixth embodiment, similar to the first embodiment, in the first round, the third round, and the ninth round when the probability variable area 75 is opened, the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" The second variable winning device 74, which takes a short time for the ball to reach the variable probability area 75, is open. Therefore, when the probability variable area 75 is opened in the first, third, and ninth rounds of the jackpot type "probability variation A", the winning ball to the second variable winning device 74 is placed at the probability variable area 75 arrangement position. At the timing of reaching , the variable probability area 75 maintains an open state, and the setting is such that a ball can flow into the variable probability area 75. For this reason, the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" is configured so that a "probability fluctuation state" can occur after the jackpot ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46, the opening/closing pattern of each variable winning device 72, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type "Time saving C" and the jackpot type "Latent probability variation C", which are jackpots of a maximum of 10 rounds of the second special symbol, is determined. "lower and upper alternating" means that in odd-numbered rounds (i.e., 1st round, 3rd round, 5th round, 7th round and 9th round), "lower", that is, the second variable winning device 74 is opened and the second variable winning device 74 is opened. Balls can flow into the attacker unit 71 from 74, and the first variable winning device 72 is closed, making it impossible for balls to flow into the attacking unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72.

In addition, the opening/closing pattern "lower and upper alternating" is such that in even numbered rounds (i.e., 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, and 10th rounds), the "upper", that is, the first variable winning device 72 is opened, and the first variable prize winning device 72 is opened. While balls can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72, the second variable winning device 74 is closed, and balls cannot flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74. It becomes.

That is, in the opening/closing pattern "lower and upper alternating", the ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 in the first round of the jackpot, and the ball can flow into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 in the next round (i.e., the second round). From then on, balls can flow into the attacker unit 71, and thereafter, the balls are alternately sent from the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 to the attacker unit 71 every round until the end of the jackpot (that is, the end of the 10th round). A ball can flow inside. Therefore, the number of rounds that can be opened by the first variable winning device 72 is "5", and the number of rounds that can be opened by the second variable winning device 74 is "5".

Here, in the jackpot type "time saving B", the second variable winning device 74 has a short time until the ball that has entered the attacker unit 71 reaches the probability variable area 75 (for example, about 1.0 seconds). 75 is set to be open in the 1st, 3rd and 5th rounds where it is closed.

On the other hand, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", in the second and fourth rounds when the variable probability area 75 is opened, the time required for the ball that has entered the attacker unit 71 to reach the variable probability area 75 is short. The variable winning device 74 is open. Therefore, in the second and fourth rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", when the variable probability area 75 is opened, the ball that has entered the second variable winning device 74 reaches the position where the variable probability area 75 is arranged. At this timing, the probability variable area 75 maintains an open state, and the setting is such that a ball can flow into the probability variable area 75. For this reason, the jackpot type "latent probability variation C" is configured so that a "probability variation state" can occur after the jackpot ends.

In addition, in the jackpot type "probability variation A", "time saving C", or "latent probability variation C" of the sixth embodiment, the number of openings of the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 in the jackpot is different. It may be configured as follows. Specifically, for example, in the jackpot type "time saving C", the number of openings of the first variable winning device 72 is 3 times, and the number of openings of the second variable winning device 74 is 7 times, for a total of 10 rounds, In the jackpot type "probability variation A", the first variable winning device 72 may be opened 8 times and the second variable winning device 74 may be opened 2 times, for a total of 10 rounds. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of gaming values given to the player and improve the interest of the game.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the number of prize balls based on winnings to the first variable winning device 72 is set to 10, and the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 74 is set to 10. The number of prize balls based on this is set to 15, and the game value given to each variable winning device 72, 74 is configured to be different. In addition, when there is a jackpot, there is a jackpot type in which only the first variable winning device 72 is released, a jackpot type in which only the second variable winning device 74 is released, and the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74. It is configured to provide a jackpot type in which both are opened. With this configuration, even if the jackpot type has the same number of rounds, the time required for the jackpot (jackpot consumption time) is the same (almost the same) because the variable winning devices 72 and 74 that are opened are different. Even if there is, the game value given can be clearly different. That is, even for the same five-round jackpot, whether it is a jackpot type in which only the first variable winning device 72 is opened, a jackpot type in which only the second variable winning device 74 is opened, or a jackpot type in which only the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are opened, Depending on the type of jackpot in which both the two variable winning devices 74 are opened (alternately), the game value that can be given to the player can be varied even if the jackpot consumption time is the same (almost the same). By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the time efficiency of the game value provided, enrich the variations of the game, and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment has the same configuration as the first to fifth embodiments, and has the same effects.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a pachinko machine 10 in a seventh embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is provided with a retractable first opening/closing plate 72a and a second opening/closing plate 74a, and when a jackpot is hit, the first opening/closing plate 72a or the second opening/closing plate 74a which is in a protruding state as an initial state. By immersing either one of them, the configuration is such that a ball can flow into the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74. The ball is configured to flow into a probability variable area 75 or a discharge passage 76 located further downstream (lower side and left side in front view) of the second variable winning device 74 located downstream.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, similar to the fifth embodiment, a retractable first opening/closing plate 72a and a second opening/closing plate 74a are provided. By recessing either the first opening/closing plate 72a or the second opening/closing plate 74a, the ball can flow into the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74. On the other hand, the probability variable area 75 and the discharge passage 76 are arranged on the lower side and right side of the first variable winning device 72 when viewed from the front, so that the balls that have flowed into the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 can flow into the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74. . That is, the balls that have flowed into the first variable winning device 72 can reach the probability variable area 75 or the discharge passage 76 relatively early after a predetermined time has elapsed, while the balls that have flowed into the second variable winning device can reach the above-mentioned predetermined amount of time. It is configured such that it can reach the probability variable area 75 or the discharge passage 76 after a period of time longer than the time has elapsed. In addition, in order for the balls to flow into the second variable winning device 74, the first opening/closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 is closed, and then the upper surface of the first opening/closing plate 72a is moved from the right side to the left side when viewed from the front. It is configured so that it is necessary to completely roll.

With this configuration, the time it takes for the ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 to reach the variable probability region 75 or the discharge passage 76, and the time it takes for the ball that has flowed into the second variable winning device 74 to reach the variable probability region 75 or the discharge passage 76 can be adjusted. It becomes possible to increase the time difference between the time taken to reach the passage 76 and the time taken to reach the passage 76. As a result, for example, a jackpot type that is a jackpot in which the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are opened alternately and in which a "probability fluctuation state" cannot occur after the jackpot (for example, a jackpot type "time saving") A"), when opening the probability variable area 75 when the second variable winning device 74 is opened, even if the interval time is not set before the opening of the second variable winning device 74, the time of () can be shortened. ), it is possible to secure enough time for the ball to reach the position of the open probability variable area 75, and the time until the ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 reaches the probability variable area 75. By closing the variable probability area 75, it becomes possible to provide a "probability variable state" according to the type of jackpot. Therefore, without providing an interval time (by setting it short) during a jackpot, it is possible to quickly provide gaming value.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 according to the first to sixth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to sixth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Details of the attacker unit 71 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is an enlarged front view schematically showing a front view of an attacker unit 71 including a first variable winning device 72, a second variable winning device 74, a probability variable area 75, and a discharge passage 76 according to the seventh embodiment. . As shown in FIG. 47, the attacker unit 71 of the seventh embodiment mainly includes a first variable winning device 72, a second variable winning device 74, a probability variable area 75, and a discharge passage 76. A second variable winning device 74 is arranged on the left side of the device 72 when viewed from the front.

In addition, similar to the first embodiment, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 have an upper right corner formed in the upper right portion of the attacker unit 71 from the right side in front view when fired in a so-called right-handed game. While the ball rolling along the slope of the rolling portion 71a is configured to be able to flow in from the right side of the attacker unit 71, the ball fired in a so-called left-handed game is not configured to flow in.

The first big winning hole detection passage 72e of the first variable winning device 72 of the seventh embodiment transfers the ball detected by the first big winning hole switch 72c to the first big winning hole switch 72c in the attacker unit 71. This is a passage for guiding to the probability variable area 75 provided directly below. This first large winning opening post-detection passage 72e is configured to have a shorter passage length (for example, 1/5) than a second large winning opening post-detection passage 74e, which will be described later. Therefore, the time required to reach the variable probability area 75 from the most upstream side of the passage 72e after detecting the first big winning opening is configured to take about 0.3 seconds.

That is, the ball that has flown into the first variable winning device 72 takes at least about 1.0 seconds to flow down the first big winning opening pre-detection passage 72d before reaching the variable probability area 75 in the attacker unit 71. It is configured so that it takes about 1.3 seconds in total, including about 0.3 seconds for flowing down the passage 72e after detecting the first big prize opening. As a result, for example, even if a ball flows into the first variable prize winning device 72 immediately after the first opening/closing plate 72a is opened (retracted), the time required for the ball to reach the probability variable area 75 is at least about 1.3%. Since it takes several seconds, if the opening/closing plate 75a of the variable probability area 75 is not opened for approximately 1.3 seconds or more from the start of opening of the first opening/closing plate 72a, the ball will not flow into the variable area 75. It is composed of

In addition, by making the inflow pattern of the winning balls into the first variable winning device 72 flow from a position where they flow down (fall) from directly above the first big winning opening switch 72c, the first big winning opening detection passage 72d It may also be configured to shorten the residence time at . That is, the balls fired in a right-handed game are caused to flow into the first variable winning device 72 by falling from a position directly above the first big winning port switch 72c of the attacker unit 71 toward the first opening/closing plate 72a. The ball can be immediately detected by the first big prize opening switch 72c. With this configuration, it becomes possible for the balls flowing into the first variable winning device 72 to quickly reach the placement position of the probability variable area 75.

In addition, after the ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 is detected by the first big winning port switch 72c, the ball may flow into the probability variable area 75 within the first predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) or not. , is configured such that it can be detected by a discharge switch 76a provided in a discharge passage 76 disposed on the right side of the probability variable region 75 when viewed from the front. In other words, the ball detected by the first big prize opening switch 72c is configured to be detected by the discharge switch 76a within the first predetermined period. With this configuration, if the ball detected by the first big winning port switch 72c is not detected by the ejection switch 76a within the first predetermined period, some kind of fraudulent activity or winning abnormality such as ball clogging will occur. It is possible to detect the possibility that

The second big winning hole detection passage 74e of the second variable winning device 74 of the seventh embodiment sends the ball detected by the second big winning hole switch 74c to the probability variable area 75 provided in the attacker unit 71. This second large winning opening detection passage 74e is configured to have a longer passage length (for example, five times) than the first large winning opening detection passage 72e described above. Therefore, the time required to reach the variable probability area 75 from the most upstream side of the passage 74e after detecting the second big winning opening is configured to take about 1.5 seconds.

That is, the ball that has flowed into the second variable winning device 72 takes at least about 0.3 seconds to flow down the second big winning opening pre-detection passage 74d before reaching the variable probability area 75 in the attacker unit 71. It is configured to take about 2.5 seconds in total, including about 1.5 seconds for flowing down the passage 74e after detecting the second big prize opening. Furthermore, by the time the ball reaches the installation position of the second variable winning device 74, the first opening/closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 is closed, and the upper surface of the first opening/closing plate 72a is moved from the rightmost end to the farthest end. It is configured so that it can flow in after it has completely rolled to the left end in about 2.0 seconds. As a result, even if, for example, the second opening/closing plate 74a of the second variable prize winning device 74 is opened immediately after the first opening/closing plate 72a is closed (protruded), the ball fired in a right-handed game will not reach the probability variable area 75. Since it takes at least about 4.5 seconds to reach , the opening time of the variable area opening/closing plate 75a of the variable area 75 is approximately 4.5 seconds from the start of opening of the second opening/closing plate 74a (closing of the first opening/closing plate 72a). If the ball is not opened for more than a second, the ball does not flow into the variable probability region 75.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the probability variable area 75 and the discharge passage 76 are arranged on the lower and right sides of the first variable winning device 72 in front view, and the first variable winning device 72 and the It is configured so that the balls flowing into the variable prize winning device 74 can flow into the variable prize winning device 74. That is, the balls that have flowed into the first variable winning device 72 can reach the probability variable area 75 or the discharge passage 76 relatively early after a predetermined time has elapsed, while the balls that have flowed into the second variable winning device can reach the above-mentioned predetermined time. It is configured such that it can reach the probability variable area 75 or the discharge passage 76 after a period of time longer than the time has elapsed. In addition, in order for the balls to flow into the second variable winning device 74, the first opening/closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 is closed, and then the upper surface of the first opening/closing plate 72a is moved from the right side to the left side when viewed from the front. It is configured so that it is necessary to completely roll. With this configuration, the time it takes for the ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 72 to reach the variable probability region 75 or the discharge passage 76, and the time it takes for the ball that has flowed into the second variable winning device 74 to reach the variable probability region 75 or the discharge passage 76 can be adjusted. It becomes possible to increase the time difference between the time taken to reach the passage 76 and the time taken to reach the passage 76. As a result, for example, a jackpot type that is a jackpot in which the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are opened alternately and in which a "probability fluctuation state" cannot occur after the jackpot (for example, a jackpot type "time saving") A"), when opening the probability variable area 75 when the second variable winning device 74 is opened, even if the interval time is not set before the opening of the second variable winning device 74, the time of () can be shortened. ), it is possible to secure enough time for the ball to reach the position of the open probability variable area 75, and the time until the ball flowing in from the second variable winning device 74 reaches the probability variable area 75. By closing the variable probability area 75, it becomes possible to provide a "probability variable state" according to the type of jackpot. Therefore, without providing an interval time (by setting it short) during a jackpot, it is possible to quickly provide gaming value.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment has the same configuration as the first to sixth embodiments, and has the same effects.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, a pachinko machine 10 in an eighth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, an attacker unit 71 having a first variable winning device 72 and a second variable winning device 74 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the game board 13 when viewed from the front, so that it is possible to play a so-called right-handed game. Only the fired balls can win the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74, and the balls fired in the so-called left-handed game can win the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74. It is configured in such a way that it is not possible.

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, the first variable winning device 72 of the attacker unit 71 is arranged at a position where a ball fired in a so-called left-handed game can win, and the second variable winning device 74 is arranged at a position where a ball fired in a so-called left-handed game can win. The ball is placed at a position where a ball fired in a so-called right-handed game can win a prize. A probability variable area 75 and a discharge passage 76 are provided in the attacker unit 71, so that the balls flowing into the first variable winning device 72 in a left-handed game and the balls flowing into the second variable winning device 74 in a right-handed game can be separated. Both are configured to be able to flow into the variable probability region 75 or the discharge passage 76. With this configuration, the variable winning devices 72 and 74 that can win a prize depending on the firing mode of the ball are made different, thereby enriching the variation of the game, and also making it possible for the ball to win a prize in the attacker unit 71 with different firing modes. Even in this case, the number of parts of the attacker unit 71 can be reduced by sharing the variable probability region 75 and the discharge passage 76.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment will be described, focusing on the points that are different from the pachinko machines 10 in the first to seventh embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to seventh embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 48, the arrangement position of the attacker unit 71 having the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 will be explained regarding the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 48 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the attacker unit 71 of the eighth embodiment, the first variable winning device 72 is located below the starting port unit 64 when viewed from the front, and when fired in a left-handed game. While the ball can be won, the ball fired in the right-handed game is configured to be impossible (difficult) to win. Therefore, in the jackpot type in which the first variable winning device 72 is released or in a predetermined round in the jackpot type, the player performs a left-handed game and creates a gameplay in which the first variable winning device 72 wins a ball. .

The ball that has flown into the first variable winning device 72 flows down the first big winning opening pre-detection passage 72d, is detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c, and then flows down the first big winning opening post detection passage 72e. It is configured such that it can flow down to the location where the probability variable area 75 is provided. Then, after the ball is detected by the variable probability region switch 75c when the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a of the variable probability region 75 is open, or after the ball is detected by the variable probability region switch 75c when the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a of the variable probability region 75 is closed. It flows down into the discharge passage 76 without flowing into the variable rate area 75, is detected by the discharge switch 76a, and then detected by the out switch 66a (see FIG. 8), and then discharged to the outside of the game board 13. .

Next, in the attacker unit 71 of the eighth embodiment, the second variable winning device 74 is arranged to be located on the lower right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front (lower side of the normal symbol gate 67 when viewed from the front). Therefore, balls fired in right-handed games can win prizes, while balls fired in left-handed games cannot (difficult) to win prizes. Therefore, in the jackpot type in which the second variable winning device 74 is released or in a predetermined round in the jackpot type, the player performs a right-handed game, and a game feature is created in which the ball enters the second variable winning device 74. .

The ball that has flown into the second variable winning device 74 flows down the second big winning opening pre-detection passage 74d, is detected by the second big winning opening switch 74c, and then flows down the second big winning opening detection passage 74e. It is configured such that it can flow down to the location where the probability variable area 75 is provided. Then, after the ball is detected by the variable probability region switch 75c when the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a of the variable probability region 75 is open, or after the ball is detected by the variable probability region switch 75c when the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a of the variable probability region 75 is closed. It flows down into the discharge passage 76 without flowing into the variable rate area 75, is detected by the discharge switch 76a, and then detected by the out switch 66a (see FIG. 8), and then discharged to the outside of the game board 13. .

With this configuration, in order to make the ball enter the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 that is opened in the jackpot type or a predetermined round in the jackpot type, by changing the firing mode of the ball. , it is possible to increase the variety of games and increase the interest of the games. In particular, when the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are opened and closed alternately in a jackpot, the fire is fired to the player in accordance with the opening and closing of the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74. By changing the mode, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Also, by opening and closing the probability variable area 75 according to the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 being opened, the ball can be won in the variable winning devices 72, 74 at any timing in any firing mode. Depending on whether or not it is possible to enter the ball into the variable probability area 75, it is possible to create a game feature. Specifically, for example, when winning a jackpot type in which the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are alternately opened and closed, the probability variable area 75 is activated only when the second variable winning device 74 is opened. is configured such that the variable probability area 75 is opened and balls can flow into the variable probability area 75, and the variable probability area 75 is opened after the second variable winning device 74 is opened, but the opening of the variable probability area 75 is relatively small. The opening time of the probability variable area 75 is set so that it is difficult to cause a ball to flow into the probability variable area 75 unless the second variable winning device 74 is closed and a right-handed game is played. (for example, 2 seconds). That is, when playing a left-handed game and winning a ball in the first variable winning device 72, and switching from the left-handed game to the right-handed game at the timing when the first variable winning device 72 is closed, the probability change area 75 It is set so that it is difficult (not in time) to allow balls to flow into the second variable winning device 74 at the timing when the is opened. With this configuration, the player can alternately play the left-handed game and the right-handed game in the jackpot type, and reliably send the ball to the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74. You can either make the ball win and acquire the gaming value, or you can only play the right-handed game, give up on winning in the first variable winning device 72, and let the ball pass through the probability variable area 75 based on the winning in the second variable winning device 74. It becomes possible to choose whether to obtain a "probability fluctuating state" or not. As a result, it is possible to create a gaming experience in which the player himself/herself can select the gaming value to be given to the player even for the same jackpot type, and to increase the interest of the game by enriching the variation of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment has the same configuration as the first to seventh embodiments, and has the same effects.

<Ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, a pachinko machine 10 in a ninth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, in the probability variable area 75 in the attacker unit 71, a probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a is provided in order to make the inflow of balls into the probability variable area switch 75c variable, and a probability variable area solenoid 75b is provided. (See FIG. 8) to open and close the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a. When the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a is retracted (opened), the ball is allowed to flow into the variable probability region 75, while when the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a is protruded (closed), the ball is allowed to flow into the variable variable region 75. The balls flow into the discharge passage 76 without flowing in. With this configuration, it is configured to change whether or not a ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 is detected by the probability variable area switch 75c.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the first discharge passage 79a into which the balls flowing into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 can flow, and the second variable winning device 74 from the attacker unit 71 A second discharge passage 79b is provided between the first discharge passage 79a and the second discharge passage 79b, into which the balls can flow. A probability variable region 75 is provided in a portion located on the downstream side. Further, a first discharge opening/closing plate 79a1 capable of opening and closing the first discharge passage 79a is provided, and a second discharge opening/closing plate 79b1 capable of opening and closing the second discharge passage 79b is provided. Further, the variable probability region 75 is configured such that the upstream side of the variable probability region switch 75c is not covered and is always open. Further, the first discharge passage 79a, the second discharge passage 79b, and the probability variable region 75 are configured to merge on the upstream side of the discharge switch 76a provided in the discharge passage 76. When the first discharge opening/closing plate 79a1 is opened (retracted), the balls flowing into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 flow down to the first discharge passage 79a and are installed in the discharge passage 76. On the other hand, if the first discharge opening/closing plate 79a1 is closed (protruded), the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 is detected by the first discharge opening/closing plate 79a1. The liquid rolls on the upper surface of the valve and flows into the variable rate area 75 disposed on the downstream side, and is detected by the variable rate area switch 75c, and then by the discharge switch 76a of the discharge passage 76. Further, when the second discharge opening/closing plate 79b1 is opened (retracted), the balls flowing into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 flow down to the second discharge passage 79b and are installed in the discharge passage 76. On the other hand, if the second discharge opening/closing plate 79b1 is closed (protruding), the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 is detected by the second discharge opening/closing plate 79b1. The liquid rolls on the upper surface of the valve and flows into the variable rate area 75 disposed on the downstream side, and is detected by the variable rate area switch 75c, and then by the discharge switch 76a of the discharge passage 76.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the points that are different from the pachinko machines 10 according to the first to eighth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to eighth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Details of the attacker unit 71 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 shows a front view of an attacker unit 71 including a first variable winning device 72, a second variable winning device 74, a variable probability area 75, a first discharge passage 79a, a second discharge passage 79b, and a discharge passage 76 according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 2 is an enlarged front view schematically showing the view.

As shown in FIG. 49, the attacker unit of the ninth embodiment mainly includes a first variable winning device 72, a second variable winning device 74, a probability variable area 75, a first discharge passage 79a, a second discharge passage 79b, and a discharge passage. The second variable winning device 74 is arranged on the left side (downstream side) of the first variable winning device 72 when viewed from the front.

The first discharge passage 79a is provided in the first large prize opening detection passage 72e, and is mainly composed of a first discharge opening/closing plate 79a1 and a first discharge opening/closing solenoid (not shown).

The first discharge opening/closing plate 79a1 is a retractable opening/closing plate disposed at a position that can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the player, and covers the upstream side of the first discharge passage 79a. It is configured so that it can be opened and closed.

When the first discharge opening/closing plate 79a1 is in the open state (retracted state), the upstream side (upper side) of the first discharge passage 79a is opened and the first discharge opening/closing plate 79a1 is connected to the first variable prize winning device 72. The inflowing spheres are guided to the first discharge passage 79a and then to the discharge passage 76. On the other hand, the first discharge opening/closing plate 79a1 is disposed so that its upper surface is flush with the bottom surface (rolling surface of the ball) of the passage in the attacker unit 71 in the closed state (protruding state), and the first variable winning prize is The ball that has entered the device 72 is guided to the probability variable area 75. The ball guided to the probability variable area 75 is discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 71 (to the back side of the game board 13) after passing through the discharge passage 76.

The second discharge passage 79b is provided in the second large prize opening detection passage 74e, and is mainly composed of a second discharge opening/closing plate 79b1 and a second discharge opening/closing solenoid (not shown).

The second discharge opening/closing plate 79b1 is a retractable opening/closing plate disposed at a position that can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the player, and covers the upstream side of the second discharge passage 79b. It is configured so that it can be opened and closed.

When the second discharge opening/closing plate 79b1 is in an open state (retracted state), the upstream side (upper side) of the second discharge passage 79b is opened, and the second discharge opening/closing plate 79b1 is connected to the second variable prize winning device 74. The inflowing spheres are guided to the second discharge passage 79b and then to the discharge passage 76. On the other hand, when the second discharge opening/closing plate 79b1 is in a closed state (protruding state), its upper surface is arranged flush with the bottom surface of the passage (rolling surface of the ball) in the attacker unit 71, and the second variable winning prize is The ball that has flowed into the device 74 is guided to the probability variable area 75. The ball guided to the probability variable area 75 is discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 71 (to the back side of the game board 13) after passing through the discharge passage 76.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are set to be opened for each round in each jackpot type, and the first discharge passage 79a or the second discharge passage Opening or closing of the passage 79b is set. And, by making it possible for balls to flow into the probability variable area 75 according to the relationship between the variable winning devices 72 and 74 that are opened and closed and the first discharge passage 79a or the second discharge passage 79b that is in the closed state (projected state). , the type of jackpot cannot be determined only from the opening patterns of the first variable winning devices 72, 74, so that it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize which type of jackpot he has won, and in which gaming state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that makes the player guess whether he or she is playing the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment has the same configuration as the first to eighth embodiments, and has the same effects.

<Tenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a pachinko machine 10 in a tenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, one attacker unit 71 is provided with a first variable winning device 72 and a second variable winning device 74, and the downstream side where the balls flowing into each variable winning device 72, 74 are merged. A variable probability region 75 and a discharge passage 76 are provided in the variable winning device 75, so that balls flowing from either of the variable winning devices 72, 74 can flow into the variable probability region 75.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are constructed from different members, and the balls flowing from the first variable winning device 72 flow down. The flow path through which the balls flowing from the second variable prize winning device 74 flow are merged at a merging portion 73, and the variable probability region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are located downstream of the merging portion 73. do. With this configuration, it is no longer necessary to share the variable probability area 75 in the variable winning devices 72 and 74 which are configured separately, and to provide the variable probability area 75 and the discharge passage 76 for each variable winning device 72 and 74. , the number of parts of the attacker unit 71 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to ninth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to ninth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 50, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 of the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 schematically shows an enlarged front view of the right side portion of the game board 13 in which the first variable winning device 72, the second variable winning device 74, the probability variable area 75, and the discharge passage 76 of the tenth embodiment are arranged. FIG. 50(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right-handed ball when both the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 in the tenth embodiment are in the closed state. 50(b) is a schematic sectional view of the right side of the game board 13 for explaining the behavior, and FIG. 50(b) shows that the first variable winning device 72 in the tenth embodiment is in the open state and 50(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right side portion of the game board 13 for explaining the behavior of a right-handed ball when the device 74 is in the closed state, and FIG. A schematic cross-sectional view of the right side of the game board 13 for explaining the behavior of a right-handed ball when the variable winning device 72 is in a closed state and the second variable winning device 74 is in an open state. It is.

As shown in FIGS. 50(a) to 50(c), in the tenth embodiment, on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, there is a right flow channel through which all or almost all of the balls fired in a right-handed game can flow down. 87 is formed. A first variable winning device 72 having a first opening/closing plate 72a is formed (arranged) at the lower left side of the right channel 87 when viewed from the front. Further, a second variable prize winning device 74 having a second right opening/closing plate 74a1 and a second left opening/closing plate 74a2 is formed (arranged) at the upper right side (and upper left side when viewed from the front) of the right channel 87 when viewed from the front. There is.

The first variable winning device 72 of the tenth embodiment is formed in the lower part of the left side wall of the right flow path 87, and mainly covers the space in which the first large winning opening detection pre-detection path 72d is formed in an upright state. A first opening/closing plate 72a configured to be rotatable around the lower part of the first opening/closing plate 72a, and a first opening/closing plate 72a for opening/closing (standing up or tilting) the first opening/closing plate 72a on the left side in front view with the lower part of the first opening/closing plate 72a as an axis. A first big winning opening solenoid (not shown), a first big winning opening switch 72c that detects the winning ball in the first variable winning device 72, and a ball before being detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c. There are provided a first big winning opening pre-detection passage 72d through which the ball flows down, and a first big winning opening post-detection passage 72e through which the ball flows down after being detected by the first big winning opening switch 72c. The first large winning opening detection passage 72e is configured to merge with a second large winning opening detection passage 74e of a second variable winning a prize device 74, which will be described later, at the merging portion 73.

Here, the ball that has flown into the first variable winning device 72 flows down the first big winning opening pre-detection passage 72d for at least about 0.3 seconds before reaching the variable probability area 75 in the attacker unit 71. It is configured to take about 2.8 seconds in total, including about 2.5 seconds for flowing down the passage 72e after detecting the first big prize opening. As a result, for example, even if a ball flows into the first variable winning device 72 immediately after the first opening/closing plate 72a is opened, it will take at least about 2.8 seconds for the ball to reach the variable probability area 75. Therefore, if the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a of the probability variable area 75 is not opened for approximately 2.8 seconds or more from the start of opening of the first opening/closing plate 72a, the structure is such that the ball does not flow into the probability variable area 75. ing.

Therefore, when the first opening/closing plate 72a of the first variable prize winning device 72 is opened, the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a is closed at least within about 2.8 seconds after the first opening/closing plate 72a is opened. If this happens, the setting is such that even if a ball wins in the first variable winning device 72, the ball cannot flow into the variable probability area 75.

The second variable winning device 74 of the tenth embodiment is formed in the upper part of the right side wall and the upper part of the left side of the right side channel 87, and mainly stands up the space in which the second big winning opening detection passage 74d is formed. A second right side opening/closing plate 74a1 is arranged in the upper part of the left side of the right flow path 87 and is configured to cover the second right side opening/closing plate 74a1 so as to be rotatable around the lower part. The second left opening/closing plate 74a2 is configured to be rotatable as an axis, and the second right opening/closing plate 74a2 is configured to be rotatable as an axis, and the second right opening/closing plate 74a2 is configured to be rotatable as an axis, and the second right opening/closing plate 74a2 is configured to be rotatable as an axis, and the second right opening/closing plate 74a2 is located on the right side in front view or on the left side in front view with the lower portions of the second right side opening/closing plate 74a1 and the second left side opening/closing plate 74a2 as an axis. A second big prize opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing (standing up or tilting) the opening/closing plate 74a1 and the second left opening/closing plate 74a2; The big winning opening switch 74c, the second big winning opening detection passage 74d through which the ball flows down before it is detected by the second big winning opening switch 74c, and the ball after being detected by the second big winning opening switch 74c. A second large winning a prize opening detection passage 74e is provided through which the second large winning a prize opening flows down. The second large winning opening detection passage 74e is configured to merge with the first large winning opening detection passage 72e of the first variable winning apparatus 72 described above at the merging portion 73.

Here, when the ball can flow into the second variable winning device 74, the second right side opening/closing plate 74a1 formed on the right side wall of the right side channel 87 tilts to the left side in front view with the lower part as an axis, and The second left opening/closing plate 74a2 formed on the left side wall of the flow path 87 is tilted to the right in front view with the lower part as an axis. At this time, the second right side opening/closing plate 74a1 and the second left side opening/closing plate 74a2 are rotationally driven in synchronization by the second big prize opening solenoid (not shown), but the amount of rotation differs depending on each cam (not shown). It is configured as follows. Specifically, the amount of rotation of the second left opening/closing plate 74a2 is configured to tilt approximately 110 degrees to the right from the upright state, and the amount of rotation of the second right opening/closing plate 74a1 is such that the amount of rotation is approximately 70 degrees to the left from the upright state. It is configured to be tilted. Then, the ball flowing down from the right channel inlet 88 of the right channel 87 first collides with the inclined surface of the second left opening/closing plate 74a2, and then moves the inclined surface of the second left opening/closing plate 74a2 from the front along the slope. It is configured to roll to the right side when viewed from the front, then roll to the right side when viewed from the front on the inclined surface of the second right side opening/closing plate 74a1, and flow into the second variable winning device 74. In this way, the second left side opening/closing plate 74a2 and the second right side opening/closing plate 74a1 are configured to close most of the right side flow path 87, so that the balls flowing down the right side flow path 87 are transferred to the second variable winning device 74. By causing the balls to flow down the right flow path 87, it becomes possible to efficiently make the balls flowing down the right flow path 87 enter the second variable winning device 74. In addition, since the second right opening/closing plate 74a1 and the second left opening/closing plate 74a2 of the second variable winning device 74 are arranged upstream of the first opening/closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72, temporarily Even if the opening/closing plate 72a, the second right opening/closing plate 74a1, and the second left opening/closing plate 74a2 are both open, the ball is configured to flow into the second variable winning device 74 located on the upstream side. has been done.

Here, the ball that has flowed into the second variable winning device 74 flows down the second big winning opening pre-detection passage 74d for at least about 0.3 seconds before reaching the variable probability area 75 in the attacker unit 71. It is configured to take a total of about 0.8 seconds, including about 0.5 seconds for flowing down the passage 72e after detecting the first big prize opening. Thereby, for example, even if a ball flows into the first variable prize winning device 72 immediately after the second right side opening/closing plate 74a1 and the second left side opening/closing plate 74a2 are opened (tilted), the ball reaches the variable probability area 75. Since it takes at least about 0.8 seconds to open the variable variable area opening/closing plate 75a of the variable variable area 75, the opening time of the variable variable area opening/closing plate 75a of the variable variable area 75 is approximately 0.8 seconds or more from the start of opening of the second right opening/closing plate 74a1 and the second left opening/closing plate 74a2. If not, the configuration is such that the ball does not flow into the probability variable area 75.

Therefore, when the second right opening/closing plate 74a1 and the second left opening/closing plate 74a2 of the second variable prize winning device 74 are opened, for example, at least If the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a is closed within about 0.8 seconds, the setting is such that the ball cannot flow into the variable probability area 75 even if the ball wins in the second variable winning device 74. It has become.

The variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a of the tenth embodiment is disposed so that its upper surface is flush with the bottom surface (rolling surface of the ball) of the passage in the attacker unit 71 in the closed state (protruding state). The balls that have flowed into the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74 are guided to the discharge passage 76. The ball guided to the discharge passage 76 is guided to the discharge passage 76, which will be described later, and is detected by the discharge switch 76a, and then discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 71 (to the back side of the game board 13).

On the other hand, when the variable variable area opening/closing plate 75a is in the open state (retracted state), the upstream side (upper side) of the variable variable area switch 75c is opened, and the flow flows into the first variable winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74. After the ball is guided to a passage where a variable probability area switch 75c is provided, the ball is guided to a discharge passage 76.

Here, as shown in FIG. 50(a), when both the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are closed, the ball fired in the right-handed game is 88 into the right flow path 87, and since the first opening/closing plate 72a of the first variable winning device 72 or the second left opening/closing plate 74a2 of the second variable winning device 74 does not exist in the downstream direction, It is configured to flow down to a right side flow path outlet 89 provided therein. The ball that has flown down to the right channel outlet 89 is configured to flow down to the out port 66 of the game board 13 (see FIG. 3).

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(b), when the second variable winning device 74 is closed and the first variable winning device 72 is open, the ball fired in the right-handed game will be directed to the right side. It flows from the flow path inlet 88 into the right side flow path 87, and the first opening/closing plate 72a of the first variable prize winning device 72 is tilted in the downstream direction, so that the inclined surface of the first opening/closing plate 72a It is configured to collide with and flow into the first variable prize winning device 72 along the inclined surface.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(c), when the first variable winning device 72 is closed and the second variable winning device 74 is open, the ball fired in the right-handed game will be directed to the right side. It flows into the right side flow path 87 from the flow path inlet 88, and the second left opening/closing plate 74a2 of the second variable prize winning device 74 is tilted in the downstream direction, and the second left opening/closing plate 74a2 and the second left opening/closing plate 74a2 are tilted. Since the second right side opening/closing plate 74a1 is tilted so as to bridge the space between the two major winning opening detection passages 74d, it collides with the inclined surface of the second left side opening/closing plate 74a2, and the second left side opening/closing plate 74a1 collides with the inclined surface of the second left side opening/closing plate 74a2. It is configured to flow into the second variable prize winning device 74 along the slopes of the plate 74a2 and the second right opening/closing plate 74a1.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are each constructed from separate members, while the The channel through which the balls flow down and the channel through which the balls flowing from the second variable winning device 74 flow are merged at a merging portion 73, and a variable probability region 75 and a discharge passage 76 are located downstream of the merging portion 73. Configure it as follows. With this configuration, it is no longer necessary to share the variable probability area 75 in the variable winning devices 72 and 74 which are configured separately, and to provide the variable probability area 75 and the discharge passage 76 for each variable winning device 72 and 74. , the number of parts of the attacker unit 71 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-mentioned embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments in any way, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. can be easily inferred. For example, the numerical values listed in each of the above embodiments are merely examples, and it is of course possible to employ other numerical values.

Furthermore, it is naturally possible to configure any of the configurations of the modified examples shown below by combining the configurations of the respective embodiments described above. Furthermore, it is naturally possible to configure any of the configurations of the following modified examples in combination with each configuration of one or more other modified examples. In these cases, additional effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

<Modification 1: Continuously opening the same variable winning devices 72 and 74>
In the first embodiment, the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are alternately opened in each round at the time of a jackpot. Instead, it may be configured such that either one of the variable winning devices 72, 74 is opened continuously, and then the other variable winning device 74, 72 is opened. With this configuration, variations in the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are made abundant according to the type of jackpot, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type has won. However, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which game state he/she is playing the game. In particular, in the eighth embodiment, the opening pattern of the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 is an irregular opening pattern (not having regularity such as alternate opening or only one opening). By opening the winning device 72 or the second variable winning device 74, the first variable winning device 72, which allows winnings only in left-handed games, opens, or the second variable winning device 74, which allows winnings only in right-handed games, opens. A game feature of guessing whether or not the opening will be created is created, and a game feature of adjusting the winning mode of the opened variable winning devices 72, 74 in which prizes can be won is created, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 2: Making the open round and effective round of the probability variable area 75 different>
In the embodiment described above, the configuration is such that when the variable probability region 75 is opened, the variable probability region 75 is always set to be valid. Instead of this, a case is provided in which the variable probability area 75 is invalid even if the variable variable area 75 is opened, or a case where the variable variable area 75 is valid even if the variable variable area 75 is not opened. It may be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, the variation between the opening pattern and the valid pattern in the variable probability area 75 is made abundant according to the type of jackpot, making it difficult or impossible for the player to recognize which type of jackpot he has won. However, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which game state he/she is playing the game. In particular, when the probability variable area 75 is opened in synchronization with the opening of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, the ejection time until the remaining balls that have flowed in from the variable winning devices 72 and 74 that are not opened at that time are ejected is By setting the probability variable area 75 to be invalid and setting the probability variable area 75 to be valid after the discharge time has elapsed, the interval time becomes unnecessary and the game value can be quickly awarded.

<Modification 3: Predetermined notification when ball passes when probability variable area 75 is invalid>
In the embodiment described above, when a ball is detected by the variable probability area switch 75c when the variable probability area 75 is disabled, the variable probability transition flag 203i is not turned on and no other processing is executed. Alternatively, when the variable probability area 75 is disabled and a ball is detected by the variable probability area switch 75c, a predetermined effect may be executed. Specifically, for example, an additional performance that changes the contents of the currently executed performance, the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, jackpot probability, gaming status, pre-reading performance for a pending variable performance, set value, etc.) It may be configured to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that something has occurred, or an abnormality notification effect that indicates that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, it is possible to give some meaning to the passage of the ball to the probability variable area 75 when the ball is invalid, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game or to accurately notify the game situation.

<Modification 4: Even if a prize is won from the first variable winning device 72 far from the variable probability area 75, the variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a is opened at a timing that allows entry into the variable probability area 75>
In the first embodiment, only the winning ball from the second variable winning device 74 disposed near the position of the variable probability area 75 can flow into the variable probability area 75, while the position of the variable probability area 75 is The opening pattern of the probability variable area 75 is set so that the winning ball from the first variable winning device 72 disposed far from the installation position cannot flow into the probability variable area 75. Instead of this, the opening pattern of the variable probability area 75 is set so that a winning ball from the first variable winning device 72 located far from the placement position of the variable probability area 75 can also flow into the variable probability area 75. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of winning patterns in the variable probability area 75 and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 5: Discharge passage 76 is arranged upstream of the variable probability region 75, and an opening/closing plate is provided in the discharge passage 76>
In the embodiment described above, the probability variable region 75 is arranged upstream of the discharge passage 76 of the attacker unit 71, and when the probability variable region 75 is closed by the probability variable region opening/closing plate 75a, the balls that have not flowed into the probability variable region 75 are passed through the discharge passage. 76. Instead of this, a case where the discharge passage 76 is arranged upstream of the variable probability region 75, a discharge passage opening/closing plate is provided to block the flow into the discharge passage 76 arranged on the upstream side, and the "probability variation state" is not provided. To open the discharge passage 76 by setting the discharge passage opening/closing plate to a non-driven state, and to provide a “probability variation state”, that is, when wanting to cause a ball to flow into the variable probability region 75, set the discharge passage opening/closing plate to a driven state. By closing the discharge passage 76, the ball may be allowed to flow into the variable probability region 75.

<Variation 6: Sudden, small hit>
In each of the above embodiments, in the lottery of each special symbol, one of the following jackpots is a "10R probability variable jackpot", "10R latent probability variable jackpot", "5R potential probability variable jackpot", "10R time saving jackpot", and "5R time saving jackpot". It was configured to be granted. On the other hand, it may be configured to perform a lottery for a jackpot different from the above-mentioned jackpot (for example, a so-called "sudden probability variable jackpot (2R probability variable jackpot)") or a "small win" different from the jackpot. With this configuration, when a player wins a jackpot or a small jackpot, the game value given to the player is different, thereby creating variations in the game and realizing diverse gameplay, thereby increasing the interest of the game. You can improve your performance.

In particular, when a "small win" is provided in a special symbol lottery, when a small win is won, a "latent probability fluctuation state" is given to the opening/closing mode of the variable winning devices 72, 74, etc., which is the same as or similar to the jackpot ( In other words, if it is a "5R latent probability strange jackpot", the player It is difficult to distinguish between the ``normal gaming state'' and the ``latent probability variation state.'' By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows players to guess which game state the game is in, and to improve the interest of the game.

Note that a "small win" is a lottery result in which the variable winning devices 72, 74, etc. are opened and closed, but unlike the "10R guaranteed strange jackpot" and the "5R latent probable strange jackpot", a change in gaming state is not carried out. .

<Variation 7: Latent definite change suggestion performance>
In the above embodiment, the player is informed that the "probability variation state" is provided only in the "probability variation notification effect mode". Alternatively, a special effect may be used to suggest to the player that the "probability fluctuating state" is or will be provided. As a special effect, for example, the third symbol display device 81 displays a special character that is more likely to be selected in a situation where a "probability fluctuation state" is given, and is difficult to be selected in a situation where a "probability fluctuation state" is not given. A probability variation area that is likely to appear at a predetermined timing (for example, during a jackpot, at the end of a jackpot, or during a variable performance) or is output when passing through a probability variation area 75 that is set to be valid, and is set to be invalid. 75, effects such as special sound effects that are difficult to output are performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which gaming state the game is being played, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 8: Suggests the start of opening or activation of the variable probability region 75>
In the above embodiment, no suggestion is given to the player regarding the timing at which the variable probability area 75 is opened and the timing at which the variable probability area 75 is set to be valid during a jackpot. Instead of this, the timing at which the variable probability area 75 is opened or the timing at which the variable probability area 75 is set to be valid may be suggested to the player. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of a ball flowing into the probability variable area 75 that is open or set effectively, and to make it easier to grant the right to the "probability variable state" to the player. can.

<Modification 9: Opening or validating the probability variable area 75 according to the count of the big prize opening switches 72c and 74c>
In the embodiment described above, the variable probability area 75 is configured to be opened and set to be valid in synchronization with the opening trigger of either of the variable winning devices 72, 74. Alternatively, the variable probability area 75 may be opened and/or set to be effective in accordance with the count number of the big winning opening switches 72c, 74c instead of the trigger for opening the variable winning devices 72, 74. Specifically, for example, at the third count in one round, that is, when the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are opened once, the big winning opening switches 72c and 74c are used to set a predetermined first number less than the maximum winning number. (For example, the third ball) is detected, the probability variable area 75 is opened and/or set to effective, and the big winning opening switches 72c and 74c are used to select the second ball that is less than the maximum winning number and more than the first number. The probability variable area 75 is configured to be closed and/or set to be invalid when the number of balls (e.g., the eighth ball) is detected. With this configuration, even if the two variable winning devices 72 and 74 are opened continuously without any interruption, and the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are opened so that there is no interval time, unintended timing can be avoided. This makes it possible to suppress the ball from flowing into the variable probability region 75. That is, when the variable winning area 75 is opened in synchronization with the opening of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, the remaining balls that have flowed in from the variable winning devices 72 and 74 that have not been opened will flow into the variable winning area 75 that has been opened. Although the interval time is set in order to prevent this, the above configuration prevents the remaining balls flowing from the variable prize winning devices 72 and 74 which are not opened from flowing into the variable probability area 75 which is opened. Not only can this be prevented, but when one variable winning device 72, 74 is closed, the other variable winning device 74, 72 can be opened early (immediately), eliminating the need for interval time and quickly providing game value. can be realized. Moreover, in this case, the ball that flows into the variable winning area 75 based on the opening of the other variable winning device 74, 72 other than the desired variable winning device 72, 74 that wants to win a ball into the variable winning area 75 will not flow into the variable winning area 75. can be performed based on the detected number of the big winning opening switches 72c and 74c, so the first big winning opening pre-detection passage 72d and/or the first big winning opening post-detection passage 72e of the first variable winning device 72, or /And even if the passage distance of the second big winning opening pre-detection passage 74d and/or the second big winning opening post-detection passage 74e of the second variable winning device 74 is shortened, there is no risk of unintended entry into the probability variable area 75. The inflow of balls can be suppressed. As a result, the overall size of the attacker unit 71 can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in designing the game board 13 with respect to other parts can be improved by the reduction.

<Modification 10: Consisting of a drive device that constantly drives the variable probability region 75>
In the above embodiment, the probability variable area switch 75c that can generate a "probability fluctuating state" when a ball passes (wins) is covered by the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a, and is opened and closed in conjunction with the opening of the variable winning devices 72 and 74. As a result, a variable probability region 75 was formed. On the other hand, the variable probability region 75 is provided in a drive device that constantly drives the variable probability region 75 (for example, a drive device that constantly drives an opening/closing plate that covers the variable probability region 75, or a rotating body equipped with a plurality of ball entry openings including the variable probability region 75), It may be configured such that a "probability variation state" can be generated when a ball enters the probability variation area 75.

<Modification 11: Probability variable area 75 is configured with non-driven croon>
In the embodiment described above, the probability variable area switch 75c that can generate a "probability fluctuating state" when a ball passes (wins) is covered by the probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a that electrically drives the variable probability area switch 75c, and the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are opened and closed. By opening and closing in conjunction with each other, a variable probability region 75 was formed. On the other hand, a circular rolling means (so-called croon) on which the ball can roll on its upper surface is provided with a plurality of ball entrance openings including the variable probability area 75, and the ball enters the entrance opening corresponding to the variable probability area 75. It may be configured such that a "probability fluctuating state" can occur when a ball enters the ball.

<Modification 12: Forming the passage inside the attacker unit 71 in a Y-shape>
In the above embodiment, the downstream direction of the balls flowing from the first variable winning device 72 and the flowing direction of the balls flowing from the second variable winning device 74 are arranged so that they flow in the same direction (for example, to the left side in front view). It constituted a passage 72e after the first big winning opening detection and a passage 74e after the second big winning opening detection. Instead, the direction in which the balls flowing from the first variable winning device 72 and the ball flowing from the second variable winning device 74 are different, that is, for example, the flowing direction from the first variable winning device 72 is different. The first large winning hole detection passage 72e is formed so that the flowing direction of the ball that has flown in from the second variable winning a prize device 74 flows down to the left side when viewed from the front. A passage 74e is formed after detecting the two major winning openings. Then, the first large winning hole detection passage 72e and the second large winning hole detection passage 74e are merged at the confluence part, and the passages 72e and 74e are communicated with each other so as to form a so-called Y-shape. A variable probability region 75 and a discharge passage 76 are arranged downstream of the merging portion. With this configuration, the degree of freedom in designing the entire attacker unit 71 can be improved.

In particular, in the attacker unit 71 of the fifth embodiment, the first large winning opening detection passage 72e is formed so that the downstream direction of the ball flowing from the first variable winning device 72 is on the left side when viewed from the front, and the second variable winning opening detection passage 72e is The second large prize opening detection passage 74e is formed so that the downstream direction of the balls flowing from the device 74 is on the right side when viewed from the front. Then, the first big winning hole detection passage 72e and the second big winning hole detection passage 74e are placed at a position closer to the first big winning hole switch 72c than the second big winning hole switch 74c, that is, the second big winning hole The passage length of the first large prize opening post-detection passage 72e is made to merge at a point where the passage length of the post-detection passage 74e is shorter than the passage length of the post-detection passage 74e, and a probability variable area 75 and a discharge passage 76 are arranged downstream of the merging point. Therefore, the balls that flowed in from the first variable winning device 72 reach the placement position of the variable probability area 75 relatively early, while the balls that can flow in from the second variable winning device 74 first reach the first variable winning device. After completely rolling on the upper surface of the first opening/closing plate 72a of 72, it flows into the second variable winning device 74, and then flows through the second large winning hole detection passage 74e, which is longer than the first large winning hole detection passage 72e. After passing through, the position where the probability variable area 75 is arranged is reached. With this configuration, the time required for the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 from the second variable winning device 74 to reach the probability variable area 75 and the time required for the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 from the first variable winning device 72 can be adjusted. The time difference between the time until the variable probability region 75 is reached is expanded, and the variable winning devices 72 and 74 for determining whether or not the probability variable region 75 can be reached, and the opening patterns of the probability variable region 75 are enriched, thereby enriching the variations of the game. be able to.

<Modification 13: Loop type>
In each of the above embodiments, as the "probability variation state", the "probability variation state" is maintained until the number of variations of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot reaches a predetermined number, while the "probability variation state" is maintained after the predetermined number of variations. It consisted of a so-called ST type game specification that ends. On the other hand, a so-called loop type game specification may be adopted in which the "probability fluctuation state" is maintained after the jackpot ends until the next jackpot occurs. By applying the configuration of the present invention to a so-called loop-type pachinko machine in which the next jackpot is guaranteed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game based on whether or not a ball passes through the variable probability area 75.

<Modification 14: Probable variable area of 2 or more>
In the embodiment described above, one variable probability region 75 is provided in the attacker unit 71 so that a ball that enters the attacker unit 71 from either variable winning device 72 or 74 during a jackpot can flow into the variable probability region 75. It was configured. Alternatively, two or more variable probability areas may be provided in the attacker unit 71, and a ball that enters the attacker unit 71 may be configured to flow into any one variable probability area. By configuring it in this way, the variation of the inflow pattern in the variable probability area 75 is made abundant, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type has won, and allowing the player to play the game in any gaming state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game feature that makes the player guess whether the player is playing the game.

<Variation 15: Other effects during interval time>
In the above embodiment, the "character selection" effect is executed during the interval time during the jackpot. Alternatively, a special effect such as a mini-game or rare image display may be executed. With this configuration, the player's attention is drawn to the special performance, and the degree of attention to the opening mode of the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 is relatively reduced, and the opening of the variable probability region 75 is The degree of attention to the aspect can also be reduced. That is, by executing a special performance that is easy for the player to pay attention to during the interval period, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to recognize the result of the ball flowing into the open probability variable area 75. As a result, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the ball has passed through the variable probability area 75, and the player is forced to guess in which gaming state the player is playing the game after the jackpot is over. It is possible to create gameplay and improve the interest of the game. In addition, even if the player is in a "time reduction state" or "normal gaming state," the player is made to guess (internally) that it may be in a "probability fluctuation state" contrary to the production mode, and is forced to continue playing the game. By doing so, the operating rate of the pachinko machine can be improved.

<Modification 16: Pseudo interval>
In the first embodiment, the configuration is such that an interval time can occur before the start of a round in which the variable probability area 75 is opened. Alternatively, it may be configured such that an interval time also occurs before the start of a round in which the variable probability area 75 cannot be opened. With this configuration, since the variable probability area 75 is not necessarily opened when the interval time is executed, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the ball has passed through the variable probability area 75, and after the jackpot is over. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which game state he or she is playing the game.

<Modification 17: One variable winning device 72, 74 is opened and closed multiple times in one round>
In the above embodiment, in one round during a jackpot, one of the variable winning devices 72, 74 is opened once, and the opened variable winning devices 72, 74 are closed, and the one round ends. was configured to do so. Alternatively, it may be configured such that one of the variable winning devices 72, 74 is opened and closed multiple times in one round during a jackpot. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to recognize the number of rounds being executed, and even if the number of rounds that the probability variable area 75 opens is recognized, the number of rounds being executed cannot be recognized. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the probability variable area 75 is opened and the ball can pass through, thereby making it difficult for the player to determine in which gaming state the player is playing the game after the jackpot is over. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that makes the player guess.

<Modification 18: Jackpot type in which the probability variable area 75 is not released>
In the above embodiment, the variable probability area 75 is always opened in any round regardless of the type of jackpot. Alternatively, a jackpot type may be provided in which the variable probability area 75 is not opened at all.

<Modification 19: Electric chew type attacker>
In the above embodiment, since the first opening/closing plate 72a and the second opening/closing plate 74a are normally closed, the ball does not enter the attacker unit 71, and based on the jackpot, the first opening/closing plate 72a or the second opening/closing plate 74a is closed. 74a is opened, a ball enters the attacker unit 71, a probability variable area 75 is provided in the attacker unit 71, and when the ball passes through the probability variable area 75, a "probability variable state" is given. Was. On the other hand, an attacker unit 71 is constituted by at least one variable winning device 72, 74 of a so-called electric chew type, in which it is easier for the ball to win when rotating, and it is more difficult for the ball to win when non-rotating than when rotating. The unit 71 may be configured to have a variable probability region 75 inside it. In addition, during normal times (i.e., "normal gaming state", etc.), the variable probability area 75 is closed or set to be disabled so that the ball does not pass through the variable probability area 75 which is set to be valid. This makes it possible to prevent the "probability fluctuating state" from being added even if the ball could have won a prize during normal times.

<Modification 20: Variable winning devices 72, 74 and probability variable area are separate>
In the embodiment described above, the first variable winning device 72, the second variable winning device 74, and the variable probability area 75 are integrally formed into a unit in the attacker unit 71. On the other hand, the variable probability area 75 may be arranged in a mechanism on the back side of the game board 13 (for example, a collection path board for collecting winning balls) that is separate from each of the variable winning devices 72 and 74. . With this configuration, the degree of freedom in designing the variable prize winning devices 72, 74 and the probability variable area 75 can be improved. The balls flowing into the variable winning devices 72 and 74 are configured to be able to reach the part where the probability variable area 75, which is arranged separately, is provided.

<Modification 21: Probability variable area 75 and discharge passage 76 are arranged on the left and right sides of the depth passage when viewed from the front, and distributed by a distribution plate>
In the embodiment described above, the variable probability region 75 and the discharge passage 76 are arranged in the left-right direction when viewed from the front or in the longitudinal direction in depth, so that the probability variable region opening/closing plate 75a distributes the balls that have flowed into the inside of the attacker unit 71 to either path. It was composed of On the other hand, a depth passage is provided in the attacker unit 71 to allow the ball to flow down in the depth direction when viewed from the front, and a drive type distribution plate is provided on the back side of the depth passage. Then, a variable probability region 75 and a discharge passage 76 are arranged on the left and right sides of the distribution plate when viewed from the front (for example, the variable probability region 75 is arranged on the left side of the distribution plate (depth passage) when viewed from the front, and the discharge passage 76 is arranged on the right side when viewed from the front. ), and the ball flowing into the attacker unit 71 may be configured to flow into the probability variable area 75 or the discharge passage 76 depending on the driving mode of the distribution plate.

<Modification 22: Deceleration rib in the passage of the second variable winning device 74 near the variable probability area 75>
In the first embodiment described above, a deceleration rib 72f for decelerating the falling speed of the ball is provided in the first big winning hole detection passage 72e of the first variable winning device 72 disposed far from the probability variable area 75. On the other hand, a ball like a deceleration rib flows down the passage 74e after the second big winning opening detection (the passage 74d before the second big winning opening detection) of the second variable winning device 74, which is arranged close to the variable probability area 75. Without providing a means to reduce the speed, the time required for the winning ball from the first variable winning device 72 to reach the variable probability area 75 and the time required for the winning ball from the second variable winning device 74 to reach the variable probability area 75 are calculated. It was configured to create a time difference. On the other hand, a deceleration rib for decelerating the falling speed of the ball is provided in the second large winning hole detection passage 74e of the second variable winning device disposed close to the variable probability region 75, while the variable probability region 75 A means for decelerating the falling speed of the ball, such as a deceleration rib, is provided in the first large winning opening post-detection passage 72e (first large winning opening pre-detection passage 72d) of the first variable winning device 72, which is disposed far from the first variable winning apparatus 72. without providing a time difference between the time it takes for a winning ball from the first variable winning device 72 to reach the variable probability area 75 and the time for the winning ball from the second variable winning device 74 to reach the variable probability area. It may also be configured so that there is no or the number of times is reduced. With this configuration, even when either variable winning device 72 or 74 is opened to allow a ball to flow into the attacker unit 71, the time required to reach the probability variable area 75 can be made the same (approximate). Therefore, control regarding the opening pattern of the variable probability region 75 can be simplified.

<Modification 23: V jackpot>
In the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game state after the jackpot is set to the "probability variable state" depending on whether or not a game ball enters the probability variable area 75 during the jackpot game. On the other hand, instead of the probability variable area 75, a V winning hole is provided, and depending on whether or not a ball enters the V winning hole, a game value that differs from the "probability variable state", for example, a ball entering the V winning hole. It may be configured such that a jackpot is generated by winning a prize.

<Variation 24: Opening time/Ending time>
In the above embodiment, the interval time is set as a period in which both the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are not opened during the jackpot state. Alternatively, the period in which both the first variable winning device 72 and the second variable winning device 74 are not opened during the jackpot state may be the opening time or ending time at the time of the jackpot.

<Modification 25: One is a dash attacker and the other is a rotating attacker>
In the first embodiment, both of the two variable prize winning devices 72 and 74 are configured as a rotary opening/closing type in which the opening/closing plate rotates. On the other hand, one of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 is configured as a rotating opening/closing type, while the opening/closing plate of the other variable winning device 74, 72 is configured as a retractable opening/closing plate that appears and retracts from the board surface of the game board 13. You may.

<Modification 26: Based on one attacker winning a ball, the probability variable area is physically opened by the ball, and the ball that has flown in from the other attacker can flow into the opened probability variable area>
In the embodiment described above, the variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a is configured to be capable of opening/closing drive (protrusion/retraction drive) by the variable probability region solenoid 75b. Instead, the probability variable region 75 in the attacker unit 71 is covered with an on-off valve that does not allow the ball to flow into the probability variable region 75 in the closed state, but allows the ball to flow into the probability variable region 75 in the open state, and the on-off valve It may be constructed so that it can be driven to open and close by its own weight. Specifically, for example, the predetermined opening/closing valve is controlled by the weight of the ball that has flowed into one of the variable winning devices 72, 74 (for example, the first variable winning device 72 on the upstream side or the second variable winning device 74 on the downstream side). The variable probability region 75 is opened by applying a load to the opening/closing valve and rotating the opening/closing valve. Then, while the opening/closing valve is rotated to open the probability variable area 75, the other variable winning device 74, 72 (for example, the second variable winning device 74 on the downstream side or the first variable winning device on the upstream side) 72) A "probability variation state" is generated by causing a ball to flow into the open probability variation region 75. With this configuration, by allowing balls to flow into each of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, it is possible to create a gaming experience that can provide gaming value, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 27: Small hit attacker>
In the embodiment described above, each variable winning device 72, 74 is configured to be opened when a jackpot is won. Instead of this, in addition to the jackpot drawing, a small winning drawing is held at the same time, and when the jackpot is won, one or both of the variable winning devices 72, 74 can be opened, and when the small winning winning is won. , either one of the variable prize winning devices 72, 74 may be configured to be openable. Further, one of the variable winning devices 72 and 74 may be configured to be opened only when a small win is won. The configuration is such that the variable probability area 75 can be opened even when either of the variable winning devices 72, 74 is opened. With this configuration, even if you win a small win in addition to a jackpot, you can land the ball in the probability variable area 75 and gain gaming value, thereby enriching the variations of the game and increasing the interest of the game. You can improve your performance.

<Modification 28: The audio lamp control device recognizes the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning device only based on the jackpot type>
In the embodiment described above, the main control device 110 sends information to the audio lamp control device 113 not only about the jackpot type, but also the opening timing and closing timing of the variable winning devices 72 and 74, the opening timing and closing timing of the probability variable area 75, and By outputting a command that can determine the timing of occurrence of the interval time, and receiving the command, the audio lamp control device 113 grasps the opening/closing timing of the variable winning devices 72, 74 and variable probability region 75, and executes various controls. was configured to do so. Instead, the audio lamp control device 113 grasps the opening/closing timing of the variable winning devices 72, 74 and/or the probability variable area 75 based on the command regarding the jackpot type transmitted from the main control device 110, and opens/closes the variable probability area. It may be configured to perform various controls such as notification. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of commands output from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, thereby reducing the control burden on the main controller 110 and/or the audio lamp controller 113. It becomes possible to do so.

<Modification 29: Jackpot type that does not notify variable area opening>
In the first embodiment, when the variable probability area 75 is opened in a state where the "character selection" effect is not being executed, the variable probability area opening notification is performed regardless of the type of jackpot. Instead of this, the probability variable area opening notification is executed only when the probability variable area 75 in the jackpot type "probability variable A" is opened, and the probability variable area opening notification is executed for the other jackpot types "time saving A", "time saving B", "time saving C", "latent probability variation". A,""latent probability variation B," and "latent probability variation C," when the probability variable area 75 is released, the probability variable area opening notification may not be executed. In the first embodiment, in the jackpot types "time saving A", "time saving B", and "time saving C" in which the "probability fluctuation state" cannot occur after the end of the jackpot, although the probability variable area 75 is opened, the opening timing is It is configured so that the ball does not flow into the probability variable area 75. Therefore, when the probability variable area opening notification is performed in conjunction with the opening of the probability variable area 75 in the jackpot types "time saving A", "time saving B", and "time saving C", the probability variable area is released while the probability variable area opening notification is being performed. A player who recognizes that the ball does not flow into the ball 75 may lose interest in the game. In addition, in the first embodiment, the jackpot types "Latent Probability Fluctuation A", "Latent Probability Fluctuation B", and "Latent Probability Fluctuation C" indicate to the player that the gaming state after the jackpot is "Probability Fluctuation State". It is structured in such a way that it does not clearly suggest that Therefore, when the probability variable area opening notification is performed with the opening of the probability variable area 75 in the jackpot type "Latent probability variation A", "Latent probability variation B", and "Latent probability variation C", while the probability variable area opening notification is being executed. When the player recognizes that the ball has entered the variable probability area 75, the player recognizes that a "probability variable state" will occur after the jackpot ends, and it becomes unclear whether or not the "probability variable state" is assigned. By doing so, the gameplay of guessing the game state is impaired. Therefore, when the probability variable area 75 is opened in the jackpot type "time saving A", "time saving B", "time saving C", "latent probability variation A", "latent probability variation B" and "latent probability variation C", the probability variable area opening notification is given. By configuring the player not to perform the above, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game, maintain the set playability, and improve the interest in the game.

<Modification 30: Shifting the probability variable area release notification>
In the first embodiment, the variable probability area opening notification is configured to be executed in synchronization with the timing at which the variable probability area 75 is opened. Alternatively, the predetermined performance (variable probability area opening notification) may be executed at a timing shifted before or after the timing at which the variable probability area 75 is opened. With this configuration, it is possible to create a gameplay in which it is estimated whether or not the variable probability area 75 is opened when (before and after) a predetermined effect is executed, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 31: Variation of opening pattern of variable winning device or probability variable area according to jackpot type>
In the above (sixth) embodiment, one of the variable winning devices 72, 74 in the five round jackpot types (i.e., "time saving A", "time saving B", "latent probability variation A", or "latent probability variation B") However, both variable winning devices 72 and 74 are configured to be opened together (alternately, according to a predetermined rule, or irregularly) in the jackpot type of the 5 rounds. Good too. In addition, in the 10-round jackpot type (i.e., "probability variation A,""time saving C," or "latent probability variation C"), both variable winning devices 72 and 74 are operated together (alternately, according to a predetermined rule, or without However, it may be configured such that only one of the variable winning devices 72, 74 is opened in the jackpot type of the 10 rounds. With this configuration, even if the jackpot type has the same number of rounds, the variable winning devices 72 and 74 that are opened are different, so the time required for the jackpot (jackpot consumption time) is the same (almost the same). Even if there is, the game value given can be clearly different. As a result, it is possible to vary the time efficiency of the game value provided, enrich the variation of the game, and improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, each command is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the audio lamp controller 113 instructs the display controller 114 to display. Commands may also be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Alternatively, the display control device 114 may be connected to the audio lamp control device 113 so that the display control device 114 sends commands to the audio lamp control device 113 instructing the output of each audio and lighting of the lamp. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be configured as one control device. By incorporating these into one control device, the number of parts can be reduced and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, during the variable presentation of the third symbol (special symbol) that is held and executed when the ball enters the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b (starting prize), the variable presentation becomes a jackpot. The case where the "pending change notice" is performed in the executed symbol and the pending symbol has been explained. On the other hand, whether or not there is a variable display of normal symbols that is suspended and executed when the ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67 (starting winning) is a hit (stops at the "○" symbol). In addition to or instead of whether there is a variable performance that will be a jackpot during the variable performance of the third symbol, the player may be informed using the normal symbol holding lamp 84, the third symbol display device 81, etc. You may notify. Thereby, the player can grasp whether there is a variable display that is a win among the variable displays of normal symbols that are on hold, or among the variable displays of normal symbols that are being executed and on hold. Therefore, it is possible to estimate whether or not the normal symbol will be a hit before executing the variable display of the normal symbol. Some gaming machines enhance the gameplay depending on whether or not the symbols hit, and this is particularly effective for such gaming machines.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbol to which no numbers from "0" to "9" are attached, but it is not necessarily limited to this. , a third symbol consisting of a main symbol with numbers or a main symbol without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Furthermore, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third symbol or back image used in the variable effect may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed executes a "suspended change notice" which is one form of continuous notice effect, but this is not necessarily limited to this. The machine 10 is provided with a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81, and the fourth symbol is displayed on the fourth symbol display device in conjunction with the variable performance executed by the third symbol display device 81. , executes a continuous notice performance (hereinafter referred to as "continuous notice performance" including "pending change notice") that is different from "pending change notice" or "pending change notice" and is executed across multiple variable performances. You may. In this case, the fourth symbol display device may be controlled by the display control device 114 or the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by providing the pachinko machine 10 with an accessory different from each movable accessory that operates according to various performances, and operating the accessory in a predetermined manner together with the variable production, a continuous preview performance can be executed. Good too. Furthermore, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113, the continuous notice performance may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous notice performance from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10. A continuous preview performance may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable performance.

As a result, each time a variable performance (dynamic display) is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (and special symbol display device 37), symbols are continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or accessories are displayed in a predetermined manner. By operating in this manner, by outputting a sound from the sound output device 226, or by lighting or flashing the illumination parts 29 to 33, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of a jackpot. In addition, the player usually continues playing the game by watching the third symbol display device 81 where the variable performance is performed, but the symbols are displayed by a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81. , a continuous notice effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting/blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, so that the player is shown a different effect than usual. This can be easily recognized. In addition, continuous notice performances can be easily performed continuously by simple controls such as displaying symbols on the fourth symbol display device, operating accessories, outputting audio from the audio output device 226, or lighting/blinking the illumination sections 29 to 33. A preview performance can be performed.

Furthermore, if the continuous preview performance is performed by audio output from the audio output device 226 or lighting or flashing of the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous preview performance is performed by the audio lamp control device 113, so that when starting a winning prize, By having the main control device 110 perform the correctness judgment and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation, the audio lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous notice performance, and the display control device 114 to perform the fluctuation performance, the pachinko machine 10 continuously performs the lottery process. When performing a preview effect, each control device can be assigned to each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required of the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

In addition, the display of symbols for continuous preview performance on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbols for continuous preview performance on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined manner, and the sound from the audio output device 226. A continuous preview performance may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 and controlling each in conjunction with each other. Thereby, it is possible to execute more diverse continuous preview effects. In addition, the execution method of the continuous notice performance (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of accessories, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33) , or a combination thereof), the gaming state after the end of the continuous preview performance ("10R guaranteed strange jackpot", "10R latent probability strange jackpot", "10R time saving jackpot", "5R latent probability strange jackpot", "5R time saving jackpot") A plurality of continuous preview performance modes may be prepared, which are selected depending on whether the game is a jackpot or a loss.

In the embodiment described above, when there is a winning (starting prize) to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, the main controller 110 adds "1" to the number of reserved balls to the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the case where each counter C1 to C3, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c due to the starting prize is included as is and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in response to the pending ball count command to be notified to is explained. The types of counters included in the held pitch count command may be part of counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include values of other counters. In addition, when the main control device 110 notifies the audio lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning, the information indicating the values of each of these counters is included in the held ball count command and notified. Instead, information indicating the values of each counter may be included in a command other than the held pitch count command, and these values may be notified to the audio lamp control device 113. Another command may be a dedicated command that notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired in conjunction with a start-up winning, or a command that sends other information such as a fluctuation pattern command or a stop symbol command by voice. The command for notifying the lamp control device 113 may include the values of each counter acquired in conjunction with the winning start. As another command, when notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, the value of each counter to be notified is specified in the fluctuating performance corresponding to which number of holds. Information indicating whether this is the case may also be included. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 stores each of the hold information included in the command in any of the first to fourth hold information areas corresponding to the hold count, based on the information regarding the hold count included in the command. Counter values can be stored.

In the above embodiment, the winnings to the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b and the passage through the normal symbol gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is The number of times is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, the number of reserved balls for the variable performance based on winning to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b is displayed in numbers or in four divided areas on a part of the third symbol display device 81. The display may be made in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) for the number of reserved balls.A light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the special symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be displayed by the light emitting member. It may be configured to notify.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display that is the variable display of the third symbol is not limited to scrolling the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The display may be performed by moving the symbols horizontally or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. In addition, the variable display of a symbol is not limited to a variable display of a symbol; for example, a display in which one or more characters are displayed in a wide variety of motions or changes together with the symbol or separately from the symbol. This also includes display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above embodiments, when performing a variation effect, a case has been described in which a high-speed variation is displayed in which all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to such an extent that the player cannot see them. Alternatively, all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size to the extent that they are not visible, or all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. Good too.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a different type from the above embodiment. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected jackpot value until you hit the jackpot once and hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after a jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machine, and a so-called gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The changing display of the identification information is started, and the changing display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbol definitively, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as gaming value in a gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.
<Group A: Double attackers share 1 variable area>
Conventionally, in game machines such as pachinko machines, game media such as game balls are fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and a downward direction provided in the game area and capable of changing the direction in which the game balls flow down is used. A predetermined gaming value is given to each game ball based on the entry of the game ball into one of the plurality of ball entrances in which the changing means is arranged, and a lottery is conducted based on the winning of the game ball to a specific ball entrance. , it is configured such that when a player wins an advantageous state such as a win in a lottery, a game ball is allowed to enter the ball entry means and a predetermined gaming value is given to the player (for example, according to a patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, although it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group A have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

A firing means for firing a game ball (for example, ball firing unit 112a),
a first ball entrance means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
Information acquisition means (for example, first holding ball storage area 203d) that acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
determination means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A second ball entering means (for example, the first variable prize winning device 72) and a second ball entering means (for example, the first variable winning device 72) each having a downward direction changing means (for example, the first opening/closing plate 72a or the second opening/closing plate 74a) that can change the downward direction of the game ball. 3. Ball entry means (for example, second variable winning device 74);
A first game value imparting means (for example, a prize ball based on detection of a ball by a first starting port switch) for imparting a predetermined first game value to the player when a game ball enters the first ball entering means. 3 pieces)) and
When a game ball enters the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means, a second gaming value giving means (for example, a first grand prize opening In a gaming machine equipped with prize balls (15 pieces) based on detection of balls by the switch 72c or the second big prize opening switch 74c,
a first area (for example, variable probability area 75) through which game balls flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass;
Based on the inflow of game balls into the first area, a game information output means capable of outputting information regarding the game (for example, execution of a V winning notification effect on the third symbol display device 81). Characteristic gaming machine A0.

According to the gaming machine A0, the game ball is fired by the firing means, and the game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entering means, and the game ball is configured to enter the first ball entering means. Predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means due to the ball being hit. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. Further, a second ball entering means and a third ball entering means are provided, each of which is provided with a downward direction changing means capable of changing the downward direction of the game ball. When the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the first game value giving means gives a predetermined first gaming value to the player, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means. When the ball enters the ball, the second game value giving means gives a second game value different from the first game value. Here, a first area is provided through which game balls flowing in from the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means can pass. Based on the inflow of game balls into the first area, the game information output means is configured to be able to output information regarding the game. As a result, since it is configured such that game balls can flow into the first area from at least two ball entry means, and there is no need to provide a first area for each ball entry means, the number of parts related to the game machine can be reduced. , it is possible to output information regarding the game based on the output of the game ball in the first area, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine A0,
a third gaming value imparting means (for example, probability change transition flag 203i) capable of imparting a third gaming value different from the first gaming value and the second gaming value when the game ball passes through the first area; A gaming machine A1 is characterized in that:

According to gaming machine A1, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A0, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the game ball passes through the first area, the third game value giving means can give a third game value different from the first game value and the second game value. As a result, since it is configured so that game balls can flow into the first area from at least two ball entry means, and there is no need to provide a first area for each ball entry means, the number of parts related to the game machine can be reduced. , a second game value is given based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, and a third game value is given in addition to the second game value when the game ball passes through the first area. It is also possible to add gaming value. As a result, it is possible to create gameplay in which the game ball that has entered the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means is allowed to flow into the first area or not, and to improve the interest of the game. .

In gaming machine A0 or A1,
The second ball entering means includes:
The flow direction changing means includes a first variable means (for example, the first opening/closing plate 72a) that can be changed between a state where it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a state where the game ball can enter,
The third ball entering means includes:
As the flow direction changing means, a second variable means (for example, the second opening/closing plate 74a) that can be changed between a state where it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a state where the game ball can enter is provided,
An advantageous state in which the first variable means or the second variable means is changed from a state where it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter into a state where a game ball can enter by using the determination result by the determination means. (For example, a jackpot state) means for an advantageous state (for example, jackpot processing (S103));
a first area switching means (for example, variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a) for switching whether or not to enter an inflow-enabled state in which game balls can flow into the first area;
Timing setting means (for example, variable probability region opening/closing table 202g) for setting the timing at which the first region becomes inflow-enabled state by the first region switching means by using the determination result of the determination means. A gaming machine A2 is characterized in that:

According to gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A0 or A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second ball entering means is provided with a first variable means as a downward direction changing means that can change between a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter or a state in which the game ball can enter, and a state in which the game ball can enter. The ball entering means is provided with a second variable means as a downward direction changing means that can change between a state where it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a state where the game ball can enter. By using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state means changes the first variable means or the second variable means from a state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter into a state in which the game ball can enter. considered to be in an advantageous state. Here, the first area switching means switches whether or not the first area is in an inflow-enabled state in which game balls can flow into the first area. Then, by using the determination result of the determination means, the timing setting means sets the timing at which the first region becomes inflow-enabled by the first region switching means. As a result, since it is configured such that the game balls can flow into the first area from each of the two ball entry means and there is no need to provide a first area for each ball entry means, the number of parts related to the gaming machine can be reduced. There is an effect that it is possible to create a game feature that determines whether a game ball flows into the first area during an advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine A2,
The advantageous state means are:
In the advantageous state of No. 1, either the first variable means or the second variable means is kept in a state in which game balls can enter until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a maximum of 30 seconds or 10 balls are won). multiple advantageous period execution means (for example, a round counter) that executes a plurality of advantageous periods (for example, one round);
By using the determination result of the determination means, the state setting means (for example, the opening/closing of the grand prize opening A gaming machine A3 characterized by comprising: a table 202f).

According to gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the plural advantageous period executing means provided in the advantageous state means allows the game ball to enter either the first variable means or the second variable means in one advantageous state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The advantageous period in which the condition occurs is executed multiple times. Further, by using the determination result of the determining means, the first variable means or the second variable means is set to a state in which the game ball can enter every advantageous period by the state setting means provided in the advantageous state means. Ru. As a result, in one advantageous state, the first variable means or the second variable means that allows the game ball to enter can be changed for each advantageous period, thereby enriching the variations of the game and increasing the interest of the game. The effect is that it can be improved.

In gaming machine A3,
The state setting means includes:
Alternating state means (for example, winning the jackpot type "probability variation A") that alternately sets the first variable means and the second variable means to a state in which a game ball can enter every advantageous period. A gaming machine A4 characterized by the following.

According to gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, by the alternating state means provided in the state setting means, the first variable means and the second variable means are alternately brought into a state in which the game ball can enter every advantageous period. As a result, in the first advantageous state, a case where the game ball enters the second ball entering means by the first variable means and a case where the game ball enters the third ball entering means by the second variable means are provided, and each By varying the entry patterns of the game balls into the ball entry means, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

In gaming machine A4,
The alternating state means is
When the first variable means or the second variable means, which is in a state in which a game ball can enter, is made into a state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter, A predetermined period state means (e.g., no interval time) for setting the second variable means or the first variable means in a state in which a game ball can enter within a predetermined period (e.g., 0.001 seconds to 1 second). ), A gaming machine A5 is characterized by comprising:

According to gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first variable means or the second variable means is in a state in which a game ball can enter, it becomes a state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter, the predetermined period state means provided in the alternating state means As a result, the second variable means or the first variable means, which has been in a state where it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter, is brought into a state into which a game ball can enter within a predetermined period of time. As a result, both the first variable means and the second variable means are in a state where it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter, that is, the game ball cannot enter either the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means. condition can be reduced. As a result, the number of times the game ball can enter the first variable means and the second variable means specified in the first advantageous state can be quickly performed, reducing the time required for the first advantageous state. This also has the effect of quickly imparting gaming value to the player.

In any of gaming machines A0 to A5,
The second game value imparting means is
a predetermined value imparting means (for example, the first big prize opening switch 72c) that imparts a predetermined value (for example, 10 prize balls) to the player when a game ball enters the second ball entering means;
a specific value imparting means (for example, a second grand prize opening switch 74c) that imparts a specific value (for example, 15 prize balls) different from the predetermined value to the player when a game ball enters the third ball entering means; ) A gaming machine A6 characterized by comprising:

According to gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines A0 to A5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a game ball enters the second ball entering means, a predetermined value is given to the player by the predetermined value giving means provided in the second game value giving means. Furthermore, when the game ball enters the third ball entry means, a specific value different from the predetermined value is awarded to the player by the specific value awarding means provided in the second game value awarding means. As a result, the game value given to the player is different depending on the ball entry means through which the game ball enters, creating a gameplay that determines which entry means the game ball enters, and increasing the variation of the game. This has the effect of enriching the game and increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines A0 to A6,
a first guide means (for example, a passage 72d before first big winning opening detection and a passage 72e after first big winning opening detection) that guides the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means to the first area side;
a second guide means (for example, a second big winning opening pre-detection passage 74d and a second big winning opening post-detection passage 74e) that guides the game ball that has entered the third ball entering means to the first area side;
a merging portion (for example, merging portion 73) where the first guide means and the second guide means merge;
The first region is
A gaming machine A7 characterized in that it is arranged downstream of the merging section.

According to gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines A0 to A6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means toward the first region, and the second guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the third ball entering means toward the first region. be done. Further, the first guide means and the second guide means are joined at the merging portion. The first region is arranged downstream of the merging section. Thereby, each game ball that has entered each ball entry means can be made to enter the first area located downstream of the confluence of each guide means. As a result, it is no longer necessary to provide a first area for each ball entry means, so while reducing the number of parts related to the game machine, it is possible to create a gameplay that determines whether or not a game ball flows into the first area, and to improve the game. It has the effect of increasing interest.

In any of gaming machines A0 to A7,
At least a game board (for example, game board 13) on which the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means are arranged;
a game ball guide that is disposed on the game board and guides the game ball to a predetermined position where the game ball can enter either the first variable means or the second variable means that is in a state where the game ball can enter; A gaming machine A8 characterized in that it is provided with means (for example, a left nail group 77 and a right nail group 78).

According to gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines A0 to A7, the following effects are achieved. That is, at least the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means are arranged on the game board. Further, the game ball is guided to a position where the game ball can enter either the first variable means or the second variable means, which are in a state where the game ball can enter, by the game ball guide means provided on the game board. Ru. Thereby, by guiding the game ball to a predetermined position on the game board by the game ball guide means, the game ball can enter the first variable means or the second variable means into which the game ball can enter. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entry means using the same game ball launching method, so even if multiple ball entry means are provided, the game method in an advantageous state can be simplified. This has the effect of providing an easy-to-understand game to the player and increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines A3 to A8,
The first area switching means includes:
In one of the advantageous states, a plurality of inflow possible state means (for example, 1st round, 3rd round, and 9th round of jackpot type "probability variation A") that makes the first area into the inflow possible state in 2 or more of the advantageous periods. A gaming machine A9 comprising:

According to gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines A3 to A8, the following effects are achieved. That is, the plurality of inflow possible state means provided in the first region switching means allows the first region to be in the inflow possible state for two or more advantageous periods in one advantageous state. As a result, even if a game ball cannot flow into the first area during any one advantageous period in which the first area is in an inflow-enabled state, the first area will be returned to the first area in another advantageous period. By setting the area in a state where inflow is possible, it becomes possible to cause game balls to flow into the first area. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a firing abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), game balls may not be allowed to flow into the first area during the first advantageous period when the first area is in a state where the flow is possible. Even if a problem occurs, by making the first area available for inflow again during another advantageous period and providing the possibility of allowing game balls to flow into the first area, players can avoid unforeseen circumstances. This has the effect that it is possible to realize a comfortable game without incurring profits, and that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9,
By using the determination result by the determination means, a recognizable mode (for example, "probability fluctuation state") that allows the player to recognize that the third game value is awarded by the third game value assignment means is established. Recognizable mode execution means to be executed (for example, a dedicated background of the “probability fluctuation state” on the third symbol display device 81),
By using the determination result by the determination means, it is possible to detect a difficult-to-recognize mode in which it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the third game value is awarded by the third game value granting means (for example, "latent probability fluctuation"). A game characterized by comprising: a difficult-to-recognize mode execution means (for example, a common background between the "latency probability variation state" and the "time reduction state" in the third symbol display device 81) for executing the "state"). Machine A10.

According to gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines A1 to A9, the following effects are achieved. That is, by using the determination result of the determining means, the recognizable manner execution means executes the recognizable manner that allows the player to recognize that the third gaming value is awarded by the third gaming value granting means. . Further, the difficult-to-recognize mode execution means uses the determination result of the determining means to create a difficult-to-recognize mode in which it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the third gaming value is awarded by the third gaming value assigning means. executed. As a result, if the recognizable mode is executed, the player can recognize that the third gaming value can be awarded by the flow of game balls into the first area, but if the difficult-to-recognize mode is executed, It becomes difficult or impossible for the player to recognize it. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess which game value will be awarded, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<Group B: Opening patterns of variable probability areas to win from each variable winning device>
Conventionally, in game machines such as pachinko machines, game media such as game balls are fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and a downward direction provided in the game area and capable of changing the direction in which the game balls flow down is used. A predetermined gaming value is given to each game ball based on the entry of the game ball into one of the plurality of ball entrances in which the changing means is arranged, and a lottery is conducted based on the winning of the game ball to a specific ball entrance. , it is configured such that when a player wins an advantageous state such as a win in a lottery, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player by allowing the game ball to enter the ball entry means (for example, patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group B have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

A firing means for firing a game ball (for example, ball firing unit 112a),
a first ball entrance means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
Information acquisition means (for example, first holding ball storage area 203d) that acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
determination means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A second ball entering means (for example, the first variable prize winning device 72) and a second ball entering means (for example, the first variable winning device 72) each having a downward direction changing means (for example, the first opening/closing plate 72a or the second opening/closing plate 74a) that can change the downward direction of the game ball. 3 ball entry means (for example, second variable winning device 74);
When a game ball enters the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means, a gaming value giving means (for example, the first big prize opening switch 72c or the second big prize opening switch 72c) gives a predetermined gaming value to the player. In a gaming machine equipped with a prize opening switch 74c),
comprising a first area (for example, variable probability area 75) through which the game ball flowing in from the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means can pass;
The third ball entering means includes:
arranged closer to the first region than the arrangement position of the second ball entry means,
Inflow enabling means that allows game balls that have entered from at least the third ball entry means to flow into the first area (for example, the second and fourth rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", or the jackpot type 1st round and 3rd round of "latent probability variation B").

According to the gaming machine B0, the game ball is fired by the firing means, and the game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the ball entering means, As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. Further, a second ball entering means and a third ball entering means are provided, each of which is provided with a downward direction changing means capable of changing the downward direction of the game ball. When a game ball enters the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player by the game value giving means. Here, a first area is provided through which game balls flowing from the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means can pass. Further, the third ball entry means is arranged closer to the first region than the arrangement position of the second ball entry means. Further, the inflow enabling means is configured to allow at least the game balls that have entered from the third ball entry means to flow into the first area. As a result, since it is configured such that the game balls can flow into the first area from each of the two ball entry means and there is no need to provide a first area for each ball entry means, the number of parts related to the gaming machine can be reduced. A game ball is caused to enter a third ball entry means disposed closer to the first region than a second ball entry means, and a game feature is created in which the game ball is determined whether or not to enter the first region. It has the effect of increasing interest.

In gaming machine B0,
Advantageous state means (e.g., jackpot processing) that uses the determination result by the determination means to bring the game ball into an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot state) that allows the game ball to enter the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means. (S103)) and
A first area switching means (for example, probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a) for switching between an inflow possible state where game balls can flow into the first area and an inflow difficult state where game balls are difficult or unable to flow into the first area. and,
Occurrence of a second advantageous state in which a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state can be generated after the end of the advantageous state when a game ball flows into the first region that has been made into a state where it can enter by the first region switching means. A gaming machine B1 characterized in that it is equipped with means (for example, a probability change transition flag 203i).

According to gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B0, the following effects are achieved. That is, by using the determination result by the determining means, the advantageous state means brings the game ball into an advantageous state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means. Here, the first area switching means switches between an inflow possible state in which game balls can flow into the first area and an inflow difficult state in which game balls are difficult or impossible to flow into the first area. When the game ball flows into the first region that has been made into a state where it can enter by the first region switching means, the second advantageous state generating means generates a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state. can be done. As a result, since it is configured such that game balls can flow into the special areas from the two variable ball entry means, and there is no need to provide a special area for each variable ball entry means, the number of parts related to the gaming machine can be reduced. Whether or not a second advantageous state occurs when a game ball entered from the second variable ball entry means disposed closer to the special area than the first variable ball entry means enters the special area, that is, the second variable ball entry means There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that determines whether or not the special area is in the state where the ball can be entered when the ball entering means is in the second state.

In gaming machine B1,
The means for allowing inflow is:
A game machine B2 characterized in that the first area is brought into the inflow-enabled state at the timing when the game ball entering from the third ball entry means reaches the first area.

According to gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first area is set in an inflow-enabled state by the inflow-enabled means at the timing when the game ball entering from the third ball entry means reaches the first area. Thereby, it is determined whether or not a second advantageous state is generated by allowing the game ball that entered from the third ball entry means disposed closer to the first region than the second ball entry means to enter the first region, that is, The effect is that when the third ball entry means is in a state in which a game ball can enter, the first area is in a state in which it is possible to enter or not, creating a gaming experience and improving the interest of the game. There is.

In any of gaming machines B0 to B2,
A first guide means (for example, a passage 72d before first big winning opening detection and a passage 72e after first big winning opening detection) that guides the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means to the first area side;
a second guide means (for example, a second big winning opening pre-detection passage 74d and a second big winning opening post-detection passage 74e) that guides the game ball that has entered the third ball entering means to the first area side;
The first guiding means is
It is configured such that a predetermined first time (for example, 2.5 seconds) is required from when the game ball enters the second ball entering means until it reaches the first area,
The second guiding means is
It is configured such that a second time (for example, 0.7 seconds) shorter than the first time is required from when the game ball enters the third ball entry means until it reaches the first area,
The means for allowing inflow is:
A first time difficult means for bringing the first area into the difficult entry state by the time the first time elapses after the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means becomes in a state in which a game ball can enter. (For example, the opening time of the variable area opening/closing plate 75a is within 2.5 seconds),
a second time inflow means (which keeps the first area in the inflow possible state until the second time period elapses after the second ball inflow means or the third ball inflow means becomes in a state in which game balls can enter); For example, the game machine B3 is characterized in that the opening time of the variable area opening/closing plate 75a is 0.7 seconds or more).

According to gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines B0 to B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means toward the first region, and the second guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the third ball entering means toward the first region. be done. Further, the first guide means takes a predetermined first time from when the game ball enters the second ball entering means until it reaches the first area, and the second guiding means allows the game ball to enter the third ball entering means. A second time shorter than the first time is required from the time the game ball enters until it reaches the first area. Here, the first time difficulty means provided in the inflow enabling means causes the first ball entry means or the third ball entry means to reach the first time by the time the first time elapses after the game ball enters the state where the game ball can enter. The area is considered to be in a state where it is difficult to enter. On the other hand, the second time inflow means allows the first area to enter into the first area until a second time period elapses after the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means is in a state in which game balls can enter. As a result, at the first time when the game ball that entered from the second ball entry means reaches the first region, the first region is in a difficult state to enter, while the game ball that entered from the third ball entry means enters the first region. At the second time, the first area is in a state where it is possible to enter. Therefore, it is necessary to determine whether or not the second advantageous state will occur by allowing the game ball that entered from the third ball entry means to enter the first area. 3. When the ball entry means is in a state in which a game ball can enter, the first area is determined to be in a state in which it can enter or not, creating a gameplay experience and improving the interest of the game. be.

In any of gaming machines B0 to B3,
The means for allowing inflow is:
A game machine B4 characterized in that it is provided with a second inflow enabling means (for example, the configuration of Modified Example 4) that allows the game balls that have entered from the second ball entry means to flow into the first area.

According to gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines B0 to B3, the following effects are achieved. That is, by the second inflow enabling means provided in the inflow enabling means, the game balls that have entered from the second ball entering means are configured to be able to flow into the first area. As a result, since it is configured such that game balls can flow into the first area from each of the two ball entry means and there is no need to provide a first area for each ball entry means, the number of parts related to the gaming machine can be reduced, A game ball that enters from the second ball entry means, which is located farther from the first area than the third ball entry means, can also enter the first area, so if a game ball enters any of the ball entry means However, there is an effect that it is possible to create a gameplay that determines whether or not game balls flow into the first area, and to improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine B4,
The second inflow means is:
A game machine B5 characterized in that the first area is brought into the inflow-enabled state at the timing when the game ball entering from the second ball entry means reaches the first area.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second inflow enabling means sets the first area in an inflow enabled state at the timing when the game ball entering from the second ball entering means reaches the first area. This determines whether or not the game ball entering from the second ball entering means, which is disposed farther from the first region than the third ball entering means, is allowed to enter the first region, that is, the second ball entering means is in the gaming state. Even when the first area is in a state in which entry is possible, it is possible to create a gameplay that determines whether or not the first area is in a state in which entry is possible, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B5,
The first area switching means includes:
Due to the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means changing from a state where it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter into a state into which a game ball can enter, the first area becomes difficult to enter. A game machine B6 characterized in that the state is switched from the state to the inflow possible state.

According to gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines B1 to B5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first area switching means causes the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means to change from a state where it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter into a state into which a game ball can enter. One area is switched from a state in which it is difficult to enter to a state in which it is possible to enter. As a result, the second advantageous state is generated by causing the game ball to flow into the first area that has become inflowable due to the state in which the game ball of the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can enter. This has the effect of creating a game experience of "or not" and increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B5,
The second ball entering means includes:
A first detection means (for example, a first big prize opening switch 72c) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the second ball entry means,
The third ball entering means includes:
A second detection means (for example, a second big prize opening switch 74c) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the third ball entry means,
The first area switching means includes:
A game machine B7 characterized in that the first area is switched from the inflow difficult state to the inflow possible state due to a game ball being detected by the first detection means or the second detection means.

According to gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines B1 to B5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game ball entering the second ball entering means can be detected by the first detecting means provided in the second ball entering means. Moreover, the game ball that has entered the third ball entry means can be detected by the second detection means provided in the third ball entry means. Then, the first area switching means switches the first area from the inflow difficult state to the inflow possible state due to the game ball being detected by the first detection means or the second detection means. As a result, it is determined whether or not a second advantageous state is generated by causing the game ball to flow into the first area that has become inflow-enabled due to the game ball entering the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means. This has the effect of creating a gameplay experience and improving the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines B0 to B7,
At least a game board (for example, game board 13) on which the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means are arranged;
A game in which a game ball is guided to a predetermined position where the game ball can enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means which are arranged on the game board and are in a state where the game ball can enter. A game machine B8 characterized in that it includes ball guiding means (for example, a left nail group 77 and a right nail group 78).

According to gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines B0 to B7, the following effects are achieved. That is, at least the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means are arranged on the game board. In addition, the game ball is placed in a position where the game ball can enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, which are in a state where the game ball can enter, by the game ball guide means provided on the game board. You will be guided. As a result, by guiding the game ball to a predetermined position on the game board by the game ball guide means, the game ball can enter the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means into which the game ball can enter. can. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entry means using the same game ball launching method, so even if multiple ball entry means are provided, the game method in an advantageous state can be simplified. This has the effect of providing an easy-to-understand game to the player and increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B8,
The advantageous state means are:
In the advantageous state of No. 1, game balls are allowed to enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a maximum of 30 seconds or 10 balls are won). A plurality of advantageous period execution means (e.g., a round counter) for executing an advantageous period (e.g., one round) in a state multiple times,
The first area switching means includes:
In one of the advantageous states, a plurality of inflow possible state means (for example, 1st round, 3rd round, and 9th round of jackpot type "probability variation A") sets the first area to the inflow possible state in two or more of the advantageous periods. A game machine B9 is characterized in that it is equipped with the following.

According to gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines B1 to B8, the following effects are achieved. That is, the plural advantageous period executing means provided in the advantageous state means allows the game ball to enter either the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means in one advantageous state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The advantageous period in which this is possible is carried out multiple times. The plurality of inflow possible state means provided in the first region switching means allows the first region to be in the inflow possible state for two or more advantageous periods in one advantageous state. As a result, even if a game ball cannot flow into the first area during any one advantageous period in which the first area is in an inflow-enabled state, the first area will be returned to the first area in another advantageous period. By setting the area in a state where inflow is possible, it becomes possible to cause game balls to flow into the first area. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a firing abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), game balls may not be allowed to flow into the first area during the first advantageous period when the first area is in a state where the flow is possible. Even if a problem occurs, by making the first area available for inflow again during another advantageous period and providing the possibility of allowing game balls to flow into the first area, players can avoid unforeseen circumstances. This has the effect that it is possible to realize a comfortable game without incurring profits, and that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B9,
By using the determination result by the determining means, a recognizable mode (e.g., "probability fluctuation state") is executed in which the player can recognize that the second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state generating means. A recognizable mode execution means (for example, a dedicated background of “probability fluctuation state” on the third symbol display device 81),
By using the determination result by the determination means, it is possible to detect a difficult-to-recognize mode in which it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state generation means (for example, a "latent probability fluctuating state"). '') (for example, a common background between the "latency probability variation state" and the "time reduction state" in the third symbol display device 81). B10.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines B1 to B9, the following effects are achieved. That is, by using the determination result of the determining means, the recognizable manner execution means executes the recognizable manner that allows the player to recognize that the third gaming value is awarded by the third gaming value granting means. . Further, the difficult-to-recognize mode execution means uses the determination result of the determining means to create a difficult-to-recognize mode in which it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the third gaming value is awarded by the third gaming value assigning means. executed. As a result, if the recognizable mode is executed, the player can recognize that the third gaming value can be awarded by the flow of game balls into the first area, but if the difficult-to-recognize mode is executed, It becomes difficult or impossible for the player to recognize it. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess which game value will be awarded, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<Group C: Player operation performance during interval time>
Conventionally, in game machines such as pachinko machines, game media such as game balls are fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and a downward direction provided in the game area and capable of changing the direction in which the game balls flow down is used. A predetermined gaming value is given to each game ball based on the entry of the game ball into one of the plurality of ball entrances in which the changing means is arranged, and a lottery is conducted based on the winning of the game ball to a specific ball entrance. , it is configured such that when a player wins an advantageous state such as a win in a lottery, a game ball is allowed to enter the ball entry means and a predetermined gaming value is given to the player (for example, according to a patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions in group C were made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

A firing means for firing a game ball (for example, ball firing unit 112a),
a first ball entrance means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
Information acquisition means (for example, first holding ball storage area 203d) that acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
determination means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A second ball entering means (for example, the first variable prize winning device 72) and a second ball entering means (for example, the first variable winning device 72) each having a downward direction changing means (for example, the first opening/closing plate 72a or the second opening/closing plate 74a) that can change the downward direction of the game ball. 3 ball entry means (for example, second variable winning device 74);
A first gaming value imparting means (for example, a first big prize opening switch 72c) that imparts a predetermined first gaming value to the player when a game ball enters the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means. or a second big prize opening switch 74c),
a first area (for example, variable probability area 75) through which game balls flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass;
special period executing means capable of executing a special period (for example, an interval period) in which both the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means are in a state in which it is difficult or impossible for game balls to enter;
When the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means is in a state where a game ball can enter, it is in a state where a game ball can enter the first area, or a game ball can enter the first area. A first region switching means (for example, a variable probability region opening/closing plate 75a) for switching between a state in which it is difficult to enter or a state in which it is difficult to enter;
a second gaming value imparting means for imparting a second gaming value different from the first gaming value to the player when a game ball flows into the first area which has been made inflow-enabled by the first area switching means; For example, it includes a variable transition flag 203i),
The special period execution means is
The special period is configured such that the special period can be executed for a period longer than the falling time required for the game ball entering from the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means to reach the first area. Game machine C0.

According to the game machine C0, the game ball is fired by the firing means, and the game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entering means, and the game ball is configured to enter the first ball entering means. Predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means due to the ball being hit. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. Further, a second ball entering means and a third ball entering means are provided, each of which is provided with a downward direction changing means capable of changing the downward direction of the game ball, and the game ball is placed in the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means. When the game ball enters, the first game value giving means gives a predetermined first game value to the player, and the first area through which the game balls flowing from the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means can pass is set. provided. Here, the special period executing means is configured to be able to execute a special period in which both the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means are in a state in which it is difficult or impossible for game balls to enter. Then, when the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means is in a state where a game ball can enter, the first region switching means determines whether the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means is in a state where a game ball can enter into the first region. A state in which it is difficult for game balls to flow into the area or a state in which it is impossible for game balls to flow into the area is switched. Furthermore, when a game ball flows into the first area that has been set to be inflow-enabled by the first area switching means, the second gaming value granting means provides the player with a second gaming value that is different from the first gaming value. Ru. Here, the special period executing means is configured to be able to execute the special period for a period longer than the falling time required for the game ball entering from the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means to reach the first area. As a result, for example, in a case where the second game value cannot be awarded, a game ball that enters from the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means enters the first region before the first region becomes inflow-enabled. By providing a special period longer than the falling time required for the game ball to reach the first area, the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means is in a state where the game ball can enter. , it is possible to suppress the game balls remaining in the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means from flowing into the first area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended second gaming value from being given, give the player a gaming value as expected in the game specifications, prevent unexpected losses from occurring in the gaming parlor, and improve the interest of the game. The effect is that you can.

In gaming machine C0,
By using the determination result by the determining means, it is advantageous to change the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means from a state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter into a state in which a game ball can enter. Advantageous state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) to make the state (for example, jackpot state);
In the advantageous state of No. 1, game balls are allowed to enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a maximum of 30 seconds or 10 balls are won). A plurality of advantageous period execution means (e.g., a round counter) that executes an advantageous period (e.g., one round) in a state multiple times,
The special period execution means is
A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the special period is executed before the start of the advantageous period in which the first area is set in the inflow-enabled state by the first area switching means.

According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C0, the following effects are achieved. That is, by using the determination result by the determining means, the advantageous state means changes the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means from a state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter into a state in which a game ball can enter. It is considered to be an advantageous state that changes to Then, in one advantageous state, the game ball enters either the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means until a predetermined condition is satisfied, by the plural advantageous period executing means provided in the advantageous state means. The advantageous period in which this is possible is carried out multiple times. Then, the special period execution means executes the special period before the start of the advantageous period in which the first area is made available for inflow by the first area switching means. As a result, for example, in a case where the second game value cannot be given, a game ball that enters from the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means may By executing the special period for a period longer than the falling time required to reach the first area, the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means is in the state where the game ball can enter. With respect to one area, it is possible to prevent game balls remaining in the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means from flowing into the first area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended second gaming value from being given, give the player a gaming value as expected in the game specifications, prevent unexpected losses from occurring in the gaming parlor, and improve the interest of the game. The effect is that you can.

In the gaming machine C1,
a display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) capable of performing an advantageous state production that indicates to the player that the player is in the advantageous state;
special performance execution means (for example, audio lamp control device 113) capable of executing a special performance different from the advantageous state performance (for example, "character selection" performance) on the display means at least during execution of the special period; A gaming machine C2 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display means is configured to be able to execute an advantageous state presentation that suggests to the player that the player is in an advantageous state. Then, at least during execution of the special period, the special performance execution means is configured to be able to execute a special performance different from the advantageous state performance on the display means. As a result, a special performance different from the advantageous state performance is executed on the display means, thereby drawing the player's attention to the special performance, and both the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means are activated when the game ball enters. It is possible to relatively reduce attention to the execution of a special period that is difficult or impossible to enter. Therefore, even if a special period is executed in which no gaming value is given to the player, it is possible to provide the player with a game that feels natural and improve the interest in the game.

In gaming machine C2,
comprising operation means (for example, frame button 22) that can be operated by the player;
The special performance execution means is
The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, as the special performance, an operation prompting performance (for example, a "character selection" performance) that prompts the player to operate the operation means is executed.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the operating means is configured to be operable by the player, and the special effect execution means executes an operation prompting effect that prompts the player to operate the operating means as a special effect. That is, during the special period that is executed before the start of the advantageous period in which the special area is allowed to enter, an operation prompting effect that prompts the player to operate the operating means is executed at least while the special period is being executed. is configured to be As a result, by performing the operation prompting effect during a special period in which no gaming value is given to the player, the player is made to pay more attention to the operation urging effect than when simply executing an advantageous state effect, and it is possible to The second ball entering means and the third ball entering means reduce the attention to the special period in which it is difficult or impossible for game balls to enter, and also reduce the attention to the manner in which game balls flow into the first area. can be lowered. That is, by executing an operation prompting effect that is easy for the player to pay attention to during the special period, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to recognize the result of the inflow of game balls into the first area. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not a game ball has flowed into the first area, and it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not a game ball has flowed into the first area during an advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by creating gameplay that makes people guess.

In gaming machine C3,
The operation prompting performance is
A gaming machine C4 characterized in that it is configured to be able to determine the content of performance in the game after the end of the advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the content of the performance after the end of the advantageous state can be determined by the operation prompting performance. As a result, by performing a performance that allows the player to decide the content of the performance regarding the game after the end of the advantageous state during the special period, the player's attention is drawn to the operation prompt performance, and the performance is relatively The second ball entering means and the third ball entering means reduce the attention to the special period in which it is difficult or impossible for game balls to enter, and the attention to the manner in which game balls flow into the first area. can also be lowered. That is, by executing an operation prompting effect that is easy for the player to pay attention to during the special period, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to recognize the result of the inflow of game balls into the first area. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not a game ball has flowed into the first area, and it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not a game ball has flowed into the first area during an advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by creating gameplay that makes people guess.

In gaming machine C4,
The display means is
Suggestive performance execution means that can execute a suggestive performance that can suggest the content of the game to the player (for example, a suggestion as to whether or not the player is in a "latent probability fluctuating state");
A gaming machine C5 characterized in that the mode of execution of the suggestive performance differs based on the content of the performance determined by the operation prompting performance.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the suggestive performance execution means provided in the display means is configured to be able to execute a suggestive performance that can suggest the content of the game to the player. The execution mode of the suggestive performance is configured to be different based on the content of the performance determined by the operation prompting performance. As a result, by performing a performance during the special period in which the player can decide the content of the performance that affects the suggestion of the game content by his or her own will, the player's attention is drawn to the operation prompt performance, and the In addition to reducing the degree of attention to the special period in which the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means are in a state in which it is difficult or impossible for game balls to enter, attention is paid to the manner in which game balls flow into the first area. The temperature can also be lowered. That is, by executing an operation prompting effect that is easy for the player to pay attention to during the special period, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to recognize the result of the inflow of game balls into the first area. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not a game ball has flowed into the first area, and it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not a game ball has flowed into the first area during an advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by creating gameplay that makes people guess.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C5,
A first guide means (for example, a passage 72d before first big winning opening detection and a passage 72e after first big winning opening detection) that guides the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means to the first area side;
a second guide means (for example, a second big winning opening pre-detection passage 74d and a second big winning opening post-detection passage 74e) that guides the game ball that has entered the third ball entering means to the first area side;
The first guiding means is
It is configured such that a predetermined first time (for example, 2.5 seconds) is required from when the game ball enters the second ball entering means until it reaches the first area,
The second guiding means is
It is configured such that a second time (for example, 0.7 seconds) shorter than the first time is required from when the game ball enters the third ball entry means until it reaches the first area,
The special period is
A game machine C6 characterized in that the game is played for at least the second time period or more.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines C0 to C5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means toward the first region, and the second guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the third ball entering means toward the first region. be done. Further, the first guide means takes a predetermined first time from when the game ball enters the second ball entering means until it reaches the first area, and the second guiding means allows the game ball to enter the third ball entering means. A second time shorter than the first time is required from when the game ball enters until it reaches the first area. Here, the special period is held for at least the second period or more. As a result, for example, in a case where the second game value cannot be given, a game ball that enters from the third ball entering means that takes a short time to reach the first area before the first area becomes inflowable state. By executing the special period in which the game ball reaches the first area, the third ball entering means can enter the first area into which the game ball can enter when the second ball entering means is in the state where the game ball can enter. It is possible to suppress the remaining game balls that have flowed into the first area from flowing into the first area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended second gaming value from being given, give the player a gaming value as expected in the game specifications, prevent unexpected losses from occurring in the gaming parlor, and improve the interest of the game. The effect is that you can.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C6,
a game board (for example, game board 13) on which the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means are arranged;
A game in which a game ball is guided to a predetermined position where the game ball can enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means which are arranged on the game board and are in a state where the game ball can enter. A gaming machine C7 characterized in that it is equipped with ball guide means (for example, a left nail group 77 and a right nail group 78).

According to gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines C0 to C6, the following effects are achieved. That is, a second ball entering means and a third ball entering means are arranged on the game board. In addition, the game ball is placed in a position where the game ball can enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, which are in a state where the game ball can enter, by the game ball guide means provided on the game board. You will be guided. As a result, by guiding the game ball to a predetermined position on the game board by the game ball guide means, the game ball can enter the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means into which the game ball can enter. can. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entry means using the same game ball launching method, so even if multiple ball entry means are provided, the game method in an advantageous state can be simplified. This has the effect of providing an easy-to-understand game to the player and increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C7,
The first area switching means includes:
In one of the advantageous states, a plurality of inflow possible state means (for example, 1st round, 3rd round, and 9th round of jackpot type "probability variation A") sets the first area to the inflow possible state in two or more of the advantageous periods. A gaming machine C8 characterized in that it is equipped with the following.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines C1 to C7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the plurality of inflow possible state means provided in the first region switching means allows the first region to be in the inflow possible state for two or more advantageous periods in one advantageous state. As a result, even if a game ball cannot flow into the first area during any one advantageous period in which the first area is in an inflow-enabled state, the first area will be returned to the first area in another advantageous period. By setting the area in a state where inflow is possible, it becomes possible to cause game balls to flow into the first area. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a firing abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), game balls may not be allowed to flow into the first area during the first advantageous period when the first area is in a state where the flow is possible. Even if a problem occurs, by making the first area available for inflow again during another advantageous period and providing the possibility of allowing game balls to flow into the first area, players can avoid unforeseen circumstances. This has the effect that it is possible to realize a comfortable game without incurring profits, and that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C8,
By using the determination result by the determination means, a recognizable mode (for example, a "probability fluctuation state") in which the player can recognize that the second gaming value is awarded by the second gaming value assigning means is established. A recognizable mode execution means to be executed (for example, a dedicated background of the “probability fluctuation state” on the third symbol display device 81),
By using the determination result by the determination means, it is possible to detect a difficult-to-recognize mode in which it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the second game value is awarded by the second game value granting means (for example, "latent probability fluctuation"). A game characterized by comprising: a difficult-to-recognize mode execution means (for example, a common background between the "latency probability variation state" and the "time reduction state" in the third symbol display device 81) for executing the "state"). Machine C9.

According to gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines C0 to C8, the following effects are achieved. That is, by using the determination result of the determining means, the recognizable manner execution means executes the recognizable manner that allows the player to recognize that the second gaming value is awarded by the second gaming value granting means. . Further, the difficult-to-recognize mode execution means uses the determination result of the determining means to create a difficult-to-recognize mode in which it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the second gaming value is awarded by the second gaming value assigning means. executed. As a result, the second gaming value that can be given by the flow of game balls into the first area can be recognized by the player if the recognizable mode is executed, but if the difficult to recognize mode is executed, the second gaming value can be recognized by the player. becomes difficult or impossible to recognize. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess which game value will be awarded, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<Group D: Including other variable winning devices and variable probability areas within the width of variable winning device 1>

Conventionally, in game machines such as pachinko machines, game media such as game balls are fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and a downward direction provided in the game area and capable of changing the direction in which the game balls flow down is used. A predetermined gaming value is given to each game ball based on the entry of the game ball into one of the plurality of ball entrances in which the changing means is arranged, and a lottery is conducted based on the winning of the game ball to a specific ball entrance. , it is configured such that when a player wins an advantageous state such as a win in a lottery, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player by allowing the game ball to enter the ball entry means (for example, patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, the gaming machine has a configuration in which the vertical width of the entire gaming machine is larger than the horizontal width, and the design constraints on the left and right widths are greater than the design constraints on the top and bottom widths. Therefore, when arranging parts that extend in the horizontal direction, the parts occupy a predetermined area in the game area of the game board, and there is a risk that the degree of freedom in designing other game parts will be reduced.

The inventions of Group D have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can contribute to improving the degree of freedom in designing gaming components.

A firing means for firing a game ball (for example, ball firing unit 112a),
a first ball entrance means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
Information acquisition means (for example, first holding ball storage area 203d) that acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
determination means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A second ball entering means (for example, the first variable prize winning device 72) and a second ball entering means (for example, the first variable winning device 72) each having a downward direction changing means (for example, the first opening/closing plate 72a or the second opening/closing plate 74a) that can change the downward direction of the game ball. 3. Ball entry means (for example, second variable winning device 74);
A first game value imparting means (for example, a prize ball based on detection of a ball by a first starting port switch) for imparting a predetermined first game value to the player when a game ball enters the first ball entering means. 3 pieces)) and
When a game ball enters the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means, a second gaming value giving means (for example, a first grand prize opening In a gaming machine equipped with prize balls (15 pieces) based on detection of balls by the switch 72c or the second big prize opening switch 74c,
a first area (for example, variable probability area 75) through which game balls flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass;
a third gaming value imparting means (for example, probability change transition flag 203i) capable of imparting a third gaming value different from the first gaming value and the second gaming value when the game ball passes through the first area; Equipped with
A gaming machine D0, characterized in that the third ball entry means and the first area are formed in a size such that the lateral dimensions of the third ball entry means and the first area as seen from the front are within the range of the lateral dimension of the second ball entry means when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine D0, the game ball is fired by the firing means, and the game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entering means, and the game ball is entered into the first ball entering means. Predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means due to the ball being hit. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. Further, a second ball entering means and a third ball entering means are provided, each of which is provided with a downward direction changing means capable of changing the downward direction of the game ball. When the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the first game value giving means gives a predetermined first gaming value to the player, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means. When the ball enters the ball, the second game value giving means gives a second game value different from the first game value. Here, a first area is provided through which game balls flowing in from the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means can pass. Further, when the game ball passes through the first area, a third game value different from the first game value and the second game value can be awarded by the third game value granting means. The third ball entry means and the first region are formed to have a size such that the lateral dimensions of the third ball entry means and the first region as seen from the front are within the range of the lateral dimension of the second ball entry means when viewed from the front. That is, a front view of the second ball entry means and third ball entry means that provide a second game value, and the first area that may provide a third game value that is different from the second game value (first game value). The lateral dimension is configured to be within the range of the lateral dimension of the second ball entry means when viewed from the front. As a result, the dimensions of the second ball entering means, the third ball entering means, and the first area in the front view lateral direction that can provide a predetermined gaming value to the player can be adjusted to a maximum of the front view lateral dimension of the second ball entering means. By keeping it within the dimension range, the area occupied by each of the second ball entry means, third ball entry means, and first region in the horizontal dimension when viewed from the front can be reduced, contributing to an improvement in the degree of freedom in the design of the gaming machine. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine D0,
a first guide means (for example, a passage 72d before first big winning opening detection and a passage 72e after first big winning opening detection) that guides the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means to the first area side;
a second guide means (for example, a second big winning opening pre-detection passage 74d and a second big winning opening post-detection passage 74e) that guides the game ball that has entered the third ball entering means to the first area side;
a merging portion (for example, merging portion 73) where the first guide means and the second guide means merge;
A discharge means (for example, a discharge passage 76) for discharging the game ball that has entered the second ball entrance means or the third ball entrance means out of the second ball entrance means or the third ball entrance means. ,
The third ball entry means, the first region, and the ejection means are formed to a size such that the lateral dimensions when viewed from the front fit within the range of the lateral dimension when viewed from the front of the second ball entry means. Game machine D1.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means toward the first region, and the second guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the third ball entering means toward the first region. be done. Further, at the merging part, the first guide means and the second guide means are merged, and the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means is transferred by the ejecting means to the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means. 3. The ball is ejected to the outside of the ball entering means. Here, the third ball entry means, the first region, and the ejecting means are formed to have a size that fits within the range of the front view lateral dimension of the second ball entry means. That is, the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means that provide the second game value, the first area that can provide the third game value different from the second game value, and the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means The third ball entering means is configured such that the horizontal dimension in a front view of the ejecting means for discharging the game balls that have entered the ball entering means is within the range of the horizontal dimension in a front view of the second ball entering means. As a result, the second ball entering means, the third ball entering means, and the first area capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value to the player, and the game balls that have entered the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means are discharged. By keeping the lateral dimension in front view of the series of mechanisms up to the point within the range of the lateral dimension in front view of the second ball entrance means at the maximum, the second ball entrance means, the third ball entrance means, and the first area In addition, it is possible to reduce the area occupied by each of the discharging means in the horizontal dimension when viewed from the front, thereby contributing to an improvement in the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine D1,
The front view depth dimensions of the first guiding means, the second guiding means, the first region, and the ejecting means are within a range of one diameter or more and less than two diameters of a game ball. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being formed.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D0 or D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the front view depth dimensions of the first guide means, the second guide means, the first region, and the discharge means are formed to a size within a range of one diameter or more and less than two diameters of the game ball. Ru. As a result, the lateral dimensions of the first guide means, the second guide means, the first region, and the ejecting means when viewed from the front are within the range of the lateral dimensions when viewed from the front of the second ball entering means, and the ball entering the second ball entering means The front view depth dimensions of the first guide means that guides the game ball to the first area, the second guide means that guides the game ball that has entered the third ball entry means to the first area, the first area, and the ejection means are A front view of each of the second ball entry means, the third ball entry means, the first region, and the ejection means, which are formed to have a size equal to or more than the diameter of one ball and less than the diameter of two balls. This has the effect of reducing (minimizing) the area occupied by the horizontal dimension and the front view depth dimension, thereby contributing to an improvement in the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D2,
A game board (for example, game board 13) on which the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means are arranged,
The second ball entering means includes:
A gaming machine D3, which is arranged on the upstream side of the third ball entry means in the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines D0 to D2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means are arranged on the game board, and the second ball entering means is arranged upstream of the third ball entering means on the game board. Thereby, the dimension in the front view lateral direction of the second ball entering means, the third ball entering means, and the first area that can provide a predetermined gaming value to the player is adjusted to the second ball entering means located most upstream. In the arrangement where the game ball can enter any of the second ball entry means, the third ball entry means, and the first area by keeping the game ball within the range of the horizontal dimension in front view, the second ball entry means, the third ball entry means This has the effect of reducing the area occupied by the ball entry means and the first area in the horizontal dimension when viewed from the front, thereby contributing to an improvement in the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3,
A gaming machine D4 characterized in that the first area and the ejecting means are arranged so as to overlap in a depth direction when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first region and the ejection means are arranged so as to overlap in the front view depth direction. As a result, the lateral dimension in front view of either the first region or the ejection means is reduced, so that the lateral dimension in front view of the second ball entry means, third ball entry means, first region, and ejection means is reduced. Dimensions can be further reduced. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the area occupied by each of the second ball entry means, third ball entry means, first region, and discharge means in the horizontal dimension when viewed from the front, thereby contributing to an improvement in the degree of freedom in the design of the gaming machine. There is an effect that it can be done.

In gaming machine D4,
A gaming machine D5, wherein the first region and the ejecting means are made of a light-transmitting material (for example, polycarbonate).

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first region and the ejection means are regulated by a light-transmitting material. As a result, when the first area and the ejection means are overlapped in the depth direction when viewed from the front, a player can visually check from the front side of the gaming machine whether the game ball has flowed into the first area or into the ejection means. can be difficult to recognize. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the third gaming value awarded based on the passing of the game ball through the first area occurs after the end of the advantageous state, and the third gaming value is awarded. This has the effect of creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the game will be played, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D5,
A first area switching means (for example, a probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a) for switching whether or not to enter an inflow-enabled state in which game balls can flow into the first area,
A gaming machine D6, wherein the first area switching means is made of a light-transmitting material (for example, polycarbonate).

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines D0 to D5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first area switching means switches whether or not to enable the inflow of game balls into the first area, and the first area switching means is formed of a light-transmitting material. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether the first area switching means is in an inflow-enabled state or in an inflow-difficult state. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the third gaming value awarded based on the passing of the game ball through the first area occurs after the end of the advantageous state, and the third gaming value is awarded. This has the effect of creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the game will be played, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D6,
The first region is
A gaming machine D7 characterized in that it is arranged downstream of the merging section.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines D1 to D6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first region is arranged downstream of the confluence section. Thereby, each game ball that has entered each ball entry means can be made to enter the first area located downstream of the confluence of each guide means. As a result, it is no longer necessary to provide a first area for each ball entry means, reducing the number of parts related to the gaming machine, and providing a third gaming value by allowing gaming balls to flow into the first area during advantageous conditions. This has the effect that it is possible to create a gameplay experience that depends on whether the game is played or not, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines D3 to D7,
A game in which a game ball is guided to a predetermined position where the game ball can enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means which are arranged on the game board and are in a state where the game ball can enter. A gaming machine D8 comprising ball guiding means (for example, a left nail group 77 and a right nail group 78).

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines D3 to D7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game ball guide means provided on the game board places the game ball in a position where the game ball can enter either the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means, which are in a state where the game ball can enter. You will be guided. As a result, by guiding the game ball to a predetermined position on the game board by the game ball guide means, the game ball can enter the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means into which the game ball can enter. can. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entry means using the same game ball launching method, so even if multiple ball entry means are provided, the game method in an advantageous state can be simplified. This has the effect of providing an easy-to-understand game to the player and increasing the interest of the game.

<Group E: Switch between enabling and disabling the variable probability area of double attacker>
Conventionally, in game machines such as pachinko machines, game media such as game balls are fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and a downward direction provided in the game area and capable of changing the direction in which the game balls flow down is used. A predetermined gaming value is given to each game ball based on the entry of the game ball into one of the plurality of ball entrances in which the changing means is arranged, and a lottery is conducted based on the winning of the game ball to a specific ball entrance. , it is configured such that when a player wins an advantageous state such as a win in a lottery, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player by allowing the game ball to enter the ball entry means (for example, patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, although it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions in Group E have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

A firing means for firing a game ball (for example, ball firing unit 112a),
a first ball entrance means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
Information acquisition means (for example, first holding ball storage area 203d) that acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
determination means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A second ball entering means (for example, the first variable prize winning device 72) and a second ball entering means (for example, the first variable winning device 72) each having a downward direction changing means (for example, the first opening/closing plate 72a or the second opening/closing plate 74a) that can change the downward direction of the game ball. 3 ball entry means (for example, second variable winning device 74);
A first game value imparting means (for example, a prize ball based on detection of a ball by a first starting port switch) for imparting a predetermined first game value to the player when a game ball enters the first ball entering means. 3 pieces)) and
When a game ball enters the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means, a second gaming value giving means (for example, a first grand prize opening In a gaming machine equipped with prize balls (15 pieces) based on detection of balls by the switch 72c or the second big prize opening switch 74c,
a first area (for example, variable probability area 75) through which game balls flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass;
Validity switching means (for example, probability variable area validity flag 203h) for switching whether or not to set the first area to be valid;
Third gaming value imparting means for imparting a third gaming value different from the first gaming value and the second gaming value when a game ball flows into the first area set to be valid by the validity switching means. (For example, a probability change transition flag 203i).

According to the game machine E0, the game ball is fired by the firing means, and the game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entering means, and the game ball is configured to enter the first ball entering means. Predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means due to the ball being hit. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. Further, a second ball entering means and a third ball entering means are provided, each of which is provided with a downward direction changing means capable of changing the downward direction of the game ball. When the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the first game value giving means gives a predetermined first gaming value to the player, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means. When the ball enters the ball, the second game value giving means gives a second game value different from the first game value. Here, a first area is provided through which game balls flowing from the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means can pass. Then, when the validity switching means switches whether or not to set the first area to be valid, and the third gaming value giving means causes a game ball to flow into the first area set to be valid by the validity switching means. A third gaming value that is different from the first gaming value and the second gaming value is given to the player. As a result, the third gaming value can be awarded only when the first area is set to be valid, so the effect is that the third gaming value can be assigned accurately and the interest in the game can be improved. be.

In the gaming machine E0,
A gaming machine E1 characterized in that when a game ball flows into the first area which is not set to be valid (set to be invalid) by the validity switching means, the third game value is not given.

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E0, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a game ball flows into a first area that is not set as valid by the validity switching means, the third game value is not given. Thereby, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has passed into the first area, it is possible to create a situation in which the third game value cannot be awarded. That is, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the third game value is awarded only by passing the game ball in the first area. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the third game value will be awarded, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E0 or E1,
The effective switching means is
A gaming machine E2 characterized in that it includes a valid timing determining means (for example, a jackpot type counter C2) that determines the timing for validating the first area by using the determination result of the determining means. .

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E0 or E1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the effective timing determining means determines the timing at which the first area is set to be effective by using the determination result of the determining means. As a result, the timing of activating the first area can be changed according to the determination result of the determination means, and there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machines E0 to E2,
By using the determination result by the determining means, the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means is changed from a state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter into a state in which a game ball can enter. Advantageous state means (e.g., jackpot processing (S103)) to bring about an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot state);
In the advantageous state of No. 1, game balls can enter either the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a maximum of 30 seconds or 10 balls are won). multiple advantageous period execution means (e.g., a round counter) for executing an advantageous period (e.g., one round) multiple times;
A state setting means (for example, a state setting means for setting the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means to be in a state in which a game ball can enter in each advantageous period by using the determination result of the determining means (for example, a big winning prize) A gaming machine E3 characterized in that it is equipped with an opening/closing table 202f).

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines E0 to E2, the following effects are achieved. That is, by using the determination result by the determining means, the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means changes from a state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter, to a state in which the game ball can enter, by the advantageous state means. It is considered to be an advantageous state that changes to the state. In addition, the plural advantageous period executing means controls either the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means in one advantageous state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, during which a game ball can enter into an advantageous period. is executed multiple times. Further, the state setting means sets the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means to be in a state in which a game ball can enter every advantageous period by using the determination result of the determining means. As a result, in the first advantageous state, it is possible to change the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means in which the game ball can enter for each advantageous period, enriching the variation of the game and improving the game. It has the effect of increasing interest.

In gaming machine E3,
The state setting means includes:
Alternating state means (for example, winning the jackpot type "probability variation A") that alternately sets the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means to a state in which a game ball can enter each advantageous period. The gaming machine E4 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E3, the following effects are achieved. That is, by the alternating state means provided in the state setting means, the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means are alternately brought into a state in which game balls can enter each advantageous period. As a result, in the advantageous state 1, a case where the game ball enters the second ball entering means and a case where the game ball enters the third ball entering means are provided, and the entry pattern of the game ball to each ball entering means is changed. This has the effect of enriching the variations of the game and increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine E4,
The alternating state means is
When the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means, which is in a state in which a game ball can enter, is made into a state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter, a state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter. A predetermined period state means (for example, (no interval time).

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means, which is in a state in which a game ball can enter, becomes in a state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter, within the predetermined period provided in the alternating state means. By the state means, the third ball entering means or the second ball entering means, which has been in a state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter, is brought into a state in which a game ball can enter within a predetermined period of time. This reduces the situation in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter both the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means, that is, the state in which a game ball cannot enter either of the ball entry means. can do. As a result, the number of times the game ball can enter the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means stipulated in the advantageous state 1 can be quickly set, so the time required for the advantageous state 1 is This has the effect of being able to shorten the amount of time required, and providing gaming value to players quickly.

In any of gaming machines E3 to E5,
The effective switching means is
In the advantageous state of No. 1, a plurality of effective possible means (for example, rounds 1, 3, and 9 of the jackpot type "probability variation A") that can effectively set the first region in two or more of the advantageous periods. The gaming machine E6 is characterized by having the following features.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines E3 to E5, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the first region can be set effectively in two or more advantageous periods in one advantageous state by the plurality of enablement means provided in the enablement switching means. As a result, even if the first area is unable to allow game balls to flow into the first area during any one of the advantageous periods in which game balls can flow into the first area, the first area will be returned to the first area in another advantageous period. By setting this to be effective and allowing the game balls to flow in, it becomes possible to cause the game balls to flow into the first area which is valid multiple times in one advantageous state. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a firing abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), game balls may flow into the first area during the first advantageous period in which the first area is set to be effective. Even if a problem occurs, the first area can be set to be valid again during another advantageous period, and game balls can flow into the validly set first area, thereby preventing unforeseen problems. This has the effect that the player can play the game comfortably without suffering any disadvantage due to the situation, and can improve the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines E0 to E6,
A first guide means (for example, a passage 72d before first big winning opening detection and a passage 72e after first big winning opening detection) that guides the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means to the first area side;
a second guide means (for example, a second big winning opening pre-detection passage 74d and a second big winning opening post-detection passage 74e) that guides the game ball that has entered the third ball entering means to the first area side;
a merging section (for example, merging section 73) where the first guide means and the second guide means merge,
The first region is
A gaming machine E7 characterized in that it is arranged downstream of the merging section.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines E0 to E6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means toward the first region, and the second guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the third ball entering means toward the first region. be done. Further, the first guide means and the second guide means are joined at the merging portion. The first region is arranged downstream of the merging section. Thereby, each game ball that has entered each ball entry means can be made to enter the first area located downstream of the confluence of each guide means. As a result, it is no longer necessary to provide a first area for each ball entry means, reducing the number of parts related to the gaming machine, and providing a third gaming value by allowing gaming balls to flow into the first area during advantageous conditions. This has the effect that it is possible to create a gameplay experience that depends on whether the game is played or not, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines E0 to E7,
a game board (for example, game board 13) on which the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means are arranged;
A game in which a game ball is guided to a predetermined position where the game ball can enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means which are arranged on the game board and are in a state where the game ball can enter. A gaming machine E8 characterized in that it is equipped with ball guide means (for example, a left nail group 77 and a right nail group 78).

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines E0 to E7, the following effects are achieved. That is, a second ball entering means and a third ball entering means are arranged on the game board. In addition, the game ball is placed in a position where the game ball can enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, which are in a state where the game ball can enter, by the game ball guide means provided on the game board. You will be guided. As a result, by guiding the game ball to a predetermined position on the game board by the game ball guide means, the game ball can enter the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means into which the game ball can enter. can. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entry means using the same method of launching the game ball, so even if a plurality of ball entry means are provided, the game method in an advantageous state can be simplified. This has the effect of providing an easy-to-understand game to the player and increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines E0 to E8,
The advantageous state means are:
A first area switching means (for example, a probability variable area opening/closing plate 75a) for switching whether or not to enter an inflow-enabled state in which game balls can flow into the first area,
The first area switching means includes:
In one of the advantageous states, a plurality of inflow possible state means (for example, 1st round, 3rd round, and 9th round of jackpot type "probability variation A") that makes the first area into the inflow possible state in 2 or more of the advantageous periods. A gaming machine E9 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines E0 to E8, the following effects are achieved. That is, by the first area switching means provided in the advantageous state means, it is switched whether or not the first area is in an inflow-enabled state in which game balls can flow into the first area. The plurality of inflow possible state means provided in the first region switching means allows the first region to be in the inflow possible state for two or more advantageous periods in one advantageous state. As a result, even if a game ball cannot flow into the first area during any one advantageous period in which the first area is in an inflow-enabled state, the first area will be returned to the first area in another advantageous period. By setting the area in a state where inflow is possible, it becomes possible to cause game balls to flow into the first area. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a firing abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), game balls may not be allowed to flow into the first area during the first advantageous period when the first area is in a state where the flow is possible. Even if a problem occurs, by making the first area available for inflow again during another advantageous period and providing the possibility of allowing game balls to flow into the first area, players can avoid unforeseen circumstances. This has the effect that it is possible to realize a comfortable game without incurring profits, and that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines E0 to E9,
By using the determination result by the determining means, a recognizable mode (e.g., "probability fluctuation state") is executed in which the player can recognize that the third gaming value is awarded by the third gaming value assigning means. A recognizable mode execution means (for example, a dedicated background of “probability fluctuation state” on the third symbol display device 81),
By using the determination result by the determination means, it is possible to detect a difficult-to-recognize state in which it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the third game value is awarded by the third game value granting means (for example, "latent probability fluctuation state"). '') (for example, a common background between the "latency probability variation state" and the "time reduction state" in the third symbol display device 81). E10.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines E0 to E9, the following effects are achieved. That is, by using the determination result of the determining means, the recognizable manner executing means executes a recognizable manner that allows the player to recognize that the third gaming value is to be awarded by the third gaming value assigning means. Ru. Further, the difficult-to-recognize mode execution means executes a difficult-to-recognize mode in which it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the third gaming value imparting means will award the third gaming value by using the determination result of the determining means. be done. As a result, the third gaming value that can be given when a game ball flows into the first area can be recognized by the player if the recognizable mode is executed, but the player can recognize the third gaming value that can be awarded when the game ball flows into the first area. becomes difficult or impossible to recognize. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess which game value will be awarded, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<Group F: Deceleration rib inside the variable winning device>
Conventionally, in game machines such as pachinko machines, game media such as game balls are fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and a downward direction provided in the game area and capable of changing the direction in which the game balls flow down is used. A predetermined gaming value is given to each game ball based on the entry of the game ball into one of the plurality of ball entrances in which the changing means is arranged, and a lottery is conducted based on the winning of the game ball to a specific ball entrance. , it is configured such that when a player wins an advantageous state such as a win in a lottery, a game ball is allowed to enter the ball entry means and a predetermined gaming value is given to the player (for example, according to a patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above game machine, since many game parts are arranged, it is necessary to improve the degree of freedom in designing each game part, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of group F were made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can contribute to improving the degree of freedom in designing gaming components.

A firing means for firing a game ball (for example, ball firing unit 112a),
a first ball entrance means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
Information acquisition means (for example, first holding ball storage area 203d) that acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
determination means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A second ball entering means (for example, the first variable prize winning device 72) and a second ball entering means (for example, the first variable winning device 72) each having a downward direction changing means (for example, the first opening/closing plate 72a or the second opening/closing plate 74a) that can change the downward direction of the game ball. 3 ball entry means (for example, second variable winning device 74);
A first game value imparting means (for example, a prize ball based on detection of a ball by a first starting port switch) for imparting a predetermined first game value to the player when a game ball enters the first ball entering means. 3 pieces)) and
When a game ball enters the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means, a second gaming value giving means (for example, a first grand prize opening In a gaming machine equipped with prize balls (15 pieces) based on detection of balls by the switch 72c or the second big prize opening switch 74c,
a first area (for example, variable probability area 75) through which game balls flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass;
a first area switching means (for example, variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a) for switching whether or not to enter an inflow-enabled state in which game balls can flow into the first area;
A third gaming value that provides a third gaming value that is different from the first gaming value and the second gaming value when a game ball flows into the first area that has been made inflow-enabled by the first area switching means. A provisioning means (for example, a probability change transition flag 203i),
A game machine F0 characterized by comprising a deceleration means (for example, a deceleration rib 72f) that decelerates the downward speed of the game ball that enters from the second ball entrance means or the third ball entrance means.

According to the game machine F0, the game ball is fired by the firing means, and the game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entering means, and the game ball is configured to enter the first ball entering means. Predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means due to the ball being hit. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. Further, a second ball entering means and a third ball entering means are provided, each of which is provided with a downward direction changing means capable of changing the downward direction of the game ball. When the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the first game value giving means gives a predetermined first gaming value to the player, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means. When the ball enters the ball, the second game value giving means gives a second game value different from the first game value. Here, a first area is provided through which game balls flowing in from the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means can pass. In addition, the first area switching means switches whether or not the first area is in an inflow-enabled state in which game balls can flow into the first area. Then, when a game ball flows into the first area that has been set to an inflow-enabled state by the first area switching means, the third gaming value giving means assigns a third gaming value different from the first gaming value and the second gaming value. Granted. Here, the speed of the game ball entering from the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means is reduced by the decelerating means. As a result, the speed of the game ball flowing down inside the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means can be prevented from becoming excessively fast, and the speed of the game ball flowing down inside the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means can be prevented from becoming excessive. It is possible to stabilize the falling behavior of the game ball. Therefore, by providing a deceleration means that decelerates the game ball that has flowed into the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, restrictions on the arrangement of the first area with respect to the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means are relaxed. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing game parts can be improved.

In the gaming machine F0,
A first guide means (for example, a passage 72d before first big winning opening detection and a passage 72e after first big winning opening detection) that guides the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means to the first area side;
a second guide means (for example, a second big winning opening pre-detection passage 74d and a second big winning opening post-detection passage 74e) that guides the game ball that has entered the third ball entering means to the first area side;
a merging portion (for example, merging portion 73) where the first guide means and the second guide means merge;
The first region is
arranged on the downstream side of the confluence part,
The deceleration means is
A gaming machine F1 is arranged on the upstream side of the merging section.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means toward the first region, and the second guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the third ball entering means toward the first region. be done. Further, the first guide means and the second guide means are joined at the merging portion. The first region is arranged downstream of the merging section. Furthermore, a deceleration means is arranged upstream of the confluence section. Thereby, each game ball that has entered each ball entry means can be made to enter the first area located downstream of the confluence of each guide means. As a result, there is no need to provide a first area for each ball entry means, so the number of parts related to the game machine can be reduced, and the speed of the game ball flowing down within the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the speed from becoming excessive, and it is possible to stabilize the manner in which the game ball flows down within the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means. Therefore, by providing a deceleration means that decelerates the game ball that has flowed into the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, restrictions on the arrangement of the first area with respect to the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means are relaxed. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing game parts can be improved.

In gaming machine F1,
The deceleration means is
A gaming machine F2 characterized in that it is provided only in either the first guide means or the second guide means.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the deceleration means is provided only in either the first guide means or the second guide means. As a result, among the game balls flowing down the first guide means or the second guide means, the speed of the one game ball flowing down is reduced by the deceleration means provided only in either the first guide means or the second guide means. can only be slowed down. As a result, for example, when it is desired to increase the difference in time of the game ball flowing down the first guide means and the second guide means, or conversely, the difference in time of flow of the game ball flowing down the first guide means and the second guide means. In cases where it is desired to reduce the speed, the above-mentioned request can be realized by providing a deceleration means on the desired (one) guide means. Therefore, by providing a deceleration means that decelerates the game ball that has flowed into the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, restrictions on the arrangement of the first area with respect to the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means are relaxed. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing game parts can be improved.

In gaming machine F2,
The deceleration means is
Of the first guide means or the second guide means, it is provided only in the first guide means or the second guide means which has a longer distance to the first area (for example, the first guide means in the first embodiment After big winning opening detection passage 72e)
The gaming machine F3 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the deceleration means is provided only in the first guide means or the second guide means, whichever of the first guide means or the second guide means has a longer distance to the first area. As a result, the time required for a game ball that has entered the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means to flow down to the first area from the first guiding means or second guiding means having a long distance to the first area, It is possible to increase the difference between the flow time from the second guide means having a short distance to the first region or the first guide means to the first region. As a result, when it is desired to increase the difference in time of the game ball flowing down the first guide means and the second guide means, the above request can be met by providing a deceleration means in the guide means having a longer distance to the first area. It becomes possible to realize this. Therefore, by providing a deceleration means that decelerates the game ball that has flowed into the second ball entrance means or the third ball entrance means, restrictions on the arrangement of the first area with respect to the second ball entrance means or the third ball entrance means are relaxed. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing game parts can be improved.

In gaming machine F2,
The deceleration means is
Of the first guide means or the second guide means, it is provided only in the first guide means or the second guide means which has a shorter distance to the first area (for example, the configuration of Modification 22).
The gaming machine F4 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the deceleration means is provided only in the first guide means or the second guide means, whichever of the first guide means or the second guide means has a shorter distance to the first area. As a result, the time required for a game ball that has entered the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means to flow down to the first area from the first guiding means or second guiding means having a short distance to the first area, It is possible to reduce the difference in flow time from the second guide means or the first guide means, which has a long distance to the first region, to the first region. As a result, when it is desired to reduce the difference in time of the game ball flowing down the first guide means and the second guide means, the above request can be met by providing a deceleration means in the guide means having a shorter distance to the first area. It becomes possible to realize this. Therefore, by providing a deceleration means that decelerates the game ball that has flowed into the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, restrictions on the arrangement of the first area with respect to the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means are relaxed. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing game parts can be improved.

In any of gaming machines F1 to F4,
The deceleration means is
It is a protruding means (for example, the first deceleration rib 72f) that protrudes into the passage from the side wall forming the passage of the first guide means or the second guide means (for example, the first large prize opening post-detection passage 72e). The gaming machine F5 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the protruding means as the deceleration means is protruded into the passage from the side wall forming the passage of the first guide means or the second guide means. The game ball flowing down within the first guide means or the second guide means rolls downstream due to its own weight, so the bottom surface or ceiling surface forming the passage of the first guide means or the second guide means If a protrusion means is formed as a deceleration means in the first guide means, the influence of the self-weight on the rolling is large, and there is a risk that the balls will become clogged in the first guide means or the second guide means. Therefore, by forming the protruding means on the side wall rather than on the bottom or ceiling surface that forms the passage of the first guide means or the second guide means, the first guide This has the effect of suppressing the occurrence of ball clogging within the means or the second guide means.

In gaming machine F5,
The protruding means is
a rear protruding means (for example, a rib on the rear side of the deceleration rib 72f in front view) provided on the side wall of the first guide means or the second guide means on the rear side in front view;
a front side protruding means (for example, a rib on the front side of the deceleration rib 72f in front view) provided on the side wall on the front side of the first guide means or the second guide means when viewed from the front;
The back side protrusion means and the front side protrusion means are
A game machine F6 characterized in that a game ball flowing down within the first guide means or the second guide means is arranged in a meandering manner between the rear side protrusion means and the front side protrusion means. .

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the rear side protrusion means provided in the protrusion means is provided on the rear side wall of the first guide means or the second guide means when viewed from the front. Further, the protruding means on the near side, which is also provided on the protruding means, is provided on the side wall on the near side in front view of the first guide means or the second guide means. The rear side protrusion means and the front side protrusion means are arranged so that the game ball flowing down within the first guide means or the second guide means meanderes between the rear side protrusion means and the front side protrusion means. be done. As a result, the game ball can be caused to flow down in a meandering manner between the plurality of protruding means, and the game ball flowing down within the first guide means or the second guide means can be efficiently decelerated, and ball clogging etc. can occur. It has the effect of suppressing things.

In any of gaming machines F0 to F6,
By using the determination result by the determining means, the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means is changed from a state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter into a state in which a game ball can enter. Advantageous state means (e.g., jackpot processing (S103)) to bring about an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot state);
In the advantageous state of No. 1, game balls can enter either the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a maximum of 30 seconds or 10 balls are won). multiple advantageous period execution means (e.g., a round counter) for executing an advantageous period (e.g., one round) multiple times;
A state setting means (for example, a state setting means for setting the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means to be in a state in which a game ball can enter in each advantageous period by using the determination result of the determining means (for example, a big winning prize) A gaming machine F7 characterized in that it is equipped with an opening/closing table 202f).

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines F0 to F6, the following effects are achieved. That is, by using the determination result by the determining means, the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means changes from a state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter, to a state in which the game ball can enter, by the advantageous state means. It is considered to be an advantageous state that changes to the state. Then, in one advantageous state, the plural advantageous period executing means controls either the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means until a predetermined condition is satisfied, during which a game ball can enter into an advantageous period. is executed multiple times. Further, the state setting means sets the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means to be in a state in which a game ball can enter every advantageous period by using the determination result of the determining means. As a result, in the first advantageous state, it is possible to change the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means in which the game ball can enter for each advantageous period, thereby enriching the variation of the game and improving the game. It has the effect of increasing interest.

In gaming machine F7,
The state setting means includes:
Alternating state means (for example, winning the jackpot type "probability variation A") that alternately sets the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means into a state in which a game ball can enter every advantageous period. The gaming machine F8 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F7, the following effects are achieved. That is, by the alternating state means provided in the state setting means, the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means are alternately brought into a state in which game balls can enter each advantageous period. As a result, in the advantageous state 1, a case where the game ball enters the second ball entering means and a case where the game ball enters the third ball entering means are provided, and the entry pattern of the game ball to each ball entering means is changed. This has the effect of enriching the variations of the game and increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines F0 to F8,
a game board (for example, game board 13) on which the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means are arranged;
A game in which a game ball is guided to a predetermined position where the game ball can enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means which are arranged on the game board and are in a state where the game ball can enter. A game machine F9 comprising ball guiding means (for example, a left nail group 77 and a right nail group 78).

According to gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines F0 to F8, the following effects are achieved. That is, a second ball entering means and a third ball entering means are arranged on the game board. In addition, the game ball is placed in a position where the game ball can enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, which are in a state where the game ball can enter, by the game ball guide means provided on the game board. You will be guided. As a result, by guiding the game ball to a predetermined position on the game board by the game ball guide means, the game ball can enter the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means into which the game ball can enter. can. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entry means using the same game ball launching method, so even if multiple ball entry means are provided, the game method in an advantageous state can be simplified. This has the effect of providing an easy-to-understand game to the player and increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine F8 or F9,
The first area switching means includes:
In one of the advantageous states, a plurality of inflow possible state means (for example, 1st round, 3rd round, and 9th round of jackpot type "probability variation A") sets the first area to the inflow possible state in two or more of the advantageous periods. A gaming machine F10 comprising:

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F8 or F9, the following effects are achieved. That is, the plurality of inflow possible state means provided in the first region switching means allows the first region to be in the inflow possible state for two or more advantageous periods in one advantageous state. As a result, even if a game ball cannot flow into the first area during any one advantageous period in which the first area is in an inflow-enabled state, the first area will be returned to the first area in another advantageous period. By setting the area in a state where inflow is possible, it becomes possible to cause game balls to flow into the first area. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a firing abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), game balls may not be allowed to flow into the first area during the first advantageous period when the first area is in a state where the flow is possible. Even if a problem occurs, by making the first area available for inflow again during another advantageous period and providing the possibility of allowing game balls to flow into the first area, players can avoid unforeseen circumstances. This has the effect that it is possible to realize a comfortable game without incurring profits, and that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines F0 to F10,
By using the determination result by the determining means, a recognizable mode (e.g., "probability fluctuation state") is executed in which the player can recognize that the third gaming value is awarded by the third gaming value assigning means. A recognizable mode execution means (for example, a dedicated background of “probability fluctuation state” on the third symbol display device 81),
By using the determination result by the determination means, it is possible to detect a difficult-to-recognize state in which it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the third game value is awarded by the third game value granting means (for example, "latent probability fluctuation state"). '') (for example, a common background between the "latency probability variation state" and the "time reduction state" in the third symbol display device 81). F11.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines F0 to F10, the following effects are achieved. That is, by using the determination result of the determining means, the recognizable manner executing means executes a recognizable manner that allows the player to recognize that the third gaming value is to be awarded by the third gaming value assigning means. Ru. Further, the difficult-to-recognize mode executing means uses the determination result of the determining means to create a difficult-to-recognize mode in which it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the third gaming value is awarded by the third gaming value assigning means. is executed. As a result, if the recognizable mode is executed, the player can recognize the second advantageous state that can occur due to the game ball flowing into the special area, but when the difficult-to-recognize mode is executed, It becomes difficult or impossible for the player to recognize it. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which gaming state the player is playing the game, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<G group: Double dash attacker with variable area>
Conventionally, in game machines such as pachinko machines, game media such as game balls are fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and a downward direction provided in the game area and capable of changing the direction in which the game balls flow down is used. A predetermined gaming value is given to each game ball based on the entry of the game ball into one of the plurality of ball entrances in which the changing means is arranged, and a lottery is conducted based on the winning of the game ball to a specific ball entrance. , it is configured such that when a player wins an advantageous state such as a win in a lottery, a game ball can be inserted into the ball entry means and a predetermined gaming value is given to the player (for example, according to a patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, with the gaming machine described above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of group G were made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

A firing means for firing a game ball (for example, ball firing unit 112a),
a first ball entrance means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
Information acquisition means (for example, first holding ball storage area 203d) that acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
determination means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A second ball entering means (for example, the first variable prize winning device 72) and a second ball entering means (for example, the first variable winning device 72) each having a downward direction changing means (for example, the first opening/closing plate 72a or the second opening/closing plate 74a) that can change the downward direction of the game ball. 3. Ball entry means (for example, second variable winning device 74);
A first game value imparting means (for example, a prize ball based on detection of a ball by a first starting port switch) for imparting a predetermined first game value to the player when a game ball enters the first ball entering means. 3 pieces)) and
When a game ball enters the second ball entering means, a second game value giving means that gives a second game value different from the first game value (for example, when a ball is detected by the first big prize opening switch 72c) Prize balls based on (10 pieces)) and
When a game ball enters the third ball entering means, a third game value giving means that gives a third game value different from the first game value (for example, when a ball is detected by the second big prize opening switch 74c) In a gaming machine equipped with prize balls (15 pieces) based on
The second ball entering means includes:
disposed upstream of the third ball entry means,
a first area (for example, variable probability area 75) through which game balls flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass;
a first area switching means (for example, variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a) for switching whether or not to enter an inflow-enabled state in which game balls can flow into the first area;
When a game ball flows into the first area, a fourth gaming value imparting means (for example, a variable probability Migration flag 203i),
By using the determination result of the determining means, switching between a state in which the game ball of the second ball entering means can enter or a state in which the game ball of the third ball entering means can enter, and the first area. A gaming machine G0 comprising: pattern selection means (for example, a jackpot type counter C2) for selecting a combination pattern of the first area with the inflow possible state.

According to the gaming machine G0, the game ball is fired by the firing means, and the game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entering means, and the game ball is configured to enter the first ball entering means. Predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means due to the ball being hit. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. Further, a second ball entering means and a third ball entering means are provided in which a falling direction changing means capable of changing the falling direction of the game ball is disposed. Further, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the first gaming value giving means gives a predetermined first gaming value to the player, and when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, , when the second game value giving means gives the player a second game value different from the first game value, and the game ball enters the third ball entering means, the third game value giving means gives the player a second game value different from the first game value. A third gaming value different from the first gaming value is given to the player. Here, the second ball entering means is disposed upstream of the third ball entering means, and a first area is provided through which the game ball flowing from the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means can pass. . In addition, the first area switching means switches whether or not the first area is in an inflow-enabled state in which game balls can flow into the first area. When game balls flow into the first area, a fourth game value that is different from the first game value, second game value, and third game value is awarded by the fourth game value granting means. Here, by using the determination result of the determining means, the pattern selecting means determines a state in which the game ball of the second ball entering means can enter, or a state in which the game ball of the third ball entering means can enter, A combination pattern with the inflow enabled state of the first area by the first area switching means is selected. As a result, game balls can flow into the first area from the second ball entering means disposed upstream and the third ball entering means disposed downstream from the second ball entering means. Since there is no need to provide a first area for each ball entry means, it is possible to reduce the number of parts related to the gaming machine, and to determine which ball entry means the ball enters into, and whether the ball enters from any of the ball entry means. This has the effect of creating gameplay in which the ball flows into the first area and determining whether or not the fourth game value is awarded, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine G0,
The second ball entering means includes:
A first movable means (for example, the first opening/closing plate 72a) for changing the downward direction of the game ball as the downward direction changing means;
A first driving means (for example, a first big prize opening solenoid 72b) that drives the first movable means so as to be displaceable to an open state or a closed state,
The first movable means is
When the second ball entry means is in the closed state in which it is difficult or impossible for game balls to enter, the game ball is configured to be able to roll on the upper surface thereof,
The third ball entry means is
When the first movable means is in the closed state, the game ball is placed at a position where the ball can enter the upper surface of the first movable means after rolling from the upstream side to the downstream side. Game machine G1.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first movable means as the downward direction changing means provided in the second ball entering means changes the downward direction of the game ball, and the first driving means also provided in the second ball entering means changes the first movable direction. The movable means is driven to be displaceable into an open state or a closed state. Here, when the first movable means is in a closed state in which the second ball entry means is in a state in which it is difficult or impossible for game balls to enter therein, the game ball is configured to be able to roll on the upper surface thereof. When the first movable means is in the closed state, the third ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball can enter after rolling from the upstream side to the downstream side on the upper surface of the first movable means. Ru. That is, when the second ball entry means is in a state (closed state) in which it is difficult or impossible for game balls to enter, the game ball does not completely roll on the upper surface of the first movable means from the upstream side to the downstream side. It is configured such that the ball does not flow into the third ball entry means. As a result, for example, the second ball entering means changes from a state in which a game ball can enter to a state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter, and then the third ball entering means changes from a state in which a game ball cannot enter into a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter. Alternatively, when the state changes from a state in which entry is not possible to a state in which a game ball can enter, in order for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means, the upper surface of the first movable means of the second ball entry means must be moved upstream. It takes time to roll from the side to the downstream side. Therefore, the time from when the second ball entry means is set to a state in which a game ball can enter until the game ball reaches the first area, and after the third ball entry means is set to a state where a game ball can enter. The effect is that it is possible to increase the time difference between the time it takes for the game ball to reach the first area, provide variations in the arrival pattern of the game ball to the first area, and improve the interest of the game. be.

In gaming machine G0 or G1,
a first guide means (for example, a passage 72d before first big winning opening detection and a passage 72e after first big winning opening detection) that guides the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means to the first area side;
a second guide means (for example, a second big winning opening pre-detection passage 74d and a second big winning opening post-detection passage 74e) that guides the game ball that has entered the third ball entering means to the first area side;
a merging section (for example, merging section 73) where the first guide means and the second guide means merge,
The first region is
A gaming machine G2 characterized in that it is arranged downstream of the merging section.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G0 or G1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means toward the first region, and the second guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the third ball entering means toward the first region. be done. Further, the first guide means and the second guide means are joined at the merging portion. The first region is arranged downstream of the merging section. Thereby, each game ball that has entered each of the ball entry means can be made to enter the first region located downstream of the merging portion of each guide means. As a result, there is no need to provide a first area for each ball entry means, so it is possible to reduce the number of parts related to the game machine while giving the fourth game value by the inflow of game balls into the first area. This has the effect of creating a gameplay experience and improving the interest of the game.

In gaming machine G2,
The first area switching means includes:
setting the first area in the inflow-enabled state in relation to the state in which the game ball of the second ball entry means can enter or the state in which the game ball of the third ball entry means can enter;
The first guiding means is
It is configured such that a predetermined first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is required from when the game ball enters the second ball entering means until it reaches the first area,
The second guiding means is
It is configured such that a predetermined second time (for example, 2.5 seconds) is required from when the game ball enters the third ball entering means until it reaches the first area,
The first time is
A gaming machine G3 characterized in that the time is shorter than the second time.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first region switching means changes the first region into a state in which the game ball of the second ball entering means can enter or in relation to a state in which the game ball of the third ball entering means can enter. be done. The first guiding means is configured to require a predetermined first time from when the game ball enters the second ball entering means until it reaches the first area, and the second guiding means is configured to take a predetermined first time from when the game ball enters the second ball entering means to reaching the first area. It is configured such that a predetermined second time is required from when the game ball enters the ball means until it reaches the first area. Then, the first time becomes shorter than the second time. As a result, the time from when the second ball entering means is set to a state in which a game ball can enter until the game ball reaches the first area, and the time from when the second ball entering means is set to a state in which a game ball can enter. The effect is that it is possible to increase the time difference between the game ball and the time it takes for the game ball to reach the first area, and it is possible to provide variations in the arrival pattern of the game ball to the first area, thereby improving the interest of the game. There is.

In any of gaming machines G0 to G3,
The third ball entry means is
A second movable means (for example, second opening/closing plate 74a) for changing the downward direction of the game ball as the downward direction changing means;
A second driving means (for example, a second big prize opening solenoid 74b) that drives the second movable means so as to be displaceable to an open state or a closed state,
The second movable means is
A game machine G4 characterized in that when the third ball entry means is in the closed state in which it is difficult or impossible for game balls to enter, a game ball can roll on the upper surface thereof.

According to gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines G0 to G3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second movable means as the downward direction changing means provided in the third ball entering means changes the downward direction of the game ball, and the second driving means also provided in the third ball entering means changes the second movable direction. The movable means is driven to be displaceable into an open state or a closed state. Here, when the second movable means is in the closed state in which the third ball entry means is in a state where it is difficult or difficult for game balls to enter, the game ball is configured to be able to roll on the upper surface thereof. As a result, when a game ball is rolling on the upper surface of the second movable means in the closed state, by opening the second movable means, the rolling game ball is transferred to the third ball entering means. can be allowed to flow in. Therefore, when the third ball entering means is in a state in which a game ball can enter, the game ball is made difficult to flow down the downstream side of the third ball entering means, and the game ball is not allowed to enter the third ball entering means. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by making it easier and giving the player a gaming value accurately.

In any of gaming machines G0 to G4,
By using the determination result by the determining means, the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means is changed from a state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter into a state in which a game ball can enter. Advantageous state means (e.g., jackpot processing (S103)) to bring about an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot state);
In the advantageous state of No. 1, game balls are allowed to enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a maximum of 30 seconds or 10 balls are won). multiple advantageous period execution means (e.g., a round counter) that executes an advantageous period (e.g., one round) multiple times;
A state setting means (for example, a state setting means for setting the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means to be in a state where a game ball can enter in each advantageous period by using the determination result of the determining means (for example, a big winning prize) A gaming machine G5 characterized in that it is equipped with an opening/closing table 202f).

According to gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines G0 to G4, the following effects are achieved. That is, by using the determination result by the determining means, the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means changes from a state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter, to a state in which the game ball can enter, by the advantageous state means. It is considered to be an advantageous state that changes to the state. In addition, the plural advantageous period executing means controls either the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means in one advantageous state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, during which a game ball can enter into an advantageous period. is executed multiple times. Further, the state setting means sets the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means to be in a state in which a game ball can enter every advantageous period by using the determination result of the determining means. As a result, in the first advantageous state, it is possible to change the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means in which the game ball can enter for each advantageous period, thereby enriching the variation of the game and improving the game. It has the effect of increasing interest.

In gaming machine G5,
The state setting means includes:
Alternating means (for example, winning the jackpot type "probability variation A") that alternately sets the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means into a state in which a game ball can enter each advantageous period. Game machine G6 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G5, the following effects are achieved. That is, by the alternating means provided in the state setting means, the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means are alternately brought into a state in which game balls can enter each advantageous period. As a result, in the advantageous state 1, a case where the game ball enters the second ball entering means and a case where the game ball enters the third ball entering means are provided, and the entry pattern of the game ball to each ball entering means is changed. This has the effect of enriching the variations of the game and increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine G6,
The alternating means is
When the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means, which is in a state in which a game ball can enter, is made into a state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter, a state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter. A predetermined period means (e.g., interval (no time).

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means, which is in a state in which a game ball can enter, becomes in a state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter, the means provided in the alternating means within a predetermined period As a result, the third ball entering means or the second ball entering means, which has been in a state where it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter, is brought into a state into which a game ball can enter within a predetermined period of time. This reduces the situation in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter both the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means, that is, the state in which a game ball cannot enter either of the ball entry means. can do. As a result, the number of times the game ball can enter the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means stipulated in the advantageous state 1 can be quickly set, so the time required for the advantageous state 1 is This has the effect of being able to shorten the amount of time required, and also providing gaming value to the player quickly.

In any of gaming machines G5 to G7,
The first area switching means includes:
In one of the advantageous states, a plurality of inflow possible state means (for example, 1st round, 3rd round, and 9th round of jackpot type "probability variation A") sets the first area to the inflow possible state in two or more of the advantageous periods. A game machine G8 characterized in that it is equipped with the following.

According to gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines G5 to G7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the plurality of inflow possible state means provided in the first region switching means allows the first region to be in the inflow possible state for two or more advantageous periods in one advantageous state. As a result, even if a game ball cannot flow into the first area during any one advantageous period in which the first area is in an inflow-enabled state, the first area will be returned to the first area in another advantageous period. By setting the area in a state where inflow is possible, it becomes possible to cause game balls to flow into the first area. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a firing abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), game balls may not be allowed to flow into the first area during the first advantageous period when the first area is in a state where the flow is possible. Even if a problem occurs, by making the first area available for inflow again during another advantageous period and providing the possibility of allowing game balls to flow into the first area, players can avoid unforeseen circumstances. This has the effect that it is possible to realize a comfortable game without incurring profits, and that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines G0 to G8,
By using the determination result by the determination means, a recognizable mode (for example, "probability fluctuation state") in which the player can recognize that the fourth game value is awarded by the fourth game value assignment means is determined. A recognizable mode execution means to be executed (for example, a dedicated background of the “probability fluctuation state” on the third symbol display device 81),
By using the determination result by the determination means, it is possible to detect a difficult-to-recognize mode in which it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the fourth game value is awarded by the fourth game value granting means (for example, "latent probability fluctuation"). A game characterized by comprising: a difficult-to-recognize mode execution means (for example, a common background between the "latency probability variation state" and the "time reduction state" in the third symbol display device 81) for executing the "state"). Machine G9.

According to gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines G0 to G8, the following effects are achieved. That is, by using the determination result of the determining means, the recognizable manner execution means executes the recognizable manner that allows the player to recognize that the fourth gaming value is awarded by the fourth gaming value granting means. . Further, the difficult-to-recognize mode execution means uses the determination result of the determining means to create a difficult-to-recognize mode in which it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the fourth game value is awarded by the fourth game value assigning means. executed. As a result, if the recognizable mode is executed, the player can recognize the second advantageous state that can occur due to the game ball flowing into the special area, but when the difficult-to-recognize mode is executed, It becomes difficult or impossible for the player to recognize it. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which gaming state the player is playing the game, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<Group H: The ball guide slope of the passage in the variable prize winning device of 2 is different with respect to the downward direction of the ball>
Conventionally, in game machines such as pachinko machines, game media such as game balls are fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and a downward direction provided in the game area and capable of changing the direction in which the game balls flow down is used. A predetermined gaming value is given to each game ball based on the entry of the game ball into one of the plurality of ball entrances in which the changing means is arranged, and a lottery is conducted based on the winning of the game ball to a specific ball entrance. , it is configured such that when a player wins an advantageous state such as a win in a lottery, a game ball is allowed to enter the ball entry means and a predetermined gaming value is given to the player (for example, according to a patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above game machine, since many game parts are arranged, it is necessary to improve the degree of freedom in designing each game part, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of group H have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can contribute to improving the degree of freedom in designing gaming components.

A firing means for firing a game ball (for example, ball firing unit 112a),
a first ball entrance means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
Information acquisition means (for example, first holding ball storage area 203d) that acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
determination means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A second ball entering means (for example, the first variable prize winning device 72) and a second ball entering means (for example, the first variable winning device 72) each having a downward direction changing means (for example, the first opening/closing plate 72a or the second opening/closing plate 74a) that can change the downward direction of the game ball. 3 ball entry means (for example, second variable winning device 74);
A first game value imparting means (for example, a prize ball based on detection of a ball by a first starting port switch) for imparting a predetermined first game value to the player when a game ball enters the first ball entering means. 3 pieces)) and
When a game ball enters the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means, a second gaming value giving means (for example, a first grand prize opening In a gaming machine equipped with prize balls (15 pieces) based on detection of balls by the switch 72c or the second big prize opening switch 74c,
a first area (for example, variable probability area 75) through which game balls flowing in from the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means can pass;
a third gaming value imparting means (for example, probability change transition flag 203i) that imparts a third gaming value different from the first gaming value and the second gaming value when a game ball flows into the first area; Prepare,
The second ball entering means includes:
A first guide means (for example, a passage 72d before detecting the first big winning hole and a passage 72e after detecting the first big winning hole) that guides the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means to the first area side. ,
The third ball entering means includes:
A second guide means (for example, a passage 74d before second big winning opening detection and a passage 74e after second big winning opening detection) that guides the game ball that has entered the third ball entering means to the first area side. ,
The first guiding means is
comprising a departure guide means (for example, the passage 72d before first big winning opening detection) that guides the game ball that has entered the second ball entry means in a direction away from the first area;
The second guide means:
It is characterized by having an approach guide means (for example, the passage 74d before detecting the second big prize opening) that guides the game ball that has entered the third ball entry means in a direction approaching the first area. Game machine H0.

According to the gaming machine H0, a game ball is ejected by the ejecting means, and the game ball ejected by the ejecting means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entering means, and the game ball enters the first ball entering means. Predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means due to the ball being hit. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. Further, a second ball entering means and a third ball entering means are provided, each of which is provided with a downward direction changing means capable of changing the downward direction of the game ball. When the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the first game value giving means gives a predetermined first gaming value to the player, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means. When the ball enters the ball, the second game value giving means gives a second game value different from the first game value. Here, a first area is provided through which game balls flowing from the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means can pass. Further, when a game ball flows into the first area, the third game value giving means gives a third game value different from the first game value and the second game value. Here, the first guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means toward the first region, and the second guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the third ball entering means toward the first region. You will be guided. Then, the game ball that has entered the second ball entry means is guided in a direction away from the first area by the separation guide means provided in the first guide means. Moreover, the game ball that has entered the third ball entry means is guided in a direction approaching the first area by the approach guide means provided in the second guide means. As a result, the difference between the time required for the game ball entering from the second ball entering means to flow down to the first area and the time required for the game ball entering from the third ball entering means to flow down to the first area is increased. can do. As a result, for example, when it is desired to increase the difference in time of the game balls flowing down the first guide means and the second guide means, the departure guide means directs the game balls that have entered from the second ball entry means away from the first area. At the same time, by guiding the game ball that has entered from the third ball entry means by the proximity guide means in a direction closer to the first area, it is possible to realize the above request. Therefore, the restrictions on the arrangement of the first area with respect to the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means can be relaxed, so there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the game component can be improved.

In gaming machine H0,
The first guiding means is
A post-separation approach guide means (for example, a first big prize opening detection passage 72e) that guides the game ball guided in a direction away from the first area by the separation guide means in a direction approaching the first area. A gaming machine H1 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine H1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game ball, which was guided in the direction away from the first area by the separation guide means, is guided in the direction closer to the first area by the separation and approach guide means provided in the first guide means. As a result, the game ball that entered from the second ball entry means can also enter the first area and be given the third game value, so any ball entry means (excluding the first ball entry means) Even if a game ball enters the first area, the game ball flows into the first area to determine whether or not a third game value is given, creating a game experience and improving the interest of the game. There is.

In gaming machine H0 or H1,
The first guiding means is
It is provided with an upward slope means (for example, an upward slope of the first big prize opening pre-detection passage 72d in the fifth embodiment) that slopes upward with respect to the inflow direction of the game ball into the second ball entering means. A game machine H2 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H0 or H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the upward slope means provided in the first guide means is formed so as to form an upward slope with respect to the inflow direction of the game ball into the second ball entering means. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means flows into the uphill slope means while maintaining the downward momentum from the predetermined inflow direction, and the inflowing momentum of the game ball is gradually increased by the uphill slope means. After that, the game ball flows down to the downstream side of the uphill slope means due to its own weight. Therefore, when the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means is flowing down the climbing slope means that is sloped upward with respect to the inflow direction, while climbing the climbing slope means, the game ball enters the second ball entering means. Because the game ball stays a little, the difference between the time it takes the game ball that entered from the second ball entry means to flow down to the first area and the time that the game ball that entered from the third ball entry means flows down to the first area is increased. can do. As a result, for example, when it is desired to increase the difference in time of the game balls flowing down the first guide means and the second guide means, the departure guide means directs the game balls that have entered from the second ball entry means away from the first area. The above-mentioned request can be realized by guiding the game balls that have entered from the third ball entry means in a direction closer to the first area by the proximity guide means. Therefore, restrictions on the arrangement of the first area with respect to the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means can be relaxed, so there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the game component can be improved.

In any of gaming machines H0 to H2,
The second guide means:
It is characterized by comprising a downward slope means (for example, the passage 74d before detecting the second big prize opening in the fifth embodiment) that slopes downward with respect to the direction of inflow of game balls into the third ball entering means. Game machine H3.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines H0 to H2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the downward slope means provided in the second guide means is formed so as to slope downward with respect to the inflow direction of the game ball into the third ball entry means. As a result, the game ball that has entered the third ball entering means flows into the downward slope means while maintaining the downward momentum from the predetermined inflow direction, and the momentum of the game ball that has entered is further amplified by the downward slope means. At the same time, the game ball flows down to the downstream side of the downward slope means due to its own weight. Therefore, when the game ball that has entered the third ball entry means is flowing down the downward slope means that is sloped downward with respect to the inflow direction, by going down the downward slope means, it is accelerated within the second guiding means. In order to do this, increase the difference between the time required for a game ball entering from the second ball entering means to flow down to the first area and the time required for a game ball entering from the third ball entering means to flow down to the first area. I can do it. As a result, for example, when it is desired to increase the difference in time of the game balls flowing down the first guide means and the second guide means, the departure guide means directs the game balls that have entered from the second ball entry means away from the first area. At the same time, by guiding the game ball that has entered from the third ball entry means by the proximity guide means in a direction closer to the first area, it is possible to realize the above request. Therefore, the restrictions on the arrangement of the first area with respect to the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means can be relaxed, so there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the game component can be improved.

In any of gaming machines H0 to H3,
a game board (for example, game board 13) on which the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means are arranged;
A game in which a game ball is guided to a predetermined position where the game ball can enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means which are arranged on the game board and are in a state where the game ball can enter. A gaming machine H4 comprising: ball guiding means (for example, a left nail group 77 and a right nail group 78).

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines H0 to H3, the following effects are achieved. That is, a second ball entering means and a third ball entering means are arranged on the game board. In addition, the game ball is placed in a position where the game ball can enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, which are in a state where the game ball can enter, by the game ball guide means provided on the game board. You will be guided. As a result, by guiding the game ball to a predetermined position on the game board by the game ball guide means, the game ball can enter the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means into which the game ball can enter. can. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entry means using the same game ball launching method, so even if multiple ball entry means are provided, the game method in an advantageous state can be simplified. This has the effect of providing an easy-to-understand game to the player and increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines H0 to H4,
a merging portion (for example, merging portion 73) where the first guide means and the second guide means merge;
The first region is
A gaming machine H5 characterized in that it is arranged downstream of the merging section.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines H0 to H4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first guide means and the second guide means are merged at the merge portion. The first region is arranged downstream of the merging section. Thereby, each game ball that has entered each ball entry means can be made to enter the first area located downstream of the confluence of each guide means. As a result, there is no need to provide a first area for each ball entry means, so the number of parts related to the gaming machine can be reduced, and the third gaming value can be given by the inflow of game balls into the first area. This has the effect of creating a unique gameplay experience and increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines H0 to H5,
Advantageous state means (e.g., jackpot processing) that uses the determination result by the determination means to bring the game ball into an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot state) that allows the game ball to enter the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means. (S103)) and
In the advantageous state of No. 1, game balls are allowed to enter either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a maximum of 30 seconds or 10 balls are won). multiple advantageous period execution means (e.g., a round counter) that executes an advantageous period (e.g., one round) multiple times;
A state setting means (for example, a state setting means for setting the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means to be in a state where a game ball can enter in each advantageous period by using the determination result of the determining means (for example, a big winning prize) A gaming machine H6 characterized in that it is equipped with an opening/closing table 202f).

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines H0 to H5, the following effects are achieved. That is, by using the determination result by the determining means, the advantageous state means brings the game ball into an advantageous state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means. In addition, the plural advantageous period executing means controls either the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means in one advantageous state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, during which a game ball can enter into an advantageous period. is executed multiple times. Further, the state setting means sets the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means to be in a state in which a game ball can enter every advantageous period by using the determination result of the determining means. As a result, in the first advantageous state, it is possible to change the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means in which the game ball can enter for each advantageous period, enriching the variation of the game and improving the game. It has the effect of increasing interest.

In gaming machine H6,
The state setting means includes:
Alternating state means (for example, winning the jackpot type "probability variation A") that alternately sets the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means to a state in which a game ball can enter each advantageous period. The gaming machine H7 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H6, the following effects are achieved. That is, by the alternating state means provided in the state setting means, the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means are alternately brought into a state in which game balls can enter each advantageous period. As a result, in the advantageous state 1, a case where the game ball enters the second ball entering means and a case where the game ball enters the third ball entering means are provided, and the entry pattern of the game ball to each ball entering means is changed. This has the effect of enriching the variations of the game and increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine H6 or H7,
In one of the advantageous states, a plurality of inflow possible state means (for example, 1st round, 3rd round, and 9th round of jackpot type "probability variation A") sets the first area to the inflow possible state in two or more of the advantageous periods. A gaming machine H8 comprising:

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H6 or H7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the plurality of inflow possible state means allows the first region to be in the inflow possible state for two or more advantageous periods in one advantageous state. As a result, even if a game ball is not allowed to flow into the first area during any one advantageous period in which the first area is in an inflow-enabled state, the game balls may not be allowed to flow into the first area again during another advantageous period. By setting the area in a state where inflow is possible, it becomes possible to cause game balls to flow into the first area. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a firing abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), game balls may not be allowed to flow into the first area during the first advantageous period when the first area is in a state where it is possible to flow into the first area. Even if a problem occurs, by making the first area available again during another advantageous period and providing the possibility of allowing game balls to flow into the first area, players can avoid unforeseen circumstances. This has the effect that it is possible to realize a comfortable game without incurring any profit, and that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines H0 to H8,
By using the determination result by the determining means, a recognizable mode (for example, "probability fluctuation state") is executed in which the player can recognize that the third gaming value is awarded by the third gaming value assigning means. A recognizable mode execution means (for example, a dedicated background of “probability fluctuation state” on the third symbol display device 81),
By using the determination result by the determination means, it is possible to detect a difficult-to-recognize state in which it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the third game value is awarded by the third game value granting means (for example, "latent probability fluctuation state"). '') (for example, a common background between the "latency probability variation state" and the "time reduction state" in the third symbol display device 81). H9.

According to gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines H0 to H8, the following effects are achieved. That is, by using the determination result of the determining means, the recognizable manner execution means executes the recognizable manner that allows the player to recognize that the third gaming value is awarded by the third gaming value granting means. . Further, the difficult-to-recognize mode execution means uses the determination result of the determining means to create a difficult-to-recognize mode in which it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the third gaming value is awarded by the third gaming value assigning means. executed. As a result, if the recognizable mode is executed, the player can recognize the second advantageous state that may occur due to the game ball flowing into the special area, but if the difficult-to-recognize mode is executed, It becomes difficult or impossible for the player to recognize it. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which gaming state the player is playing the game, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<Group I: Information output according to detection mode of upstream switch and downstream switch>
Conventionally, in game machines such as pachinko machines, game media such as game balls are fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and a downward direction provided in the game area and capable of changing the direction in which the game balls flow down is used. A predetermined gaming value is given to each game ball based on the entry of the game ball into one of the plurality of ball entrances in which the changing means is arranged, and a lottery is conducted based on the winning of the game ball to a specific ball entrance. , it is configured such that when a player wins an advantageous state such as a win in a lottery, a game ball is allowed to enter the ball entry means and a predetermined gaming value is given to the player (for example, according to a patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the gaming machine described above, it is necessary to grasp the status regarding the game at an early stage, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group I have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can quickly grasp information regarding games.

A firing means for firing a game ball (for example, ball firing unit 112a),
a first ball entrance means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
Information acquisition means (for example, first holding ball storage area 203d) that acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
determination means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A second ball entering means (for example, the first variable winning device 72) in which a downward direction changing means (for example, the first opening/closing plate 72a or the second opening/closing plate 74a) that can change the downward direction of the game ball is disposed;
A first game value imparting means (for example, a prize ball based on detection of a ball by a first starting port switch) that imparts a predetermined first game value to the player when a game ball enters the first ball entering means. 3 pieces)) and
When a game ball enters the second ball entering means, a second game value giving means that gives a second game value different from the first game value (for example, when a ball is detected by the first big prize opening switch 72c) In a gaming machine equipped with prize balls (15 pieces) based on
a first area (for example, probability variable area 75) through which the game ball flowing in from the second ball entry means can pass;
a first detection means (for example, a first big prize opening switch 72c) capable of detecting that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means;
a second detection means capable of detecting that the game ball has passed through the first region (for example, the probability variable region switch 75c or the discharge switch 76a);
A gaming machine I0 characterized in that it is equipped with a game information output means (for example, winning abnormality notification) that can output information regarding the game based on the detection mode of the first detection means and the second detection means. .

According to the game machine I0, the game ball is fired by the firing means, and the game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entering means, and the game ball is configured to enter the first ball entering means. Predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means due to the ball being hit. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. Further, a second ball entering means is provided in which a falling direction changing means capable of changing the falling direction of the game ball is arranged. When the game ball enters the first ball entering means, a predetermined first gaming value is given to the player by the first game value giving means, and when the game ball enters the second ball entering means. , a second gaming value different from the first gaming value is awarded by the second gaming value awarding means. Here, a first area is provided through which game balls flowing in from the second ball entry means can pass. Further, the first detection means is configured to be able to detect that a game ball has flowed into the second ball entry means, and the second detection means is configured to be able to detect that a game ball has passed through the first area. . Then, the game information output means is configured to be able to output information regarding the game based on the detection modes of the first detection means and the second detection means. As a result, information regarding the game is output based on the fact that the game ball has flowed into the second ball entering means and that the game ball has passed through the first area, and the information regarding the game is output to the second ball entering means and the first area. There is an effect that information regarding the game can be grasped at an early stage by notifying the inflow mode of game balls.

In the gaming machine I0,
The game information output means includes:
A time measuring means for measuring the time from the timing when the game ball was detected by the first detection means (for example, 10 seconds from the detection of the ball by the first big prize opening switch 72c);
Abnormality notification execution means (for example, prize winning abnormality notification) that executes a predetermined abnormality notification when a game ball is detected by the second detection means beyond a predetermined first time measured by the time measurement means; A gaming machine I1 characterized in that it is equipped with the following.

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the time measuring means provided in the game information outputting means measures the time from the timing when the game ball is detected by the first detecting means, and if the time exceeds the predetermined first time measured by the time measuring means. 2. When a game ball is detected by the detection means, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed by the abnormality notification execution means. If the game ball is originally (normally) detected by the second detecting means within a first time after the first detecting means detects the game ball, the second detecting means detects the game ball within a first time. If more than two balls are detected by the detection means, there is a high probability that a winning abnormality due to fraudulent activity or ball jamming has occurred. As a result, if a game ball is detected by the second detection means after a first time has elapsed since the game ball was detected by the first detection means, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed, thereby preventing the occurrence of fraudulent activity or winning abnormality. This has the effect of being able to recognize the game at an early stage and grasp information regarding the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine I1,
The game information output means includes:
Normal notification execution means (for example, V winning notification performance) that executes a predetermined normal notification when a game ball is detected by the second detection means within the first time measured by the time measurement means. A gaming machine I2 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a game ball is detected by the second detection means within the first time measured by the time measurement means, a predetermined normal notification is executed by the normal notification execution means provided in the game information output means. . As a result, if a game ball is detected by the second detection means within a first time after being detected by the first detection means, a predetermined normal notification is executed to ensure that no fraudulent activity or winning abnormality has occurred. This has the effect that information regarding the game can be grasped at an early stage.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2,
The abnormality notification execution means includes:
A game machine I3 characterized in that the abnormality notification is executed when a game ball is not detected by the second detection means within the first time measured by the time measurement means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the game ball is not detected by the second detection means within the first time measured by the time measurement means, the abnormality notification execution means executes the abnormality notification. As a result, if a game ball is not detected by the second detection means within a first time after the game ball is detected by the first detection means, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed, thereby preventing the occurrence of fraudulent activity or prize winning abnormality at an early stage. This has the effect that information regarding the game can be grasped at an early stage.

In any of gaming machines I1 to I3,
The abnormality notification execution means includes:
A game machine I4 characterized in that the abnormality notification is executed when a game ball is not detected by the first detection means but a game ball is detected by the second detection means.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a game ball is not detected by the first detection means but a game ball is detected by the second detection means, the abnormality notification execution means executes the abnormality notification. When a game ball is detected by the second detection means, if it is normal (normal), the game ball is detected by the second detection means within a first time after the game ball is detected by the first detection means. If the game ball is not detected by the first detection means but is detected by the second detection means, there is a possibility that a winning abnormality has occurred due to fraudulent activity or ball jamming, etc. is high. As a result, if a game ball is not detected by the first detection means but a game ball is detected by the second detection means, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed, thereby recognizing the occurrence of fraudulent activity or winning abnormality at an early stage. However, there is an effect that information regarding the game can be grasped at an early stage.

In any of the gaming machines I0 to I4,
a third gaming value imparting means (for example, probability change transition flag 203i) capable of imparting a third gaming value different from the first gaming value and the second gaming value when the game ball passes through the first area; A gaming machine I5 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines I0 to I4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the game ball passes through the first area, the third game value giving means can give a third game value different from the first game value and the second game value. As a result, a second game value is given based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means, and a third game value is also given in addition to the second game value when the game ball passes through the first area. can be granted. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that determines whether or not the game ball that has entered the second ball entry means is allowed to flow into the first area, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines I0 to I5,
A third ball entry means (e.g., second variable winning device 74) in which a flow direction changing means (e.g., second opening/closing plate 74a) capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball is disposed;
When a game ball enters the third ball entering means, a fourth game value giving means that gives at least a fourth game value different from the first game value (for example, ball detection by the second big prize opening switch 74c) Prize balls (15 pieces) based on
A third detection means (for example, a second grand prize opening switch 74c) capable of detecting that a game ball has entered the third ball entry means,
The game information output means includes:
Based on the detection mode of the first detection means or the third detection means and the second detection means, it is configured to be able to output information regarding the game,
The first region is
A gaming machine I6 characterized in that it is configured to allow a game ball flowing in from the third ball entry means to pass through.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines I0 to I5, the following effects are achieved. That is, a third ball entering means is provided in which a downward direction changing means capable of changing the downward direction of the game ball is arranged. Further, when the game ball enters the third ball entering means, the third game value giving means gives at least a third game value different from the first game value. Furthermore, the third detection means is configured to be able to detect that a game ball has flowed into the third ball entry means. The game reward output means is configured to be able to output information regarding the game based on the detection mode of the first detection means, the third detection means, and the second detection means. Here, the first area is configured to allow the game balls flowing in from the third ball entry means to pass through. That is, the first area is configured so that the game balls flowing into the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means can pass therethrough. As a result, since it is configured so that game balls can flow into the first area from at least two ball entry means, and there is no need to provide a first area for each ball entry means, the number of parts related to the game machine can be reduced. , output information regarding the game based on the fact that the game ball has flowed into the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means and that the game ball has passed through the first area, and There is an effect that information regarding the game can be grasped at an early stage by notifying the third ball entering means and the manner in which the game ball enters the first area.

In gaming machine I6,
The second ball entering means includes:
The flow direction changing means includes a first variable means (for example, the first opening/closing plate 72a) that can be changed between a state where it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a state where the game ball can enter,
The third ball entry means is
The flow direction changing means includes a second variable means (for example, the second opening/closing plate 74a) that can be changed between a state where it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a state where the game ball can enter,
By using the determination result by the determination means, the first variable means or the second variable means is changed from a state where it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter into an advantageous state to a state where a game ball can enter. (For example, a jackpot state) means for an advantageous state (for example, jackpot processing (S103));
a first area switching means (for example, variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a) for switching whether or not to enter an inflow-enabled state in which game balls can flow into the first area;
Timing setting means (for example, variable probability region opening/closing table 202g) for setting the timing at which the first region becomes inflow-enabled state by the first region switching means by using the determination result of the determination means. A gaming machine I7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second ball entering means is provided with a first variable means as a downward direction changing means that can change between a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter or a state in which the game ball can enter, and a state in which the game ball can enter. The ball entering means is provided with a second variable means as a downward direction changing means that can change between a state where it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a state where the game ball can enter. By using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state means changes the first variable means or the second variable means from a state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter into a state in which the game ball can enter. considered to be in an advantageous state. Here, the first area switching means switches whether or not the first area is in an inflow-enabled state in which game balls can flow into the first area. Then, by using the determination result of the determination means, the timing setting means sets the timing at which the first region becomes inflow-enabled by the first region switching means. As a result, since it is configured such that the game balls can flow into the first area from each of the two ball entry means and there is no need to provide a first area for each ball entry means, the number of parts related to the gaming machine can be reduced. There is an effect that it is possible to create a game feature that determines whether a game ball flows into the first area during an advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine I7,
The advantageous state means are:
In the advantageous state of No. 1, either the first variable means or the second variable means is kept in a state in which game balls can enter until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a maximum of 30 seconds or 10 balls are won). multiple advantageous period execution means (for example, a round counter) that executes a plurality of advantageous periods (for example, one round);
By using the determination result of the determination means, the state setting means (for example, the opening/closing of the grand prize opening A gaming machine I8 characterized by comprising: a table 202f);

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the plural advantageous period executing means provided in the advantageous state means allows the game ball to enter either the first variable means or the second variable means in one advantageous state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The advantageous period that results in the state is executed multiple times. Further, by using the determination result of the determining means, the first variable means or the second variable means is set to a state in which the game ball can enter every advantageous period by the state setting means provided in the advantageous state means. Ru. As a result, in one advantageous state, the first variable means or the second variable means that allows the game ball to enter can be changed for each advantageous period, thereby enriching the variations of the game and increasing the interest of the game. The effect is that it can be improved.

In gaming machine I8,
The state setting means includes:
Alternating state means (for example, winning the jackpot type "probability variation A") that alternately sets the first variable means and the second variable means to a state in which a game ball can enter every advantageous period. A gaming machine I9 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I8, the following effects are achieved. That is, by the alternating state means provided in the state setting means, the first variable means and the second variable means are alternately brought into a state in which the game ball can enter every advantageous period. As a result, in the first advantageous state, a case where the game ball enters the second ball entering means by the first variable means and a case where the game ball enters the third ball entering means by the second variable means are provided, and each By varying the entry patterns of the game balls into the ball entry means, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

<Group J: Variable entry means to win a prize changes depending on the firing mode>
Conventionally, in game machines such as pachinko machines, game media such as game balls are fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and a downward direction provided in the game area and capable of changing the direction in which the game balls flow down is used. A predetermined gaming value is given to each game ball based on the entry of the game ball into one of the plurality of ball entrances in which the changing means is arranged, and a lottery is conducted based on the winning of the game ball to a specific ball entrance. , it is configured such that when a player wins an advantageous state such as a win in a lottery, a game ball is allowed to enter the ball entry means and a predetermined gaming value is given to the player (for example, according to a patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, although it is necessary to reduce manufacturing costs in the gaming machine described above, there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of group J were made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce manufacturing costs.

A firing means for firing a game ball (for example, ball firing unit 112a),
a first ball entrance means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
Information acquisition means (for example, first holding ball storage area 203d) that acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
determination means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A second ball entering means (for example, the first variable prize winning device 72) and a second ball entering means (for example, the first variable winning device 72) each having a downward direction changing means (for example, the first opening/closing plate 72a or the second opening/closing plate 74a) that can change the downward direction of the game ball. 3 ball entry means (for example, second variable winning device 74);
A first game value imparting means (for example, a prize ball based on detection of a ball by a first starting port switch) for imparting a predetermined first game value to the player when a game ball enters the first ball entering means. 3 pieces)) and
When a game ball enters the second ball entry means, a second game value giving means that gives at least a second game value different from the first game value (for example, ball detection by the first big prize opening switch 72c) Prize balls (15 pieces) based on
When a game ball enters the third ball entry means, a third game value giving means that gives at least a third game value different from the first game value (for example, when a ball is detected by the second big prize opening switch 74c) In a gaming machine equipped with prize balls (15 pieces) based on
The second ball entering means includes:
A game ball fired by the firing means in a predetermined first firing mode (for example, left-handed game) is placed in a position where the ball can enter, while a second firing mode different from the first firing mode (for example, right-handed game) A game ball fired during a hitting game) is placed in a position where it is difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the ball,
The third ball entering means includes:
The game ball fired in the second firing mode by the firing means is placed in a position where the ball can enter, while the game ball fired in the first firing mode is placed in a position where it is difficult or impossible for the ball to enter. placed,
A gaming machine J0 comprising: a first area (for example, a variable probability area 75) through which a game ball flowing in from the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means can pass.

According to the game machine J0, the game ball is fired by the firing means, and the game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entering means, and the game ball is configured to enter the first ball entering means. Predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means due to the ball being hit. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. Further, a second ball entering means and a third ball entering means are provided, each of which is provided with a downward direction changing means capable of changing the downward direction of the game ball. When the game ball enters the first ball entering means, a predetermined first gaming value is given to the player by the first game value giving means, and when the game ball enters the second ball entering means. , the second game value giving means gives at least a second game value different from the first game value, and when the game ball enters the third ball entering means, the third game value giving means gives at least the first game value. A third game value different from the value is given. Here, the second ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball fired in a predetermined first firing manner by the firing means can enter, while the second ball entrance means is placed in a position where the game ball can enter the game ball in a second firing manner different from the first firing manner. The game ball is placed in a position where it is difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the ball. Further, the third ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball fired in the second firing mode by the firing means can enter the ball, while the third ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball fired in the first firing mode is difficult to enter. The player is placed in a position where he cannot enter the ball. A first area is provided through which game balls flowing from the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means can pass. As a result, the game ball is configured to be able to flow into the first area from the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means into which game balls fired in different shooting modes flow, and the first ball entering means is configured to be able to flow into the first area. Since there is no need to provide a separate area, the number of parts related to the gaming machine can be reduced and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In gaming machine J0,
When a game ball passes through the first area, a fourth gaming value imparting means (for example, a fixed variable transition A gaming machine J1 characterized by comprising a flag 203i).

According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J0, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the game ball passes through the first area, the fourth game value giving means can give a fourth game value that is different from the first game value, the second game value, and the third game value. As a result, since it is configured such that game balls can flow into the first area from at least two ball entry means, and there is no need to provide a first area for each ball entry means, the number of parts related to the game machine can be reduced. , a second game value or a third game value is given based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, and a second game value is given when the game ball passes through the first area. Alternatively, in addition to the third gaming value, a fourth gaming value can also be provided. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that determines whether or not the game ball that has entered the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means is allowed to flow into the first area, and to improve the interest of the game. .

In gaming machine J0 or J1,
The second gaming value is
A gaming machine J2 characterized by being different from the third gaming value.

According to gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine J0 or J1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second game value is configured to be different from the third game value. As a result, the gaming value obtained for each firing mode is changed, for example, the gaming value obtained for the second firing mode is greater than the gaming value obtained for the first firing mode, thereby enriching the variations of the game. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines J0 to J2,
The first ball entering means includes:
A gaming machine J3 characterized in that it is arranged at a position where a ball can enter in the first firing mode.

According to gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines J0 to J2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the ball can enter in the first firing mode. As a result, the game ball enters the first ball entering means in the first firing mode and is judged by the judging means, and based on the judgment result, the second ball entering means becomes ready to enter the game ball. In this case, the game can be played while maintaining the first firing mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entry means using the same game ball launching method, so even if multiple ball entry means are provided, the game method can be simplified. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

In any of gaming machines J0 to J3,
The second ball entering means includes:
The flow direction changing means includes a first variable means (for example, the first opening/closing plate 72a) that can be changed between a state where it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a state where the game ball can enter,
The third ball entering means includes:
As the flow direction changing means, a second variable means (for example, the second opening/closing plate 74a) that can be changed between a state where it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a state where the game ball can enter is provided,
An advantageous state in which the first variable means or the second variable means is changed from a state where it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter into a state where a game ball can enter by using the determination result by the determination means. (For example, a jackpot state) means for an advantageous state (for example, jackpot processing (S103));
a first area switching means (for example, variable probability area opening/closing plate 75a) for switching whether or not to enter an inflow-enabled state in which game balls can flow into the first area;
Timing setting means (for example, variable probability region opening/closing table 202g) for setting the timing at which the first region becomes inflow-enabled state by the first region switching means by using the determination result of the determination means. Game machine J4 is characterized by:

According to gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines J0 to J3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second ball entering means is provided with a first variable means as a downward direction changing means that can change between a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter or a state in which the game ball can enter, and a state in which the game ball can enter. The ball entering means is provided with a second variable means as a downward direction changing means that can change between a state where it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a state where the game ball can enter. By using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state means changes the first variable means or the second variable means from a state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter into a state in which the game ball can enter. considered to be in an advantageous state. Here, the first area switching means switches whether or not the first area is in an inflow-enabled state in which game balls can flow into the first area. Then, by using the determination result of the determination means, the timing setting means sets the timing at which the first region becomes inflow-enabled by the first region switching means. As a result, since it is configured such that the game balls can flow into the first area from each of the two ball entry means and there is no need to provide a first area for each ball entry means, the number of parts related to the gaming machine can be reduced. There is an effect that it is possible to create a game feature that determines whether a game ball flows into the first area during an advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine J4,
The advantageous state means are:
In the advantageous state of No. 1, either the first variable means or the second variable means is kept in a state in which game balls can enter until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a maximum of 30 seconds or 10 balls are won). multiple advantageous period execution means (for example, a round counter) that executes a plurality of advantageous periods (for example, one round);
By using the determination result of the determination means, the state setting means (for example, the opening/closing of the grand prize opening A gaming machine J5 characterized by comprising: a table 202f).

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the plural advantageous period executing means provided in the advantageous state means allows the game ball to enter either the first variable means or the second variable means in one advantageous state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The advantageous period in which the condition occurs is executed multiple times. Further, by using the determination result of the determining means, the first variable means or the second variable means is set such that the game ball can enter the state for each advantageous period by the state setting means provided in the advantageous state means. Ru. As a result, in one advantageous state, the first variable means or the second variable means that allows the game ball to enter can be changed for each advantageous period, thereby enriching the variations of the game and increasing the interest of the game. The effect is that it can be improved.

In the gaming machine J5,
The state setting means includes:
Alternating state means (for example, winning the jackpot type "probability variation A") that alternately sets the first variable means and the second variable means to a state in which a game ball can enter every advantageous period. The gaming machine J6 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J5, the following effects are achieved. That is, by the alternating state means provided in the state setting means, the first variable means and the second variable means are alternately brought into a state in which the game ball can enter every advantageous period. As a result, in the first advantageous state, a case where the game ball enters the second ball entering means by the first variable means and a case where the game ball enters the third ball entering means by the second variable means are provided, and each By varying the entry patterns of the game balls into the ball entry means, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

In gaming machine J6,
The alternating state means is
When the first variable means or the second variable means, which is in a state in which a game ball can enter, is made into a state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter, A predetermined period state means (e.g., no interval time) for setting the second variable means or the first variable means in a state in which a game ball can enter within a predetermined period (e.g., 0.001 seconds to 1 second). ), a gaming machine J7.

According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first variable means or the second variable means is in a state in which a game ball can enter, it becomes a state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter, the predetermined period state means provided in the alternating state means As a result, the second variable means or the first variable means, which has been in a state where it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter, is brought into a state into which a game ball can enter within a predetermined period of time. As a result, both the first variable means and the second variable means are in a state where it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter, that is, the game ball cannot enter either the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means. condition can be reduced. As a result, the number of times the game ball can enter the first variable means and the second variable means specified in the first advantageous state can be quickly performed, reducing the time required for the first advantageous state. This also has the effect of quickly imparting gaming value to the player.

In any of gaming machines J0 to J7,
A first guide means (for example, a passage 72d before first big winning opening detection and a passage 72e after first big winning opening detection) that guides the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means to the first area side;
a second guide means (for example, a second big winning opening pre-detection passage 74d and a second big winning opening post-detection passage 74e) that guides the game ball that has entered the third ball entering means to the first area side;
a merging section (for example, merging section 73) where the first guide means and the second guide means merge,
The first region is
A gaming machine J8 characterized in that it is arranged on the downstream side of the merging section.

According to gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines J0 to J7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the second ball entering means toward the first region, and the second guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the third ball entering means toward the first region. be done. Further, the first guide means and the second guide means are joined at the merging portion. The first region is arranged downstream of the merging section. Thereby, each game ball that has entered each of the ball entry means can be made to enter the first region located downstream of the merging portion of each guide means. As a result, it is no longer necessary to provide a first area for each ball entry means, so while reducing the number of parts related to the game machine, it is possible to create playability that determines whether or not a game ball flows into the first area, and to improve the game. It has the effect of increasing interest.

In any of gaming machines J4 to J8,
The first area switching means includes:
In one of the advantageous states, a plurality of inflow possible state means (for example, 1st round, 3rd round, and 9th round of jackpot type "probability variation A") sets the first area to the inflow possible state in two or more of the advantageous periods. A game machine J9 characterized in that it is equipped with the following.

According to gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines J4 to J8, the following effects are achieved. That is, the plurality of inflow possible state means provided in the first region switching means allows the first region to be in the inflow possible state for two or more advantageous periods in one advantageous state. As a result, even if a game ball cannot flow into the first area during any one advantageous period in which the first area is in an inflow-enabled state, the first area will be returned to the first area in another advantageous period. By setting the area in a state where inflow is possible, it becomes possible to cause game balls to flow into the first area. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a firing abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), game balls may not be allowed to flow into the first area during the first advantageous period when the first area is in a state where the flow is possible. Even if a problem occurs, by making the first area available for inflow again during another advantageous period and providing the possibility of allowing game balls to flow into the first area, players can avoid unforeseen circumstances. This has the effect that it is possible to realize a comfortable game without incurring profits, and that the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines A0 to A10, the gaming machines B0 to B10, C0 to C9, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F11, G0 to G9, H0 to H9, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I9 and J0 to J9 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines B0 to B10, the gaming machines A0 to A10, C0 to C9, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F11, G0 to G9, H0 to H9, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I9 and J0 to J9 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines C0 to C9, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B10, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F11, G0 to G9, H0 to H9, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I9 and J0 to J9 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines D0 to D8, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B10, C0 to C9, E0 to E10, F0 to F11, G0 to G9, H0 to H9, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I9 and J0 to J9 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines E0 to E10, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B10, C0 to C9, D0 to D8, F0 to F11, G0 to G9, H0 to H9, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I9 and J0 to J9 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines F0 to F11, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B10, C0 to C9, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, G0 to G9, H0 to H9, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I9 and J0 to J9 may be applied.

Additionally, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines G0 to G9, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B10, C0 to C9, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F11, H0 to H9, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I9 and J0 to J9 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines H0 to H9, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B10, C0 to C9, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F11, G0 to G9, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I9 and J0 to J9 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines I0 to I9, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B10, C0 to C9, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F11, G0 to G9, H0 to A configuration limited to any one of H9, J0 to J9 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines J0 to J9, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B10, C0 to C9, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F11, G0 to G9, H0 to A configuration limited to any one of H9, I0 to I9 may be applied.

In these cases, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B10, C0 to C9, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F11, G0 to G9, H0 to H9, I0 to I9, J0 to J9, the gaming machine is A gaming machine I1 characterized by being a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B10, C0 to C9, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F11, G0 to G9, H0 to H9, I0 to I9, J0 to J9, the gaming machine is A gaming machine I2 characterized in that it is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (big prize opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win balls, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes is awarded. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B10, C0 to C9, D0 to D8, E0 to E10, F0 to F11, G0 to G9, H0 to H9, I0 to I9, J0 to J9, the gaming machine is A gaming machine I3 is characterized in that it is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board (part of the game board)
22 Frame button (part of the operation means)
64a First starting port (part of the first ball entry means, part of the first game value imparting means)
66a Out switch (part of second detection means)
72 First variable winning device (part of second ball entering means)
72a First opening/closing plate (part of the flow direction changing means, part of the first variable means, part of the first movable means)
72b 1st big prize opening solenoid (part of the 1st driving means)
72c First big prize opening switch (part of the second gaming value giving means, part of the predetermined value giving means, part of the gaming value giving means, part of the first detection means, part of the first playing value giving means) Department)
72d Passage in front of the first big prize opening detection (part of the first guide means, part of the departure guide means, part of the climbing slope means)
72e Passage after detecting the first big prize opening (part of the first guide means, part of the passage, part of the approach guide means after leaving)
72f Deceleration rib (part of deceleration means, part of protrusion means, part of back protrusion means, part of front protrusion means)
73 Confluence (part of confluence)
74 Second variable winning device (part of the third ball entering means)
74a Second opening/closing plate (part of the flow direction changing means, part of the second variable means, part of the second movable means)
74b 2nd big prize opening solenoid (part of the 2nd driving means)
74c Second big prize opening switch (part of the second gaming value giving means, part of the specific value giving means, part of the gaming value giving means, part of the second detection means, part of the first gaming value giving means) part, part of the third game value giving means, part of the fourth game value giving means, part of the third detection means)
74d Passage in front of the second big prize opening detection (part of the second guide means, part of the approach guide means, part of the downward slope means)
74e Passage after detecting the second big prize opening (part of the second guide means)
75 Definite variable area (part of the first area)
75a Variable variable area opening/closing plate (part of the first area switching means)
75c Variable variable area switch (part of second detection means)
76 Discharge passage (part of discharge means)
76a Ejection switch (part of second detection means)
77 Left side nail group (part of game ball guiding means)
78 Right side nail group (part of game ball guiding means)
81 Third symbol display device (part of game information output means, part of recognizable mode execution means, part of recognition difficult mode execution means, part of display means)
110 Main control device (part of determination means)
112a Ball launch unit (part of launch means)
113 Audio lamp control device (part of special performance execution means)
202a Jackpot random number table (part of determination means)
202f Big prize opening opening/closing table (part of state setting means)
202g Variable variable area opening/closing table (part of timing setting means)
203d First reserved ball storage area (part of information acquisition means)
203h Probable variable area valid flag (part of valid switching means)
203i Probability change transition flag (part of the third gaming value giving means, part of the second advantageous state generating means, part of the second gaming value giving means, part of the fourth gaming value giving means)
C2 Jackpot type counter (part of pattern selection means, part of valid timing determination means)
S103 Jackpot processing (part of advantageous state means)

Claims (1)

a firing means for firing a game ball;
a first ball entry means into which the game ball launched by the launch means can enter;
information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information due to the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a second ball entering means and a third ball entering means each provided with a downward direction changing means capable of changing the downward direction of the game ball;
a first gaming value imparting means for imparting a predetermined first gaming value to a player when a game ball enters the first ball entering means;
a second gaming value imparting means that imparts a second gaming value different from the first gaming value when a game ball enters the second ball entering means;
A gaming machine comprising a third gaming value imparting means that imparts a third gaming value different from the first gaming value when a game ball enters the third ball entering means,
The second ball entering means includes:
disposed upstream of the third ball entry means,
a first area through which game balls flowing in from the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means can pass;
a first area switching means for switching whether or not to enter an inflow-enabled state in which game balls can flow into the first area;
a fourth gaming value imparting means for imparting the fourth gaming value different from the first gaming value, the second gaming value and the third gaming value when a gaming ball flows into the first area;
By using the determination result of the determining means, switching between a state in which the game ball of the second ball entering means can enter or a state in which the game ball of the third ball entering means can enter, and the first area. A gaming machine comprising: pattern selection means for selecting a combination pattern of the first area with the inflow possible state.

Images